ee ee ee tle ~ Shee ar OP pots ar Hawt lies Rete atiiee Deemer arer eres Chpeepatscst cae eee ot eee nnd pore Witte Ms r » Fa ee tee gee, ar apie pet : TI Scandi seit a Pipa ciany pom ele bs . pO Pew mis partie ee bave ae is eae ee foo pie Sita Bryer: x pete tats fy Pantene ag reyes paris ¥ ed Sone a hephimpanient : : oa rte : : Senn 3 : Cente 6 eT pa pI : (erent nS rereRE RRR CS ay Cistieny clet Gog noee Ae pe aidewss- 4 dev lent % Sy er Pa peree Senet Stet oe be enya yee fears er reir eee ee asa eesti res Fas Rtontgsen seat wee Mase 3 POE) NOTES Ne tita te Co napta peat, eater eri mater Te ~ 3 : errins lest ne ed ite posses ne i ance a rats pee esnteree eet aM. G stam Te dole Cede IP-AYE EE vee Y Pigmowetttaery preh « : - ras mapas ted tet ache hre mAs PEE SA GTR ren yw ists cove te TET. LV ers Me “) F Te IH TN Re ae OO A AEB OG El tance TO Te Dus pe Bhat erence tan Hevsre ane reste riers taco es : mee le ee renee “hE TobeHlae. a! 140 Apo ln Twh Petty Be aeyM vac ego TTI a en td aeAnen | aS . . enrhiag spymiere ee. AeBrnehWiscntewrarat tec emrstazeite Feit iecenee ree) . : 4 Ff STee Bye sYPeM fae = PAT OE Piva Bnvy HET PU mie SUNS . z oe Beans tanravis Of eerie atte ah ATPSh peels eonlncy ° APR TNW eters yea fas tt tatery hod Tintih es pe niier man: Ning feet petennts wee * ti Teepe net ta pine Eroatenl te teense eee - “ vl - ‘ on = aie hire 2 A 7 ale eter So wees erway poe oregon cr ea ereaes ween are thin abe toe rere teat apathy aw eltreectt i ope gal tay Cate? srg tae 4 tf pak tat p cetera e FT amvenstny Rowe fei of st 7 Por vee edema Oe Fr ear geet ol ete tes Ma a4 Orn Cate IEE Note needed Fry oar Toco ie ate Benak eath bem wily ee meena le we NTT . Lr Finest perenn he cle witeeh Gat“ +e radue) east e 7 ahaa ae lp ooo IN Ateee tn phot pres soli woh mtatenat omnia Be Feos Neepent ehre rat iptomtapteds na eet el the @ELE). vo ne keteam Weaethogt tenn Freer kiep hire hafio ioe Pika gor Loete soemagchbabes detent. Car Wieys Us sLrecee ones Shep armed aytene” «kefetet onan et & BEL is Cenod peered Se em terni iam todiertede rea diee amet peetirel wivaied mae pinot ete Mearctat, cece teres obs Thad tte aber ed mew Jae $ solange Peake Honea Tene dda bey es achiet ctans Lanne wa F nef tated Jaeadireete petee ine hme Cb NRA RN SS Tee lee Ok pe Atacem ern et a The Victorian Naturalist The Magazine of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated THE MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY OF VICTORIA Vol. 95 January —December, 1978 COMPILED BY JAMES A. BAINES @ MELBOURNE: @) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD. 1-13 Abbotsford Street, West Melbourne, 3003 ABORIGINES Aboriginal Material Culture, No. 1: Vie- torian Wooden Water Vessels (illus.), 54- 55 Aboriginal Material Culture, Spearthrowers and Paddle (illus.), 88-91 Aborigines in the Ranges (Otways, Surzeleckis, Rocky Jack Divide) (illus.), ee Pes No, 2: On Steamers Otway AUTHORS Allan, Eric R., 31-32 Anonymous, 22, 53, 77, Backhouse, G. N., 158, 163, 203 (with R. W. Vanner), 128-132 Baines, James A., 32, 33-34, 75 (supra), 75 (infra), 104, 141, 187, 208-209, 235 Balmford, Rosemary, 91 Beasley, A. W., 172-175 Beaton, G., (with G. Weste), 178-187 Beauglehole, A. Clifford, 67-74, 198-203 Bell, K, N., 105-107, 133-136 Buckingham, lan D., (with M.S. Joshi), 95- 104 Carolan, Pat, 53 Common, lan F. B., 192-195 Cooper, Barry J., 8-12 Corrick, Margaret G., 188-190, 207 Czechura, G. V., 150-151 Degabriele, Robert, 74, 148-149 Dixon, Joan M., 4-7, 216-221 26-30, 56-60, 92-94, Doery, Mary K., 12, 13-14, 159 Douglas, J. G., 137-140, 222-225 Forster, Joan, 112-119 Galbraith, Jean, 240, .247 Gill, Edmund D., 23-25, 152-158 Green, K., (et al.), 226-235 Green M.,, (et al.), 226-235 Gupta, J. D., (et al.), 147 Harley, J. D., (et al.); 147 Henshaw, C. H., 204-205 Hornsby, P. E., 108-111 Ingram, Glen J., 142-146 Johnson, K., 241-242 Joshi, Martland S., (with |. D. Bucking- ham), 95-104 Kent, Reuben D., 221 Lester, Margery J. “aie 50-52 Littlejohn, M. J., (with J. W. Wainer), 251- 252 Lyndon, Ellen, 52, 158 McInnes, Daniel E., 191 Messer, Michael, 61 Millett, Mervyn R. O,, 15-22 Morris, |. C., 149, 250 Morrison, lan F., 25 Mutton, Patricia, (et al.), 147 New, T. R., 195-197 Oates, Alison M., 54-55 Osborne, W., (et al.), 226-235 Preece, M., (et al.), 226-235 Reid, Derek A., 47-49 Ritchie, Blyth, 52 Robbins, Frank, 160-162, 206-207 Sefton, Allan Roy, 248-250 Smith, Brian J., 164, 236-240 Smith, Malcolm, 162 Stephens, Tanya, (et al.), 147 Thies, Arthur W., 252 Turner, Elizabeth K., 111 Vanner, R. W., (with G. N. Backhouse), 128-132 Vestiens, W. J, M., 176-177 Wainer, W. J., (with M. J. Littlejohn), 251- 252 Wall, J., 243-247 West, A. L,, 88-91 Weste, Greta, (with G. Beaton), Whinray, John, 62-66 White, Laura M., 163-164 Willis, James H., 44-46 178-187 BIRDS Battery Island, Furneaux Group, Tasmania (bird list), 65-66 Eagle, Wedge-tailed, King of the (note), 221 Dungatert, Snowy Mountains (species list), Air? Kites, Letter-winged, Ag scriptus, in South Gippsland (note), Queensland F.N.C.V. E xcursion (bird list of 127 species), 245-247 Seg be Victoria (FNCV Excursion bird list), 14 VORG Conference, 21-23 July, 1978: Tech- niques of Research in Ornithology, 91 EXCURSIONS Mount Buffalo, Field Naturalist trip to ineY Excursion 27-1-78—3-2-78), 112- Otway Ranges, FNCV Easter Excursion, 24- 28 March 1978, 159, 160-162 Queensland Excursion, FNCV 22 July-5 August, 1978, 243-247 South-west Victoria, FNCV Excursion to, 1- 7 October 1977 (with bird list), 13-14 FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUB OF VICTORIA Accounts, 79-82 Alpine Area, FNCV Submission on the Pro- posed Recommendations of the, 203 Australian Natural History Medallion Fund, ya) a): ee YP) Executive Council Report, 78 General meetings, 36, 37, 76, 120, 121-122, 165, 166, 209, 210, 252-253, 254 Group meetings, 39, 83, 123, 167, 211, 255 Kinglake FNCV Nature Reserve, 38, 242 Microscopy Group, 22 Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Associa- UONs Meeting and excursions at Creswick, ‘Victorian Naturalist’—Back issues available (from 1894 onwards), 225 ‘Victorian Naturalist’ Subject Index, 1977, 163, (delay), 242 1884- FISHES (FRESHWATER) Galaxiid, Dwarf, Galaxiella pusilla, Observa- tions on the Biology of (illus.), 128-132 GEOLOGY, PALAEONTOLOGY & PHYSIOGRAPHY Cone ieute Ravaretic Microfossils (illus,), -12 English and Victorian Terrains, Comparison of the (illus.), 23-25 Flowers, Victoria’s Oldest (illus.), 137-140 Foraminifera as Fossils (illus.), 105-107 Foraminifera, Recent, from Limeburners Bay, Victoria (illus,), 133-136 Geological Features of the National Estate in Victoria, Survey of (note), 53 ‘Gippsland Lakes Region, The Geo- morphology of the’, by E. C. F. Bird (monograph ayailable), 197 Mount Buffalo, Geology of (FNCV Excur- sion, January 1978), 206-207 Pilot Range, ean ear Victoria, Geology of the (wi ith 2 maps), 95-104 Sandy Beaches (illus.), 172-175 Volcanoes of Western Victoria, Australia, Sate Bae Dating of the (illus.), 152- INSECTS Beetle, Carabid, Catadromus lacordairei, preying on Frogs, 251-252 Case-moth, Faggot— vandal or opportunist? (note), 25 Glow-worms of the Otways (PFNCV Excur- sion, Easter 1978) (illus.), 160-162 easels Snowy Mountains (species list), Moths, Black and white day, Agaristidae, Range of (note), | Oak Leaf-miner: A new infestation of our street trees? 19] Oak Leaf-miner: Melbourne area, 195-197 Oak Leaf-miner, Phyllonorycter messaniella (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) established in Australia (illus.), 192-195 Trialeurodes vaporarium, ‘White Fly’ (Hemiptera: Aleyrodidae) (note), 77, 122 family Notes on the, in the MAMMALS Australian Alps, Mammals of the —a brief review of past work, with a view to the future (illus.), 216-221 Australian Alps (list of mammal species), 220-22] Echidnas, Six sun-bathing (Warby Ranges) (note), 149 Echidnas, Wild, Behaviour in a Group of, 241-242 Gungartan, Snowy Mountains: A Winter Fauna Survey above 1500 Metres (with maps and species lists), 226-235 Koala, Phascolarctos cinereus (photo), 1 Koala, Australia’s “native bear’, 35, 74 Koala, Does it need to drink water? (illus.), 148-149 Koala, Name does not mean animal’ (note), 162 Marsupials, Comments on the feeding of young, 61, 111, 120, 147 Possum, Pigmy, Little, Cercartenis lepidus, First Victorian and other Records of (illus.), 4-7 Possum, Pigmy, Mountain, Burramyps parvus (living fossil) (photo), 213 Species list, Gungartan, Snowy Mountains. 231-232 Wallabies, Rock, A note on the pouch life of (illus.), 108-111 ‘no drink MARINE BIOLOGY & INVERTEBRATES Foraminifera as Fossils (illus.), 105-107 Foraminifera, Recent, from Limeburners Bay, Victoria (illus.), 133-136 Molluscs of the Victorian Great Dividing Range, Notes on the (illus., and with map and species list), 236-240 MICROSCOPY FNCYV Microscopes, 38 Foraminifera, Introduction to (illus,), 105- 107 Foraminifera, Recent from Limeburners Bay, Victoria (illus.), 133-136 Microscopy Group, F.N.C,.V. (Microscopes are for Everybody), 22 MISCELLANEOUS Battery Island, Tasmania, Some Records for (illus., and with species lists), 62-66 Easter in the Otways: Speculation about Unusual Phenomena, 204-205 M. A. Ingram Trust, The, 31-32 Norfolk Island, Field Naturalists in, 12 Northern Territory, Field Naturalists form club (in Darwin), 158 ‘Victorian Naturalist’ Author Index, 1884- 1976: Supplementary Ls of Errata, Omissions and Addenda, Wollongong, The impact of saree penal on the environment during the past fifty years, 248-250 PERSONAL Bennett, Mrs. Eulalie (60 years active mem- bership), 122 Cooper, Barry (marriage, and assistant pro- fessorship in Toronto), 210 Filson, Rex (drawings of Pultanaea spp. for M. G. Corrick’s articles), 122 Fuller. Amy (wildflower painter), 207 Ralph, Cedric, honorary membership, 253; $250 donation, 254 Rogers, Keith, In memory of, 1896-1978, 247 Sefton, Allan Roy—Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1978 (with portrait), 208-209: presentation of medal- lion, 254 Wheeler, John Russell, Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1977 (with portrait), 33-34 PLANTS Amanita, The Toadstool Genus (illus.), 42, 44-46 Amanita, New Species of Fungi from Australia, 47-49 Banksia integrifolia, Coast Banksia (girth of biggest tree at Beaumaris), 77 Battery Island, Furneaux Group, Tasmania (list of plant species), 62-65 Bush-peas of Victoria—genus Pultenaea (all illus.) —no.8: P. subumbellata (Wiry B.-p.), P. paludosa, (Mountain B.-p.), P. muelleri (Mueller’s B.-p.), 26-30; no.9: P. juniperina (Prickly B.-p.), P. platvphylla (Flat-leaf B.-p.), P. retusa (Blunt B.-p.), 56-60; no.10: P. foliolosa (Small-leaf B.- p.), P. procumbens (Heathy B.-p.), 92-94; no.ll: P. costata, (Ribbed B.-p.), P acerosa (Bristly B.-p.), 188-190 UCT, Veteran, on Mt, Buffalo (photo), 5 Eucalypts, Three pale-trunked, Buffalo Plateau (illus.), 50-52 Eucalyptus SUP, Bogong Gum, Dis- tribution of, ative of V Rae and Tasmania’, by N. Wakefield (new edition, revised by Dr, ‘ H, Willis), 37 Fossil Plants (V ictoria’s Oldest — (illus.), 137-140 Fungi, Five small, newly recorded from Vie- toria. Australia (illus.), 178-187 Generic Names of the Victorian Flora, The Origin of—Part 2: Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (continued) — of the Flowers) *Pastinaca to Pentapogon, 32, *Pentaschistis to Pentatropis, 715, *Periballia to *Petroselinum, 104, *Peucedanum to *Phleum, 141: Pholidia to Phylloglossum, 187: Phyllota to * Pieris, 235 Orchids: Caladenia patersonii and Diuris punctata (photos of Amy Fuller paint- ings), 169 Otways, Easter in Treeferns), 204-205 Otways, Juicy Fruits of the (FNCV Easter Excursion, 1978), 159 Stomata in leaves (By their skins ye shall know them) (illus.), 15-22 Trees that establish themselves on trunks of treeferns and a Yellow Box that enclosed its own sawn-off stump, 240 Vascular Flora of Victoria, Alterations and additions to the, Part 1, 67-74 Vascular Flora of Victoria, Alterations and additions to the, Part 2, 198-203 the (Uronbarks and REPTILES AND AMPHIBIANS Frog, Green-thighed, Litoria brevipalmata (Anura: Pelodryadidae), A new locality for, from South Gippsland, 150-151 Frogs, Carabid Beetle preying on, 251-252 Gecko, A new species of, genus Cyrtodac- qlus, from Cape York Peninsula, Queens- land, Australia (C. galgajuga) (illus.), 142-146 Lizard, Blue-tongue, survives a Jonah-like experience (note), 250 Snake, Black, swallowing a Brown Snake (note), 52 Snake, Brown, being swallowed by a Black Snake (note), Tortoises, Phe Feaa: Chelodina longi- collis, Methods for marking individual (illus.), 176-7 REVIEWS ‘A Field Guide to the Common Genera of Gilled Fungi in Australia’, by Mary Cole, Bruce Fuhrer and Albert Holland, 252 ‘Flora of South Australia’, by J. M. Black, Part |—Third Edition (revised and edited by John F. Jessop), 163-164 ‘Science Field Guide—Barnacles’, Underwood, 164 by A. J. January/February, 1978 Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Category “B” Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical. FNCY DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 13 February, 8.00 p.m. Spy Speaker: Mr Robert Burn, Honorary Associate in Invertebrates, National Museum of Victoria. Subject: ** Victorian Nudibranchs’’. Wednesday, 15 March, 8.00 p.m. Note: this is Wednesday not Monday because of Moomba. Speaker: Members of FNCV Microscopy Group. Subject: *‘Introduction to microscopes, how to choose one, etc’’; see page 22. Monday, 10 April, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr Bill Birch, Curator of Minerals, National Museum of Victoria. Subject: ‘* Victorian Minerals”’ New Members — February General Meeting Ordinary: Mr A. W. Deverall, 6 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, 3103. Flora and fauna. Mrs G. Gregory, 11 Copelin Street, South Yarra, 3142. Mammal survey. Mr A. R. Lawson, 50 Tivoli Road, South Yarra, 3141. Flora and fauna. Mr R, J. Riddell, 13 Carmichael Street, East Ivanhoe, 3079. Geology, botany. Joint members: Mr and Mrs E. R. Harrison, 4 Croft Street, Essendon, 3040. Marine biology and mammal survey. Mr Colin Kitchen and Mrs Phyllis Kitchen, 91 Berkeley Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Country members: Mrs Pearl Reeves, 7 Whittakers Road, Traralgon, 3844. Mr J. Featherstone, Deans Marsh, 3235. T. Dudley Hagger, ‘‘Willunga’’, Maroondah Parade, Healesville, 3777. Mr E. G. Errey, 3 Leonard Street, Belmont, 3216. Mr G. W. Beaton, 4 Eighth Street, Eildon, 3713. Overseas subscription: Mr and Mrs. B. Klingeberg, 15 Trillium Village, Apt 203, Chatham, Ontario, Canada, FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 19 February. Entomology excursion led by Mr Peter Kelly. Destination dependant on weather. Meet at Batman Avenue, 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.00. Bring one meal and a snack. Saturday, 11 March-Monday, 13 March. Creswick is the venue for this year’s weekend gathering of the Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Association and the Creswick FNC will be host. Full details are not yet available but there will be an afternoon excursion on Saturday, a full day excursion on Sunday and a morning trip on Monday. Transport will be by private cars, and it would be appreciated if any members having a spare seat would invite others without transport. Most naturalists will be camping and details of the site will be given at club meetings. Those wishing accommodation should make their own arrangements and, as accommodation at Creswick is limited, early booking is advisable. Or accommodation could be obtained at Ballarat 11 miles away. Easter: Friday 24 March-Tuesday 28 March. Apollo Bay. Coach and DBB accommodation, approx. cost $100. Details from Excursion Secretary. (Continued on page 39) Vict.Nat. Vol.95 TAL MUcSS WAL MUS (xe fUN 4 Q FEBIIE | ~ SOF yiCcT of The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 1 January/February, 1978 Editor: Reuben D.Kent Editorial Committee: Barry A.Callanan, Margaret G.Corrick, Ian Hood, Margery J.Lester, Brian J.Smith, Paul Temple Little Pigmy Possum in Victoria, by Joan M.Dixon ................ 4 Conodonts—enigmatic micro-fossils, by Barry J.Cooper ............ 8 FNCV Excursion to SW Victoria, by Mary K.Doery ............... 13 By their skins ye shall know them, by M.R.O.Millet ............... 15 Comparison of English and Victorian terrains, by Edmund D.Gill..... 23 Bush-peas-of Mictoria, by M-G:Corrick (232... e be ee 26 The-M-A. Ingram Trust; by Eric RvAllan’ = 3.45. : sage tee fetes 31 Origin of Generic names of Victorian Flora, by J.A.Baines.......... 32 1977 Natural History Medallionist........ 0.0.0.0 ...2 0-45-74 ++ eee 33 Koala, Australia’s ‘native bear’’, by M.J.Lester...............-... 35 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria: Reports of meetings 36, Success story 37, Overhead projector 37, Kinglake property 38. Cover illustration: Koala Phascolarctus cinereus is probably the best loved and possibly the least intelligent of Australia’s animals. See page 35 for a layman’s collection of facts. Photo by Graham Pizzey. The First Victorian and other Victorian records of the Little Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas). BY JOAN M. DIXON,* Prior to 1964, Cercartetus lepidus was known as a living species only from Tas- mania. In that year, a specimen was col- lected at Kangaroo Island and noted by Ait- ken (1967). Additional specimens were col- lected from the island at a later date, and detailed information on the general biology of the species on Kangaroo Island published by Aitken (1974). No specimens of C. lepidus were re- corded from mainland Australia before 1976, when a pair was collected 46 km SSW of Pinnaroo (Aitken, 1977). Fossil and sub-fossil material of C. lepidus has been recorded from the Austra- lian mainland. Sub-fossil specimens of C. lepidus have been recorded from a large area of eastern and central Victoria and trom coastal New South Wales (Ride 1960) and Wakefield (1960). In his paper **The Aus- tralian Pigmy Possums”, Wakefield (1963) commented that C. nanus had replaced C. lepidus to a considerable degree in the Pyramids area near Buchan, Victoria. He considered that this development may have been linked with vegetational change from wet to dry sclerophyll forests in earlier geological periods. He did not indicate that fossils were known from semi-arid or Mal- lee situations or heath mallee complexes which occurred in Western Victoria and which are now proving to be the habitat fora number of small mammal species. Aitken (1977) commented that the dis- covery of a specimen in a relatively harsh climate on the mainland indicates that they are not so dependent on wet, cool conditions as was formerly supposed, and that future collecting could extend their known dis- tribution considerably. On 9th April 1976, several specimens of Cercartetus were collected 5% km south of Millewa Bore, 2 km north of Rockhole Bore South, in the Sunset area of the Victorian Mallee (Lat. 34° 49’ S, Long. 141° 3’ E approx) by P. Brown and A. J. Coventry. These were recognised as C. concinnus, until July 1977 when one of the specimens which had died in March 1977 was donated to the National Museum of Victoria, This specimen, a female, is now registered as C 17246 in the Museum collections. It had been eviscerated prior to donation, and the pouch condition could not be determined. From the body dimensions and general col- ouration, it was evident that the specimen was Cercartetus lepidus and constituted the first record of that species from Victoria, Measurements in Table | follow Cockrum (1955), and are in millimetres. ee ee Table 1 Measurements of Cercartetus lepidus, female, National Museum of Victoria No, C 17246 Body dimensions. Body length 134mm Tail length 65mm Length of hind foot minus claw 6.4mm Height of ear from notch I4mm Greatest width of ear 11.8mm Skull and tooth dimensions: Greatest length of skull {8.9mm Crown length m 1-3 2.4mm Crown length m 4 4mm 8.9mm 6.2mm 116mm Greatest length of skull Rostral length to lachrymal fossa Zygomatic breadth Greatest width across the upper molars 5.5mm Palatal length 9.2mm Depth of cranium 8.5mm Crown length ml-3 2.4mm Crown length m 4 4mm Crown width m 4 5mm Length of mandible 13.0mm Crown length m 4 4mm Crown width m 4 4mm *Curator of Vertebrates, National Museum of Victoria Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Habitat Some information on the soil and vegeta- tion of the area is available from photos taken at the time of collection. The soil is yellow-brown sand, with tree cover of Eucalyptus incrassata, the shrub layer in- cludes Leptospermum laevigatum, and ground cover Triodia irritans, from which the present specimen was retrieved (Figs. | and 2). The area is part of the Berook Land System of the Sunset block of the Victorian Mallee, as defined by the Land Conserva- tion Council of Victoria, 1974. It belongs to the Big Desert land system, which ts charac- terised by irregular dunes and plains, with a rainfall between 320 and 375 mm, and vege- tation comprising mallee heath and scrub. The dominant soils are deep sands, and ero- sion 1s severe, Morphological features The external features of the Millewa specimen agreed well with those described for the species by Thomas (1888). The areas of the chest and belly are particularly characteristic, being a dark, slatey grey for most of their length and having creamish- white tips. This contrasts with C. concinnus where the chest and belly are pure white, The new record had a swollen tail similar to that of C. nanus, the basal half inch furred and the remainder finely haired with minute scales. This is markedly different from the non-incrassated tail of C. concinnus. January/February, 1978 1. Habitat of Cercartelus lepi- dus in Millewa Bore area, Vieto- rian Mallee, Photo: A.J,Coventry. Apart from external features, the main method of determination of C. lepidus 1s based on cranial morphology. Thomas (1888) commented that there were four molar teeth in this species and also that it had been identified as the young of C, nanus prior to his work, There appears to be con- siderable variation in cranial features in the genus, but identification is straightforward when the following distinguishing charac- teristics are compared. In C. lepidus, P, Fig . 2. Cercartetus lepidus in Triodia irritans clumps, Millewa Bore area, Photo A. J. Coventry projects just below the tips of the molars in the upper jaw. It lacks a posterior cusp, but has a slightly bifid-tipped main cusp, the anteriormost of which is shortest. There are four molars, which decrease in size from anterior to posterior, and Mg is quite minute. In the lower jaw, P, is considerably higher than the molars, having a bifid ex- tremity with equal points, and four molars, of which M, is quite small. In C. nanus, P, is very large and strong with a pointed main cusp, corresponding to the bifid cusp of C. /epidus and a permanent secondary posterior one, almost or quite as high as the tips of the molars. In both upper and lower jaws, there are three molars only. In C. concinnus, P, is large, pointed, mar- kedly higher than the molars, but bifid at the extremity, and lacks a posterior cusp. There are three molars only in C. concinnus. There appears to be considerable varia- tion in the fourth molar in C. lepidus. This Fig. 3. Cranium of Cercartetus lepidus C 17246, ventral aspect. Photo F. Coffa may be minute or even absent. In the Mil- lewa specimen, C 17246, M, is present on the left maxilla only, but is found on both mandibles. It is sub-circular rather than triangular in section. (Figs. 3 and 4). Other Victorian Records of Cercartetus lepidus Subsequent to identification of the first specimen, a second record of the species was found on the ground 10 km south of Moonlight Tank on the Murrayville track, Big Desert, (Lat. 35° 46’ S, Long. 114° 23° E approx), April, 1977, by J. Wainer. The skull was in poor condition, discoloured and incomplete, but could be identified as C. lepidus. The cranium is damaged in the reg- ion of M,, but in the mandibles, a minute almost ovate M, is in evidence. This speci- men is registered asC 17247 in the Museum collections. The area is part of the Big Desert Land system of the Big Desert block of the Vic- torian Mallee, as defined by the Land Con- servation Council (1974), White sands pre- dominate throughout and annual rainfall (320-375 mm) is higher than in the Berook land system. Vegetation comprises mallee heath and scrub mallee, Dominant soils are Fig. 4. Mandibles of Cercartetus lepidus C 17246, occlusal aspect. Photo F. Coffa Vict.Nat. Vol.95 deep sands, and the area is prone to erosion. A third specimen was collected a few hundred metres south of an unnamed bore on the Nhill to Murrayville road, October, 1977 (Lat. 36° 50’ S, Long. 141° 25’ E approx), from an insect pitfall trap by M. Fleming. It is registered as C 17248 in the National Museum of Victoria collections. Vegetation in this area is a mallee heath with Eucalyptus incrassata and E.foecunda forming the tree cover, a shrub cover includ- ing Leptospermum laevigatum, Casuarina muellerana (the most common species), and Pultenaea prostrata, and ground cover of Astroloma humifusum and Triodia irritans. Significance The Victorian Mallee contains a wide range of mammal species. The occurrence of Pigmy Possums of two species in the area is significant and the northern extension of range of C. lepidus is yet a further step in determining the mammal fauna of desert areas. The locality of the Millewa record is in uncommitted land close to the boundary of land which may be used for dispersed mobile military training and is just north of land set aside for limited cultivation lease (L.C.C. 1977). The specimen from Moonlight Tank area is in uncommitted crown land which is also zoned for dispersed mobile military training (L.C.C. 1977). No faunal reserves have been set aside in this area. Further investiga- tions into this and other desert species are necessary to provide detailed information on their distribution and general biology, and to enable some criteria of their vulnera- bility to varied land uses to be determined. Acknowledgements Thanks are extended to the following per- sons who contributed information or techni- cal assistance in the preparation of this paper: P. Brown of the Sir Colin Mackenzie Fauna Park, J. Wainer, University of Mel- bourne Zoology Dept., M. Fleming and A. Cockburn, Monash University Zoology Department, A. J. Coventry, F. Coffa and J. Freeman, National Museum of Victoria. REFERENCES Aitken, P. F. (1970). Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) an addition to the fauna of Kangaroo Island. Ree. S. Aust. Mus. 15 (3): 575-576, Aitken, P. F. (1974). The Little Pigmy Possum (Cercar- tetus lepidus Thomas) on Kangaroo Island, South Australia, South Aust, Nat, 48 (3): 36-43. Aitken, P, F. (1977). The Little Pigmy Possum (Cercar- tetus lepidus (Thomas)) found living on the Austra- lian mainland. South Aust. Nat. 51 (4): 63-66. Cockrum, E.L., (1955). Manual of Mammalogy. Burgess, Minneapolis. Land Conservation Council (1974), Report on the Mal- lee Study Area. June, 1974. Melbourne, Victoria. Land Conservation Council (1977). Final Recommenda- tions Melbourne Study Area. May, 1977. Mel- bourne, Victoria, Ride, W. D. L., (1960). The fossil mammalian fauna of the Burramys parvus breccia from the Wombeyan Caves, New South Wales. J. Proc. R. Soc. West. Aust, 43 (3): 74-80. Thomas, O. (1888). Catalogue of the Marsupialia and Monotremata in the Collection of the British Museum (Natural History). British Museum, Lon- don. Wakefield, N. A., (1960). Recent Mammal Bones in the Buchan district-2-Victorian Nat. 77 (8): 227-240. Wakefield, N. A., (1963). The Australian Pigmy Pos- sums. Victorian Nar. 80 (4): 99-116. Natural History Medallion Fund Donations from persons and organisations wishing to help this Fund will be appreciated and acknowledged. Amount invested as at 31 December 1977 NMR EIG URE AN Anes seeder aternire tak era as Mr and Mrs Corrick January/February, 1978 $466.00 30.00 10.00 $506.00 7 Conodonts — Enigmatic Microfossils By BARRY J. COOPER* The present world contains such a wide diversity of animals that few people can hope to appreciate all variations and adap- tions. The animal world of the past, embrac- ing many hundreds of millions of years gone by, encompass an even greater diversity than that of the present and includes many extinct groups. One extinct group of animals, studied more extensively than others because of their value to geologists, are the problematic creatures that beared conodonts. Conodonts are microscopic teeth-like fossils composed of calcium phosphate. The animals bearing them (conodontophorids) flourished in the seas during the Palaeozoic era along with the extinct trilobites, graptolites and tabu- late corals. The conodont elements probably served as a body support or assisted feeding in these animals. Present evidence indicates that the last conodontophorid perished near the end of the Triassic period. What are they? The inevitable question that arises when one sees conodonts for the first time under a microscope is, *What-are they?” My friends usually cannot hide a smile when I admit, “T don’t know”’. Conodontophorids, in contrast with most extunct animal groups have no known living relatives and their preservable skeleton (the conodonts themselves) almost always scat- ter after death. Biologists over the past century have postulated that conodontophorids show af- finilies to almost every known animal Phyla and one worker has recently suggested that conodonts might even be formed by algae. No one hypothesis has gained favour umongst the majority of conodont workers, Recently William Melton discovered a number of exceptionally well preserved fos- sils broadly resembling primitive fish at a Carboniferous locality in Montana (U.S.A,) and containing conodont elements within the body. Many conodontologists were satisfied that the remains of the complete conodontophorid had been found and cauti- ously accepted Melton’s suggested distant relationship to the vertebrates. Other specialists were sceptical of Melton’s dis- covery pointing out that the animal under consideration was probably a conodon- tophorid eater rather than the conodon- tophorid itself. So the mystery, persists. Many palaeon- tologists nowadays prefer to place the cono- dontophorids in a separate phylum distinct from all other living things. Discovery Conodonts were discovered by Christian Heinrich Pander (1794-1865). His speci- mens were extracted from strata of Ordovi- cian age near St. Petersberg (now Lenin- grad) in Russia. Pander recognised the enigmatic nature of his discovery and sent specimens to many prominent geologists of the day for comment. Finally in 1856, he published a monograph describing his find. For 70 years after Pander’s death, cono- donts remained as curiosities to the scien- ufic world. Then in the 1920s and 1930s American geologists (notably E. B. Bran- son and M. G. Mehl at the University of Missouri) became aware of the great diver- sity of conodonts, their wide occurrence and consequently their value in the relative dat- ing of rocks, Another tool to enravel the mysteries of the Palaeozoic successions had been realised and by 1975 over350 palaeon- tologists throughout the world were study- ing the group. *Department of Mines, South Australia. Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Initially palaeontologists searched for conodonts by splitting shale and scanning the bedding planes with a hand lens. By 1950, the use of acetic acid in disaggrega- ting limestones was accepted. This chemi- cal breaks down the calcium carbonate in limestones without damaging the conod- onts, which are composed of calcium phos- phate. The acid disaggregation technique Fig. 1—Ozarkodina excavata (Branson & Mehl). revolutionised conodont study as limestones yield the most abundant conodont collec- tions. What Value! To specialists in the 1950s, conodonts held the promise of being the ideal Palaeozoic index or guide fossil. In the plat- form limestone rocks of Europe and North 1, Paelement. 2, Pb element. 3, Melement.4, Scelement. 5, Sbelement. 6, Sa element. All specimens are magnified at x60 and photographed using the Scanning Electron Microscope. Elements illustrated here are from the Upper Silurian Yarrangobilly Limestone, S.E. New South Wales. January/February, 1978 America, conodonts were prolific, and evolved so rapidly that correlation of rock successions between different areas was possible at a degree of refinement greater than ever before. The conodontophorid seemed to show little ecologic preference and was obviously a free swimming or at least a floating creature. The small size of conodonts was also important as It was pos- sible to extract useful collections from small pieces of core retrieved from deep oil wells and other borings The value of conodonts in unravelling the age of strata is now well established. The high promise of the group has been fulfilled although a few problems have surfaced. Like all animals, the conodontophorid does show some environmental dependence and this may prove an obstacle to world wide correlation. Conodonts do not occur in all marine rocks and technologically palaeon- tologists have great problems in extracting them from some sandstones and black shales. Also recent palaeontological ad- Fig. 2—1, Triangular element of Belodella resima (Philip), x60, from Lower Devonian limestone, Tyers near Moe. 2, Costate element of Panderodus unicostatus (Branson & Mehl), x60 from Upper Silurian Yarrango- billy Limestone, S.E. New South Wales. Fig. 3—Lenticular element of Belodella anomalis Cooper. 1, Basal view, x200. 2, Lateral view, x150 Specimens from Upper Silurian Yarrangobilly Limestone, S.E. New South Wales 10 Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Fig. 4—1, Pa element of Eognathodus trilinearis (Cooper), x60, from Lower Devonian limestone at Loyola near Mansfield. 2, Sa element of Ozarkodina confluens (Branson & Mehl), x60, from Upper Silurian Yarrangobilly Limestone, S.E. New South Wales. 3, Pa element of Ozarkodina sp. cf. O. johnsoni (Klapper), x60, from Lower Devonian Lilydale Limestone. vances reveal that Palaeozoic rocks also contain other mysterious microfossils like chitinozoans, scolecodonts and acritarchs, which also have potential in dating Palaeozoic rocks. Nevertheless continuing research into conodonts is revealing new uses for these remarkable fossils. They can now be used by their colour as an index to the metamorphism or the degree of alteration of rocks. Recognisable collections have now been extracted from high grade metamor- phic rocks and from cherts where no other fossils are known. The pace of study into the group continues to quicken with no end in sight. In Australia Conodonts were first recorded in Aus- tralia by Crespin (1943) who described a small collection from Ordovician strata in the Waterhouse Range of Central Australia. January/February, 1978 Throughout the 1950s and early 1960s, the occurrence of conodonts from Palaeozoic strata in Queensland, Western Australia and the Northern Territory was recorded but no detailed study ensued. Early reports generally came from limestone plat- form sequences where prolific collections could be made. Since 1965, conodonts have been recorded from rocks in every state of the Commonwealth. Detailed investigations of collections from western Queensland (Cambro-Ordovician), Yass-Canberra area (Silurian) and northern Western Australia (Late Devonian) provide valuable reference sections for the world wide correlation of strata. However, much work remains to be done before Australian conodontophorids are well known. Victorian Problems Victoria contains thick sections of Or- 1 dovician, Silurian and Devonian marine de- posits and conodonts have been recorded from rocks of each system. Kennedy (1972) found Ordovician conodonts in the Digger Island Limestone at Waratah Bay. Bischoff in Talent, Berry and Boucot (1973) records Silurian occurrences in remote limestone deposits near Benambra and near the source of the Murray in eastern Victoria. However, limestones are rare in Victorian Ordovician and Silurian rocks and no palaeontologist has yet been encouraged to search for con- odonts in the thick shale, siltstone and sandstone successions where most primary organic material has been much altered or removed, The study of conodonts from the Early Devonian rocks in Victoria has led to a refinement of age assignment of these rocks. Most of this work has been carried out by G. M. Philip and his colleagues, at the Uni- versity of New England during the 1960s, They sampled most Devonian limestones in South-eastern Australia and worked on the corals and conodonts. Their studies re- vealed good conodonts in the limestones at Buchan which clearly indicated an Early Devonian age for this succession for the first time. Early Devonian limestones at Lilydale, Waratah Bay, Tyers near Moe, Loyola near Mansfield and others have also yielded conodonts. Refined age determinations and confident correlation overseas were thus ob- tained for these deposits. Of course our work on Victorian cono- donts is still incomplete and several produc- live sections are, as yet, incompletely documented, SELECTED REFERENCES Barnes, C.R. (Editor) 1976. Conodont Paleoecology, Spec. Pap. Geol, Assoc. Canada 15:1-324, Cooper, B.J, (1973). Lower Devonian Conodonts from Loyola, Victoria, Proc. Roy, Soc, Vie, 86; 77-84. Crespin, I, (1943). Conodonts from the Waterhouse Range, Central Australia, Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust. 67; 231-233, Epstein, A.G., Epstein, J.B., and Harris, L.D. (1977), Conodont Color Alteration — un Index to Organic Metamorphism, Prof. Pap. U.S. Geol. Surv. 995; 1-27, Kennedy, D.J. (1971), Ordovician Conodont faunas in southern Australia, A.NZ.A.A.S. (43rd Congress) Brishane. Section 3, Abstracts p, 43-44, Lindstrom, M. (1964). Conodonts. Elsevier Publishing Company, 196 p. Philip, G.M, (1965). Lower Devonian Conodonts from the Tyers area, Gippsland, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet. 79: 95-118. Philip, G.M. (1966). Lower Devonian Conodonts from the Buchan Group, Eastern Victoria. Micropaleon- tology 12: 441-460. Philip, G.M., and Pedder, A.E.H. (1967). The Age of the Lilydale Limestone. J, Paleont, 41: 795-798. Philip, G.M., and Pedder, A-E.H. (1967a). A Correla- tion of some Devonian limestones of New South Wales and Victoria. Geol. Mag. 104: 232-239, Philip, G.M. and Pedder, A.E.H. (1967c). Stratigraphi- cal Correlation of the principal Devonian limestone sequences of eastern Australia. International Sym- posium on the Devonian System (Calgary, 1967) Vol, II, pp. 1025-1041. Rhodes, F.H.T. (Editor), (1973). Conodont Paleozo- ology. Spec. Pap, Geol. Soc. Amer. 141: 1-296, Sweet, W.C., and Bergstrom, S.M. (Editors), (1971). Symposium on Conodont Biostraligraphy. Mem. Geol. Soc. Amer. 127: 1-499. Talent, J.A., Berry, W.B.M., and Boucot, A.J, (1975). Correlation of the Silurian Rocks of Australia, New Zealand and New Guinea. Spec. Pap. Geol. Soc. Amer, 150; 1-108. Field Naturalists in Norfolk Island 13-23 October, two members of F.N.C. Mel- bourne Branch, were on Norfolk Island. They were particularly interested in the geology, flora and birds of the Island, Contact was made with Mr Owen Evans, Vice President of the Fauna and Flora Society, who gave them an evening in his home of interesting Kodachromes, showing Nor- folk Island, and the off-shore islands of Nepean and Phillip. Some. birds seen were: Red-haired Tropic birds, excellent observations occurring at Cascade Bay, where these birds appeared to be deciding on cliff nesting sites; White Terns arriv- 12 ing from the Philippines to breed in Norfolk Pines; Masked Gannets sitting on nests; Emerald Doves; Crimson Rosellas; Scarlet Robins; Sacred Kingfishers; White-capped Noddy Terns; 3 dif- ferent migrant Waders. Local naturalists watched from cliffs at night, for the first arrivals of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters. Lesley Bennett and Mary Doery were with members of a group of 35 National Trust of Australia (Victoria) Tour. Mr Evans sent greetings to our club from the Fauna and Flora Society of Norfolk Island, Mary K, Doery Vict.Nat. Vol.95 FNCV Excursion to S.W. Victoria 1-7 October, 1977 BY MARY K. DOERY 1-7 October, 17 members made Casterton a base for investigating the surrounding coun- try. We should like to thank Mrs Todd who lives in the Wilkin area south of Casterton, for acting as our guide to the heathlands of Wilkin Park, and Mill Swamp. Mrs Kathleen Meehan, a member of our party, knew the area well, and we were grateful to her for giving us good sugges- tions for some excursions, and historical facts along the way. Mrs Meehan was our guide to the Dergholm area, Baileys Rocks, and the **Big Tree’’, which is an old Red Gum near Chetwynd. We visited the heathlands of part of the Kentbruck National Park, the Ink Pot, and Richmond National Park overlooking Dis- covery Bay, and where there is the Lear- mouth Memorial Nature Trail, At Mount Gambier, the cutting of limestone was in progress at a quarry, and the Blue Lake was visited. At the former Railway Station rooms, Casterton Museum is housed and we found it a worthwhile place to see. Miss Marie Allender was given directions from Mrs Daphne Boyle, one of our mem- bers who lives in the area, to Cemetery Swamp and Lake Mundi, just off the Penola road. Both places proved most rewarding. Mr Frank Robbins, a member of the Ben- digo FNC was with us, and he provided detailed geological maps of SW Victoria which were helpful. We enjoyed an evening of Rodachromes which Mr Robbins took on a recent tour of India to attend a World Conference on Glaciers. Flora The time was especially rewarding for orchids in flower. Wax-lip Orchids glos- sodia major, showed all shades from white to deep mauve. Pink Fingers Caladenia January/February, 1978 carned, showed white through to deep pink, and a sweet musk-like fragrance was noticed from these flowers. Two species of Spider Orchids, Caladenia patersonii, and C. dilata were found. Perhaps thousands of leaves of Red-beaks Lyperanthus nigricans were examined, but only one inflorescence was discovered. Species representing the following genera were seen, Pterostylis, Acianthus, Diurus, Thelymitra, and Calochilus. Lavender Grevillea G. lavandulacea, was covered in bright red flowers, and in this Proteaceae there were two species of Banksias in flower, Desert Banksia B. or- nata, and Silver Banksia B. marginata. Common Fringe myrtle Ca/ytrix terragona, was at its peak for blossom. Of the Papilionaceae, several genera were ob- served, and Running Postman Kennedia prostrata, showed markedly large pea flow- ers. Epacrids were well represented, and of special mention were several plants of Gol- den Heath Sryphelia adscendens, covered with greenish yellow bells. Blunt Everlast- ings Helichysum obtusifolium, wath their white inflorescences were often seen, Of the Violaceae, the Shrub Violet Hybanthus floribundus, Viny Violet Viola Sieberiana, and Ivy-leaf V. hederacea were flowering. Four species of Sundews were found; Scented Drosera whittakeri, which was in fruit; Tiny D. pygmaea, in bud; Climbing D, planchonii, and Tall D. auriculata, both of which were in flower. There were three species of Boronia flowering, the very beautiful Blue B, caerulescens, and the pink flowering Small B. nana, and Hairy B. pilosa, One large shrublet of Blue Tinsel- lily Calectasia cyanea, was found, Other representatives of Lillaceae, were; Blue stars Chamaescilla corymbosa, Twining 13 Fringe-lily Thysanotus patersonii; Dwart Wire-lily Laxmannia sessiliflora; Early Nancy Anguillaria dioica; Milkmaids Bur- chardia umbellata. Spikes of Grass-tree Xanthorrhoea sp., were conspicuous in cer- tain areas. Birds Each day Bird Lists were taken at approx- imately ten minute intervals of travelling time. These lists are now recorded for the Field Atlas of Australian Birds. It could be mentioned that several groups of Brolgas were sighted, and it was wonderful to watch parents with two young, at a place within almost two miles of Casterton. Some keen bird observers were up at dawn looking for birds in the Casterton Sewerage Works area, and in low lying swampy parks of the Glenelg River near the town. On several occasions Emus were seen, and also, pairs of Mountain Duck with up to nine young. Masked Plovers and their young were often on the verge near roads. On one day, Mr Ian Morrision taped the song of Eastern Shrike Tits, which were inhabiting eucalypts, in the vicinity of the Sports Ground. Then, in the same place at another time, our group assembled to hear a replay, and watch and listen to the fascinat- ing behaviour of the Shrike Tits to their own song. At Baileys Rocks some of us observed a male and female Brown Tree Creeper feeding their young in a nest which was built in the hollow of a eucalypt. State Game Reserves of permanent water in addition to many stretches of temporary water made possible sightings of numerous water birds. Miss Cecily Allen has compiled a list of 88 species of birds seen, and the list is included at the end of this report. We should like to thank Miss Marie Al- lender for arranging this Spring Excursion, and I am sure some of us will want to re-visit these interesting parts of our State. Birds recorded on FNCY week in Casterton area *breeding species- Emu Little Grebe Little Pied Cormorant Black Cormorant Little Black Cormorant White-necked Heron White-faced Heron Cattle Egret Large Egret White Ibis Straw-necked Ibis Yellow-billed Spoonbill Black Swan Mountain Duck Black Duck Wood Duck Musk Duck Black-shouldered Kite Whistling Kite Swamp Harrier Brown Falcon Dusky Moorhen Swamphen Coot *Brolga *Masked Plover Black-fronted Dotterel Pied Stilt Silver Gull 14 1-7 October 1977 Yellow-tailed Black Cockatoo Gang Gang Cockatoo Galah Long-billed Corella Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Crimson Rosella Red-rumped Parrot Fan-tailed Cuckoo Pallid Cuckoo Rufous-tailed Bronze Cuckoo Tawny Frogmouth (dead on roadside) Kookaburra Sacred Kingfisher *Welcome Swallow Tree Martin Fairy Martin Pipit Black-faced Cuckoo-Shrike Blackbird Scarlet Robin Yellow Robin Shrike-tit Golden Whistler Rufous Whistler Grey Shrikethrush Jacky Winter Restless Flycatcher Grey Fantail *Willie Wagtail Reed Warbler Little Grassbird Rufous Longlark Supurb Bluewren Brown Thornbill Striated Thornbill Varied Sitella White-throated Treecreeper *Brown Treecreeper Red Wattlebird *Noisy Minor Yellow-faced Honeyeater White-eared Hone yeater White-plumed Honeyeater Black-chinned Honeyeater New Holland Honeyeater Eastern Spinibill Spotted Pardalote *Striated Pardalote Goldfinch House Sparrow Red-browed Firetail Finch Common Starling White-winged Chough Magpie Lark Masked Woodswallow White-browed Woodswallow Dusky Woodswallow Australian Magpie Raven sp. Vict.Nat. Vol.95 By their skins ye shall know them BY M.R.O.MILLETT* This article was first published in **The Commonwealth Professional’’ June 1977. Australia’s unique race of trees, the eucalypts, cannot fail to hold the interest of people who do not merely take them for granted. The stomata, minute elliptical pores which occur in the epidermis, or ‘skin’, of the leaves of the trees (as indeed, is also the case with all other terrestrial green plants) are much more important than is commonly realised. The purpose of this article is not to pre- sent the implications of the foregoing in the usual manner of a scientific paper, justified by detailed data and analysis. Rather is it to interest the general reader, and also to place on record, in outline, what the writer be- lieves is a worthwhile hypothesis, in the hope that some day others, with more years First published drawing, for a scientific description, of Eucalyptus obliqua in 1788. Drawing by noted French botanical artist, L. J. Redouté, for the botanist, Charles-Louis L’Héritier de Brutelle (1746-1800), who named the genus, (Ref. 1.) January/February, 1978 ahead of them, will investigate the pos- sibilities suggested. This would require ob- servations and experiments to test the valid- ity of a supplementary approach to botanical classification and comparative anatomy, but at a cellular level. Research along these lines could not only be full of interest to botanists, plant breeders and others, but could also be of significance in the better understanding and growing of many kinds of plants — be they in pastures, agricultural crops, forest crops, or just trees, shrubs and other plants cultivated only for aesthetic Teasons. Eucalyptus Species First, a few words in general about Aus- tralia’s genus Eucalyptus which is indigen- ous only to Australia, Papua~New Guinea, Timor, the Celebes and the Philippines. Only a very few (tropical) species are en- demic outside Australia itself and these are confined to the listed countries to the north of Australia. Depending on the system of classification used, there are considered to be from 400 to 600 species of this remarka- ble group of trees. *‘Australia and the world have in the eucalypt a natural asset capable of further development and use in ways sel- dom adequately envisaged, let alone at- tempted, up to the present. We have barely scratched the surface of the problems, and the possibilities of exploiting the poten- tialities of our eucalypts in terms of better land use, increasing the economic resources and deriving greater benefits for mankind are immense . . . these trees grow over a wide range of climatic environments — from the mild coastal regions to the cold alpine tree line, and from the rain forests of the tropics and temperate winter rainfall *72 Nicol Road, Tecoma, Victoria. 15 26. Cotyledons of germinating seed with some other shapes (27). 28. Opposite leaves of seedling followed later by leaves placed alternately up the stem (29), 30-36. Various ways the leaves arise from the stem. 37-47. Various leaf shapes. Some of the many specific variations in leaf shape amongst eucalypts. (Ref. 1.) areas to the hot dry interior and margins of the desert.’*! Because of the wide range of diverse en- vironments, where different species of eucalypts are adapted each to grow in its own favorable native environment, these trees of many species are admirably suited for cultivation in other countries — for there is a suitable type of eucalypt for selection to grow in almost any situation where a tree will grow. Altogether, eucalypts are known to have been introduced successfully to more than 40 countries. Stomata The discovery of the minute organs in the leaf, later Known as stomata (plural for stoma), and speculation and experiment with regard to their function, awaited the discovery of the microscope. For the first published account of stomata, credit must be given to Malpighi (1672), who in his **Anatomia Plantarum” describes these or- gans and gives some rather crude drawings of them as seen in the leaves of the oleander. 16 Guard cells cell nuclens (N) Diagram of transverse section through leaf of Eucalyrus erythrocorys , showing the two guard cells forming the stoma in a closed phase. Microscope at 2,750X, but scale on photo itself indicated by line of 1/100 mm on drawing. (Based on photo by D. J. and S. G. M. Carr in Ref. 2.) Vict.Nat. Vol.95 In the same year an Englishman, Nehemiah Grew, in his *‘Anatomy of Vegetables Be- gun’’, describes in plants ‘‘orifices or passports either for the better avolation of superfluous sap or the admission of aer,”’ The appearance and shape of the stomata are shown in the accompanying photomi- crographs and other illustrations. **A stoma 1s a pore formed by two specialized cells in the epidermis of plants. Stomata are present in large numbers, mainly in the leaves, and through them gaseous exchange with the atmosphere takes place. Each stoma is sur- rounded by two guard cells which are roughly crescent- or sausage-shaped. The guard-cells change their shape sufficiently, due to variations in starch content and pres- sure of fluid within them, to enlarge or di- minish the size of the pore from a com- pletely closed condition to one of maximum opening. The word stoma is also commonly applied to a pore and the guard cells sur- rounding it. The word stomate(s) is often applied to convey this latter meaning . . . vast quantities of water yapour are. . . released from the soil’s subsurface to the atmosphere by the Earth’s vegetation, and this is part of the hydrological cycle provid- ing water to sustain life on our planet. Plants use the atmosphere’s carbon dioxide (COz) in the respiratory process necessary for their development and growth, The carbon (C) of the COz is retained by the plant to combine with hydrogen (H) and oxygen (O) in vari- ous forms. Some of the oxygen, derived from the original intake of the HzO and COz, is released to the atmosphere, thus contributing to the maintenance of the re- quired four-fifths oxygen content of the air breathed by Man and other animals,’’? Thus plants are, so to say, the “‘lungs’’ of our biosphere. Transpiration, or the amount of water emitted in vaporous form through the stomata of plants, is not easy to measure accurately, except where the plant is grow- ing in the restricted and unnatural environ- ment of a container which can be weighed for measurable water loss. It is estimated that plants growing in the temperate zone may transpire up to ¥% litre per square metre January/February, 1978 of leaf area per hour, that is to say, about .08 pint per square foot per hour, or about % pint over a period of 10 hours of daylight. Certainly, the amount of water drawn up by the roots of a large tree and transpired through its foliage can be an immense quan- tity. It has been said that the aggregate area of the fully open pores, as a proportion of the total leaf area, is only 1 to3 per cent; but even this estimate seems far too high. The fact that rates of stomatal transpiration are frequently 50 per cent (and sometimes more) of the evaporation from a free water surface, under similar conditions, is doubt- less capable of explanation in terms of rates of gaseous diffusion in relation to aperture size; diffusion rate through apertures of smaller area tend to result in faster rates (relative to pore area) than through apertures of larger area. I first became interested in the stomata of Eucalyptus species not long before World War II, when, using an optical microscope at 250 X magnification, | made large num- bers of stomatal counts on the leaf surface (or epidermis), and also measurements of the size of the stomatal pore, as well as of the guard cells which together surround and form the pore.* The size of the ellipse formed by the two guard cells is more sig- nificant than that of the pore, since the former's long axis varies little; whereas the pore itself varies considerably in size as it opens or closes in response to climatic and physiological changes throughout the day. Stomata size and frequency The microscopic work was commenced to determine whether there was any differ- ence in stomatal frequency and stomatal size in the leaves of Spotted Gum Eucalyptus maculata growing in certain parts of Vic- toria, New South Wales and Queensland. This was done because there were certain features of the macroscopic botanical characters (leaves, buds, flowers, fruits, bark, etc.) which differed in trees consid- ered to be of the same species, but indigen- ous to quite different localities many hun- dreds of miles apart. The stomata in their leaves were examined under the microscope 7 Stomata and epidermal cells, with microscope mainly at 250X. 1-4, drawn with camera lucida to show range of sizes: 1. E. maideni; 2. E. delegatensis; 3. E. cypellocarpa;, 4. E. grandifolia. 5-13, photomicrographs: 5. E. maculata (N.S.W.); 6. E. maculata (Q); 7. E. maideni; 8. E. diversicolor (upper leaf surface has no stomata); Vict.Nat. Vol.95 9. Tristania laurina (upper surface has no stomata); 10. Tristania laurina (lower Surface only has stomata); 11. E, delegatensis; 12. E. spenceriana; 13. Pinus radiata (stomata always in lines along pine needle). (Photographic scales not given here.) and it was found that there was a significant difference in their number, and even size, as between the localities of the trees con- cerned. This helped to confirm the findings of some forest botanists who had noticed the macroscopic differences. Although this did not necessarily justify the naming of new species, it did at least show that small sub- specific differences are probably more basic than commonly believed. There is a discer- nible fascinating diversity amongst our eucalypts due to possible causes such as natural hybridization, geographical differ- ences and other suggested reasons. The investigation of one species led to curiosity about the remaining several hun- dreds of different Eucalyptus species. Could it be that the epidermis of these would tell a meaningful story in terms of genetic and environmental differences? It soon became evident that there were some considerably significant differences in the epidermis as between some species — especially, for example, in relation to species growing in regions of very low rainfall as compared with tropical and temperate rain-forest January/February, 1978 species, It looked like an exceedingly prom- ising and perhaps, indeed, exciting project if it could be carried through. But various other demands required that it be in- definitely set aside. Some years after my first thoughts on this problem, it was most interesting and a pleasant surprise to find that the Victorian botanist, Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, in a seldom-referred-to series of monographs published nearly a century ago, had at one time been interested in the stomata of the genus. He had also specu- lated on their possible use in better under- standing and even identifying eucalypts.* 19 Photomicrographs, with the electron microscope, of leaf surface of four Eucalyptus species, showing an open stomatal pore and the epidermal surface’s wax formation which varies from species to species. Approximate photographic scale of magnification varies from about 2,000X to 3,000X. 1. E. muellerana; 2. E. fastigata; 3. E. panda ssp. panda,4. E. obliqua, Photographs from T. C, Chambers and N. D. Hallam, This helped to confirm what I believed to be the worth-whileness of persuading botanists to pursue this matter further. Work in Australia Although this field has not engaged much attention in Australia until more recent years, most of the known interest in the epidermis of Eucalyptus has been shown at the School of Biological Sciences, Austra- lian National University, under Professor 20 D. J. Carr and Mrs. S. G. M,. Carr®; and at the School of Botany, University of Mel- bourne under Professor T. C. Chambers. Here the particular interest in the epidermis has been mainly in differences in the de- tailed sculpturing of the cuticular layer and the protective waxes. The high resolving power of the electron mioscope (non- existent in my day) is able to show these sculpturings like a fascinating “‘moonscape.”’! Dr. Neil Hallam, now of Vict.Nat. Vol.95 the Department of Botany, Monash Univer- sity, made the epidermal leaf waxes the sub- ject of his PhD thesis® at the University of Melbourne, and co-author of a paper.” Significance of the Leaf Basic to the concept of the significance of the epidermis should be a still wider botani- cal ‘‘credo”’ that the fundamental organ of green plants, the leaf, and detailed know- ledge of its anatomy and physiology, should be central to botanical science. It is an indisputable fact that Linnaeus’ system of plant classification has been of great benefit in readily recognising and re- cording certain macroscopic differences be- tween plants, and in naming species and classifying them in a pragmatic fashion, with the least possible disagreement be- tween taxonomic botanists. It does at least enable botanists to use the same names and talk the same language, at least eliminating much possible confusion in that area. This system is an “‘artificial’’ system, as opposed to a “‘natural’’ system, using as it does characters such as the flowers, the fruits, the seeds, leaf shape, etc. A ‘‘natural’’ system, say basing classification on differences in internal anatomy and related physiological function, would doubtless be more truly “‘scientific’’, but it would, by its need for immensely complicated comparative studies of disputable ‘*basics’’, result in endless arguments. The Linnean system es- tablished about 1737, is here to stay, if for no other reason than its eminent pragmatism and long establishment. It is most unlikely to be supplanted by a natural system, just as English is unlikely to be replaced by Esperanto. I am not, of course, advocating that the comparative anatomy revealed by the microscope should be used as a practical day-to-day method of classification. In this connection, however, it could often be used profitably in sorting out many differences between botanists whenever the more superficial Linnean system seems to lead to contradictions. More important is my con- tention that the leaf, and particularly its surface, should be the subject of far deeper January/February, 1978 study. than up to now, throughout the Vege- table Kingdom. Two wonderful new tools of science, the electronic computer and the electron microscope, now bring us nearer to the achievement of obtaining and assembl- ing new knowledge in a way previously not dreamt of. We need to consider the great variety of leaf surfaces throughout the plant world, Just consider the leaf surface, to which the plant owes so much for its development, growth and survival, and what it presents in variety and ingenuity, and aesthetic attrac- tion, even only to the naked eye, and a pocket hand lens. How much more so under the microscope! Consider alone the form and function of those cellular outgrowths from the epidermis, called hairs: soft and scattered hairs; fine and close; coarse, rough, bristly, cottony felt; woolly and glandular; ridged and wrinkled; flattening down; unbranched; starlike; straight or curved prickles; sticky secreting hairs . . . These and other features (so often affecting air flow at the leaf-surface, and therefore associated with transpiration in conjunction with the stomata) also open up a field of study, especially in understanding the physiology of plants. The foregoing is offered tentatively as the result initially of intuitive thinking, and needs much more testing by empirical pro- cedures. I am convinced, however, that botanical science should ultimately follow this path, and will be able to do so. Acknowledgements I wish to thank Professor T, C. Chambers and Dr. Neil Hallam for permission to re- produce their excellent photomicrographs of much-magnified stomata and wax cover- ings in the eucalypt’s epidermis. My own photomicrographs, made with the conyen- tional microscope, have their limitations, but serve a little to illustrate the subject. Ido want to record here my debt to my old friend, whose assistant I was, and who first asked me to count the stomata of Eucalyptus maculata, thus arousing my interest — Charles Edward Lane Poole (1885-1970), Ingénieur Civile des Eaux et des Foréts 21 (Nancy), Australia’s first Inspector-General of Forests (1927-1944). REFERENCES 1, Millet, M. R. O. (1969), Australian Eucalypts, Lansdowne Press, Melbourne. (p. 7). 2. Millett, M. R, O, (1971), Native Trees of Australia. Lansdowne Press, Melbourne, (p. 30). 3, Millett, M. R. O, (unpublished paper, 1946), The stomata of Eucalyptus species, 4. Mueller, F. von (1879-1884), Eucalyptographia. Melbourne. 5. Carr, §.G.M., Milkovits, L. and Carr, D, J, (1971), Eucalypt phytoglyphs; the microanatomical features of the epidermis in relation to taxonomy. Australian Journal of Botany 19: 173-190. 6, Hallam, N. D, (1967). Anelectron microscope study of the genus Eucalyptus L‘Héritier. Thesis for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy, University of Mel- bourne. 7. Hallam, N, D. and Chambers, T. C. (1970), The leaf waxes of the genus Eucalyptus L’Héritier. Australian Journal of Botany 18; 335-386, Microscopes are for Everybody Come to a series of one-hour talks and demonstrations Microscopy opens up a world of beauty and wonder that can be enjoyed by everybody yet is sadly missed by many. Here is achance for you to share that enjoyment. And if you wish to develop your skill in the use of microscopes to further your studies, there are specialists at these evenings to help you overcome problems. The FNCV Microscopy Group consists of en- thusiasts who enjoy microscopy as a hobby for its own sake as well as a means for studying natural history, Members have decided to give a series of talks and demonstrations at the Group’s monthly meetings during 1978. They aim to help people understand the variety of microscopes that are available, how they work, the type most suited to any particular purpose or person, how to get the best results, how to prepare objects for examina- tion under a microscope, etc. The series aims to cover all aspects of the use of microscopes as a form of recreation or study for people of all ages. Talks and demonstrations will be on the third Wednesday of each month at the National Her- barium hall. The meeting starts at 8.00 p.m., the address at 8.15 and continues with demonstra- tions for one hour. The atmosphere is informal and there will be plenty of time to ask questions and to examine more closely the demonstration items and members’ exhibits. And Group mem- bers are ready to help you with any microscopy problem; there's an enthusiastic specialist on al- MOSL every aspect. Here is the programme for 1978: February 15. Exhibits by Group members and discussion of the year's programme. March 15. Microscopes — historical and modern. Demonstration of all types from the 22 simplest to the most advanced. How to choose a microscope. %-hour for members’ exhibits. April 19. The various methods of illuminating an object to see the most detail — top lighting, bright field, dark ground, Rheinberg illumina- tion. 4-hour for members’ exhibits. May 17. Simple methods of mounting dry ob- jects for microscope examination — insect parts, butterfly wings, mineral sands, seeds, forams, textiles, small shells, etc. “%-hour members’ exhibits. June 21. How to prepare and mount objects in Canada balsam, glycerine jelly, Euparal and other mountants, 4-hour members’ exhibits. July 19. Pond and marine microscopic life — collection, treatment, method of viewing, preser- vation, %-hour members’ exhibits. August 16. Zoological and botanical section cutting, staining, mounting. 44-hour members’ exhibits. September 20. Special forms of transmitted light. Demonstration of Kohler illumination, phase contrast, polarised light for biological specimens and interference. 44-hour members’ exhibits. October 18. Photography through the micros- cope — black and white, colour, movies. ’%-hour members’ 35mm colour slides. The Microscopy Group hopes the talks will help people to become more interested in this fascinating hobby. Everybody is invited to at- tend. There is no fee. For further information contact The Secretary, Microscopy Group, c/o FNCV, National Her- barium, South Yarra, 3141, or any other member of the Group. Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Comparison of the English and Victorian Terrains BY EDMUND D.GILL,* A few months ago it was my privilege to travel once more England's ‘“‘green and pleasant land”’ from East Anglia as far west as Somerset and Devon, from Portland Bill in the south to Durham in the north, and coastal Whitby where Captain Cook lived. Boarding a boat at Potter Heigham, we explored the northeast sector of the Norfolk Broads, sailing up Meadow Dyke to Horsey Mere near the coast. From there we walked past the reconstructed windmill to the vil- lage of Horsey (with its ancient church) and by pathway across the fields to the sea. In February 1938 a storm surge breached the sea wall, flooding most of the Parish of Horsey; it took four and a half months of constant pumping to remove the sea water. This event seemed far away as we walked the rich fields with their sheep, cattle and crops. As I walked across those pleasant fields, I set to wondering why it is that the English terrain is so different from that in Victoria, Australia. England has an area of about 51,000 square miles, while that of Victoria is about 88,000, so these antipodal territories are roughly comparable in extent. Apart from the flora and fauna, what are the essential differences between these two in- teresting terrains? I decided that they are five: 1. English Humidity. It was midsummer but we had seen little sun. The drizzle had stopped, but the skies were grey, thé air humid, and evaporation low. The rain does not fall in heavy showers as it does in Vic- toria, but mostly as a drizzle that does not cause much erosion. The Royal Society of Victoria had trouble with the Hall roof be- cause this 1859 building was designed for English drizzle and not Victorian “‘cloud- bursts’’. The light green of the English countryside is a function of high effective rainfall, and the spread of precipitation over January/February, 1978 most of the year. By contrast, in summer in Victoria there are periods when rain is rare, and a hot sun shines down from a clear sky, turning the vegetation brown. 2. Legacy of Glaciers. Nearly the whole of England is covered with Ice Age de- posits. Great glaciers crept down from the north, leaving a carpet of till over the ter- rain. South of the ice cap rim other proces- ses were at work such as ice wedging, frost shattering and solifluction. Thus most of England is covered by very young sedi- ments, whereas in Victoria ancient rocks outcrop over much of the terrain; there are no Pleistocene tills. It is interesting to note that in England what happened 100,000,000 years ago is presently affecting much of the countryside. In the Cretaceous (when dinosaurs were still about) a warm sea covered part of Western Europe and precipitated the Chalk that now forms white cliffs and rolling downs. Mas- ses of siliceous sponge spicules in the chalk later became flint. The glaciers gouged the soft chalk forming chalky till, and thus over a very wide area distributed the very resis- tant flints. Early man utilized these flints for tools, while in the Middle Ages (for exam- ple) they were used for building roads (as at Elm Hill, Norwich), abbeys (as at Bury St. Edmunds) and houses (as at Thetford). There is no such chalk in Victoria, but on the South Australian border there is a Miocene limestone with flints. The Aborigines used it, and traded it to central and northern Victoria, whereas in the Mur- ray Valley north of Victoria a common opal was utilized. 3. Youthful Soils. In England glaciers, like giant bulldozers, scraped away the old *47 Wattle Valley Road, Canterbury 23 Robin Hood's Bay, Yorkshire. The bedrock is Mesozoic black shale, over which is a thick boulder clay of Ice Age origin. Slipping in the clay has broken the road in the foreground and threatened the Medieval village below, necessitating the constniction of a high sea wall. soils. Young soils have now developed on the tills and other Ice Age deposits. By con- trast, many Victorian soils are very ancient, and some (such as laterites and krasnozems) were formed in the Tertiary Era two to five million years ago. The young soils are much richer because less leached. Asa result, they grow a better vegetative cover. In England, the combination of youthful soils and humid climate results in the “‘green and pleasant” look we so much enjoy. 4. Pebbly Shores. The word beach ap- pears to come from the Middle English bayche, which means a pebbly shore. Shakespeare certainly used beach in that sense. On Horsey Beach the sand was peb- bly. The Pleistocene glaciers tip-spread the terrain with rocks, especially flints. The sea sieved out this till, carrying away the fine sediments and emplacing the sand and peb- bles on the beach. On Horsey Beach flints dominated, but there were also samples of rocks from a wide range of other forma- tions. One interesting relic was a rounded clod of peat held together with humified 24 E.D.G. photo. roots. Buried in the peat was a piece of flint. I wonder what human story is represented by that flake? The energy level of a bog is too low to transport such a piece of flint so it must have been carried there by man. Prob- ably the peat came from under the sea,.from a bog that formed after the ice retreated but before the sea rose to its present level; such peats are frequently found round the world. It would have been interesting to use radiocarbon to date the peat, and the roots to show when the shrub or young trees grew there. Pollen analysis could have defined the flora of the area, fibres from the peat proved what kind of bog it was, while the wood structure of the roots could have ‘shown what kind of bush grew on the peat, and whether it belonged to the same ecology as the bog or was a later phase. In England there are many beaches that consist almost entirely of flint pebbles like the famous Chesil Beach at Portland. At Crumini in Brittany there is such a beach which our French friends considered a “belle plage’’, but I fancy I can still feel the Vict.Nat. Vol.95 dents of those hard flint pebbles! A **beauti- ful beach’’ in Victoria means a wide sandy one. 5. Marine Energy and Tidal Range. The waves were small at Horsey Beach, In Victoria strong waves run on open ocean beaches for most of the year because of the powerful southwest swell from the Southern Ocean. In England there are heavy Atlantic storms, but in the intervals the sea is rela- tively calm. So there is a very different distribution of marine energy in England from that in Victoria. And at Horsey Beach the tide was coming in fast. In Victoria the tidal range varies from 0.9 to 2.4 m, but in England the tidal ranges are generally high and reach 12.7 m (42 ft,) at Avonmouth on the Bristol Channel. Where the declivity of the shore is low, the intertidal area can be kilometres wide, so that it is easy to get trapped when the tide is racing in. At school I was told the story of King Canute com- manding the tide to stand still, and imagined him sitting there for an hour afterwards wait- ing to see if his command were effective. But I had the wrong ecologic setting. On England’s macrotidal shores one can actu- ally see the tide advancing, as I did at Flam- borough on the east coast. It was a sunny day and crowds of people had gone to the beach to enjoy it. The tide was coming in and every few minutes someone had to shift because the water was rising so fast. By noting a particular pebble, it was easy to watch the advance of the sea in relation to it. So when the word beach is used in Eng- land, people think of a pebbly shore with a large tidal range (which creates salt marshes and tidal rips) and seas that are made rough by storms but in between are relatively calm. In Victoria the word beach has a connotation of sandy shores with a small tidal range (with rare salt marshes and tidal rips), and a sea that is constantly active because of the strong S.W. swell. In 1973 I showed an international group of scientists over the coast of Western Victoria, and at the end a French professor said, ““But Mon- sieur Gill, where are the peats?’’ **The ab- sence of peats,’’ I replied, **is one of the marks of the microtidal coast.”’ So I think that England’s ‘green and pleasant land”’ is due to the greater humidity of the climate, and the widespread Pleis- tocene deposits with their youthful soils, while the coasts differ in their coarser sedi- ments, larger tidal range and the different energy profile. Faggot Case-moth — vandal or opportunist? Some time ago | helped a friend transplant a large young Spruce tree. We dug it up with a big ball of earth, and as the new position was rather exposed, my friend made the tree secure with several guys of fishing cord. Next morning, to his surprise, he found that the guy lines had been cut. On close examination he discovered the vandal was the larva of the Faggot Case-moth Clania tenuis, It had neatly cut ten pieces of cord one inch long and attached them side by side to the outside of its case. To add to the offence, it was then having breakfast off the ! Spruce tree! IAN F, Morrison, DONCASTER (To be continued) Techniques of Research in Ornithology Preliminary notice of VORG Conference 21-23 July 1978 The Victorian Ornithological Research Group will be holding a conference in Melbourne over the week-end 21-23 July 1978 on the theme ‘Techniques of Research in Ornithol- ogy’’. Allinterested persons are invited to attend. Further details will appear in a later issue of this journal. January/February, 1978 25 Bush-peas of Victoria — genus Pultenaea — 8 By M. G. CORRICK Pultenaea subumbellata Hooker in Curtis's Bot. Mag. 60; t.3254 (1833). Pultenaea subumbellata was described by James Hooker from specimens grown in the Glasgow Botanic Garden from seed col- lected in Tasmania by Dr. Scott. The plant is a very slender, often trailing shrub 30-60 cm high; it will almost always be found in swamps or wet heathland where the slender branches mingle with other vegetation. The stems are usually glabrous and terete, but in young growth they may be slightly ridged and hairy. The alternate, acute, lancelote leaves are 5-12 mm long and 1-2 mm wide with a blunt tip. They are glab- rous, usually flat with margins very slightly incurved. The minute, pale stipules are about .5 mm long, closely appressed to the stem and easily overlooked. They are joined across the base of the petiole and usually remain on the stem when the leaf falls off. ~~ ) Anton af Sh e | D J oN 5 eo w > ter + ee a a K /V& ee | NG Fig. 9a Known distribution of P, subumbellata. tht, \ A N\A. \ + B G he, © ie, Ate | ite se ¥ sei pits H M R 4 a | D J N S w go> A ap a Wak a TA od ae a N Fig. 9b, Known distribution of P. paludosa. 26 The flowers are about 10 mm long, each subtended by a bract and clustered in small terminal heads. The bracts are broadly ovate, tapering abruptly into a slender but blunt point, which is green and leaf-like below the outer flowers of the inflores- cence. The calyx is about 5 mm long and pubes- cent or hirsute with rather long hairs, but usually becoming glabrous towards the base. The lower acuminate lobes are longer that the two broad upper lobes. The lance- lote bracteoles have ciliate margins, are at- tached below the calyx tube and are about as long as the tube only. The flowers are orange, the standard has deep purple mark- ings and is about twice as long as broad. The ovary and base of the style are densely co- vered with long white hairs. The style is hooked and appears thick in comparison with the ovary. Together they are only 3.5 mm long. Flowering time is from mid Oc- tober to December, but may be earlier, par- ticularly in warm areas. The plump, dark pod is covered with rather long hairs and has usually only one mature seed. This species is widely distributed over southern Victoria, but the comparatively few collections in the Melbourne Herbarium suggest that it has probably been overlooked in many areas. It also occurs in Tasmania and Southern New South Wales. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Grampians, 12 mls S. of Halls Gap, T.B. Muir 2735, 6.xi. 1962 (MEL 516557); Grampians, E. side of Victoria Range, A. C. Beauglehole 16139, 10.xii. 1966 (MEL 516558); Grampians, Victoria Valley, M. G. Corrick 5659, 17.x. 1976 (MEL 516563); Nunniong Plateau, K. C. Rogers, 29.xi, 1965 (MEL 516870); Bonang Highway-Bendock Rd. Jen., A. C. Beaug- lehole 34607, 19.xi. 1970 (MEL 16871), Dandenong Ranges, C. Walter, x. 1900, (MEL 516872), Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Fig. 9. a-g, Pultenaea subumbellata, a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style; d, floral bract; e, leaves and stipules, all from MEL 516563; f, pod; g, seed, from MEL 516558. h-m, Pultenaea paludosa, h, habit; i, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; j, style; k, floral bract; 1, leaves and stipules, stipule drawn a little larger, all from MEL 516873; m, pod; n, seed, from MEL 516555. January/February, 1978 27 Pultenaea paludosa 3.Thompson in Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 83:123 (1959). Pultenaea paludosa was described by Joy Thompson from a specimen collected by Betche in 1833 in swamps between Coogee and Bondi. It is a slender, rather weak shrub from 10-40 cm high, erect when small or later supported by surrounding plants. Sup- erficially it is very similar to Pultenaea sub- umbellata but there are distinctive differ- ences in leaves, stipules, bracts, calyx and bracteoles and the flowers are consistently very much smaller, The stems are terete and covered with rather long, pale hairs except on the oldest part of the plant. The alternate, ovate leaves are 6-8 mm long, 1-2 mm wide, flat and usually glabrous, but there may be a few long hairs on the upper surface of young leaves. In dried specimens the centre of the underside of the leaf is often dark brown. The mid-rib is not obvious except on the underside of the oldest leaves. The leaf margins are minutely scabrid. The stipules are very slender, .5 mm long with several fine hairs about | mm long at their tips. They are closely appressed to the stem and difficult to see among the stem hairs. Some descriptions and keys state that stipules may be absent in both P. paludosa and P. subumbellata but, although incon- spicuous, they have been found on all the Melbourne Herbarium specimens examined, The flowers are 6 mm long, each sub- tended by a small bract and densely clus- tered at the tips of the branches. The bracts are lancelote and covered with long white hairs; a few of the outermost ones in each flower head may have green tips, but the majority are pale. The calyx is about 4 mm long, with three lower narrowly acute lobes and two broader, obtuse upper lobes; it is very simi- lar to the calyx of P. subumbellata in shape but is densely covered all over with long white hairs. The bracteoles are attached below the tube and are as long as it. They are also covered with long hairs so as to appear to consist almost entirely of a bunch of hairs. The flowers are about 7 mm long, keel and wings are pale orange with purple streaks. The narrow standard is dark purple edged with pale orange. The ovary and base of style are densely covered with long white hairs reaching more than half-way up the style which is hooked at the tip. Flowering time is between mid September and early October. The rather hard, rounded pods are 3-4 mm long, dark grey and hairy with one fully developed seed. This species has only recently been rec- ognised as occurring in Victoria and appears to be confined to East Gippsland. It is also found in coastal areas of New South Wales. In the field the very small flowers, hairy stems and narrow bracts should distinguish it from P. subumbellata. It also favours similar wet habitats, but the two species have not been found in the same locality. Many more collections of both species are needed, particularly from eastern Victoria, before their distribution can be clearly estab- lished. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Cape Conran Rd., A. C. Beauglehole 34507, 12.xi. 1970 (MEL 516555); Prince’s Highway 3% mls. NE of Cabbage Tree Ck., A. C. Beauglehole & E. W. Finck, ACB 33061, 4.i. 1970 (MEL 516619); Prince’s Highway 25 km W. of Cann River, M. G. Corrick 5966, 25.x. 1977 (MEL 516873). Pultenaea muelleri Bentham in Flora Australiensis 2; 138 (1864), Pultenaea muelleri is a plant of moist, well-timbered hill-sides and mountain slopes of the central and eastern highlands. It is considered to be endemic in Victoria, but as its distribution extends almost to the 28 border at Mt. Cobberas, Mt. Stradbroke and Mt. Tingaringy it seems likely that it could also occur in south eastern New South Wales. Close to Melbourne it is plentiful in the Kinglake Forest, on Mt. Baw Baw and Vict.Nat. Vol.95 pot i 4 pas in? a 4 t A , f- | T upemenntgtereenee T= Stl nat tees cumeen pent asm ee Fig. 10. a-h, P.muelleri; a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; c, ovary and style; d, floral bract; e, leaf and stipule; f, stipule; all from MEL 516836; g, pod; h, seed; from MEL 35234. i-l, P.muelleri var.reflexifolia; i, habit; j, ovary and style; k, floral bract; I, leaves and stipules, all from MEL 516838; m, long leaf form from Powelltown MEL 516837. January/February, 1978 29 Lake Mt. Its flowering period, from mid November to January, is later than most lowland species. Bentham described the species from material collected and sent to him by Baron von Mueller and after whom he named it. P. muelleri var, muelleri is usually a fairly dense erect shrub up to 1.5m high, but this varies according to situation, at higher altitudes it is smaller and more compact. The alternate, flat or slightly concave leaves are 7-15 mm long and 1-2 mm wide tapering into a pungent point which is sufficiently strong to make the plant feel slightly prickly. The upper leaf surface is glabrous, the underside has a few scattered hairs and is darker in colour with a prominent mid vein and two to four less prominent parallel veins. The brown, papery stipules have a prom- inent mid-rib and are about 2 mm long and often joined, so that on young growth, where the leaves are close together, the stem may be almost concealed by the stipules. The flowers are usually single and termi- nal, occasionally they are paired or may appear clustered when several short branch- lets are close together along a stem. The ovary and style are covered with short, silky hairs. The calyx is silky with long appressed | Pee opin - oe. vo — of ee Eas rt i i pet | ME Bmealers vo: ender R { | S32 Bumvelleri var ceflenifohia ae | i ih | | ~ a | > 3@ on w |Z > =n ae ve oo, K - ALB T Vv ee \ ; Fig. 10a. Known distribution of P.muelleri. hairs and is almost hidden by the large en- veloping bracteoles. These are 3 mm long and 2 mm wide, concave and papery with obtuse ciliate tips. They are attached at the base of the calyx tube and reach half way up the lobes. Immediately below the calyx and partly concealing the bracteoles are several closely imbricate bracts similar in texture to the bracteoles but somewhat smaller. In the hills around Powelltown and the Latrobe River watershed a particularly long-leafed form occurs, with leaves up to 20 mm in length. Typical P. muelleri is occasionally con- fused with P. juniperina var. mucronata, but the latter species has narrow lanceolate bracteoles and lacks the persistent bracts of P. muelleri. P. muelleri var. reflexifolia J. H. Willis in Vict. Nat. 57; 98(1940) occurs in several areas to the west of Melbourne. It is gener- ally a much smaller plant, sometimes less than 30 cm high; it is distinguished by the strongly reflexed leaves which give the plant a rather withered appearance. the stipules and calyx lobes are also longer and more finely pointed. It has been recorded from several places in the Wombat Forest, west of Gisborne, and also from Dayles- ford, Skipton and Apollo Bay. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: var. muelleri: Mount Barkly, F. Mueller, Jan. 1863, (MEL 35234, Isotype) Lake Mt., E. of Echo Flat, J. H. Ross 2471, 8.1. 1977, (MEL 516836); Powelltown, J. H. Willis, 12.xii, 1977, (MEL 516837), Mts Erica & Baw Baw, H. B. Williamson, 2.1. 1905 (MEL 516840); Var. reflexifolia: Skipton, Rev. W. Whan 149, (MEL 35232, Holotype); Wombat Forest, B. Kemp 30.xi. 1976 (MEL 516838). ‘*Build-it-yourself Microscope’’ available again These microscope tubes are complete with graduated tube, standard high quality 7x eyepiece and standard extra high quality 3.7 objective. Magnifications can be varied from 19x with 130 mm tubelength to 33x with 190 mm tubelength. 30 Any handyman can mount the tube in a box frame. Price $24.00; or with a graticule measur- ing eyepiece instead of ordinary eyepiece $27.00, Postage 80c, beyond 50 km in Victoria, $1.20, Order from FNCV Sales Officer. Vict.Nat. Vol.95 The M.A.Ingram Trust BY ERIc R, ALLAN Two members of the F.N.C.V. who were very active in the Club affairs during their lifetime, left all their property to create a Trust in perpetuity for the protection and preservation of the fauna and flora of Australia. This article is an account of how the Ingram family founded the M.A. Ingram Trust and what has been done with the funds it has provided. The twin brothers John and Will Ingram were born in 1868 at Maryborough. Their father who had come out from Ayr in Scotland in 1852 had served his apprenticeship as a watch and clockmaker with his father in Scotland and in due course the twins became another generation to follow this profession. In 1892 they founded the firm of Ingram Bros, and for over half acentury in Swanston Street were well known as master clockmakers. They installed the first electrical clock systems in Melbourne and were responsible for timing every record of the Victorian Amateur Athletic Association from 1895 until just before they died, Will in March 1945 and John in De- cember 1946, They enjoyed walking in the Australian “bush” and took a keen interest in the wild life. Will Ingram became a member of the F.N.C.V. in June 1919 and from 1931 until June 1942 he carried out the duties of honorary assistant libra- rian, John Ingram became a member in October 1926 and from 1929 until 1942 carried out the duties of honorary treasurer. Both of them led or participated in many of the Club excursions. Their father had died in 1885 and with their Mother and two sisters Mary and Janet they lived in the house they had built in Clowes Street, South Yarra. Neither the twin brothers or their two sisters married so that having no dependants, and in view of their great interest and concern for the wild life of Australia, the four of them decided to make identical Wills in which, apart from a few small bequests, all their Estates would be held in per- petual Trust and the income would be used for the protection and preservation of the fauna and flora of Australia and to encourage research and in- crease of knowledge with respect to the origin, history, habits, life and use and the scientific benefits, if any, of indigenous Australian (espe- cially Victorian) mammals and birds, and the flora providing their food, cover and breeding facilities. The Wills provided that the Trust should be known as “‘The M.A. Ingram Trust’’ as a mem- orial to their Mother, Mary Ann Ingram. On the death in 1947 of Janet, the last surviving Ingram, the Executers began to take the necessary legal steps to set up the Trust. The Executors were the Public Trustee, Mr. C. E. W. Bryant a Sol- January/February, 1978 icitor and member of the R.A.O.U., Mr. A. S. Chalk a member of the F.N.C.V., Mrs, Mary D, Graham a friend of the Ingram family and Eric R. Allan a cousin of the Ingrams. The income from the Trust which at present in 1977 amounts to approximately $17,000 per an- num, has been used for a great variety of purposes within the terms of the Trust and details of some of these are given in the following paragraphs. Some details of Trust-income spent Grants to the R.A.O.U, to assist with the print- ing costs of its journal the ‘“‘Emu”’ and its Index. to the F_N.C.V. to assist with the printing costs of the ** Victorian Naturalist’’ and of “Nature Show”’ leaflets for nine years, to the Bird Observers Club to assist with the cost of printing special articles in *‘The Bird Watcher”’ and the booklets ‘‘Field Guide to the Waders”’ and “Field Guide to the Hawks’’. to V.O.R.G. to assist with printing costs of ‘“‘Handlist of Victorian Birds’’ and with Field Observation Cards. to the Gould league of Bird Lovers for printing of Field Guides to Victorian Birds. to S.A. Ornithological Association to assist with printing of “S.A. Ornithologist’’ to Geelong F.N.C. for printing of booklet ‘Care of sick, injured & orphaned native birds and animals” Provision of water storage pond for wildlife at Wyperfeld National Park, Purchase of 3929 acres of virgin Mallee land at Wandown to retain the habitat of numerous Lowan, kangaroos and Mallee birdlife. Purchase of 157 acres land at Ocean Grove for Geelong & District Natural History & Environ- ment Centre. Grant towards cost of Helmeted Honey Eater Survey Centre of B.O.C. at Yellingbo. Grant towards cost of Nature Conservation Sur- vey of Victoria by Victorian National Parks As- sociation. Radio carbon datings re sites containing bird and animal bones. Provision of Finch Aviary at Healesville Sanctuary. Assistance with cost of Behavioural Laboratories at Monash University. Excavation of McEachern’s Cave, Lower Glenelg National Park, by Jeannette Hope. Study of Rock Wallabies from Arnhem Land, by Dr. J. E. Nelson. Study of Seals at Seal Rocks, off Phillip Island, by Fisheries and Wildlife Division. Study of Peregrine Falcon by Dr. Clayton White Basic Studies of Marsupials by Fisheries & Wildlife Division Study of Mutton Birds (Short 31 tailed shearwater) by V.O.R.G. Provision of equipment for Mammal Survey Groups of F_N.C_V., Victoria, of Ballarat, and of Macedon Range Conservation Society. Grants have been made to assist with the cost of many research projects carried out by qualified persons at Universities, on marsupials, bats, de- sert animals and birds. Up to 30th June 1977 a total amount of approx- imately $173,000 has been paid out as grants to assist with projects such as detailed above. The present managing Trustees are — Mr. Eric R. Allan (Cousin and original Trustee) Mr. James H. Willis (Nominee of the F.N.C.V.) Mr. Jack Jones (Nominee of the R.A.O.U.) Pro- fessor Graeme Campbell (Professor of Zoology, Melbourne University) and the Public Trustee is Custodian Trustee, that is he is responsible for the investments of the Trust and the maintenance of proper accounts. The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 263 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A. BAINES *Pastinaca. Lat name for the carrot, later for the parsnip when daucus was used for the carrot. The name, according to Jaeger, is from Lat pas- tinum, a dibble with carrot-like form; confirmed by Gilbert-Crater, as from pastino, dig or trench the ground; and by Smith and Stern, as from pastus, food. *P. sativa, Parsnip, is in tribe Peucedaneae of family Umbelliferae, the tribal name stemming from the generic synonym Peucedanum, by which it is again called by some modern botanists. The surname of Boris Paster- nak, author of many poems and of “Dr. Zhivago’, is the Russian word for parsnip, and is in fact the same Latin word in a Slavonic guise. Pelargonium. Gk pelargos, a stork; because the fruit has a “beak’ not unlike that of a stork, hence the common name stork’s-bill for most of the species. Victoria has five native species, the commonest being P. australe, Austral Stork’s- bill, and three introduced, including *P. domes- ticum, Garden *“Geranium’, Family Geraniaceae has five genera, of which three are represented in the State's flora — Geranium, Erodium and Pelargonium named respectively after the bills of the crane, heron and stork. The genus Pelar- gonium has 250 species, Geranium 400 and Erodium 90, so the ‘geranium’ misnomer can be pardoned! P. inodorum, also native to N.Z., is known by the Maori name Kopata. Pellaea. Gk pellaios, dark; alluding to the stalks which are generally dark. Our sole species, P. falcata, Sickle Fern, was formerly classified in 32 the genus Preris, The genus is in family Adian- taceae, and the name should be accented on the second syllable, though a first-syllable stress is often heard. The specific epithet means sickle- shaped (Lat falx was used for both sickle and scythe). Pennisetum. Lat penna, a feather; seta, bristle; the flower of these grasses having long, feathery bristles. Victoria has one native species, P. com- pressum, Swamp Foxtail-grass, and three intro- duced, Kikuyu Grass, African Feather Grass and Feathertop. Kikuyu is named after the Kenya tribe of that name, and the first syllable should be pronounced like key, not kye as often heard. Pentachondra. Gk pente, five (in compounds, penta-); chondros, a grain; in reference to the five-parted fruit. Our sole species, found in the Alps, is P. pumila, Carpet Heath, also native to N.Z., where it is known as Little Mountain Heath, and to Tasmania, which has two other species endemic there. The genus is in family Epacridaceae. Pentapogon. Gk pente, five; pogon, beard; the flowering glume having five awns, Our sole species 18 P. quadrifidus, Five-awned Spear- grass. It is a monotypic endemic Australian genus, setup by Robert Brown in 1810, five years after Labillardiere had named the species as an Agrostis. (To be continued) Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1977: John Russell Wheeler There are two noteworthy points to make about the award of the Australian Natural History Medallion for 1977 to the prominent Geelong naturalist Jack Wheeler. Of the 38 Medallionists, 17 have been professionals in the sense that their regular paid employment was in the scientific field, usually in universities, research institutes or herbaria, or in Government departments, while 21 have been amateurs in the sense that they earned salaries in other occupations and became experts in natural history or some branch of it because of their enthusiasm for a hobby interest that spread over many years, with eventual rec- ognition far and wide. Jack Wheeler comes into the Jatter category, as does his brother Roy, who won the same award in 1965, They are the second pair of brothers to be so honoured, which is the other noteworthy point referred to above. The other pair of brothers, Dominic and Vincent Ser- venty, won the medallion in 1956 and 1974 re- spectively. Perhaps birdwatching runs in families, as all four have distinguished them- selves in ornithology. John Russell Wheeler was born on 22 April, 1909 at Coleraine in Victoria’s Western District, and was educated at the local primary and secon- dary schools. His occupation for over 20 years was in the Transportation section of the Victorian Railways, and for 29 years in the Dairying section of the Department of Agriculture. This service was interrupted by his participation in World War II, serving in the Middle East and New Guinea, 1940-44, holding the army rank of lieutenant. He is still active in the Rats of Tobruk Association. Although nominally retired, he may be said to have the occupation of ‘full-time naturalist’, as he is involved still in a wide variety of activities in ornithology, botany, ecology and conservation. When living in Ballarat, he became joint founder in 1952 of Ballarat Field Naturalists’ Club, of which he was secretary for the first six years, being made a life member in 1958. He began contributing a nature column to “The Courier’ (Ballarat daily newspaper), under the name *Na- ture Notes’, modestly conducted by ‘J.R.W.’, which is now in its 20th year, appearing in each Saturday issue. When he transferred to Geelong, he became a foundation member of the revived Geelong Field Naturalists’ Club (the original club had begun in 1880, only afew months after the formation of the F.N.C.V.). He was vice-president, 19614 and 1976-7, president, 1965-71, and has also held at various times the offices of treasurer, excursion secretary, editor of monthly newsletter, and botany group member. This is a very active club, with meetings largely attended, and many excur- sions and campouts. The two key members are Jack Wheeler and his friend Trevor Pescott (who January/February, 1978 Mr. Jack Wheeler edits ‘Geelong Naturalist’, and conducts the na- ture column called ‘By Field and Lane’ in the ‘Geelong Advertiser’). The Juniors meet each month before the main meeting, and Jack Wheeler has many times delivered lectures to these keen young people, and given them the benefit of his practical experience. Birds were Jack Wheeler’s first enthusiasm, and they continue to be a major interest for him. Joining the Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union and the Bird Observers’ Club in 1950, he has contributed important papers over the years to their respective publications, “The Emu’ and “The Australian Bird Watcher’, and articles have ap- peared in the Gould League’s ‘Bird Lover’ and ‘Survival’, ‘Geelong Naturalist’, “Bendigo Naturalist’, “Bird Observer’, “Canberra Bird Notes’, ‘Wildlife in Australia’, * Victorian Naturalist’, and ‘The Bird Bander’. Bird banding has taken up many hours of Jack Wheeler's life. Number 24 Bird Bander’s A Licence was issued to him in 1955, and is still current, Some of the species he has banded in- clude: Silver Gull 3000, Mutton Birds 5000, Aus- tralian Gannets 450, White-faced Storm Petrels 400, Black Swans 700, Banded Plover 500, Spur-winged Plover 500, Gull-billed Terns 50, Giant Petrels 42 — and he has even banded one Wandering Albatross! He has taken part in bird population counts at Lake Wendouree, Lake Natimuk, Lake Wallace, Lake Brambruk in Wyperfeld National Park, and Reedy Lake at Leopold, making a complete circuit of each lake. 33 He led the local challenge bird counts for five years, and took part in World Bird Day lists. A special project was his regular visits to the Wedge Light gannetry in Port Phillip Bay, first found to be active in 1966 and gradually building up since then; also regular visits to Fort Island, where an important overflow rookery of the White-faced Storm Petre! exists near the main breeding rookeries of Mud Island near Queenscliff. Wheeler has often visited other sea-bird refuges, such as Lady Julia Percy Island and Griffith Island (near Port Fairy) and Lawrence Rocks (near Port- land). He is carrying out individual studies on the breeding of certain species: in the Geelong reg- ion, Nankeen Night Heron, Banded Plover, Fairy Tern and Spur-winged Plover; and in the Ballarat area, Black Swans on Lake Wendouree. Perhaps Jack Wheeler's greatest contribution to conservation is his involvement with the Ocean Grove Nature Reserve, of which he has been chairman of the Committee of Management since its inception in 1968 and continues in that office. This reserve, on land largely left in its original state of native vegetation by the Cuthbertson fam- ily, was originally of 200 acres (81 hectares), but was expanded to an area of 357 acres (143 ha) by public appeal which raised $78 ,000 in 1964, per- sonally conducted by Wheeler and Pescott. Even- tually, with the help of Government funds, it will be known as the Geelong and District Natural History and Environment Centre. This reserve is open to the public, and is being increasingly known and visited, and many school visits take place, with volunteer guides showing the main features, which include nature trails, ant colonies with larvae of the rare small Ant Blue butterflies, koalas and areas planted with thousands of native shrubs and trees, Jack Wheeler spends 2-3 days every week in attendance in an honorary advisory capacity, and carrying out plantings and general supervision. Another of his conservation efforts has been the organization of regular plantings of native trees and shrubs, and excursions for the eradica- tion of boneseed (now a major threat there as on the coast) at the You Yangs. From 1963 he has been a member of the Committee of Management of the You Yangs Forest Park, and in this capacity has worked co-operatively with many members of the Geelong F.N.C. and the Bird Observers’ Club. He has taken a leading part in the surveys and submissions for the proposed conservation of Mount Cole Range, and was author of the 31- page report so well received by the Minister of Forests. He led deputations for Lake Connewarre Wildlife Reserve, Edwards Point Fauna Reserve (St. Leonards), Bannockburn Fauna and Flora Reserve, Bambra headwaters of Retreat Creek, Flax Mill Swamp (Wendouree), and other areas, Jack Wheeler has been in the forefront of moves for the conservation and reservation of adequate areas of the Otway Ranges and adjacent coastlands, and, with other members of Geelong 34 Field Naturalists’ Club (which has often held campouts in various parts of this magnificent reg- ion and built up a fund of practical knowledge of its ecology), he took part in the Otways seminar at Lorne. The 1977 Medallionist has been a regular lec- turer at field naturalists’ clubs throughout Vic- toria, and these talks are illustrated with his photographic slides drawn from a large collection on birds, insects, mammals, marine creatures, trees, wildflowers and general conservation. Schools too have often benefited from his exper- Use, and he has taken an active part in wildflower shows of Geelong F.N.C. and Angair, the pro- gressive conservation society of Anglesea and Airey’s Inlet. He has taken an active role too in the Western Victorian Natural History Clubs As- sociation, comprising all F.N.C.’s in the ‘Western half of the state, which holds get-togethers and local excursions in each town in rotation — he was president in 1975-76. He was on the original Steering Committee for the Victorian Field Naturalists’ Clubs Association in 1972, and has been a delegate ever since, Other activities have included the New Guinea Bird Society and the Australian Seabird Group, Jack Wheeler conceived the need for, and car- ried out the authorship of, a recently-published small book called ‘The Care of Sick, Injured and Orphaned Native Birds and Animals’, issued by Geelong F.N.C. and financed by donations solicited from local industry, conservation groups and individuals. The book is distributed free of charge, and an initial printing of 20,000 copies has been exhausted. All schools, most libraries, conservation groups, and even South Australian, N.S.W. and Tasmanian recipients, have been given copies, so that proper care will be able to be given to our distressed fauna, He has compiled brochures on ‘Birds of Ballarat and District’, ‘Birds of Northern Territory and East Kimber- leys’, ‘Birds of South-East Asia’, “Introduction to Ocean Grove Nature Reserve’, ‘Introduction to Batesford Sanctuary’, *Bird and Plant List of In- verleigh Common’, 10 year editor of "Geelong FNC Newsletter’. Batesford Sanctuary is 208 acres of natural bushland conserved by the Belcher family of ‘Lilydale House’, and Jack Wheeler had carried on for some years a corres- pondence with the late Sir Charles Belcher, who died in his 90’s at Kokstad (South Africa) after having been successively Chief Justice of Trinidad, Nyasaland and Kenya; in his young manhood he wrote the now rare but valuable book, “The Birds of the District of Geelong’, published in 1913. Jack Wheeler married Trixie Hansen in 1932, and they have two daughters and seven grand- children, The medallion was presented at the November meeting of the F.N.C.V., and the re- cipient of the award gave an illustrated address on conservation aspects of his various projects, J. A. BAINES Vict.Nat. Vol.95 Koala, Australia’s ‘‘native bear”’ Some facts gathered by a Jayman BY M. J. LestEr* The koala is not remotely related to the bear family but its imperceptible tail was probably the cause of the early name ‘‘native bear’’. And sev- eral years later it was given the scientific name Phascolarctos meaning *‘pouched bear’’, The specific appendage cinereus means “‘grey’’. The strange animal was first reported from the Blue Mountains in 1798, first described in a scien- tific journal in 1808, and illustrated in 1810 under the title “‘Koala or New Holland Sloth’’. It had also been called a monkey. Feeding, etc, The koala is probably the most specialised of our marsupials, It lives almost exclusively on eucalypt leaves. In Victoria its favourite is Manna Gum Eucalyptus viminalis but the diet is varied with a few other species. And it is a careful feeder, At certain times the leaves build up prus- sic acid and the koala might cover a lot of ground during the night looking for non-poisonous ones. It sleeps most of the day, rouses at dusk to begin feeding and consumes two to three pounds of leaves at a sitting. Occasionally it wakes for a snack during the day. There is a 2-metre extension of the intestines to cope with such a bulky diet, and digestion is aided by bacteria which the young koala acquires from its mother in its early ‘*pap’’ food described be- low. The name koala is derived from an aboriginal word meaning “‘no drink animal’’. Some obsery- ers state that drinking causes sickness. When disturbed from its daytime sleep, the koala’s puzzled babyish expression enchants the onlooker, but many knowledgeable persons con- sider the animal unusually stupid. Young When born, the single young is little more than a centimetre long; it makes its way to the pouch and attaches to one of the two teats. The pouch opens backward as in the wombat and suggests that the two have the same ances- tors, A backward-opening pouch makes sense for a burrowing animal, but for a tree-climbing one it means that the pouch opens downwards. To pre- vent the young from falling out there is strong muscular control at the entrance. Long before the young koala is able to leave the pouch, its mother’s milk becomes insufficient and is supplemented in a strange way. At certain January/February, 1978 times the leaves eaten by the mother are not wholly digested but are broken up into a sort of pap which passes through her digestive tract to the anal opening. The young koala puts its head out- side the backward-opening pouch to eat the pap. It feeds this way once a day. After about six months the cub is too big forthe pouch and is carried on its mother’s back up to another six months. Distribution. Conservation in Victoria Fossils indicate that the koala once existed in Western Australia, but it is now limited to south- east Queensland, east NSW, Victoria, and south-east South Australia. Koalas were abundant in those areas when the white man arrived, but by the 1920s there were fears of extermination. The koala is prone to respiratory and other diseases and there had been two bad epidemics. Another hazard was its fur. Thousands of pelts were exported yearly and mounted to 2 million in 1924 alone. In 1925 Victoria’s Fisheries and Games De- partment made a survey of existing koala colonies and estimated the survivors at about 500. An active conservation and publicity programme was initiated. The koala was given full protection (it is now protected throughout Australia) and many of the survivors were taken to Phillip Island which was fairly secluded and had plenty of the right food trees, By the 1930s, numbers had increased sufficiently to begin re-stocking mainland areas. These days, when we hear of wildlife officers moving koalas from one place to another, it is simply because the increase of numbers has en- dangered their food supply. There is no longer any fear of extinction. REFERENCES Barret, Charles (1939). Koala. Robertson & Mullens. Fisheries & Wildlife Division (1978). Pers. comm, Gould, John and Dixon, Joan M. (1977). Selections from Mammals of Australia. Macmillan. Hanzak, Veselovsky and Stephen (1968). Encyclopedia of Mammals. Collins, Lewis, F. (1954). ‘Rehabilitation of the Koala in Vic- toria’’. Vict.Nat. Vol.70, No.11. Morecombe, Michael (1974). Encyclopaedia of Austra- lian Wildlife. Macmillan. Pizzey, Graham (1966). Animals & Birds of Australia. Cassell. Ride, W.D.L. (1970). Guide to the Native Mammals of Australia. O.U.P. *4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra 35 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCV Activities General Meeting Monday 12 December 1977 Hawthorn Juniors were the speakers at this meeting and they provided an eye- opener to many of us on their Club. History, aims, activities. Wendy Clark, President of Hawthorn Junior FNC, re- ported that the Club was started in 1943 by Mrs Fream and continued with Mr Fische. Then Mr Dan McInnes was president for ten years and built the Club into the lively or- ganisation it is today. Now the Club ts run wholly by the juniors themselves, Council members being elected from the age of 12, The aims of the Club are to stimulate interest and enquiry on all aspects of natural history; this is done by monthly meetings with emphasis on exhibits, day trips, Easter camps and special week-end trips. Parents and other adults are welcome at all these events and are usually present in considera- ble numbers. Wendy then spoke of the success of sev- eral previous members of the Club. Animal skeletons are of special interest to Malcolm Turner, and he declared that much can be learned from them about the animals’ life habits, especially from the skull. He displayed a Wombat’s skull and one of its large continually-growing teeth that are used for grinding vegetation. He showed the bird-like skull of an Echidna with a curiously thin stick-like lower jaw, compared the skull with frontal eye sockets of a cat with that of a possum, and the skull of a Kookaburra and a falcon indicating their different eating habits. There was a stuffed Lesser Long-eared Bat with wings spread, and a fully mounted Brush-tail Possum. The beautiful wing of a Barn Owl was much admired and Malcolm explained how it ensures silent flight. Lyrebirds were talked about by Rose- mary Fearon, a very young member. Lichens consist of two plants — an alga and_a fungus, Barbara Thomson continued to explain that lichens serve as pioneers to break down rocks in preparation for larger 36 plants. In her exhibit of lichens, she drew attention to the fruiting bodies of the alga part, Railway reserve between Alamein and Burwood has been thoroughly explored by Robert Muir. He spoke of the several native plants and grasses that sull survive there, birds and their nests, and the ants, Specimens from the reserve included four native grasses; Common Wallaby-grass Danthonia caespitosa, Long-hair Plume- grass Dichelachne crinita, Kangaroo Grass Themeda australis and Common Wheat- grass Agropyron scabrum, Four small bot- tles contained a jumping ant, meat ant, sugar ant, and a bull ant. There were photos of the reserve and a copy of an article that appeared in this journal October last year, Vol.93 No.5. Chart of birds at Webb Dock near Westgate Bridge was displayed by George Appleby, aged 9. Unfortunately George could not be present and the amazingly comprehensive chart was talked about by Wendy Clark. Easter family camps began in 1970 and continue as the star annual event. Angela Fearon showed slides of incidents and views at the various locations. Most campers travel by private car but a bus ts chartered for those without cars. There are 80-90 people at each camp. Cane toad in Victoria? Malcolm Turner spoke of a week-end trip with a specific aim — to examine reports that the cane toad was present in the Strezlecki Ranges. His slides showed some of their search methods and what they found — Striped Marsh Frog and Bull Frogs. The investigators concluded that the 6-7 cm specimens had been mag- nified by other observers to cane toad size, FNCV President thanked the Hawthorn Juniors for providing such a varied and in- formative evening. Exhibits. Most of the exhibit space was occupied by material from the Juniors as listed to each speaker, Aquatic caterpillars (about 8 mm) were Vict.Nat. Vol.95 displayed in a dish among water milfoil, and they had cut small pieces of milfoil and used them as a covering like the case-moth cater- pillar uses sticks; under the microscope, a caterpillar was seen to be emerging from the egg. Marine plankton under a microscope showed various forms. Coastal Spinifex Spinifex hirsutus was exhibited as a genuine spinifex in contrast to the so-called spinifex of the inland which is really a species of Triodia; naturalists prefer to call the latter Porcupine Grass. A flower- ing head of Marram Grass Ammophila arenaria (not Australian) was covered with dangling stamens. General Meeting Monday 9 January 1978 The first meeting of the year is tradition- ally a members’ night and there were five contributions. FNCV Badge. With colour slides and drawings, Miss Madge Lester gave some- thing about the botany and history of the Club badge — Common Correa C.reflexa. Walkabout. Mr Garnet Johnson showed colour slides of various places, birds and flowers in Australia, Huon Pines were spoken about by Mrs Margaret Corrick. Dacrydium franklinii be- longs to a primitive group of conifers and is limited to a few areas in Tasmania's rain forests. Previously inaccessible regions are being opened up by the Electricity Commis- sion and Huon Pine is again being harvested in quantity. The timber is remarkably long- lasting and can remain in water for years yet still be sound. Slides showed cross sections of trunks and timber uses. Central Australia. Dr Brian Smith spoke of a recent Museum expedition to Central Australia following the route of the 1894 Horne expedition. Slides showed the interesting country along the way and some of its land snails. Norwegian fiords and mountains. Dr Alan Parkin showed movies of his recent trip in Norway. Exhibits included the larvae, pupa and eggs (under a microscope) of the Australian Admiral Butterfly Vanessa itea; the intro- January/February, 1978 duced nettle Urtica urens is grown as the food plant. A larva of the moth family An- thelidae was 6-7 cm long, about 1.5 cm diameter and very hairy; its cocoon alongside bristled with hairs which the larva pushed through when it pupated. And there were other caterpillars. Photographs showed a Coastal Banksia tree B.integrifolia at Beaumaris with a girth of 15ft 8in, and alarge Bull Mallee Eucalyp- tus behriana near Bacchus Marsh; people were asked if they knew of any other trees with exceptional girth. A bow! made of Huon Pine was giving off its characteristic aroma. FNCY Success Story! Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania”’ by N. A. Wakefield was first published by this Club in 1955. In 1975 it was revised and up-dated by Dr.J.H.Willis and 3500 were sold within nine months. Another 2100 were printed and have almost sold out. Perhaps this result is hardly suprising for the book is tremondous yalue at $3.25 (less to FNCV members). In June 1977 Council decided to print another 5000 with the addition of four pages on the cultivation of ferns. This 1977 edition has received further up-dating by Dr Willis and will be released for sale in 1978. The retail price has not yet been decided. Overhead Projector for Group Meetings Our Study Groups have been asking for an appliance that will project drawings or diagrams large enough to be seen by all members in a small area. Here it is: Standard overhead projector 213 is compact and easily used by the speaker. He faces his audience and draws on the trans- parent sheets that are about 25 cm square (10"). Or the drawings can be made be- forehand and projected when the speaker wants them. This will spare us many a scratchy or too-small-to-see effort on the blackboard. But the projector is a costly item (more than $300) that needs careful handling. Groups will be asked to designate one or two 37 projectionists and they will receive a dem- onstration and hints for use. It will be kept in our library under a plas- tic cover and Council has decided that it must not be removed from the Herbarium hall except by special permission. How it was paid for. The projector has been purchased with income from the W. C. Woollard Fund and the D. E. McInnes Fund. These funds were derived from the making and sale of the FNCV microscope during the 1960s. Members of the Microscopy Group had discussed the need for a low-power inex- pensive microscope, and in 1963 Mr Wool- lard devised the FNCV instrument. He, Mr McInnes and other members constructed more than 150 with the components neatly fitted in a hardwood case. They were sold to Club members at £12.15 ($25.50). Micro- scope tubes were also supplied without cases to handymen members who could make their own. FNCV microscopes — old or new. We are grateful to Dr Beadnell who has given one of the original FNCV microscopes to the Club, It is used at each General Meeting. Now that microscope tubes are again available (far better quality than previously) members could use the FNCV instrument as a model to build their own. These better tubes cost $24. See Dan McInnes about them. Open days at our Kinglake property In ‘*The Naturalist’’ of March/April 1976 and 1977, also in September/October 1977, we were enthusiastic about the Kinglake property and its possibilities for use by members. Now equipped with a toilet, bar- becue (not to be used on fire-ban days) and tank water, Council has decided that the first Sunday in each month shall be **Kinglake Day”’ and invites all members for a good day in the bush. New members and country members are especially welcome. Please wear name tags, sign the visitors book, and let the warden know you have arrived. You can sit and talk, follow the nature trail, go for a hike, do some odd jobs if you bring a rake or spade, or simply laze and enjoy the fresh air. If you wish to study in a serious fashion, go out with one of the groups. Unless requested, we do not propose to meet in June, July or August. Warden on duty for March, April and May will be Gar- net Johnson, phone 56 3227. May will be a good month for fungi in which the property is astonishingly rich. See map below for location. Gate at McMahons Road will be open at 10 am; drive in, keep left, and angle park. Vacancy on Kinglake Committee We need one or two active members with ideas and enthusiasm to help develop our Kinglake project. It is a valuable property and alert minds will find good ways to make the most of its possibilities. Please contact Tom Sault, Garnet Johnson or the President. HOW TO GET TO FNCV PROPERTY AT KINGLAKE Enter from McMahons Road Large Entrance Kinglake Hotel SS) 3s m ‘ y ‘or e YY, Cop End of bitumen approx. 1 mile 1.6 km. BbPUGasiny FNCV Subcriptions were due on Ist January Hf you have not already paid your subscription, please do so at the next General Meeting or post to Mr, F. Koth, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. The expense of sending out reminder notices is colossal. 38 Vict.Nat. Vol.95 (Continued from page 2) GROUP MEETINGS (All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment.) ees eee _ ee At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group 1 March; Members’ mineral night. 5 April: To be announced. Third Wednesday in the Month—Microscopy Group 15 February: Members’ exhibits and discussion of the year’s programme. 15 March: Microscopes—historical and modern. Demonstration of all types from the simplest to the most advanced. How to choose a microscope. 1-hour members’ exhibits. See the year’s programme of Microscopy talks on page 22. Second Thursday in the Month—Batany Group Each meeting includes a %-hour session for beginners—various subjects. 9 March: ‘‘Orchids’’. Mrs Margaret Dacy. 12 April: To be announced. At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne, at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area—enter from Latrobe Street. First Monday in the Month—Marine Biology & Entomology Group 6 March: ‘‘Crayfish or lobster?’’ Mr D. E. McInnes. 3 April: ‘‘Aquatic insects’’. Mr P. Genery. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown Street, Heidelberg, at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month—-Mammal Survey Group 2 March. 6 April. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. GEOLOGY GROUP Sunday, 12 March. Meet 10.00 a.m. at Loddon River Hotel, Bridgewater. Then travel to Mount Kooyoora granite pluton. BOTANY GROUP Saturday, 25 February. Dom Dom Saddle — Black Spur. Meet 9.30 a.m. at north side of Surrey Hills railway station. Saturday, 11 March-Monday, 13 March. Creswick with VFNCA. See page 2. Day Group—Third Thursday in the Month Thursday, 16 February. Parliament House. Meet at 11.30 a.m. at the pond in Treasury Gardens. Thursday, 16 March. Cliff-top walk to Beaumaris. Meet at Cheltenham railway station. Train leaves Flinders Street at 11.31 a.m. arriving atCheltenham 11.37. Cars will ferry members to the starting int. Thursday, 20 April. Train outing to Ferntree Gully National Park. Train leaves Flinders Street at 10.15 a.m., arriving 11.11. GROUP CAMPS—Mammal Survey Group 18-19 February. Wallaby Creek. 11-13 March. Gelliondale, near Yarram. Easter Camp, 24-27 March. Western Grampians. January/February, 1978 39 Field Naturalists Club of Victori Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E,, Q.C. Key Honorary Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Mrs. MARGARET CORRICK, 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, 3103. (857 9937.) Vice-President: Mr. DAVID M. LEE, 15 Springvale Road, Springvale, 3171. Secretary: Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Treasurer; Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427). Subscription-secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. D, KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087. (435 8664.) Librarian; Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra. Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161. (527 2749.) Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. (211 2427.) Archives Officer: Mr. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards St., Coburg, 3058. Tel. 36 0587. Group Secretaries Botany; Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986). Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127. (89 2850.) Field Survey: Mr. R. D. SANDELL, 39 Rubens Gve., Canterbury, 3126 (836 8009.) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, South Yarra, 3141. Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065. Microscopical; Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy St., East Brighton, (96 3268.) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and| other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. | Subscription rates for 1977 Metropolitan $10.00 Joint Metropolitan......,..... $12.50 Joint Retired Members aa A $10.00 Country Subscribers, and Retired Persons over 65 Pe ee $8.00 Joint Country ............ Se An a i tei , $10.00 ee Ah SPP Ras al ay TG RR Pog Bh, oe Te ete. $2.50 SDartipsions to Wit INGE 656s .0csfe bau Fe ba taal atte Rede cance Onn ae; OO meee Js Bare gen Omoe $8.00 VARESE SUMSCHUON ich sbi. eee m et. aclleie ols EAd. doetim, Es PRU Ae oe ae ian ae eles ene $10.00 SET elite Na ali 14 Oh ous, nah: +p thou e entet dsl to fe Recatier Bet | MEL aie OR a $8.00 Individual Magazines ©. 2. ite si dneko is 8 glace te anes! ast Mee Speen ie OhiL wen Une $1.20 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. @) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 10 April, 8.00 p.m. : ene Speaker: Dr Bill Birch, Curator of Minerals, National Museum of Victoria. Monday, 8 May, 8.00 p.m. Annual General Meeting Business: Minutes of 1977 Annual General Meeting. Receive Report of Council. Receive Balance Sheet and Statement of Receipts and Expenditure. Elect Council (President, Vice-President and 10 Council Members). Elect Office-bearers. Speaker; Mrs Margaret Corrick, FNCV President. Subject: Looking for Bush-peas. Monday, 12 June, 8.00 p.m. Speakers: Ms Alison Oates, Assistant Curator in Anthropology and Ms Annette Seeman, Educa- tion Officer, both from National Museum of Victoria. Subject: Plant foods of Victorian Aborigines. New Members — April General Meeting Ordinary: Miss F. B. South, 1/13 Tyndall Street, Surrey Hills, 3127, Miss Alva Brunning, 4/67 Wattle Valley Road, Canterbury, 3126. Brother J. C. Kissane, 2 Hutcheson Street, Moonee Ponds, 3039. Geology, Biology. Mrs D. Mills, 29 McConchie Avenue, East Kew, 3101. Mr U. B. Broadbent, P.O. Box 159, East Melbourne, 3002. Mrs M. M. Cragg, 36 Harrison Avenue, Burwood, 3125. Botany and Geology. Mr A. W. Thies, 25 Davies Street, East Malvern, 3145. Botany. Miss Irene Evans, 2/81 Alfred Street, Kew, 3101. Botany. Miss Kathy Dunk, 136 Holmes Road, Moonee Ponds, 3039. Botany. Miss E. Yule, 65 Yarrbat Avenue, Balwyn, 3103. Mr Chris Symons, 9/844 Lygon Street, Carlton, 3054. Botany. Mr M. F. Cooper, Dept of Geology, Melbourne University, Parkville, 3052. Mrs D. M. Rasche, Box 248, Preston, 3072. Joint: Miss Anne Sinclair and Mr I. Milton, C/- Post Office Hurstbridge, 3099. Flora and Fauna. Mr and Mrs G. J. Higgins, 13 Grace Court, Mont Albert, 3127. Country: Mr G. Patterson, 20 Annerley Avenue, Shepparton, 3630. Mr M. Wood, 35 Norwood Street, Herne Hill, 3218. Mr Stephen Donnellan, 122 Bundock Street, Coogee, N.S.W., 2034. Mr A. Wellington, 20 Holyman Street, Scullin, A.C.T., 2614. Mr T. J. Parker, C/- Nhill High School, Box 210 Nhill, 3418. Life Membership: Mr Ronald C. Kershaw, 45 West Tamar Road, Launceston, 7250. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 16 April. Leader: Mr Graham Love. The excursion will be through Beveridge, Strath Creek and Flowerdale and includes a visit to The Junction mine. Mr Love will outline the geology and history of the area. Coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.00. Bring one meal and a snack. Sunday, 21 May. Leader: Miss Madge Lester. Subject: Ferns and general. The excursion will be by train taking Puffing Billy to Lakeside. By present timetables the train leaves Flinders Street at 9,33 *a.n. to connect with Puffing Billy at 11 a.m., but it would be wise to confirm times when the winter timetables are issued, Bring one meal and a snack if desired. Sunday, 18 June. Yan Yean and Toorourong Reservoirs. Coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m., fare $5.00. Bring one meal. (Continued on page 83) 42 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 \ Or wicTC wr J CLF ITO The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 2 March/April, 1978 — Editor: Reuben D: Kent Editorial Committee: Barry A.Callanan, Margaret G.Corrick, Ian Hood, Margery J.Lester, Brian J. Smith, Paul Temple The Toadstool Genus Amanita by J. H. Willis ........................5. 44 New species of Amanita (fungi) from Australia by Derek A. Reid .... 47 Three pale-trunked Eucalypts of the Buffalo Plateau bye Mareen i MmlEeSten eaiter (5 ele stan. camaneniorny ei se hove teat 50 Distribution of Eucalyptus Chapmaniana (Bogong Gum) by P. Carolan 53 Aboriginal Material Culture, by A. M. Oates ........................... 54 Bush-peas-of Victoria, Dy: Me iGr Cormick! 20) ta 2) fate cere ene ds 56 Comments on the feeding of orphaned marsupials, by Michael Messer 61 Some Records for Battery Island, Tasmania, by John Whinray ........ 62 Alterations and additions to the Vascular flora of Victoria — Part 1, bys Ge ealvichOlen tench ii teimieder perenne te rt ee oF) Pedr te tees 67 Corrections to some of the information in “‘Koala, Australia’s native bear abyvels ober Mc CdOricle mae 8 clk eee Rec eM ese. Sieber Cree: 74 Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora, by James A. Baines 75 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria — IRepomeofeViceten ge. rtm et tag treme Tir re 2 otaiurss ye sort gene aey detent 76 IM ANGals ee POLtetOn gb Pr] aes aate Sart Ila Hay aro alae tothe eeccrsae Benge Tei Cover Illustration: Amanita pulchella, Healesville, Vic. (yellow, orange or salmon-red cap). Photo J. H. Willis. The Toadstool Genus Amanita BY J. H. WILLIS Ninety per cent (or more) of all deaths from fungal poisoning can be ascribed to two species of Amanita, viz. A. phalloides (‘‘Angel-of-death’’) and A. verna which secrete protoplasmic toxins. If eaten they cause severe gastroenteritis, with constant diarrhoea and vomiting that leave the victim dehydrated; at a later stage peripheral circu- lation fails and blood pressure drops to a critical level. Autopsies reveal extensive damage to the heart, liver and kidneys — at present the mortality rate from poisoning is more than 50%. Another group of Amanita species, e.g. A. muscaria (the well known orange-scarlet Fly Agaric) and brownish A. pantherina, have toxins that affect the central nervous system, inducing nausea, vomiting, headaches, muscular spasms, sweating, excessive salivation, respiratory difficulty, disturbed vision and sometimes violent hallucination; a patient may collapse and, should death occur, it is due to dam- aged heart muscles. On the other hand, some species are ex- cellent edible mushrooms (such as A. caesarea, A. rubescens and A. vaginata); but it requires expert knowledge to distin- guish these from their highly poisonous congeners. It is not surprising that world authority Rolf Singer should state in The Agaricales in Modern Taxonomy (1962): “Amanita has been monographed fre- quently and special attention has been paid to it by numerous mycologists and amateurs’’. R. J. Bandoni and A. F. Szezawinski, in their Guide to Common Mushrooms of British Columbia (1964), de- scribe the amanitas as ‘‘an extremely impor- tant group of mushrooms because of the number of poisonous forms included’’, while the late Elsie M. Wakefield in her Observer's Book of Common Fungi (1958 edition) says *‘The genus Amanita repre- 44 sents the highest degree of development in the gill-fungi.”’ But how does one recognize an amanita on sight? Here are the characteristics: ma- ture fruiting-bodies or sporophores have a cap that is easily detached from its stem, white (occasionally cream or pale greyish) gills which are free from the stem, and al- ways white spores; but an often occurring feature is a fleshy cup or volva ensheathing the stem-base, either loosely or tightly (sometimes in the form of two or three bracelet-like girdles). It is wise to avoid eating any toadstool that has a volva. Often, part of a veil-like membrane that originally covered the gill cavity remains on the stem Amanita vaginata Goonmirk Range, E, Vic. (mouse- grey cap) photo. J. H. Willis Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Amanita (aff. A. umbrinella) Lake Hattah, N.W. Vic. (pale smokey-brown cap). photo. J. H. Willis March/April, +978 45 as a short pendulous skirt or ring. Stems may be swollen and bulbous at the base, while, in most species, torn fragments of a universal veil (the volva being part of it) persist on the cap as pale and usually scat- tered patches or mealy warts. Such superfi- cial, rule-of-thumb tests for the genus as taste, smell, tarnishing effect on silver etc. are futile, if not misleading. Species of these fascinating fungi are to be found in many parts of all continents (excepting Antarctica), but south-eastern U.S.A. would seem to have the richest rep- resentation. Those occurring in Europe, North America, temperate South America and tropical Africa are currently the best known. E. J, Gilbert (of Paris), having studied numerous types, admitted 102 species by 1941. During the past 37 years, many more species of Amanita have been discovered, most of which still await formal description by botanists. In Victoria, for instance, there are published records of only 13 species (seven being mentioned in the F.N.C.V.’s Victorian Toadstools and Mushrooms, 1963); yet it is obvious that at least twice that number are present here. Most kinds inhabit the drier open eucalypt forests but some occur in closed rain forest, others in subalpine woodland, on coastal heaths or even sand-hills of the Mallee; a few introduced species, like A. muscaria, are invariably associated with man-made plantations (e.g. of pines, oaks, birches, etc.) It has been fortunate for Australia that Mr. Derek A. Reid (senior mycologist at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England) spent several months in 1976 collecting and studying our larger fungi, including amanitas. An immediate result of his re- search is the series of Latin diagnoses now presented in the Victorian Naturalist, as a necessary prelude to the full treatment of this genus in Australia. Nominations of FNCV Council Members and Office Bearers FNCV Annual General Meeting will be on Monday, 8 May, and nominations may be received up to that date. Nominations are required for Council members. Council consists of the President, Vice-President, Immediate Past-President, and ten other persons. The following offices are open for nomination: President, Vice-President, Secretary, Minute Secretary, Treasurer, Assistant Treasurer, Excursion Secretary, Librarian, Assistant Librarian, Editor. Such office-bearers might be members of Council or not. If you nominate a person for a par- ticular office and he would also like to be a Council member, you must make the addi- tional nomination of him as a Council member. Think now of the people you would like to see on our governing body, and ask them if they will accept nomination. FNCV Subscriptions Now Due The financial year begins on 1 January 1978 and members are asked to pay sub- scriptions promptly to Mr. F, J. Koth, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. 46 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 New species of Amanita (fungi) from Australia BY DEREK A. REID* In preparation for a forthcoming mono- graph of the Australian Amanita species it has been found necessary to publish descrip- tions} of 13 new taxa mostly based on col- lections made in Victoriat. In addition two new names are proposed viz. Amanita austro-pulchella Reid for A. pulchella (Cooke & Massee) Gilb. (1941) [non A. pulchella Imai (1937)] and A. austro- straminea Reid for A. straminea Cleland (1927) [non A. straminea Secr. (1833)]. It is intended to publish, elsewhere, full descriptions of all the Australian species of Amanita with a key for their identification. This monograph will include line drawings of the micro-characters and hopefully some coloured illustrations of the fruit-bodies. Amanita austro-pulchella Reid, nom, nov, Agaricus pulchellus Cooke & Massee inGrevillea 18: 1 (1889), Pl. 176 B. Amanitopsis pulchella (Cooke & Massee) Sacc. in Syll. Fung. 9: 2 (1891). Vaginata pulchella (Cooke & Massee) O. Kuntze in Rev. Gen, Plant 3(2): 539 (1898). Amanita pulchella (Cooke & Massee) Gilb. in Bre- sadola, [conog. Mycol. 27(2): 203 (1941) [nec A. pul- chella Imai 1933]. Amunita austro-straminea Reid, nom. nov. Amanita straminea Clel, inTrans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 51: 299 (1927) [nec A, straminea Secr, (1833)). Aspidella straminea (Clel.) Gilb, in Bresadola, Iconog. Mycol. 27(1): 79 (1940). Amanita dumosorum Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 6.5 cm diam., plano-convexus, pallide bubalinus sed siccitate pallide stramineus, reliquiis vol- vae albis pannum singulum usque 2 cm. latum efforman- tibus. Margo striatus, glaber. Stipes 6.5 cm. altus, 0.9 em. latus, cylindricus yel leviter clayatus. Annulus inconspicuus, membranaceus, angustus, supra striatus. Volva nulla. Lamellae albidae. Sporae amyloideae, +These descriptions in Latin are to fulfil the requirements of the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature for new Taxa. EType specimens of all these new taxa have been lodged for reference in the collections of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England. *Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England. March/April, 1978 7.0-8.75 x 6.0-7.75 jcm, latissime ellipticae vel ovatae, Basidia usque 46 x 10 jm, clavata, quadrispora, sine fibulis. Cheilocystidia clavata, ovata vel subglobosa, usque 35 ym alta, et 18 wm lata, saepe breviter catenulata, Reliquiae volvae pilei ex hyphis hyalinis, 4-18 «wm latis et sine fibulis omnino efformatae. Habitat: in open scrubby area, Two Peoples Bay, 27 km E.N.E. of Albany, Western Australia, coll. D.A. & D.G. Reid, R. Hilton & N. Brittan, 12 May 1976 (Typus]. Amanita epregia Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 10-20 cm. diam., convexus dein plano- convexus Vel ad centrum leviter depressus, nudus, vis- cidus, juventute albus, maturitate pallide brunneus sed marginem striatum versus cremeus; siccitate stramineo- coloratus. Stipes 12.5-20.0 em altus, 0.9-2.3 cm latus, basin versus leviter dilatatus, albus, fibrillosus vel fur- furaceus. Annulus amplus, pendulus, membranaceus. Volva ampla, saccata, Lamellae albae. Sporae nonamyloideae, 9-12 x 8-10 44m, subglobosae vel latis- sime ellipticae. Basidia 32-45 x 10-12 wm, clavata, quadrispora, quoque basidio fibula basali instructo. Cheilocystidia subglobosa, usque 24 jim lata. Structura volvae ad basin stipitis ex hyphis sine fibulis omnino efformata. Habitat: in lines in open eucalypt forest, possibly the remains of a huge “‘fairy-ring’’, Moggill, Queensland, coll. J.B.C, Aberdeen (No. 161), 4 Feb. 1954 [Typus). Amanita gossypino-annulata Reid, sp. noy, Pileus 2.2-4.0 cm diam., convexus dein plano- convexus, pallide hinnuleus, reliquiis volvae tenuibus albis coactis pannum singulum usque 6 mm latum ef- formantibus, demum nudus; margo laevis. Stipes circiter 3 cm altus, 0.5 cm latus, albus, cylindricus sed basi abrupte marginate bulbosus et hic usque 1.2 cm latus. Annulus bene evolutus, crassus, gossypinus, Volva nulla. Lamellae albae. Sporae amyloideae, 7.0-10.0 x 6,2-9.0 um, globosae vel ovatae, raro latissime ellip- ticae. Basidia usque 59.4 x 11,0 wm, quadrispora, saepe fibulata. Hyphae subhymenii saepe fibulatae, Cheilocys- tidia saepe breviter catenulata, segmento ultimo sphaeropedunculato vel ovato, usque 20 ym lato. Re- liquiae volvae in pileo (1) ex hyphis, 2-5 zm latis, hyalinis, muris tenuibus, saepe incrustatis et interdum fibulatis (2) ex cellulis ellipticis, ovatis vel globosis usque 30 jz2m diam. irregulariter disposilis sistatae. Habitat: Lilly Pilly Gully, Tidal River, Wilson’s Promontory, Victoria, coll. D.A. & D.G. Reid, 2 May 1976 [Typus]. Amanita griselloides Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 6 cm diam,, plano-convexus, argenteo- griseus, reliquiis volvae tenuibus coacto-fibrillosis, griseis obtectus, his insuper pannis arachnoideis albis partim obtectis. Margo pilei laevis, glaber, Pileus in siccitate fusco-griseo-brunneus, Stipes usque 7 cm al- tus, 1.0 cm latus, albidus, basi leviter clavata et hic usque 1.4 cm lata. Annulus nullus. Volva nulla, Lamel- lae albae. Sporae amyloideae, 8.2-12.5 x 6.0-7.0 (-8.5) jum, ellipticae. Cheilocystidia non visa. Reliquiae 47 volvue in pileo ex (1) strato griseo coacto-fibrilloso e cellulis subglobosis ovatis vel clavatis, usque 90 x 65 jam, succo repletis et hyphis, 2-8 y latts, hyalints, ramosis, sine fibulis et muris tenuibys irregulariter in- termintis (2) strato superficiali albo arachnoideo ex hyphis hyalinis ramosis prostratis efformatae Habitat: 2 km north of Bow River on Highway |, near Walpole, Western Australia, coll, DA. & D.G. Reid, R. Hilton and N, Brittan, 13 May 1976 [Typus). Amanita griseo-conia Reid, sp. nov, Pileus usque 95 em dium, primo valde conyexus, hinnuleus, verrucis prominentibus chalybeis conicis un- iformiter dispersis; dein uplanatus, verrucis collaben- tibus vel dilabentibus sed squamis fuscis minutis innatis relictis; squamae sub lente tenuiter pulverulentae. Margo pilei appendiculatus, Stipes usque 11.5 cm_ longus, 2.2 em fats, cylindricus, albus, bulbo basal fusiformi immurginato, superficies dense et minute flocculento- squamata. Annulus nullus, Volva nulla, vel zonam in- conspicuuam verrucarum formans. Lamellae albae. Caro alba. Sporae amyloideae, globosae. subglobosae vel ovatae, 7.75-11,0x6.75-9.0 xm, Basidia 35,0-50,0 x 9.0-12.5 4am, quadrispora, basi fibulata, Cheilocys- tidia clavata vel sphueropedunculata, usque 20 jam lata, bus! saepe fibulata) Verrucae conicue in pileo ex cellulis abundantibus, globosis subglobosis vel clavatis pro parte maxima formatae; sed hyphae rariores hyalinae, fibulatae, muris tenuibus intermixtae. Maculae pul- verulentae in pileo e cellulis globosis vel oyatis ommino formatae, Habitat: Lilly Pilly Gully, Tidal River, Wilson's Promontory, Victoria, coll. D.A. & D.G, Reid, 2 May 1976 [Typus] Amanita griseo-velata Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 4,5-5.5 cm diam., applanatus ad marginem laevis dein in centro leviter depressus, ardesiaco-griseus sed puniceo-tinctus, vel ad discum fere niger, superficie polita vel leviter viscida sed reliquiis volvae pallido- griseis et coactato-prurnosis oblecta, Reliquiae volvae in centro pilei magis distinctae et hic in pannos tenues irregulares disruptue, sed peripheriam versus floccos minutos pruinosos (sub lente minute arachnoideos) ef- formantae, Pileus senectute saepe glabriusculus, Stipes usque 6 ¢m altus, basi 1.0 cm Jatus, aequalis vel apicem versus leviter angustatus, et bast breviter radicans, albus; superficie in zonas minutas fractiflexas diffracta. An- nulus vix cohaerens, fugax nivi similis. Volva nulla, Lamellae albae. Caro alba. Sporae amyloideue, 7.0-10,0 (-11.5) 4 6.75-8.5 (-10.5) am, subglobosae, ovatae vel fere triangulatae, saepe aspectu truncatue propter apiculum conspicuum eft nonamyloideum, Basidia 34-47 x 10-12 xm, quadrispora, basi sine fibula, Cheilocys- tdia ovata, usque 2] 4m diam, Structura reliquiarum volyae pileiex (1) hyphis, 4-5 ym diam,, hyalinis, sep- tatis, ramosis, muris tenulbus et sine fibulis (2) cellulis elongatis varie inflatis usque 112 x 45 wm, (3) sphaerocystis usque 92 jzm diam., vel ferminaliter in ramis brevibus lateralibus vel in catenis brevibus produe- fis. Habitat: Fernshaw Reserve, Victoria, coll, DA Reid, 29 May 1976 [Typus}. Amanita hiltonii Reid, sp. nov. Sporophora brevia, sed robusta, juventute farinose- floccosa. Pileus usque 6 cm diam., demum plano- conyexus, cremeo-albus vel argenteus, reliquiis volyae ulbis gossypino-floccosis (saepe contrum versus ver- rucas indistinetas efformantibus) omnino obtectus. Stipes usque 5 cm altus, 2 cm latus, albus, basi leviter Clavata et radicanti. Annulus distinctus, membranaceus 48 sed angustus, Volva nulla, Lamellae albidae, in sicco et in senectute pallide luteae, Odor nucum, Sporae amyloideae, 7-0-9.5 (-10.0) x 4.75-6,.2 um, anguste ellipticae. Basidia 48-55 x 7-10 4m, quadrispora, quoque basidio fibula basali instructo. Cheilocystidia clavata, usque 12 yom lata, saepe infra apicem constricta et late stipitata, Stratum farinoso-floccosum pilei ex cel- lulis globosis, ovatis et clavatis (usque 40 42m latis) sistens cum hyphis insuper, 2-4 2m latis, hyalinis, ramosis, varie inflatis, fibulatis, muris tenuibus, irregu- lariter dispositis et in proportione aequali intermixtis. Habitat; Dale Forest, Brookton Highway, Perth, Western Australia, coll, D.A, & D.G. Reid & N. Brit- tan, 9 May 1976 [Typus]. Amanita luteolo-velata Reid, sp. nov. Pileus usque 5 cm diam., primo valde convexus, dein applanatus, pallide griseo-brunneus, strato contextus volvae pallido-luteolo tenui coactato-pulverulento om- nino obtectus; in centro pilet stratum squamas indis- tinctas arachnoideas formans, Pileus exsiccatus brunneo-griseus, impolitus, strato coactato, tenui, con- colori (non luteolo-tincto) fere uniformiter vestitus; squamis minus distinctis. Stipes usque 4 em altus, 1 em latus, sed basi clavatus et abrupte acutus, hic usque 1.5 cm latus, supra annulum albus sed inferne cremeo- luteolus, Annulus membranaceus, bene formatus, pa- tens, pendulus, leviter striatus, infra cremeo-luteolus, Volva nulla, Lamellae albae, Caro alba, Sporae amyloideae, ellipticae, late ellipticue vel ovatae, 70-9 2 x 5.0-7.0 xm. Busidia 40-45 x 8-12 am, quadrispora, basi sine fibula. Cheilocystidia breviler catenata; seg- mento ultimo sphacropedunculato vel ovate, usque 20 xm lato. Stratum coactato-pulverulentum, in pileo pro maxima parte ex sphaerocystis vel cellulis avatis formatum, vel terminaliter in ramis brevibus lateralibus, vel terminaliter in catenis breyibus segmentorum hyphorum; egam ex hyphis frequentibus hyalinis ramosis muris tenuibus et sine fibulis formatum. Habitat: Darby Saddle, Wilson's Promontory, Vie- toria, coll. D.A,, D.G. & P.M. Reid 8 July 1976 [Typus]. Amanita ochrophylloides, Reid, sp. nov. Pileus usque 15,0 cm diam,, convexus dein plano- convexus, tandem ad centrum leviter depressus, pallido-brunneus, verrucis strobiliformibus numerosis obsitus; margo pilei juventute reliquiis veli conspicue appendiculatus. Stipes usque 10 cm altus, usque 2.6 em Jatus, sed basin versus conspicue bulbosus et hic usque 4.5 cm latus, albus sed varie brunneo-discoloratus. An- nulus distinctus, albidtis, seneetute aliquando fugax, Volva ad apicem bulbi stipitis limbum brevem liberum efformans. Lamellae pallide aureae, usque 1.3 cm altae. Odor dilute farinaceus. Sporae amyloideae, 7.0-9.0 x 6.5-8.5 wm (in cumulo), subglobosae Vel ovatue. Basidia usque 75.9 zm longa, usque 13.2 yom lata, quadrispora, plerumque sine fibulis. Cheilocystidia bre- Vier Catenata; segmento ultimo clayato, ovato vel sub- globoso et usque 18 jam lato, Structura verrucarum pilei ex stratis duobus sistens (1) stratum superficiale tenuis simum praecipae ex hyphis saepe ramosis, hyulinis, varie inflatis usque 14 jm latis, muris tenuibus et sine fibulis, ramis angustissimis, 2 jam Jatis, angulo 90° suepe eXortis; (2) stratum magis profundum ex (4) hyphis abundantibus, usque 5S jm latis, vitreis, intricate ramosis et (b) cellulis abundantibus brevibus, clavatis, ellipticis, ovatis vel doliiformibus usque 60 2m longis, et usque 25 j2m latis, Habitat: on rocky black soil, amongst bracken and under Eucalyptus sp. [of peppermint group], on B.B. Jordan Divide Track, between Roberts and the Jordan Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 River, South-East of Matlock, Gippsland, Victoria, 850m alt., coll. LM. Green, 26 March 1977 [Typus]. Amanita pagetodes Reid, sp, nov. Pileus usque 7 cm diam., convexus dein plano- convexus, sordide albidus, reliquiis volvae tenuibus pulverulentis vel subfloccosis pallidis vel bubalino- coloratis obtectus. Margo pilei laevis, reliquiis albis annuli conspicue appendiculatus, Stipes usque 9 cm al- tus, 1.5 cm latus, basi bulbosa immarginata et hic usque 3.0 cm lata, albidus, apicem versus floccis conspicuis albidis vel pallido-bubalinis ornatus. Annulus fugacis- simus, Volva nulla, Lamellae albae vel cremeae. Caro alba. Sporae amyloideae, 7.5-10.2 x 7.2-8.75 (-10.0) pm, subglobosae ovatae vel late ellipticae, apiculo conspicuo et nonamyloideo instructae. Basidia clavata, usque 75.9 x 15.4 wm, quadrispora, quoque basidio fibula basali instructo. Cheilocystidia clavata vel ovata usque 19 zm lata, saepe breviter catenulata. Stratum farinaceum pilei ex cellulis globosis ovatis clavatis vel ellipticis et irregulariter dispositis, usque 70 x 60 jum, pro parte majore formatum, cum hyphis spar- sis, hyalinis, ramosis, muris tenuibus intermixtis. Habitat: Dom Dom Saddle, Healesville, Victoria, coll. D.A. Reid, 29 May 1976 [Typus]. Amanita peltigera Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 5.5 cmdiam,, plano-convexus, in vivo griseus Sed superficie (nisi marginem laevem glabrum versus) reliquits albis peltatis volyae obtectus, in sicco superficie bubalino-coloratus. Stipes usque 5 cm altus, 1 cm latus, basi bulbosa leviter radicanti et hic usque 2.3 cm lata et volva libera alba vaginata. Annulus nullus, Sporae amyloideae (6,5-) 7.5-9.0 x (6.0-) 7.0-7.5 (-8.5) wm subglobosae, ovatae vel latissime ellipticae. Basidia 30-37 x 9-10 um, clavata, sine fibulis. Reliquiae volvae in pileo praecipue ex hyphis intertextis, 3-12 um latis, hyalinis, ramosis, saepe varie inflatis sistatae, muris hypharum tenuibus sed distinctis, et sine fibulis, cum cellulis quoque sparsissimis globosis yel ovatis, usque 110 x 90 «wm intermixtis. Habitat; Stirling West, Western Australia, coll. J. Randals, March 1976 [Typus]. Amanita pyramidifera Reid, sp. nov. Pileus 2-3 cm diam., plano-conyexus, griseo- bubalinus, verrucis conspicuissimis, acute conicis vel pyramidalibus, usque 5 mm altis instructus. Margo pilei laevis, glaber. Stipes 3.5-6,5 cm altus, 0.6 cm latus, basi bulbosa immarginata et hic usque 1.0 cm latus, infra annulum minute floccoso-lepidotus, Annulus dis- tinctus sed male evolutus, gossypinus, albus. Volva nulla. Lamellae albae. Sporae amyloideae, 8.0-13.5 x 7.0-9.0 wm, obovatae vel ellipticae. Basidia clavata, 58-70 x 11-13 jm, bi-vel quadrispora, quoque basidio fibula basali instructo. Cheilocystidia ovata vel clavata, usque 19 wm lata, saepe breviter catenulata. Verrucae pilei praecipue ex cellulis globosis vel ovatis et irregular- iter dispositis, usque 47 jum latis sistentes, cum hyphis Sparsis hyalinis ramosis muris tenuibus intermixtis. Habitat: Eildon, Victoria, coll, D.A. Reid & G. Beaton, June 1976 [Typus]. Amanita rosea Reid, sp. nov. Pileus usque 6.6cm diam., convexus dein applanatus, centro leviter depressus, cremeus sed mar- ginem versus roseus et maculis intensius roseiis dispersis praesertim peripheriam versus ornatus. Margo laevis, nonunquam reliquiis volvae appendiculatus. Stipes usque 8,5 cm altus, 1.3 cm latus, albus, dimidio in- feriore minute luteo-punctatus, sed apicem versus roseo-punctatus; annulus nullus; volva bulbosa, flavida, margine breviter libero ornata. Lamellae cremeae. Caro alba. Sporae (9,5-) 10.2-14.0 (-15.0) x (5.5-) 6.0-6.6 (-7.75) «zm, amyloideae, cylindricae, Basidia usque 53.0 x 14.5 yom, quadrispora, sine fibulis. Cheilocys- lidia breviter catenata, segmento ultimo clavato vel ovato usque 16 jm lato. Reliquiae volvae in pileo ex hyphis abundantibus, hyalinis, ramosis, muris tenuibus, et sine fibulis sistentes; hyphae saepe inflatae et ex seg- mentis catenularum formatae, segmento ultimo clavato, ovato vel globoso, Habitat: Darby Saddle, Wilson’s Promontory, Vic- toria, coll. D.A., D.G. & P.M. Reid, 8 July 1976 {Typus]. Press Release National Parks Victoria — New Colour Brochure An attractive colour brochure describing the 40 areas in Victoria managed by the National Parks Service has just been released. Produced jointly by the National Parks Service and the Ministry of Tourism, the brochure gives details of the location, features and facilities of these 40 parks. It explains how to get to them, and suggests possible activities. Five years ago Victoria had 25 areas managed by the National Parks Service, national parks such as Wilsons Promontory and Mount Buffalo. The increase since has been partly the result of Land Conservation Council recommendations, while several areas have been donated to the State through the Victorian Conservation Trust. March/April, 1978 The new parks described in the brochure — such as Melba Gully in the Otways, Seawinds and Nepean State Park on the Mornington Peninsula, Discovery Bay Coastal Park and Holey Plains State Park — will be unfamiliar to many people. The brochure is the first comprehensive guide to all these new areas, although the National Parks Service is at Present producing separate leaflets for each park, as well as nature-trail guides and bird and plant lists. The new brochure is available free at Victorian Government Tourist Bureaus, or from the Na- tional Parks Service head office, district offices and parks. 49 Three pale-trunked Eucalypts of the Buffalo Plateau BY MARGERY J. LESTER* The casual observer tends to assume that the pale-trunked eucalypts about the Chalet at Buffalo are all Snow Gums. Actually there are three different species — Snow Gum Eucalyptus pauciflora, Mountain Gum E.dalrympleana and Buffalo Sallee E.mitchelliana. The last is endemic to the plateau. Judging by the trunks there is little to distinguish between them, The smooth bark comes off in strips and patches leaving areas of varied colour. The young of all three species often forms mallee-like clumps of slender trunks, but all three species can grow into substantial trees. To distinguish one from the other it is necessary to look at the leaves, buds and fruits (seed capsules). Leaves of the three species The leaves of Snow Gum are of moderate length 8-12cm (3°’-5’’) and vary considera- bly in width. Whatever the leaf width, the veins tend to run down the length of the leaf and the midrib is often no more evident than the other longitudinal veins. Leaves of Mountain Gum might be any- thing from 8-20cm long (3’’-8’’) but are not as variable in width as those of Snow Gum. The central vein is very conspicuous and side veins branch off from it at an angle of about 45°. Sometimes an intra-marginal vein can be seen. Leaves of Buffalo Sallee are 8-12cm long and much narrower than those of the other two species. The midrib is very comspicu- ous and is often the only veining that can be seen with the naked eye. Sometimes an intra-marginal vein can be discerned and sloping cross veins (at about 35°) linking it with the midrib. The leaves are dark green rather than bluish-green and glisten in the *4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra 50 sunlight. In January-February 1978 the leaf stalks of Buffalo Sallee and stems extending some 50-60cm back (2ft.) were almost scarlet, but that marked colour is probably of seasonal occurrence. es Buffalo Sallee E.mitchelliana ALL HALF SIZE Mountain Gum £ dalrympleana, Simplified drawings of an average leaf of the three species, all half size. These drawings emphasise the main features to look for, but an intra-marginal vein is sometimes noticeable in Mountain Gum and occasion- ally in Buffalo Sallee. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 track beyond the Pulpit Rock turn-off. There are only these four eucalypt species at Buffalo, but as one descends from the plateau other species enter such as Candlebarks, and still further down Pep- permints and Manna Gums. Note concerning Mountain Gum A doubt exists about the identification of Mountain Gum. Leaves, juvenile foliage, buds and fruits are pretty well identical with those of Candlebark E.rubida. It is said that Mountain Gum comes in and Candlebark cuts out at about 1400 metres (4500ft) so the plateau is at an elevation where both species could occur. However, most forestry people consider they are probably all Mountain Gum at Buffalo; identification in the field cannot be certain and would require labora- tory examination. Acknowledgement I am grateful for permission to examine specimens at the National Herbarium, Mel- bourne. REFERENCES Costermans, L. F. (1977), Trees of Victoria. Willis, J. H. (1972). Handbook to Plants of Victoria, Vol. 2. Melbourne University Press. A Black Snake swallowing a Brown Snake A few days ago when walking through long grass, I came across what appeared to be a snake partly three-quarter black and quarter brown. After the initial reaction of rapid reverse I realized that it was a black snake swallowing a brown. I gave it a couple of pokes (not strikes) with a stick and after the second it disgorged the brown and took off. The brown snake under- standably had his neck out of joint a little at this intrusion on his Sunday, but curiously he was very much alive. Since he was 4ft long and had been consumed to about Ift I guessed that the Process took possibly an hour. Why did he not suffocate? Secondly, how did the black get him into posi- tion to swallow? I didn’t/couldn’t measure the black but he must have been Sft long and therefore the brown was not far off his own size although thinner in the body and considerably smaller in the head. It is unlikely that black measured brown before selecting him for dinner and possibly, I suggest, that his eyes were toVict.Nat. Vol, 95 big for his stomach, i.e. he may have been able in ingest, say, 3ft 8in with the last 4in sticking out, presumably leaving him wide open for Kookaburra attack unless he could find a safe retreat for 1-2 weeks (another guess). Blyth Ritchie, Mountain Creek, N.S.W. Letter-Winged Kites in South Gippsland 23/5/77. A friend rang usin some excitement to tell us that a party of Letter-winged Kites had appeared at Tarwin Lower. We immediately paid them a visit and found nine birds roosting in coastal manna gum woodland behind the beach 52 dunes. They were easily approached and looked fluffy and torpid, taking flight reluctantly to dis- play the letter pattern beneath the wings. They have been in the district at least a month. ELLEN Lynpon, Leongatha Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 IN WN E. datrympleana NN Buds and fruits The buds of Snow Gum are clustered on a stalk 6-12mm long (4-%’’), 8-12 buds per cluster, each bud with a swelling towards the outer end and coming to a blunt apex. The fruits are more or less spherical or pear-shaped up to a centimetre across. Buds of Mountain Gum occur in threes on a 6-12mm stalk that is slightly flattened. The spherical fruits have protruding valves. Buds of Buffalo Sallee are clustered on an almost imperceptible stalk, 7-12 buds to each cluster. Each bud has only a slight swelling and comes to a sharp point so that the cluster looks like a ball of spikes. Fruits are small 5-7mm across, Because they are so much more bulky than the slender buds, the fruits completely hide the tiny stalk to the cluster and often the leaf seems to be growing out from the fruits rather than from the stem! Summary of main identifying features The active observer is likely to find the three species can be readily distinguished if the following features are kept in mind: the almost parallel-veining of Snow Gum March/April, 1978 Ww iN Simplified drawings of buds E.mitchelliana and fruits, all natural size. NS leaves; the three-bud or three-fruit clusters of Mountain Gum; the shiny narrow leaves and spiky bud clusters of Buffalo Sallee. If in doubt, examine other characteristics. All three species are abundant close to the Chalet, almost equally distributed along the roadway but, behind the Chalet, Buffalo Sallee is predominant. Occurring only on the plateau, this species is certainly not rare and there is almost a pure stand of Buffalo Sallee at the Monolith. Not a young gum The abundant, loosely open shrub with the bluish leaves is not a young gum but a wattle — Hickory Wattle Acacia ob- liquinervia. The main vein of the leaf (phyl- lode) is markedly off-centre. A fourth eucalypt on the plateau Another eucalypt that is plentiful at Buf- falo is Alpine Ash or Woollybutt E.de- legatensis. It has rough fibrous bark that continues far up the trunk so cannot be con- fused with the three gum-barked species, Pure stands of Alpine Ash can be seen along the track to Lake Catani and along the Gorge 51 Distribution of Eucalyptus Chapmaniana (Bogong Gum) BY Pat CAROLAN* Eucalyptus chapmaniana was first de- scribed in the Victorian Naturalist in 1947!, when the localities given were: ‘‘Pretty Val- ley Road 2-3 miles above Bogong township, scattered East Kiewa Valley, 7 miles south of Eskdale, Buffalo Road %4 mile above Mackey’s Lookout,’’ Johnson? adds Khan- coban area, N.S.W. (Byles), Mt. St. Ber- nard (Maiden) and Wentworth River (How- itt). Recently C. Beulehole collected speci- mens from Echo Point near Tali Karng and north of Grimmes Saddle about 22 km SW of Mt. Howitt. This note is to record the existence of E.chapmaniana as a common tree in the Woods Point-Gaffneys Creek area, thus considerably extending its range. At Gaffneys Creek it grows from lowest slopes to top of ridge between Raspberry and Gaffney’s Creeks (altitude from about 600-800m) on west side of settlement. Up- ward extent on east side is not known. Soils on these steep hillsides are usually thin over shales and sandstone of Lower Devonian age. At Woods Point, where the situation is similar except that drainage, by the Goul- burn River, is towards the south-east, *1/92 Were St., Brighton, 3186, E.chapmaniana has been collected on hill- side above police station and along Matlock Road about 2 km from Woods Point. One minor point worth recording is that some trees have inflorescence of more than three in umbel. This has also been noticed in trees on Big Hill above Mt. Beauty. There are no signs of hybridism in any trees examined. The vegetation of this area must have been modified considerably by over a cen- tury of mining activities and bush fire devas- tation. However, it is still an interesting area to study variation with elevation and aspect, e.g. E.viminalis bordering the creeks, E.radiata on lower slopes, E.regnans on sheltered south-facing slope, E.delegaten- sis above about 1000m with some E. dal- rympleana, and E. pauciflora on high ridges. There is a surprising patch of almost pure E. rubida forest on the BB Spur just west of Matlock at an altitude of about 1200m, E.chapmaniana occurs at lower al- titudes than most of other reported occurr- ences of this species but the valleys are frost hollows with low minimum temperatures. I wish to thank Dr. J. H. Willis for exa- mining specimens. 1, Vic.Nat. 64, 54, 1947. 2. L. A. S. Johnston, Studies in the Taxonomy of Eucalyptus, Cont. N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 3, 3, 1962. Survey of Geological Features of the National Estate in Victoria The Geological Conservation Subcommittee of the Geological Society of Australia (Victorian Division) is conducting a survey of geological features of the National Estate in Victoria, under a grant from the Australian Heritage Commis- sion. The Subcommittee believes that areas and Sites of special geological interest are worthy of permanent protection for all or any of the follow- ing purposes: (a) to ensure representation of geological fea- tures relevant to the teaching of geology at all educational levels March/April, 1978 (b) to preserve geological features which are unique or scientifically important to Australia or parts of Australia (c) to preserve geological features which are of aesthetic, educational or recreational value to the general public, People interested in helping this project by submitting listings and documentation of sites of geological interest (especially of endangered areas) should contact Lyal Harris in Room 301, School of Earth Sciences at the University of Melbourne, Parkville 3052, or by telephone on 341 7217. 53 Aboriginal Material Culture No. | Victorian Wooden Water Vessels BY A. M. OATES* The Australian Aborigines, who prac- tised a semi-nomadic hunter/gatherer life- style, were able to maintain a delicate balance with their environment. They were able to move freely and relatively unencum- bered in their food-quest because they re- stricted their tool-kit to a few functional and, in some cases, multi-purpose artifacts. Containers used for food and water varied throughout Australia and included baskets, bags, trays and troughs made from a variety of raw materials such as bark, wood, skin, shell and fibre. Water containers made from excres- cences or gnarls on eucalypts were distri- buted throughout the eastern third of Aus- tralia, ranging from Cape York Peninsula in the north to the Western District of Victoria in the south (Davidson, 1937). The Wurundjeri Aboriginal tribe, who inhabited the Melbourne area, called this type of ves- sel a tarnuk (Fig.1). Tarnuks were also made from naturally bent tree limbs. The interior of the vessel was gouged out and then smoothed with stone tools until the sides were quite thin. As it was light in weight (the tarnuk in Fig.1 weighs only 0.5 kg) it could conveniently be carried over long distances by means of an attached cord of vegetable or animal fibre. The tarnuk drawn in Fig.1 is one of four from Victoria in the National Museum of Victoria ethnographic collections. It was made from the gnarl of a tree and suspended by a length of animal tissue, possibly a por- tion of the small intestines of a kangaroo or emu. An interesting non-traditional feature of this particular tarnuk is a human face carved on the base. * Assistant Curator In Anthropology, National Museum of Victoria An unusual form of the tarnuk acquired by the National Museum of Victoria in 1891 is the tarnuk bullito or tarnuk bullarto (Fig.2, see also Smyth, 1878, Vol. 1, p. 347, fig. 163) said to have been made by the ““Yarra’’ Aboriginal tribe. This vessel was also modified from a gnarl! of a eucalypt but unlike the tarnuk proper, is heavy, weigh- ing nearly 7 kg. Fire was used initially to hollow out the gnarl and burn marks are still clearly visible on the interior of the container. To increase its capacity, most of the burnt wood was gouged out, using steel tools. The tarnuk bullito was too heavy to carry and it was customary for Aborigines to leave them at their various camping places. Apart from its use as a water vessel, the Aborigines used the tarnuk bullito to make a beverage termed bool or beal. The nectar-bearing cones of Banksia species and the blossoms of some eucalypts were pounded in the container with water to pro- duce the sweet beverage. A similar method of procuring a sweet drink from Grevillea flowers is practised by inland Australian tribes using a shallow, wooden vessel. Fig. 2, Wooden vessel called tarnuk bullito or tarnuk bullarto by Victorian Aborigifies, (Length: 50 cm). National Museum of Victoria collection, No. X1350. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Legend: Fig. 1. Wooden vessel called tarnuk by Victorian Aborigines. (Length: 20 cm). National Museum of Victoria collection, No. X1527. Acknowledgements: Lam grateful to J. Cook and D. Stephens, National Museum of Victoria, for supplying the drawings. References Davidson, D. S, (1937). Transport and Receptacles in Australia, Journal of the Polynesian Society, Vol. 46, No. 4: 175-205, Smyth, R. Brough. (1878). The Aborigines of Victoria. Vol. 1, pp. 346-8. Melbourne. Albury-Wodonga Field Naturalists’ Club — affiliated with F.N.C.V. At an extraordinary General Meeting of F.N.C.¥. on 14th November, 1977 Albury- Wodonga was elected an affiliated club. Meet- ings are held in the Centre for Continuing Educa- tion, High Street, Wodonga, on the first Friday of alternate months commencing in February. Ex- cursions are held on the fourth Sunday of every month except December and January, with some additional Saturday trips during the Spring months. President for 1978 is Mr, R. Coghill of Wodonga and Secretary is Mrs. E. Davies, 346 Parkland Drive, Lavington, N.S.W. Corrections In the article *‘Two new species of frogs’’ by D.S. Liem and G.J. Ingram (Vict. Nat. Vol. 94, Dec., 1977) the following is a list of corrections:— Page 22: Title Line 2 read Pelodryadidae Line 5 read Ingram Left column Line 2 read deserticola Page 256. Heading Fig. 1. read Ranidella.deserticola. Page 257: Left column Line 38 read tinnula. March/April, 1978 Page 258: Right column: Line 1 read latin not lating Line 9 read (DSL 5276-80). Page 261: Left column Line 27 read expanded Line 37 read metacarpal Line 48 read ventro-marginal Page 262: Right column Line 18 read Moreton Island 55 Fig.11. a-g, P. juniperina; a, habit, b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; c, ovary and style; e, leaf and stipules; all from MEL 516833; f, pod; g, seed; from MEL 520601. h-m, P.. juniperina var. mucronata; h, habit; i, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; j, ovary and style; k, leaf and stipule, all from MEL 515364; I, pod; m, seed, from MEL 35174. March/April, 1978 57 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 9 By M. G. CoRRICK Pultenaea juniperina Labill, in Noy. Holl. Plant Specimen 1: 102; t. 130 (1806). Like the previous species, Pultenaea juniperina is found in fairly sheltered, often moist places, mainly in hills and mountain areas, but it is more widespread in Victoria than P. muelleri and extends further west to the Grampians and Otways. An isolated oc- currence near Portland is believed to have been introduced (A.C. Beauglehole pers. comm. August 1977). It also occurs in New South Wales & Tasmania. Pultenaea juniperina var. juniperina is an open, rather straggly shrub up to 2 m high. The alternate, glabrous, lanceolate leaves are 5-10 mm long with incurved mar- gins; the mid-vein is prominent on the un- derside and oftens forms a keel. The leaf tapers into a strong, pungent point and the whole plant is very prickly to handle. The stipules are 2-3 mm long, lanceolate, closely appressed to the stem and have a distinct mid-rib. The flowers, on pedicels 2-3 mm long, are solitary in the leaf axils and often close together towards the tips of the branches. They are generally large, the standard may be as much as 10 mm in height and width. It is a bright yellow-orange with red-brown markings in the throat; the wings are yellow-orange and the keel red-brown. The calyx is slightly hairy with acute, =~, A I \ j AoeBarq su, “ aeisq _qunos0y juawaaoidwy qn[D a pun. Azeiqiy] Pung uoIsinoxy Japuet[y eueA “"""*" puny uoOrsindxy pun, vonroi[qnd puny Surpping s]UNOIIY WW spuny jeieds pury ul sjueig Ainsrary puey ut quese isndy weisuy “Y "W nee eae siopaig Aipung gourape ut pred suondiosqns iqery juaainy SALLITIAVIT ‘jlounoD asannsaxq ay) JO Joquiaw Aue 0} qn{D oy) Aq pred duam syuawNjourY ON °Z “QN[D 2) 0} S2dIAIAS ITAY) JO joadsar ul s1oypNy ay) Aq Poatadal aia SHJaUIq 194yI0 ON “ATU SadAsas SuNIpny O} saejar ‘OOTY JO UONRIOUNWIAY ,sIONpNY ~] “sSaloK Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 80 9SL‘19$ 1Z8'T LIVSI 119° 007‘ Sz sIo}Ipeig Alpung ssa7 178‘ I$ 178 yueg ye yseo Opus “iste ee 103 1 spuog SBUIAeS JUSWUIIZAOH uel[elsny ca yueg ZNV — 301g usodeq puny uoIsindxq Spoil So ya Me ae JOUpeg Arpung ssa7T yueg 3 ysep 919 s10}qoq Aipuns ice ath ate al ssuouspueg oy) Jo sprig OL gue ven bee pote totems cmd oe ay eg tm 90m ond aero dw KIO} -UOWOIg $,UOS[IAA SIOMOTJPTEM UO ee ita erueUse | pue BIIOINIA jo sulay — ]sog 18 Syo01g yoog eles. oe ee 1803 18 spuog SSUIARS JUSWIUIOAOH uRITeNSNYy puny suonesiyqnd 117 yueg ye yse) Gita Ger coca ee pers a 1809) je soinjueqaq — ‘pi] epuesy Mee wate ae \so7 18 spuog SSUIARS JUOWUIOAODH uPITesny puny surpping ee a ysodag — Ae100g Bul -pling jJuouevulieg yeninjy [PUOTeN COD, Se soinjusqeq ‘py] epuesy 00s somusqed “Ma WW ohn eng eee Teh spuog sSulareg JUSUIUIOAOH uBITRNSsNYy C07 Ss$ 9672‘ S$ SEEl 1€9°9$ SIS‘€ OII‘e$ ores SI SIE‘EI$ L8S CHL Ive (G7 £08 719°6 6380'S OSL‘ 19$ pres eee con sae seak 304 snjding ‘ puny preyfoomM “DM puny souupsyl “A “Gd — juoudinbg jo sseyo -ind JO} spunJj Woy siaysuery, puny sWsAOIdWY] qn{D WoI Jaysuely, LL/T/1 3 soueleg qunoddy snjdaing junosoy yoefoig aye[sury pun, uoryepay] AroystH [enjeN puny diysroquisy 231 T S07 SS$" 1 foe) March/April, 1978 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BUILDING FUND Amount of Fund at 31 December 1976 tg SPECEE ING iad his tae dAd ers vssoxy «4228 Interest on Investments and Bank Account . 4 ; : et, i 385 Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977 searuhe tievhiees, SeAUOtEe PUBLICATIONS FUND Amount of Fund at 31 December 1976 . ; ' ... $13,300 Interest on Investment and Bank Account SY ates Lies 4 978 Surplus (Loss) for the year from — Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania s $806 Wild Flowers of Wilson's Promontory National Park pears Fe 26 Birds of the Dandenongs wre + 839 Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977 adie Behe laen CLUB IMPROVEMENT ACCOUNT Amount of Account at 31 December 1976 ..... rate ey. $2,554 Booksales Account Profit RRA at) COs a oe 4 142) 4,275 Less - Purchase Library Books and Equipment transferred to Surplus Account .......... 219 Amount of Account at 31 December 1977 ..................... A eG eee $4,056 EXCURSION FUND Amount of Fund at 31 December 1976 ..... CRE em ee Less - Transfer to Marie Allender Excursion Fund ........... 2 es 1 aa Beco i, ae 4,000 1,296 Add — Interest Received on lnvestrment ...0.% F.0d. oa.1. deen ce eae ts $424 Surplus on Tours ; ; * bie Terie tried elates 101 525 Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977 . beara eee ee ae $1,821 Statement by the Members of the Executive Council In the opinion of the members of the Executive Council of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA, the accompanying Balance Sheet is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Club as at 31 December 1977, and the accompanying Statement of Income and Expenditure is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the surplus of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1977. Signed in accordance with a resolution of the Executive Council on 4th April 1978. M. Corrick, President. D. E. McInnes, Treasurer. Statement by the Principal Accounting Officer I, Daniel E. McInnes, being the officer in charge of the preparation of the accompanying accounts of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA for the year ended 31 December 1977 state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, such accounts give a true and fair view of the matters required by Section 162 of the Companies Act 1961, to be dealt with in the accounts. Signed at Melbourne on the 4th day of April 1978. D. E. McInnes. 82 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 (Continued from page 42) Queensland in July. Would members be interested in an excursion to Queensland for two weeks in July? The plan is to go by air and spend most of the time in the Whitsunday area with a few days at the Eungella National Park. Accommodation would mainly be room only with cruises and tours extra. Cost would vary with type of accommodation, but air fare and accommodation with cooking facilities and restaurants nearby would probably be from $350 to $430, but cheaper if anyone wished to camp with camping equipment supplied. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment. At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month — Geology Group Wednesday, 3 May. Informal discussion led by Mr Lyal Harris (Melbourne University) on “Geologically significant sites around Melbourne’. Wednesday, 7 June. ‘‘Limestone caves of Victoria’. Mr Lloyd Mills (Speleology Association). Wednesday, 5 July. ‘‘Aboriginal culture of Australia’’. Dr Gallus. Third Wednesday in the Month — Microscopy Group Wednesday, 19 April. Various methods of illuminating objects to see the most detail — top lighting, bright field, dark ground, Rheinberg illumination. 4-hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 17 May. Simple methods of mounting dry objects for microscope examination — insect parts, mineral sands, seeds, forams, textiles, small shells, etc. %4-hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 21 June. How to prepare and mount objects in Canada balsam, glycerine jelly, Euparal and other mountants. 4-hour members’ exhibits. Second Thursday in the Month — Botany Group Thursday, 13 April. Four short talks. Thursday, 11 May. ‘‘Introduction to Fungi’’. Mr Bruce Fuhrer. At the Conference Room, National Museum at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area — enter from Latrobe Street. First Monday in the Month — Entomology and Marine Biology Group Monday, | May. ‘‘Food plants of insects’’. Mr Peter Carwardine. Monday, 5 June. ‘‘Use of Drosophila melanogaster in genetics’’. Mr Peter Kelly. Monday, 3 July. “‘Dragonflies and damsel flies’’, Mr Urwin Bates. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown Street, Heidelberg, at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month — Mammal Survey Group Thursday, 4 May, 1 June, 6 July. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCYV members are invited to attend Group excursions. GEOLOGY GROUP Geology excursions to be announced at Group meetings. BOTANY GROUP Saturaay, 22 May. *‘Seaweeds’’. Leader Mrs Dora Sinkora. Area to be announced. Saturday, 3 June. “‘Fungi’’. Leader Mr Bruce Fuhrer. FNCV Kinglake property. Day Group — Third Thursday in the Month Thursday, 20 April: Train Outing to Ferntree Gully National Park. Train to Upper Ferntree Gully Railway Station leaves Flinders Street at 10.15 a.m. arriving 11.16 a.m. Thursday, 18 May: Williamstown. Train leaves Flinders Street at 11.13 a.m. arrives Williamstown 11.40 a.m. Meet at station; then walk to Shelley Beach. : Thursday, 15 June: Weather Bureau. Meet at Carlton Gardens, near corner of Latrobe and Spring Streets at 11.30 a.m. for lunch after which we cross to the Commonwealth Centre to meet our Guide at 1.25 p.m. Once again the number is limited, so please contact the Secretary before the due date. Weekend Camps of Mammal Survey Group 22-23 April. Strathbogie Ranges. 10-12 June. Gelliondale (near Yarram). 20-21 May. Cathedral Ranges. 83 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists, Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E., Q.c Key Honorary Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Mrs. MARGARET CORRICK, 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, 3103. (857 9937.) Vice-President: Mr. DAVID M. LEE, 15 Springvale Road. Springvale, 317! Secretary: Mr. G. JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227). Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427). Subscription-secretary: Mr. F. J, KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. D, KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087. (435 8664.) Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra. Excursion Secretary. Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161. (527 2749.) Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. (211 2427.) Archives Officer: Mr. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards St., Coburg, 3058. Tel. 36 0587. Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986). Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street. Mont Albert, 3127. (89 2850.) Field Survey: Mr. R. D. SANDELL, 39 Rubens Gve., Canterbury, 3126 (836 8009.) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, South ‘Yarra, 3141. Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065. Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy St., East Brighton. (96 3268.) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1977 MGNTODCHAAN = 8d Fis vged- Sew rove. 100.) TRSU Eons gap tote nees ose vais: eb don Coleen h-Der rane it $10.00 SATE ADO CRONIES Sc etasltac sae cose Vee cio Vane tp ae: casehenssaperhereed? Re 2.4 $12.50 SHOU PAGHEEES NAEIIOGE S252. Ss tao) charg acapiget> asda ewie sia « aie Winks sMaidy « Lsisae Meio ® Sek ees $10.00 Country Members, Subscribers and Retired Persons . ers soles sas eel ne $8.00 Joint Country $10.00 ct SO aes scene | $2.50 Subscriptions to Vict. Nat. $8.00 Overseas Subscription . . . nan x 1. 4 pace at $10.00 Junior with “Naturalist” ..... : estas $8.00 WUNUMEIIMOORTINOE. 5. oo 5. cay ck gery ope ahenge stat event a¥ peeey $1.20 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Category “‘B’’ Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical. FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra. Monday, 12 June, 8.00 p.m. Speakers: Ms Alison Oates, Assistant Curator in Anthropology and Ms Annette Seeman, Educa- tion Officer, both from National Museum of Victoria. Subject: Plant foods of Victorian Aborigines. Monday, 10 July, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Mr J. Blyth, Survey Officer. National Museum of Victoria. Subject! Aquatic Invertebrate Surveys — Aims and Methods. Monday, 14 August, 8.00 p.m. Speaker; Dr P. J. Keame. Lecturer in Botany, La Trobe University. Subject: Fungi in the Environment. New Members — June General Meeting Ordinary Miss Helen Bartossewicz, 23 Henry Street, Kensington, 3031 Mr R. Barker, The Ridgeway, Mt Evelyn, 3796 Mr Peter Bascomb, 51 Park Drive, Parkville, 3052 Mrs B. Dry, 20 Charles Street, Kew, 3101 Mrs M, Evans, 60 Fromer Street, Moorabbin, 3189 Mr Donald McG. Ewart, 2 Wattle Valley Road, Canterbury, 3126 Mr J. Gardner, 7 Illawarra Crescent, North Dandenong, 3173. Mr D. Hansch, 38 Sandells Road, Tecoma, 3160 Mrs G. Lumetzbererger, 16 Tiverton Drive, Mulgrave, 3170. Mrs Joy Martin, 19 Shakespeare Street, North Carlton, 3054. Mr Peter Mathews, 31A Howard Street, Glen Iris, 3146 (Botany & Mammals) C. S. Proctor, 24 Darling Street, Oakleigh, 3166. Mr A. J. Singe, 160 Railway Parade, Noble Park, 3174. Mrs D. Swinburne, 32 Eulings Avenue, Aspendale, 3195 Joint Members: Mr Phillip Smith & Mrs Pat Smith, 8 Munro Street, Ringwood, 3134. Life Membership: Mrs Ellen Lyndon, P.O. Box 80, Leongatha, 3953 FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 18 June. Yan Yean and Toorourrong Reservoirs. Coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.00. Bring one meal. Sunday, 16 July. Annual Boneseed Pulling Day at Studley Park. We have concentrated on small areas each year and the results to date are very encouraging so come along and give a hand. Tom Sault is the leader, Meet at the second picnic area along the Boulevard, just past Molesworth Street and Opposite the Kew Psychiatric Hospital at 10,00 a.m, Look for the FNC V sign, Members can join in later if unable to be there at 10.00. Those going by bus will be met at 10.00 a.m. and 11,00 a.m, at bus stop No. 28, Studley Park Road. Saturday, 22 July-Saturday, 5 August—Queensland. The plane leaves at 7.00 a.m. Saturday for Proserpine from whence the party will travel by road to Airlie Beach where accommodation has been booked on a room only basis for the fortnight. Airlie Beach is near Shute Harbour where cruises leave daily for islands in the Whitsunday Group and also near the Conway National Park, On Sunday, 30 July the party will leave for a three night stay at Eungella National Park with full board. On the return to Airlie Beach there will be an overnight stop at Mackay, dinner, bed and breakfast and a visit to Cape Hillsborough National Park. The cost will be $500.00 plus meals and any cruises taken from Airlie Beach, Caravan accommodation is $40.00 cheaper. Prices based on 30 members going and twin share accommodation at Airlie Beach, multishare at Eungella. The full amount less deposit already paid should reach the excursion secretary by the General Meeting on 12 June if possible, otherwise by the Friday of that week as the Tourist Bureau requires the payment well in advance of the trip. Sunday, 20 August. Cranbourne. Details in next Naturalist. (Continued on page 123) 86 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 3 Editorial Committee: Barry A.Callanan, cia eC , lan Hood, Margery J.Lester, Brian J. Smith, Paul oie Aboriginal Material Culture No. 2 by A. L. West................5. 88 Bush=peas. of VictonasbyeMl. .G. (Comick ie S78. Se sche fe. Bd os 92 Geology of the Pilot Range, Beechworth, Victoria by lan D. Buckingham and Meantland: SrahGs Wins Pe CPR ah macys oe Lape TREN ood iteoni nur Gee fils 95 Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by James A. Baines .. 104 Introduction to: foram inifera by K. Ni Belli. ow oe ee 105 A note on the pouch life of rock wallabies by P. E. Hornsby ........ 108 Reply from Elizabeth Turner by Elizabeth K. Turner ............... 111 Field Naturalist Trip to Mt. Buffalo by Joan Forster................ 112 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria — Report of Meetings............ 120 Cover Illustration: Veteran of Mt Buffalo. Photo by Mrs Zillah Lee Aboriginal Material Culture No. 2 on Spearthrowers and Paddle Steamers By A, L. WEST* For thousands of years spearthrowers have been a part of man’s tool kit, their function being to provide increased lever- age, speed and accuracy in the discharge of spears. In Europe, mainly in southern France, in the area between the Dordogne and the Pyrenees, Upper Palaeolithic specimens made of reindeer antler have been found. Many of these spearthrowers, dating to about 14,000 years ago, are beauti- fully carved in the form of birds, fish and other animals such as ibex, bison and rein- deer (Leroi-Gourhan, 1968). Spearthrowers or woomeras, a word which apparently came into Australian usage as a result of early settler contact with coastal Aborigines in New South Wales (McCarthy, 1946), are well-known Austra- lian artefacts. They were made principally from wood and because no specimens have yet been found in the archaeological record we have no definite knowledge of their an- tiquity. There is however general agreement amongst scholars that because of its continent-wide distribution the spear- thrower has been in use here for a very long time. Spearthrower forms varied considerably throughout Australia. Aborigines in Vic- toria and neighbouring areas of South Aus- tralia and New South Wales fashioned an impressive type of slender spearthrower with the point carved out of the solid wood! (Figs. 1 and 2). A fine spearthrower (X 1825) of this type, from Victoria, came into the collections of the National Museum of Victoria in 1891. It previously belonged to a Miss I. De Beer, a member of a Melbourne family whose busi- *Curator of Anthropology National Museum of Victoria 88 Fig. 1. Two views of Victorian spearthrower (X1825) with cross section. ness interests included ship broking. The register entry, much of which cannot be taken at face value, is as follows: Spearthrower, ‘‘Kurruk’’ of Cypress Pine (Callitris verrucosa). For propel- ling small reed spears. Ornamented on both sides. Victoria. Microscopic examination of the speci- men? indicates that it was made from a hardwood Belar (Casuarina cristata) and Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 \ “{ Plate 1. Part of the incised decoration on spearthrower (X1825), showing the profiles of stern-wheel paddle steamers. Approx. % size. (Photo: A. M. Oates). May/June, 1978 not from a Callitris sp. The original mis- taken identification possibly arose from a consideration of the lightness of the artefact, a fact which superficially would appear to be more consistent with a soft wood than a hard wood. Its weight of 143 gm is well below the mean of 194 gm for the 41 Vic- torian spearthrowers in the collections. It is also important to note that reed spears were not the only kind thrown by means of spearthrowers, in Victoria, and that the name kurruk was probably used only by the Wurundjeri tribe which occupied the Yarra River area (Smyth, 1878), Evidence suggests that this particular artefact did not originate in southern Victoria (see below) and therefore the use of the term kurruk is inappropriate. The surface of the spearthrower is smooth and polished apparently from long use by its owner(s). It is thus likely that it was made many years before it was acquired by the Museum. It is 66.3 cm long and at its widest point is 4.3 cm wide and 1.3 cm thick. The upper surface (the surface adjacent to the spear) is flat, the lower one is convex and the handle cylindrical. It is decorated on all surfaces principally with banded and trian- gular areas of fine cross hatching and on the flat surface there appear, as well, the incised profiles of six stern-wheel paddle steamers (Plate 1). The incised designs have all been accentuated by a dark infill of pigment, pos- sibly ground charcoal mixed with what ap- pears to be a fatty substance, Casuarina cristata, the wood from which the spearthrower is made, has a predomin- antly Mallee distribution in Victoria (Wil- lis, 1972). This fact, together with the inclu- sion of stern-wheel paddle steamers in the decorations, strongly suggests that the ar- tefact was made by a member of one of the Murray River tribes in north-western Vic- toria.* But these paddle steamers are also par- ticularly interesting for two other reasons. Firstly the vessels depicted are not the common type of side-wheeler but the rather rare stern-wheeler. Only 15 of about 200 paddle steamers which operated on the Murray/Darling Rivers throughout the his- 89 Fig. 3. The Lady Daly, a stern-wheel paddle steamer which operated on the Murray River System from 1862 to 1893 or 1894 Fig. 2. Diagram showing the use of a spearthrower (After Brough Smyth), tory of the trade were stern-wheelers and two of these came into operation after this spearthrower was acquired by the Museum (Parsons & Tolley, 1967 and Fig. 3). Sec- ondly, the paddle steamers are unique as a Victorian style of decoration on spear- throwers. No other spearthrower, from Vic- toria, in the Museum has representations of man-made objects as part of its decoration. 90 Indeed, only nine others have incised line decorations representing plants, humans, and other animal forms. The majority, 31 out of 41, are either undecorated or show some kind of a wide range of geometric patterning. These facts suggest that or- namentation of Victorian spearthrowers with non-geometric forms resulted from European influences. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 The craftsman who produced this spear- thrower was conservative enough to make a finely balanced and functional artefact in the traditional style even though he must have been living in a bewildering world of rapid change. Yet he was also innovative enough to decorate his spearthrower in a non- traditional way. For a person venturing into a new mode of aesthetic expression he achieved a superb result. He has also pro- vided an unusual glimpse into an exciting and fascinating period of Murray River his- tory. NOTES ' There are four south-eastern Australian spearthrowers in the collections of the National Museum of Victoria which have detachable bone points bound and cemented to the wooden shaft. Three are from Victoria (X1818, X1820, X27912) and one from southern N.S.W. (X1819). Brough Smyth, 1878, 1, p. 309, Figs. 91, 92 has illustrations of two south-eastern spearthrowers with detachable points but he states that they are teeth. According to Smyth it was the habit of Aborigines to fit new points to damaged spearthrowers, that is to those whose wooden points, carved from the solid, had broken off. * Mr. W. A. Clifford, Forest Products Officer, Forests Commission of Victoria and Mr. J. Ilic, of the C.S.1.R.0. Division of Building Research provided this identification and I am grateful for their help. * Paddle steamers were used in other parts of Victoria, the first one being the Firefly which commenced a ferry service from Port Melbourne to Williamstown as early as 1838 but it is clear from the records compiled by Parsons and Tolley (1967, passim) that stern-wheelers operated only on the Murray River system, REFERENCES Leroi-Gourhan, A., 1968. The Art of Prehistoric Manin Western Europe. p. 473, Figs. 196-207. London, Thames and Hudson. McCarthy, F. D., 1946. New South Wales Aboriginal Place Names and Euphonious Words, with their Meanings. p. 31, Sydney. The Government Printer. Parson, R. H. & Tolley, J.C., 1967, Paddle Steamers of Australasia. p. 174. Lobethal §.A. R.H. Parsons. Smyth, R. Brough, 1878. The Aborigines of Victoria. 1, p. 309. Melbourne, Victorian Government Printer. Willis, J. H. 1972. A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. 2, p. 20, Melbourne, Melbourne University Press. VORG Conference, 21-23 July, 1978 Techniques of Research in Ornithology The Victorian Ornithological Research Group is holding a Conference in Melbourne over the weekend of 21-23 July, 1978, entitled Techniques of Research in Ornithology. The Conference is open to anyone interested, and further information and registration forms are av- ailable from VORG Conference Secretariat, P.O. Box 203, South Melbourne, Victoria, 3205. As numbers are inevitably limited, registrations will be accepted in order of application. Speakers and topics already arranged at the time of going to press are:— Mr. Claude Austin, Nest Finding. Mr. Peter Balmford, Ornithology and the Law. Professor J. M. Cullen and Mr, David Paton, Setting up Research Projects. Mr. Howard Jarman, Principles of Bird Identifi- cation. Mr. Allan McEyey, The Ornithological Collec- tions of the National Museums of Victoria. Dr. G. F. Van Tets, Bird Behaviour. In addition, a panel consisting of Ms. Margaret Blakers, Mr. Mare Gottsch, Mr. Len Jackson and Ms. Pauline Reilly will answer questions on the Auas of Australian Birds, bird photography, re- May/June, 1978 cording bird calls, and bird banding; there will be an excursion to the La Trobe University Wild Life Area, led by Dr. Richard Zann of the School of Biological Sciences of that University; a series of short talks on current activity in ornithological research is being arranged; and it is hoped to hold an exhibition of works by wildlife artists on the Friday evening in conjunction with Conference registration. The programme has been designed to cover an extensive range of research techniques; the speakers bring together a variety of ornithological skills and experiences; the excursion will keep before the participants the importance of the liv- ing bird; and the exhibition will remind them of the aesthetic delights which are for many of us an integral part of our involvement in ornithology. Registration fee of $25 includes coffee on Fri- day evening, lunches, all morning and afternoon teas and bus fare on the excursion. We hope that as many people as possible will attend and contribute to the Conference. ROSEMARY BALMFORD, for the VORG Committee. 91 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 10 By M. G. CorRICK Pultenaea foliolosa A. Cunn, ex Benth. in Ann, Wien. Mus. Naturg. 2:83 (1840). Pultenaea foliolosa is an uncommon Species in Victoria and apparently confined to two small areas in the eastern half of the State, one in the north-east between the Warby Range, Wodonga and Beechworth, and the other in Gippsland north of Maffra between the Macalister and Mitchell Rivers. {It also occurs in New South Wales and Queensland. It favours dry situations in open forest, often on stony granite hillsides. P. foliolosa is a soft, spreading, some- times rather straggly shrub, 1-2 m high. The stems are terete, pubescent and rather pale. The tiny, alternate, elliptic or almost orbicu- lar leaves are 1-3 mm long and 1-2 mm wide. The upper surface is usually pubes- cent and concave with involute margins. The lower surface is darker in colour with spreading hairs and often wrinkled when dry. The mid-vein is inconspicuous. The slender, lanceolate stipules are 1-2 mm long, light to dark brown and stand : ees N Zz > A, il SA Oey © | MEN ~_K dy T ee VAY B G Y csi | p j + * ‘SY & Fig. 13b. Known distribution of P. procumbens. 92 well away from the stem. The flowers are axillary, bright orange with a rich purple-brown keel. The standard is broad, 7-8 mm high and 8 mm wide, with faint dark markings. The wings are usually orange. The pubescent or villous calyx is 4-5 mm long with very broad, obtuse, oblique- tipped upper lobes. The lower lobes are acute and much narrower. The three-lobed bracteoles are attached at about the centre of the calyx tube. The centre lobe of the brac- teole is green and leaf-like with spreading hairs. The two light brown, setaceous outer lobes resemble stipules. There are no floral bracts. The ovary is glabrous except for a tuft of hairs at the base of the long, slender style. Flowering time in Victoria is from mid- October to mid-November. The pod is plump and hidden by the calyx which ap- pears to enlarge as the fruit matures. The slender, curled style persists for some time on young fruit. The distribution of this species as shown on the accompanying map does not include Grid S. Although recorded as occurring in this grid by Willis (1972) and Churchill and de Corona (1972) no supporting collections have been located in the National Her- barium, Melbourne. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: 8,8 km NNW Myrtleford, A.C. Beauglehole 43774 ,7.xii.1973 (MEL 519876); Between Eldorado & Woolshed near Reedy Creek, M.G. Corrick 5978, 29,.x.1978 (MEL 524876); Upper Murray R.,C. French Jnr., 1886 (MEL 519868); Near Killawarra, 7.B. Muir 1694, 1 xi, 1960 (MEL 35142); Warby Ranges, Miss D. Nason, 18.ix. 1960 (MEL 519874); Freestone Creek between Briagalong and Cobbanah, Mrs. C.N. Southwell, Nov. 1960. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 13, a-g, Pultenaea foliolosa; a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteoles drawn a little larger; c, style; e, leaf and stipules, all drawn from MEL 35142, h-o, P. procumbens; h, habit; i, calyx and bracteoles, bracteoles drawn a little larger; j, style; k, leaf and stipules from MEL 522258; 1, pod, enclosed in enlarged calyx; m, seed; n, leaf form lacking pungent point from Beechworth, MEL 527203; o, narrow leaf form with long pungent point from Pine Mt. MEL 522249. May/June, 1978 93 Pultenaea procumbens A. Cunn, in Field Geogr. Mem. N.S.W. 346 (1825). Pultenaea procumbens has a similar dis- tribution in Victoria to P. foliolosa, al- though slightly more widespread and plenti- ful. Recent collections have extended its known range to Grids W and Z in Gipps- land. It is also found in New South Wales. It favours dry situations with sandy or stony soil generally of granitic origin. P. procumbens is usually a rounded, rather procumbent shrub, less than 1 m high, although an erect, much taller form occurs in the Reef Hills near Benalla. The leaves are lanceolate, rhomboidal or occa- sionally linear, 4-10 mm long and 1-4 mm wide, tapering into a long, pungent point and strongly recurved. The leaf margins are incurved and both surfaces are sparsely vill- ous with hairs somewhat thicker at the edges. The pale brown, lanceolate stipules are 3-4 mm long, tapering to a slender point and with a conspicuous mid-rib. The axillary flowers are bright orange with a brick red keel. The broad standard is 9 mm high and 11 mm wide and is slightly marked with red lines in the throat. The calyx is 7-8 mm long with rather sparse hairs which are thicker at the edges of the lobes. The upper lobes are broad with ob- lique tips and slender points. The lower lobes are acute with long slender points. The bracteoles are three-lobed, attached just above the centre of the calyx tube and reach about half-way up the calyx lobes. There are no floral bracts. The ovary is glabrous except for a tuft of long white hairs at its summit; the long, slender style is also glabrous. The mature pod is held well within the calyx, with the style forming a brittle curl at the tip, which makes the fruit rather similar in appearance to that of P. foliolosa. Flow- ering time in Victoria is from mid-October to mid-November. A form of P. procumbens which occurs in the Beechworth hills has leaves which lack the pungent point. Willis (266:1972) com- ments that this plant shows a transition to- wards P. foliolosa which occurs in the same area. The two species appear closely re- lated, having similar bracteoles and ovary, and the possibility of hybridization cannot be overlooked. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: 4 km NNW Chiltern, A.C. Beauglehole 43632, 25.x1.1973 (MEL 527203); Jingallala R. area, A.C. Beauglehole 35774, 4.1.1971 (MEL 522248); Warrenbayne State Forest, S of Benalla, 7.8. Muir 3601, 30.x.1964 (MEL 522258); Beside Old Coach Road near Mt. Pilot, M.G. Corrick 5980, 29.x.1977 (MEL 524875); SW slopes of Pine Mt., J.H. Willis, 17.xi.1964 (MEL 522249). Natural History Medallion Fund Amount invested March 31 Mrs Ellen Lyndon Clarence Valley Field Naturalists Club **Anpair’’ Anglesea Aireys Inlet Australian Society Society for Growing Australian Plants Melb. (2nd donation) ...........0..0..005 Mr Je Ro Wheelers ina: ho aoetts Line eed Total 5.00 $656.00 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Geology of the Pilot Range, Beechworth, Victoria BY LAN D. BUCKINGHAM* AND MARTLAND S. JOSHI* Abstract The Pilot Range batholith is a heterogeneous body emplaced in the epizone by the mechanisms of large scale piecemeal stoping and cauldron subsidance, followed by small scale stoping. The batholith was fairly crystalline during emplacement; hence the host Upper Or- dovician sediments show contact metamorphism to a limited extent. The orig- inal adamellite magma has undergone dif- ferentiation and potash enrichment giving risé to granitic and aplitic variations. The adamellite intrusion was followed by gra- nites and lastly the aplites. The late stage granitic fluids are present as dykes occupy- ing the cracks in the cooling magma. The ‘granites’ show post kinematic features (Post Benambran orogeny). Cassiterite mineralization is the main feature of the Pilot Range Granites, being restricted mainly to the greisened portion of the batholith. Introduction This report encompasses the study of ap- proximately 40 sq.km. represented on the Beechworth, Victoria, 1:50,000 toposheets 8225-111. Field mapping was carried out during May and September 1972 and April 1973 (I.D.B.) on aerial photographs: Wan- garatta 1:50,000, Run 3, photographs 98, 99 and 100 and toposheet 8225-111. The township of Beechworth ts located approximately 276 road kilometres from Melbourne and 35 road kilometres east of Wangaratta. The area under study is approx- imately 40 sq.km., with the township of Beechworth located in the southern section (PI.1). *Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology May/June, 1978 Over 70 rock specimens were collected on a grid system for petrographic study. Also over 200 measurements of attitudes such as strike and dip of bedding planes and joint planes were recorded against their grid references, using compass and clinometer. Geological Setting and Age of the Pilot Range Granite The Pilot Range Granite is intrusive into sediments of (?) Upper Ordovician age and is overlain in parts by tillites of the Lower Permian age. The regional NNE-SSW strike of the Or- dovician sediments along the central part of the Lachlan Geosyncline (Cochrane 1971), was first developed during the Benambran orogeny (epi-Ordovician). A potassium-argon age determination of a granite sample from the Beechworth area yielded an age of 365 million years (Ever- den & Richards 1962). However, as the rock was weathered they were doubtful of the accuracy of the result and tentatively correlated the rock with the older granites of the Bowning orogeny. Although they have not found the exact age, they have proved that the granite cannot possibly be younger than Upper Devonian. Skeats (1931) considered the Pilot Range Granite to be of a Lower Devonian age be- cause of its tin bearing nature, and hence its possible relationship with the tin-bearing acid granite dykes and veins of Mitta Mitta and Bethanga, which are part of the main metamorphic belt. In his discussions on the Victorian Goldfields Mineral Province including the Pilot Range Granites, Hills (1965) includes tin with the metals that were introduced dur- ing the Cerberean Epoch of ore deposition during epi-Upper Devonian time. 95 The Pilot Range Granite shows post Kinematic features. Briefly, these features are that the most abundant potash feldspar is an extremely perthitic orthoclase, micro- cline is well cross hatched, a very high fluorine content and tin which generally oc- curs in post kinematic granites (Marmo 1971). Therefore by definition and characteristic mineral assemblages, it would seem that the Pilot Range Granite is post-Bowning orogeny, and therefore an age of 365 million years as determined by Evernden & Richards could be correct. Location and Extent of the Area Physiography The major topographic features of the dis- trict are the Pilot Range to the north-west of the township of Beechworth and the Woor- ragee Range to the east. The Pilot Range is comprised mostly of granite and rises to a maximum elevation of 540 metres at Mount Pilot. The Woorragee Range is made up of Ordovician sediments. It extends southward from Woorragee and gradually rises to over 900 metres, the highest point being Mount Stanley — 1008.3 metres above sea level, 16 kilometres south-east of Beechworth. The area is dissected by numerous streams which are controlled by local struc- ture, of which Reedy Creek forms a major unit. Reedy Creek is formed by the confluence of the Woorragee and Spring Creeks and flows in a westerly direction. Most of the streams in the Pilot Range run through steep v-shaped valleys indicating them to be still in the youthful stage. How- ever, Dunn (1913) considers them to be of mature age. They are accompanied by nar- row alluvial flats. Vegetation The granite area is largely reserved as State Forest, with a few patches cleared for sheep and cattle grazing. The predominant variety of vegetation over the area is gener- ally the Murray Pine, or, as referred to in some states, the Native Pine. This tree is known to grow in very acid soils, which 96 ” BEECHWORTH DISTRICT Recent aiueral tere QUARTEMNARY In the map opposite, Beechworth is at bottom centre, indicated as a built-up area. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 fae \+ i* \ 7 \ + + C A YO Ta ser May/June, 1978 would account for its occurrence over the entire area. One striking point about the tree is that although it grows all over the area, it has a tendency to grow thicker over quartz por- phyry, quartz-feldspar porphyry and aplite dykes, in which case marked lineations can be picked up from the aerial photographs. History The Beechworth area was one of the largest producers of gold and has yielded the major part of tin ore produced in Victoria. A number of lodes have been prospected in the area, but practically all the tin has come from alluvial workings along Reedy Creek and its numerous tributaries. In the 1850s, rich shallow alluvial gold was discovered on Spring Creek just north of the present township of Beechworth (Reid 1905). A gold rush soon developed and, in the following years, mining ex- tended rapidly upstream on Spring Creek and downstream along Reedy Creek. Exploitation of the gold-tin deposits oc- curred in several distinct phases. The ear- liest mining was carried out by small groups of miners by means of shafts, tunnels or ground sluicing. Their workings covered many miles of recent alluvial flats as well as Pliocene-Pleistocene alluvial terraces. Many small sluicing companies were formed, and often the same rich ground was worked profitably several times. Where Reedy Creek emerges from the western side of the ranges near Eldorado, the depth of alluvium rapidly increases from 20 metres to 60 metres. A new phase of mining developed in this area, with a number of public companies sinking rela- tively deep shafts and using powerful pumps for de-watering (Dickers Mining Record 1867; Hunter 1909). In 1899 the Cocks Pioneer Electric Gold & Tin Sluicing Company was formed in order to re-work the Eldorado alluvium by means of a gravel pump mounted on a barge (O'Malley 1936). The recent rise in tin price has enabled several syndicates to successfully carry out small sluicing operations. 98 Previous and Present Investigations Most of the early investigations of the Beechworth and Woolshed Valley regions were carried out by Dunn between 1871 and 1913, and Baragwanath from 1946-1948 kept his reports basically to the history of the area and descriptions of the Woolshed Val- ley. The latest report on the Pilot Range petrology of the granitic rocks of the Pilot Range is found in the Geology of Wan- garatta Region (Leggo 1964). There has also been considerable ex plora- tion activity for new deposits. The most extensive programme was carried out by North Broken Hill Pty Ltd during 1965- 1967, when many alluvial flats in the El- dorado and Beechworth districts were tested. The latest companies to take out ex- ploration licenses in the area are Mining Pty Ltd and Newmont Pty Ltd (E.L. 4915), Leighton Mining Pty Ltd (E.L. 436), and Geosearch Pty Ltd (E.L. 488) which are presently engaged at working upon the li- cence area, Pilot Range Granite Complex Introduction This is a preliminary report on the geol- ogy of the Pilot Range. Detail mineralogy, petrology and chemistry of these rocks will be discussed in later communications. The Pilot Range Granite Complex forms a large batholith of approximately 700 square kilometres in extent and is bounded on the south by the township of Beechworth, on the west by Eldorado, and 3.2 kilometres north of the northern extrem- ity of the batholith lies the township of Chil- tern, The batholith has an east-west elongation of 32 km, while the north-south extent is about 22 kilometres. Although there are numerous tors of granite rocks in the area, fresh rocks were found along Spring Creek, Reedy Creek, in recent road cuttings on the Beechworth-Chiltern and the Beech- worth-Wangaratta Roads, and the Gorge *b/w 1871 and 1913, who kept his reports basically to the history of the area and descriptions of the Woolshed Valley, and Baragwanath from 1946-1948. Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Road near Beechworth. The batholith is composed of several dif- ferent varieties of biotite granite, Great dif- ficulty was experienced in trying to de- lineate the boundaries of the different varia- tions and the reasons for this are best sum- marised by Leggo (1964): I. It seems that gradations exist between the variations, Il, The variations do not have marked differences and owing to the severe weather- ing, these frequently could not be discerned, Ill. There is a lack of exposure in some critical areas, and IV. There are complications due to an abundance of dyke rocks. Granite Types The granite pluton consists essentially of a biotite granite and its variants. Six main types of granite were distinguished in the Pilot Range batholith. The biotite granite, being the most com- mon type, is found throughout the massif. It is a coarse-grained, grey granite and con- tains abundant quartz, feldspar and biotite. The granite is slightly porphyritic. The best exposures of this granite are to be found in Tecent road cuttings along the Beechworth-Chiltern Road: Section BE-R-9. Fresh outcrops also occur along Spring Creek: Section BE-R-37, and along Reedy Creek. A porphyritic adamellite was found in the Vicinity of the source of the Rising Sun Creek (Beechworth Military Sheet, grid re- ference 705169) on the southern section of the margin of the batholith: Section BE-R- 45. A coarse grained adamellite, Section BE-R-47, was found in the vicinity of the junction of Spring Creek and Woorragee Creek (Beechworth Military Sheet, grid re- ference 658184). A pink granite, similar in composition to the biotite granite but finer grained, was found scattered throughout the area under study, but according to Leggo (1964) this granite is restricted only to the southern sec- tion of the batholith. Good exposures of this granite variety were found at different May/June, 1978 localities along Reedy Creek, i.e. Sections BE-R-16, BE-R-21 and BE-R-31. Pink gra- nite was also found in the vicinity of Racecourse Creek (Beechworth Military Sheet, grid reference 686160) Section BE-R-29 and Gimblets Creek (Beechworth Military Sheet, grid reference 653151) Sec- tion BE-R-19, A porphyritic leucocratic granite was found only in one locality and outcrop was restricted. (Section BE-R-37 Beechworth Military Sheet, grid reference 663145). Dyke Rocks associated with the Granite Complex One of the most unusual features of the Pilot Range Granite Complex is its high proportion and variation of dyke rocks. These occur throughout the granite and are estimated to constitute at least 10% of the total outcrops (Leggo 1964), Dyke rocks include: quartz porphyry, felspar porphyry, quartz-felspar porphyry, granite porphyry, granophyre, pegmatite and aplites. All these rock types show tex- tural and mineralogical variations. Leggo (1964) states that ‘‘relationships between dyke rocks, as well as between the latter and the enclosing granite, are difficult to resolve, both on account of the complex- ity of the dykes and also because of the lack of good exposures”’. Very few dyke rocks show clear intrusive relation with the granite by their chilled margins and sharp contacts, However, in the Beechworth Prison Pine Plantation, a definite transition from granite through to porphyry occurs and other transitions between dyke rocks are common, During the measurements of dip and strike of the dyke rocks it was noted with few execeptions that the dykes were shallow dipping and the general trend of strike was NNW-SSW. This general strike was also encountered in the dykes situated in the Or- dovician country to the south-east of Beechworth. The pegmatites are generally small in size and occur most frequently as lenses or poc- kets. At one locality (grid reference 657198) pegmatite occured as a large pocket some 99 300 metres in length. Petrology of the Dyke Types Quartz-Feldspar Porphyry: This is a porphyritic, allotriomorphic granular rock with quartz phenocrysts in excess of perthite phenocrysts. These are set in a matrix of quartz, perthite, occasional plagioclase felspar, biotite and rare muscovite. The phenocrysts are up to 5 mm; the grain size of the matrix is always less than | mm, Carlsbad twinning of the perthite is com- mon, as is kaolinization. Plagioclase feldspar varies from albite and oligoclase and the albite law of twinning is always followed. Quartz is always highly fractured and undulose extinction is com- mon, Biotite is usually scattered sparsely through the matrix. It is the normal light- brown to red-brown pleochroic halos, In section BE-R-4, apitite is seen as inclusions in quartz. Quartz & Feldspar Porphyries: The minerals present in these dykes are almost identical to that of the quartz-feldspar por- phyry, the difference being, in the case of quartz porphyry dykes, perthite is absent and in the case of felspar porphyries, quartz phenocrysts are absent. Granite Porphyry: It has a similar min- eral assemblage as in the quartz-feldspar porphyry. However, section BE-R-D5 shows that it is coarser grained and slightly more porphyritic, It consists of irregular grains of quartz, perthite and a little oligo- clase (small phenocrysts up to 2 mm) and much altered biotite in a ground mass com- posed of a fine mosaic of quartz, orthoclase and biotite. Granophyre: A_ thin section of granophyre No. 1452 (Dunn 1913) from the Victorian Mines Department was obtained. The granophyre is composed almost entirely of intergrowths of orthoclase and quartz. The quartz occurs as minute hair-like inter- growths. The periphery of the feldspars is often marked by a coarse intergrowth of the two minerals. Aplite: The aplite of section BE-R-2 is a quartz-perthite rock with albite-oligoclase 100 muscovite and biotite. The perthite and quartz appear to have crystallised simul- taneously giving rise to what Leggo (1964) has described as a xenomorphic granular texture. The grain size never exceeds a mil- limetre. Genesis of the Dyke Rocks: It is known that after emplacement in the crust, a body of magma will begin to cool more quickly in the upper and outer portions. As if becomes solid, it breaks up by contraction into jointed masses. As the cooling and the crys- tallisation of minerals from the magma go on, the volatile components of the magma, beyond those retained by the minerals that use them in their chemical composition, be- come concentrated in the still liquid portion of the magma and as they accumulate more and more, their pressure increases enor- mously. Consequently they tend to force their way upwards along the fissures in the surrounding rocks. At 374°C water reaches its critical tem- perature; that is, at this temperature or above, its vapour cannot be turned back into liquid merely by pressure, however great the pressure may be. As the temperatures of magmas greatly exceed the critical tempera- ture of water, water must therefore be in the gaseous state when it escapes from the magma in which it is contained, Such super-heated steam can dissolve and carry silica and other substances in gaseous solu- tion. From a magma highly charged with water the minerals would crystallize somewhat differently from the way they would from normal magma. In some places the magma might have only moderate water content and the results would approximate those ob- tained in the main body of magma. If the water content is diminished by escaping into the wall rocks, the magma would solidify as an aplite. With the presence of volatiles in the cooling body the constituent minerals crystallize into magacrysts giving rise to pegmatites. Finally, the ichors may be depleted of most of its constituents in quartz veins. Hence, aplites and pegmatites are essen- tially alike in composition, except for the Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 greater abundance of pneumatolytic miner- als in pegmatites; and pegmatites have the ability to undergo more extensive recrystal- lization and replacement of older by younger minerals. Both rocks may occupy sharply defined fractures, and both, but particularly pegma- tites, may form replacement bodies with indefinite margins, which would explain the irregular lenses and pockets of pegmatites encountered in the Pilot Range Granite. Thus, we may visualise how quartz- feldspar, granophyre, aplite, pegmatites of variable composition, and quartz veins may be formed. It will also suffice to explain to some degree the gradational contracts which sometimes occur between dyke rocks and between dyke rocks and granite. Perhaps the best way of discussing the difficulty in resolving the dyke forms is from the angle of proving that the batholith has just been de-roofed; and knowing that the dykes in the roof section of batholiths are in general flat lying, it would thus in the case of large dykes where outcrop was poor, be difficult to detect the contact relationships of the dykes. Evidence to support the hypothesis that the Pilot Range Granite has just been de- roofed comes in the form of the large quan- tities of dyke rocks, the presence of volatiles in the form of tourmaline, topaz, fluorite and cassiterite, and the fact that the alluvium through the batholith is rich in tin. The mineralised greisens are concen- trated near the roofs of the granites and the richest alluvial concentrations (of tin) are found in the vicinity of granite intrusions which have undergone only shallow erosion (Leggo 1964), Contact with the (?) Upper Ordovician Sediments Only one third of the zone of hornfels (granite-sedimentary contact) is exposed in the area, the rest being covered by alluvium. On the north-east flank of the batholith, emplacement has been controlled by an ar- cuate fracture. A slight change in strike of the bedding is apparent around the contact, but the latter is still discordant..The slight May/June, 1978 irregularity is probably due to emplacement along an original fracture zone. Piecemeal stoping of this area could have caused the minor irregularities. To the north of the area studied in the present report, the contact runs along the Indigo Valley. The contact is straight, and almost concordant with a strike of 335°. “The contact appears to be slightly trans- gressive and this, combined with the lack of effect of the rather variable bedding attitude on the straight contact leads to an assump- tion that the intrusion has utilized in its emplacement what is almost a strike fault (Leggo 1964).”” Granitic dykes occur in the Ordovician sediments in the north-west section of the batholith, striking approximately parallel to the main trend of the contact. Along the cuttings of the old Beechworth-Wangaratta railway line north of the township the rocks of the contact aureole are best exposed. Large, manganese-stained quartz veins, some up to 10 cm wide, can be found penetrating into the hornfels forming the aureole. Petrology of the Contact Aureole: The rocks of the contact metamorphic aureole range in composition from biotite- muscovite schists to meta-siltstones, shales and sandstones in the sections studied. The metasediments have lost most of their primary features in the contact metamorphic aureole, by microfolding, cross-shearing and also by the formation of medium grained porphyroblasts (now fine muscovite). At places fine laminations in the hornfels seem to represent primary bed- ding. Evidence of shearing and distortion varies from pronounced (thin section BE- R-43) to negligible (thin section BE-R-44). This suggests early shearing associated with granite intrusion followed by low stress (contact) metamorphism. There is also evi- dence of post biotite muscovitization. The biotite may represent, at least, in part, re- crystallized sedimentary material — the muscovite perhaps being a metasomatic alteration product. Hornfels (BE-R-43) is a weathered con- torted and veined biotite-muscovite schist. 101 The sample consists of muscovite, biotite and quartz. A small quartz muscovite vein cuts the sample. This appears to have been a shale which during metamorphism suffered contortion and minor brecciation, veining and formation of porphyroblasts and altera- tion of porphyroblasts to fine muscovite in that order. Hornfels (BE-R-44) is a meta-silt-stone- shale consisting of alternating laminae of fine granular quartz with a small amount of interstitial biotite and muscovite and a trace of magnetite and zircon, and fine-grained randomly orientated biotite associated with minor quartz, and cut by minute randomly orientated needles of muscovite. The fine bedding in this sample is very irregular and lenslike with some evidence of cross or current bedding. A meta-greywacke or poorly sorted sandstone (thin section BE-R-46) consists of angular quartz and minor albite fragments in a fine, granular matrix of quartz, musco- vite, biotite and minor felspar. The sample is cut by thin irregular zones which are identical to the matrix but richer in biotite and muscovite, and within these zones there is a suggestion of a foliation which has been partly modified by later, low-stress recrystallization. It would seem that they are the product of an early irregular shearing stress. Meta-shale (section BE-R-48) consists of a fine grained foliated mixture of biotite, muscovite and variable amounts of fine grained quartz. The rock has a fine lamina- tion and there appears to have been a direc- tion of shear roughly parallel to the lamina- tion and also one at a large angle to the lamination. A peculiar lens-like area, simi- lar to the country rock but richer in quartz may represent a small, filled scour channel. Also present are medium grained areas of essentially similar composition to the mat- rix. These also have an identical lamination to the matrix but this lamination is often at a small angle to the country rock lamination suggesting slight rolling. Perhaps these are areas of incipient porphyroblast formula- tion, 102 Xenoliths: The only xenoliths found in the Pilot Range Complex occur in a coarse- grained adamellite, (Beechworth Military Sheet, grid reference 695165). No xenoliths were found in the common biotite granite. The xenoliths are small, fine-grained, quartz-rich and contain felspar (albite- oligoclase and microperthite). The largest xenolith found measured 4 cm by 3 cm. Faulting in the Pilot Range Granite Complex Few faults have been recorded in the Beechworth District. This could be due to the poor exposures and the great thickness of alluvium covering much of the granite area, Dunn (1913) however, has described a post Tertiary fault at Beechworth and Leggo (1964) has also described a fault. A Post Tertiary Fault: Dunn (1913) has described a fault at the upper end of Spring Creek. The fault cuts through the granite, altered Ordovician beds, and Newer Pliocene deposits of clay, gravel and au- riferous wash dirt. It strikes at 40° and dips to the south-east at 45°, with uplift being on the southern side. The fault continues in a westerly direction to the Two Mile Creek. The Newton Fault: Leggo (1964) has also described a fault at the upper end of Spring Creek near the falls. Leggo’s fault is traceable for approximately half a mile on a strike of 70° from the falls, “‘Movement has occurred in both granite and dyke rocks (ap- lite, pegmatite and porphyries), and is usu- ally represented by thin isolated mylonitic zones’’. The continuation of the Newton Fault cannot be traced in the granite or the sur- rounding Ordovician sediments. Minor Faulting and Postulated Faults: Near Spring Creek, just north of the bridge on the Gorge Road, a thin mylonitised zone was traced over a distance of about twenty metres through the granite; this fault has an average width of 10 cm and a strike of ap- proximately north-south. The brecciated dykes (Beechworth Mili- tary Sheet, grid reference 712164 and 660140) received the attention of some of the earliest writers, Dunn (1872) in his Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 report on enhydros from Beechworth, re- corded a silicified fault breccia which, after the initial fracturing and entry of quartz, suffered further fracturing, followed by chalcedony infilling. Dunn (1913) in his report on the Woolshed Valley at Beechworth has pos- tulated a fault running along Spring Creek valley and its continuation up Snakes Head Creek towards Mount Pilot. Although stat- ing that this looks remarkably like the course of a fault, signs of the fault could not be detected. Jointing: The jointing in the Pilot Range was plotted from both contact measure- ments and aerial photographs. A rose dia- gram (Fig. 1) shows the major joint direc- tions for the batholith. The variability in strike due to the slight inconsistency of magnetic north relative to the aerial photo- graphs is small; the strikes determined from the aerial photographs differing by less than 5° from the actual contact measurements made in the field. Also, from the field ob- servations it was found that the joints are usually steeply dipping; usually greater than 70°. May/June, 1978 The figure shows that the jointing has a dominant strike of north and south. The other maxima having strikes of 155° + 5° and 60° + 5°, while minor maxima occur at 125°. These principal joint directions can be correlated with those of the Kiewa Region (Beavis 1962). The direction of compres- sive strength 60° + 5° could account for the observed jointing, this strike direction cor- responding to the orientation of the principal compressive strengths determined by Beavis for the Bowning Orogeny. The strikes 155° and N-S can be correlated with the Bowning and Tabberabberan Orogenies respectively and correlate to tension frac- tures. The strikes 60° + and 125° can be shown to the shears associated with the Tabberabberan Orogeny. In general the joint pattern seems to run parallel to the contact between the granite and the Ordovician Sediments. Though most of the streams run straight there is some suggestion of their course being con- trolled by joint system. References Alling, H. L., 1936. Interpretive Petrology of the Igne- ous Rocks, N.Y. Beavis, F. C., 1962. Geology of the Kiewa Area, M.Sc. Thesis, University of Melbourne. Buddington, A. F., 1959. Granite Emplacement with Special Reference to North America, Bull, Geol. Soc. Am, 70: pp. 671-747. Chayes, F., 1956. Petrographic Model Analysis — An Elementary Statistical Appraisal. New York, Wiley 1956, 113 p. Cochrane, G. W., 1971. Tin Deposits of Victoria, Geol. Sury. Vic., Bull. No. 60. Deer, W. A., Howie, R. A. & Zussman, J., 1967. Rock Forming Minerals, Vols. 1, 3, 4, 5. Clowes & Sons, London. Dunn, E. J., 1971. Notes on the Rocks and Minerals of the Ovens District — Appendix A. . Reports of the Mining Registrar, Mines Dept. Vic., March; pp. 41-47. Dunn, E. J., 1913. The Woolshed Valley, Beechworth, Bull. Geol. Surv. Vic., 25. Evernden, J, F. & Richards, J. R., 1962. **Potassium — Argon Ages in Eastern Australia.”’ Jour, Geol. Soc. Aust. 9 (1): 1-49. Hills, E. S., 1963. Elements of Structural Geology, London, Methuen, 483p. Jacobson, R. R, E., MacLeod, W. N. & Black, R., 1958. Ring Complexes in the Younger Granite Pro- vince of Northern Nigeria: Geol. Soc. London Mem. Johannsen, A., 1933. A Descriptive Petrology of the Igneous Rocks, Vol. 1. University of Chicago Press, Chicago. Leggo, M. D., 1964. The Geology of the Beechworth District, M.Sc. Thesis (unpubl.), University of Mel- bourne. 103 Marmo, Y., 1971. Granite Petrology and the Granite Problem, Elservier, New York. Newall & Rast, N., 1970. Mechanisms of Igneous Intru- sion, Geol. Jour. Special Issue No. 2, Galley Press, London Rattigan, J. H., 1963, Geochemical Ore Guides and Techniques In the Exploration for Tin, Proc Australasia Inst. Min, Met. No. 207, pp. 137-151. Skeats, E. W., 1931, The Age, Distribution and Pet- rological Characters of the Granites of Eastern Australia. Tuttle, O. F., 1952. Optical Studies on Alkali — Felspars. Am. — Jour. Sc, Bowen Vol. pt. 2, pp. 553-567. The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 75 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A. BAINES *Periballia. Gk peri, around, near; ballo, to throw; perhaps in allusion to the seeds. Our species, introduced from the Medi- terranean region, is *P. minuta, Small Hair-grass, classified in Aira from 1753 to 1899. *Petrorhagia. Gk petros, a rock; rhagas, rent, chink (from rhegnymi, to break asun- der); equivalent to Lat saxifraga, stone- breaker. Our two introduced species are Hairy Pink and Proliferous Pink. Both species were first classified in Dianthus, then in Tunica (Lat tunica, garment, tunic; cf. tunicates in marine biology). They be- long to family Caryophyllaceae. *Petroselinum. Gk petros, rock; seli- non, parsley or celery, i.e. wild parsley. *P. crispum, Parsley, is sporadically naturalized. The French name Persil, the German Petersilie, and English Parsley are all forms of the same Latin word. The genus is in family Umbelliferae, which has an al- ternative name Apiaceae, derived from Apium, in which genus our species was first placed. Erratum Note Caesia. * Vict. Nat.’ 91: 165, June, 1974. Delete the paragraph giving derivation from Latin caesius, bluish-grey, and insert the following in its place: Caesia. Named by Robert Brown in 1810 after Federico Cesi (Caesius in Latin), an Italian botanist of the first half of the 17th Century. He was first to discover the purpose of fern spores, and wrote ‘Tabulae Philosophicae’, Rome, 1651. His surname comes from Lat caesius, meaning bluish-grey. New edition ‘‘Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania’’ The 1977 edition, further up-dated by Dr Willis, includes a chapter on the cultivation of ferns. $3.75; special discount to FNCV members $2.75; postage 40c. Order from FNCV Sales Officer, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. 104 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Introduction to Foraminifera BY K. N. BELL* A group of animals seldom seen or studied by field naturalists is the Foramini- fera, These are microscopic (0.1 to 2.00mm) single celled animals or Protista which differ from the Amoeba in having a hard shell or test. To appreciate the beauty of these animals a microscope with magnifi- cation of 10 to 30 is needed. Foraminifera are marine animals. The benthonic or bottom dwelling forms may be found in mud-flats in the intertidal zone, attached to algae, in estuarine conditions in the sands, in the deepest waters of the oceans. The planktonic or free-floating forms are to be found in the upper water levels in the open oceans but after death their tests fall to the sediment on the ocean floor. I will not consider the planktonic foraminifera any further as their study is rather specialised. Types of tests (shells) The tests of foraminifera are of 3 types. The arenaceous tests are usually formed by the cementing together of various sized quartz grains although other mineral grains may be used and some deep water foraminifera use sponge-spicules laid side- by-side to make their tests. The common arenaceous forminifera in Victorian waters are Textularia, Ammobaculites, Miliam- mina, Reophax. The other two types of test are both cal- careous (made of calcium carbonate) — the one having an imperforate test (apart from the main aperture) known as the Miliolina which includes Quinqueloculina, Pyrgo; the other having a perforated test (very mi- nute openings) known as the Rotaliina which includes the genera Ammonia, *Honorary Associate, Invertebrate Department National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne May/June, 1978 Brizalina, Uvigerina, Cibicides, Spirillina. The test consists of usually a series of chambers which may be arranged in a uni- serial, branching, conical, spiral, or globu- lar fashion but some consist of only one chamber which may be globular, spiral, flask-shaped, spindle-shaped, branching or uniserial, In all cases the outside of the test may be smooth, pustulose, ribbed or with other sculpture form. Elphidium, Collecting Collecting these animals is very easy. By scraping a small open-mouthed vial over the top 2-3 em of muddy sand on ‘‘Zostera’’ flats in the intertidal zone specimens of many species will be found. At Flinders, Western Port, samples may contain up to 70 species (mostly calcareous forms) but at Tooradin in the mud flats only 4 or 5 species will be collected (mostly arenaceous forms). Samples from weed-covered shallow-water muds in Queensland have yielded 15 species of arenaceous forams while samples of the fine sands on the Great Barrier Reef will yield over 150 species of the calcareous species. Do you know some- one with a boat? Good — because mud scrapings from the anchor will yield a fine fauna of the different species to be found at varying depths. Algal fronds of the smaller species like Zostera and Cymadocea often have forams attached to them, sometimes camouflaged with a covering of sand grains. Even the filamentous algae may have species entangled e.g. from Hastings, Western Port, a slimy green alga had 250 specimens of 15 species present. The foram fauna varies from locality to locality, with different environments and the only niche usually without forams (except broken and worn specimens) are the mobile sands at the water’s edge, 105 17 18 19 Plate 1 Explanation of figure: Specimens to various scales. Arenaceous forms: 1. Reophax 2. Trochammina 3. Clavulina 4. Textularia Porcellaneous forms: 5. Pyrgo 6. Sigmoilina 7. Quinqueloculina 8. Spiroloculina Rotaliid forms: 9. Robulus 10. Patellina 11. Brizalina 12. Ammonia 13. Lagena 14. Bulimina 15. Elphidium 16 Uvigerina Planktonic forms: 17. Globigerina 18. Globigerinoides 19. Globorotalia 106 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Preparation of Samples Initially one would only be interested in observing the different species present without regard to their being alive at the time of collection or not. If so the samples of sediment are easily prepared. Spread the sample out very thinly over the bottom of a petri-dish or similar and examine in re- flected light. Among the many sand grains you will soon find the forams. They can be picked out of the sample using a wetted fine camel hair brush (I use size 000) and glued onto a slide. Usually cardboard well slides are used although normal glass slides with a ting can be used which will enable you to Study them by transmitted light as well. If there is much clay present in the sample wash the sample carefully by decanting until most of the clay-sized material is removed, then proceed as above. Samples can be washed through fine sieves to concentrate the forams and remove rubbish. There are other methods which can be found in the references listed. Forams as fossils Forams are also to be found as fossils. They range in time from Cambrian to Re- cent and are very common in the Tertiary limestones and marls in Victoria in such places as Port Campbell cliffs, Fossil Beach — Mornington, and the Lakes Entrance area. A normal Tertiary marl will provide over 200 species of both benthonic and planktonic species. Because of their rela- tively restricted ecological tolerances in the present day sediments, forams make very good palaeoecological indicators for the in- terpretation of the environment of deposi- tion of these geologic sediments. The prep- aration of fossil faunas differs from that of Recent ones. The sediment sample (about 10g) needs to be boiled with a small quantity of “‘Calgon’’ or sodium carbonate until it becomes well broken down (usually about 30 mins.). Either then wash through fine sieves or decant carefully, washing well as for the Recent faunas. Biology of forams Little is known of the biology of living May/June, 1978 forams. They apparently feed on diatoms and unicellular algae which become entrap- ped in the protoplasmic net surrounding the foram test. They have a complex reproduc- tive cycle consisting of 2 (some researchers believe 3) alternating generations but only some 30 species out of an estimated 6000 living species have yet been studied in the laboratory. The place of forams in the trophic struc- ture of ocean life is as yet poorly known but it is Known that they form a large part (perhaps even exclusively) of the diet of some Retusa species in Victoria (shelled opisthobranchs) and overseas research has shown them to form part of the diet of some tube-worms. There is obviously much to be learned about the biology of living foraminifera. Identification The identification of forams is relatively easy to genus level. To go to species level is more complex as access to a library with specialist research papers is needed, Some of the more common forams in Victoria are figured in Plate 1, References The best reference is the Treatise of Inver- tebrate Paleontology, Part C (Univ. of Kan- sas, 1964, Loeblich, A. R. and Helen Tap- pan) which lists and describes all genera and gives figures of most of them. An earlier handbook to the genera is Cushman, J. A., 1950, Foraminifera (Harvard Univ. Press) which gives good figures and descriptions of the genera although the names are not all up to date. Albani, A. Handbook No. 1, A.M.S.A. is a good guide to the more common N.S.W. forams but many occur in Victoria. The fauna of Port Phillip Bay has been monographed by A, C. Collins (Memoir No. 34, National Museum of Victoria) but of the 278 species only 48 are figured. From these references the interested worker in forams will find many further articles as an aid to preparation and identifi- cation. 107 A note on the pouch life of rock wallabies By P. E. HORNSBY* The usual pattern of behaviour amongst the joeys of the larger macropods is for them to have an extensive ‘interim’ period of pouch life — that is, the period between the time when the joey leaves the pouch for the first time and when it is permanently out of the pouch. For example, Kirkpatrick (1965) quotes pouch young of the grey kangaroo Macropus major (Shaw) as first leaving the pouch at 250 days, and permanently out of the pouch at 297 days (giving an interim pouch life of 47 days) while Poole (1975) quotes an interim duration for 35 days for the same species, and 25 days for the west- ern grey kangaroo, M. fuliginosus. Sharman and Pilton (1964) reported an interim pouch life of 36 days for the red kangaroo Megaleia rufa, and Russell (1973) gave a figure of 56 days for the smaller species Macropus eugenii, the tammar or dama wal- laby. This interim period is then followed by a protracted ‘at foot’ stage when the joey ac- companies its mother on her travels. The behaviour of at least two species of rock wallabies and probably all or most of the others, differs markedly over both of these periods. Recently, records have been made for two of the latest yellow-footed rock wallaby, Petrogale xanthopus, joeys (both male) to be raised at the Adelaide Zoo, The first joey had an interim pouch life of only ten days, being observed to first leave the pouch on September 12th 1977, and to be permanently out as from September 22nd 1977. The second joey, conceived when its mother was approximately sixteen months old, had never been observed out of the pouch before 14.11.77, and was perma- nently out by 21.11.77, amaximum interim pouch life of seven days. (One possible reason for the short duration is that the *Department of Psychology University of Adelaide 108 Female yellow footed rock wallaby, mother was still not fully grown herself.) These short-duration pouch lives resem- ble that observed earlier in the related species P. pencillata pearsoni, the Pearson Island rock wallaby. In this instance, the joey, also a male at Adelaide Zoo, was ob- served to first leave the pouch on 15.9.74, and definitely recorded as permanently out of the pouch by 6.10.74, though it is ex- tremely likely that the final eviction had taken place before this later date. The behaviour of the joeys of both species shows only marginal differences from one another during the post-interim stage but both differ substantially from the conven- tional ‘at foot’ process. In the case of the Pearson Island wallabies at the Zoo, this can best be illustrated by considering the be- haviour over a twenty-four hour period, Starting early in the morning. The mother would suckle her joey for some time, fol- Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 1. Pearson Island rock wallaby joey resting alone in a log at the Adelaide Zoo. é Fig. 2. Yellow footed rock wallaby joey resting alone on a rock in the Flinders Ranges, South Australia. May/June, 1978 109 lowed by each animal grooming itself, plus some grooming of the joey by the mother, together with some mutual play behaviour. The mother would then depart, and the joey would adjourn to its resting point, in this instance, a hollow log (see figure 1) where it would remain all day. Meanwhile, its mother would retire to her favourite resting place on the main rock pile in the enclosure. Towards dusk the joey would emerge from the log and the mother would come and collect it, and together they would adjourn to the rock pile, where the joey would again be suckled. Then, after grooming and play, both would go off and feed together. A similar pattern of behaviour occurs in the native habitat on Pearson Island, though this is necessarily more complex because of interactions with other wallabies. However, as regards this post-interim behaviour, the basic characteristics are the same. The comparable behaviour is somewhat easier to observe in the case of the yellow- footed rock wallaby in its natural habitat, because of a lesser propensity to retire un- derground during the daytime. Here the daily cycle is essentially the same, with the mother leaving her joey in a ‘safe’ place while she goes off to feed, drink, or rest elsewhere. This safe spot is normally well within the home range of the colony, and so 110 Young eagle diving over wallabies at Hamiltons Creek the ‘abandoned’ joey is nevertheless quite safe because it can rely on warnings by others in the case of danger. If for some reason it has to leave its chosen spot, it will endeavour to return later to the same place. However where numbers have been re- duced, this tendency to sit out in exposed places (see figure 2) must make it particu- larly vulnerable to its natural enemies such as the wedge-tail eagle, Aquila audax, and introduced exotics like the feral cat, Felis catus, Free-ranging joeys of both species exer- cise a certain degree of licence with regard to the spot where they have been left, wan- dering about to graze and interact with other conspecifics, playing and fighting with their peers, but they never show anything re- sembling the stereotyped ‘at foot’ behaviour of the more nomadic macropods. Acknowledgements I am indebted to Richard Oglesby, on the staff at the Adelaide Zoo, for the record of dates regarding the first P. xanthopus joey, and to the Director and Board of the Adelaide Zoo for permission to observe the animals outside normal working hours. REFERENCES Kirkpatrick, T. H, (1965) Studies in Macropodidae in Queensland. 3, Reproduction in the Grey Kanguroo Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 (Macropus major) in Southern Queensland. Qd. J. agric. anim. Sci., 22, 319-328. Poole, W. E. (1975) Reproduction in the two species of grey kangaroos, Macropus giganteus (Shaw) and M. fuliginosus (Desmarest) II. Gestation, parturition and pouch life. Aust. J. Zool., 23, 333-353. Russell, E, M. (1973) Mother-young relations and early behavioural development in the marsupials Macropus eugenii and Megaleia rufa. Z. Tierpsychol. 33, 163- 203. Sharman, G, B. & Pilton, P. E. (1964). The life history and reproduction of the red kangaroo (Megaleia rufa). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond,, 142, 29-48, Reply from Elizabeth Turner Dr. Michael Messer PhD, Senior Lecturer in Biochemistry at the University of Sydney, has kindly called my attention to some errors in my article **Preventive Marsupial Paediatrics’ ( Vic- torian Naturalist, 94, 3 129 May/June 1977) and I thank him for his concern and information. These new facts are most interesting and very recently published and indeed were not available to me at the time of writing my article and I relied for my references on Stephens et al (1974-75) as published in the *‘References’’. On the question of whether marsupial pouch young can metabolize dietary galactose, Dr. Messer points out that Stephens’ findings of low activity of the kinase and transferase enzymes in the red blood cells of red and grey kangaroos was obtained on: 1. adult kangaroos, not on pouch young, and 2. that galactose would be metabolized by the liver and not the red blood cells. Dr. Messer is unable to supply any references of published material on the levels of activities of galactose-metabolizing enzymes of the livers of infant marsupials. He has misunderstood my statement in para- praph 4, page 130, as he points out that marsupial milks do indeed contain some lactose. I stated that “the predominant carbohydrate is not lactose’’ and that the giving of ‘high lactose containing milks produces diarrhoea’’. Dr. Messer states that ‘‘quite significant amounts of galactose-containing saccharides have nevertheless been found in the milk of sev- eral species of marsupials. This was first de- monstrated by Gross and Bolliger (1958, 1959) for the brush possum and confirmed by Jenness et al (1964) for the quokka, red kangaroo and American opossum."* He then kindly included a reprint of his own May/June, 1978 recent paper ‘*Milk carbohydrates of Marsupials, Partial Separation and Characterization of Neu- tral Milk Oligosaccharides of the Eastern Grey Kangaroo” (Messer and Mossop. Aust. J. Biol. Sci. 1977 30, 379-88) in which he has shown that the milk of the grey kangaroo contains a variety of saccharides of various sizes, in each of which galactose is the predominant monosaccharide. Finally, he cites the work of Kerry K. R. (1969) Comp. Biohem. Physiol 29, 1015, on “Intestinal disaccharidase activity in a monot- reme and eight species of marsupials’. Kerry examined the lactase activity of pouch young in one specimen of ring-tail possum and one of grey kangaroo and found it to be higher than in infant eutherians, This would indicate that in these two pouch young at least there would be no difficulty in digesting cow’s milk, as suggested by the work of Stephens et al (1974) in their paper ‘‘Defi- ciency of two enzymes of galactose metabolism in Kangaroos’’ Nature, (London) 248, 524. Dr. Messer states that ‘‘it seems unlikely that the cataracts sometimes seen in young marsupials would be related, causally, to those found in human infants with congential galactosaemia. In my View, the true cause of these cataracts remains tu be discovered.”’ Apparently conflicting theories and reports of the causes of the cataracts exist. This is a disappointment to those of us who have noted the cataractous eyes of young marsu- pials and we await with some impatience the results of further research work by persons of the calibre of Dr. Messer and his colleagues, and do sincerely hope that these results may be published in journals which are more readily available to the non-specialist reader. ELIZABETH K, TuRNER M.D. 11 Field Naturalist trip to Mt. Buffalo FNCV Excursion 27-1-78 - 3-2-78 BY JOAN FORSTER On January 27th, 1978, 41 Field Naturalists left Spencer Street Station for a week at Mt. Buffalo, which Hume and Hovell named during their expedition from Sydney to Port Phillip Bay in 1824, because to them the mountain looked like a buffalo. It was a novelty to be waiting on a crowded station for a train journey instead of setting out by bus. The last part of the journey however was by bus from Wan- garatta. In the cold and dark the friendly bus driver entertained us with welcome tales of the Chalet and points of interest along the way. After a cold night the first Saturday was pleasant for walking, then we had two days of heavy rain. Many members of the group braved the wet weather and we were grateful for the efficient drying room provided in the Chalet. By the end of the week and on our journey home the weather was almost too hot to be pleasant. As we were not dependent on our own bus for transport members chose their own ac- tivities each day except for the Wednesday when a bus from the Chalet took us to the Horn. Walks near Lake Catani The walks in the area around Lake Catani and along the Gorge were popular with botanists who delighted in the abundantly flowering Burgan Tea-tree Leptospermum phylicoides and the Shrubby Platysace Platysace lanceolata. Though after the heavy rain those near the Chalet were almost de-flowered. An interesting feature of the Burgan was the varied length of the sta- mens. Some were much longer than the pet- als, some the same length and others very short indeed. These stamens protruded at various angles although they were mostly parallel with the petals. The iow growing bushes of Shrubby 112 Helichrysum adenophorum var. waddellae. Photo by Ray Lee. Platysace were very charming. The slightly domed flower heads were 2-3 cm across, each head consisting of many tiny white flowers touched with pink where buds oc- curred. On the track to Lake Catani near the broad bridge were a few low-growing, sprawling bushes of Monkey Mint-bush Prostanthera walteri. The flowers were typ- ical mint bush shape but 2-3 cm long, a pale greenish grey colour with purple veining on the upper petal; strangely handsome. The dark green leaves lacked the aroma charac- teristic of most mint bushes. Under the bridge Mountain Plum pine Podocarpus lawreacei grew, showing some pinkish mauve male cones. Here in the Myrtle Teat- ree Leptospermum myrtifolium there were Eastern Spinebills Acanthorynchus tenuirostris flitting from the growth below the bridge to the bushes on the bank. As they darted among the leaves you could catch a glimpse of the brown back, the white shafts of the tail, the black head and white throat Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Buffalo Plateau. Photo by Zillah Lee. with reddish brown patch in the centre. The clashing of the cobbler’s awl — beak snap- ping at insects and the whirring of wings could be clearly heard. Along the shady parts of the track Pale Vanilla-lily Arthropodium milleflorum was growing and it was interesting to taste the long stalked clusters of fruits on the Carra- way Oreomyrrhis eriopoda growing near by. Round leaf Mint Bush Prostanthera rotundifolia had a few flowers and on the twining stems of the Common Appleberry Billardiera scandens there were immature green berries. Green immature fruits were also on the Waxberry Gaultheria appressa. Mountain milkwort Comesperma retusum was in flower and a narrow leaf form of Panax Tieghemopanax sambucifolius was in bud. Among the mossy boulders Fish-bone Water fern Blechnum nudum, Mother- May/June, 1978 shield fern Polystichum proliferum and Sc-ambling Coral fern Gleichenia mic- rophylla added delicate beauty. In several places Royal Bluebells Wahlenbergia gloriosa were in full rich glory. The en- demic Fern-leaf Myrtle Baeckea cre- natifolia was recognised, though not in flower and hanging on the granite cliffs were little trailers of silvery leaved Cliff Cudweed Gnaphalium umbicola. Common Fringe Myrtle Calytrix tetragona had finished flowering but the tailed sepals per- sisted. On the further side of the bridge the Royal Grevillea Grevillea victoriae showed rusty red buds and a few flowers. Lemon Bottle- brush Callistemon pallidus was beside the track and a large bush of Catkin Wattle Acacia dallachiana had catkin buds. The pungent Alpine Mint bush Prostanthera 113 cuneaia was growing in shady places and we were delighted to see a few pink-tipped buds and white flowers of the Waddell Ever- lasting Helichrysum adenopherum var. waddellue . The meadow along the north side of Lake Catani was a film consuming garden, There were photogenic clumps and spreads of big orange Billy Buttons Graspedia glauca, orange Everlastings Helichrysum acuminatum, Pale Everlastings Heli- chrysum rutindolepis, Alpine Podelepis P. robusta and Alpine Everlastings Helli- chrysum hookeri, On muddy flats pale blue flowers of mud Pratia P. surrepens were growing flat on the ground and purple Fairies’ Aprons Utricularia dichotoma flo- wered above submerged bladder carnivor- ous leaves. Among the grass there were Scaly Buttons Leptorhynchos squamatus, while pink Alpine Trachymene 7, humilis grew close to the ground. The heaths seen in wet places had ceased flowering — Coral Heath Epacris Microphylla, Swamp Heath E, paludosa and Candle Heath Richea con- tintis, while Mountain Beard Heath Leucopogon suaveolens showed red berry- like drupes and Heath Milkwort Comes- perma ericinum was in flower. Granite but- tercup Ranunculus granticola showed its shiny yellow flowers and Rigid Buttercup R. gunnianus had heads of achenes above the much divided leaves. In the same area Alpine Heath-myrtle Baeckea gunniana was covered with small Tea-Tree-like flowers. Baeckeas have fewer stamens than Tea-trees and they tend to bend over to the centre of the flowers. At the end of this swampy area we saw a Wombat Vombatus ursinus feeding and rest- ing in a grassy patch by the lakeside with a White-necked Heron Ardea pacifica near by and a Dusky Moorhen Gallinula tenebrosa feeding among the reeds. Later we saw a Black Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo and a Black Duck Anus superciliosa in the same area. The track from here is enclosed by flow- ering Tea-Tree Leptospermum grand- ifolium. These bushes were the haunt of White-eared Honeyeaters Meliphaga 114 leucotis. Their loud ‘Choc, choc’ call draws attention to them as they move actively from bush to bush catching insects or sip- ping nectar. This handsome dark yellowish-green bird with grey crown, black face and throat and white patch behind the eyes spends a long time feeding in the same group of bushes, so it is easy to get a good sight of him. The walk to Chalwell Galleries On Saturday a small group of Naturalists decided to join a walking party from the Chalet. The destination was the Chalwell Galleries. The party consisted of about twenty people ranging in age from six to sixty years. For naturalists the leader moved too quickly with no stops for botanizing, but the climb was an experience we would not have missed. From the south end of the camping ground at Lake Catani the track led through a woodland of slender Snow Gums Eucalyptus pauciflora beneath which grew Mountain Shaggy Pea Oxylobium alpestre with a few yellow and brown pea flowers. There were patches of leafy Bossaea B foliosa which had a few remaining yellow pea flowers amongst the masses of little flat brown legumes. Handsome Flat Pea Platylobium formosum and prickly Gorse Bitter Pea Daviesia ulicifolia had both finished flowering. In the camping ground under the trees we saw Cinnamon Bells Gas- trodia sesamoides. At the edge of this area among the Snow Wallaby Grass Danthonia nivicola there were a few Snow Daisies Celmisia ayteliifolia, Yellow Kunzia K. muelleri had some flowers and there were one or two flowers remaining on the long leaf Hovea H. longifolia, The track then climbed gently until we reached the base of the Galleries. These were made up of a group of large boulders piled one on another. Here the leader said we should leave our bags as we would need two hands and the passages between the rocks would be too narrow to accommodate our bodies and our bags. As we stretched from stone to stone down narrow defiles, climbed up through crevices between boulders or slithered down over slippery granite slabs we knew he had been Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 right. In one place the space between the boulders was so narrow that we had to prog- ress backwards on hands and feet as we faced the sky, then insert ourselves with a twist upwards through a slit between the boulders. At last after much physical effort we came out onto a rock platform where we could look down over the Buckland Valley and across to Victoria’s highest peaks. We were interested to see in the valley tobacco growing and the farm houses and curing sheds. Mists By Monday afternoon the rain had eased and many people ventured out along the tracks. All around us the mist hid the views, the nearer trees being silhouetted as twisted grey shapes against the white mist. By even- ing from Bent’s Lookout a white lake en- gulfed the lowlands and wisps of cloud crept up between the mountains as in a Chinese painting until the mist rose at our feet en- gulfing us in a damp blanket. The Gorge track next day in the sunlight gave us clear views over the chasm below and the opportunity to recognise Mountain Pepper Drimys lanceolata, Box Micran- theum M. hexandrum with maturing cap- sules, Myrtle Tea-tree Leptospermum myr- tifolium and Slender Tea-tree L. brevipes in flower. Also growing along the track were Alpine mint bush Prostanthera cuneata and Violet Kunzea K. parvifolia. Firewood Groundsel Senecio linearifolius looked bright beside the track and both Heli- chrysums that are often called Cascade Everlastings added dainty beauty with their showers of white flowers, H. throideum with shiny green leaves and H. secundif- lorum with grey leaves. Catkin buds were seen on the endemic Buffalo Sallow Wattle Acacia phlebophylla and Alpine Wattle A. alpina was also budding. A very large feral tabby cat was seen stealthily stalking prey on a boulder but it was gone like a flash when it realised we were near. Trees around the Chalet Round the Chalet area Mountain or Kindling Gum Eucalyptus dalrympleana dominated the scene and Buffalo Sallee E. May/June, 1978 Cliffs at Buffalo. Photo by Zillah Lee. mitchelliana, endemic to Buffalo was rec- ognised by drooping narrow shining leaves and a pointed starry arrangement of its buds, Below these gums giving a blue-grey colour to the middle story were many Hickory Wat- tles Acacia obliquinervia with attractive blue-grey phyllodes and rounded buds. A little way from the Chalet Alpine Ash or Woolly-butt £. delegatensis was plentiful. These trees favour a sub-alpine environment 3000 to 4500 feet altitude which here coin- cides with the exposure of the Mt. Buffalo granite. Birds Guests were entertained by the colourful Crimson Rosellas Platycercus elegans feed- ing in the Eucalypts or eating food put out on roofs and verandahs, The Pied and Grey Currawongs Strepera graculina and §, ver- sicolon and Little Ravens Corvus mellori also came for food or entertained with their chasing and calling in the tree tops. Black Backed magpies Gymnorhina hypoleuca 115 and Kookaburras Dacelo gigay carolled and laughed and Red Wattle birds Anthochaera carunculata added their raucous cries. Above Manfield’s Lookout Eastern Striated Pardalotes P. ornatus were busily feeding high in the Eucalypts and slipping into the hollow branches to feed their entunnelled young. The Gorge Nature Walk The gorge nature walk, planned in a cir- cuit from the Chalet gave good views from Bent’s, Manfield’s and Wilkinson’s Look- outs. These lookouts were named for people who made a contribution to the early de- velopment of Mt, Buffalo. The Premier Sir Thomas Bent funded the building of the proper road to the plateau in 1908. The Manfield family were among the first to come camping and tramping on the plateau. They built the Temperance Hotel below Eurobin Falls in the 1880s. Dr. J. F. Wilkin- son was the first secretary of the Bright Alpine Club who between 1887 and 1897 took an active interest in tourist activities at Mt. Buffalo. Another early identity is commemorated by a plaque on the Monolith. Edward Car- lile, a cattle man of Wandiligong, was the first to climb the Monolith. Taking a rope up with him, he had his wife attach tools and a wire rope ladder. He hauled these up and attached the ladder to the top of the boulder. Formation of the Gorge At the gorge Lookout the Nature Guide draws attention to the lattice of cracking over the face of the rock walls. Two such enormous cracks once intersected to en- compass a huge wedge of rock. Over mill- ions of years the turbulent waters of Crystal Brook have excavated this massive wedge leaving the cavernous gorge. The precipit- ous North Wall seen from Pulpit Rock has a sheer drop of 250 m and provides the most challenging climb in the State. Early History On this walk the remains can still be seen of the Manfield’s Guest House which was burned to the ground in 1928. The propriet- ress, Lil Manfield was the daughter of John Manfield, one of the first settlers on Mt. Buffalo. Standing on the track looking out at 116 the pattern of Eucalypts, boulders and un- dergrowth, as early settlers must have done, we marvelled at the courage it would have taken to lead such rigorous and lonely lives. Further along the track we saw the homes of more ancient settlers the wombats — two large burrows dug beside the track. Eucaly pts On this Nature Trail the four most com- mon eucalypts were seen. Along the first section to the Crystal Brook bridge the tall, smooth, white or grey-barked Mountain Gum £, dalrympleana stands out among the Snow Gums and Buffalo Sallee. It is closely related and very similar to Candlebark Gum E. rubida but larger in most features, such as buds and fruits in threes, and having a thicker trunk. It sometimes develops the same reddish tinge on the trunk, Where the soil is deeper the tall straight Alpine Ash appears. It is a ‘half-bark’, with thick fibrous bark on the lower trunk peeling to smooth gum bark on the upper half, In the valley on the furthest stretch of the Nature Walk is a pure stand of Alpine Ash, re- growth after the 1939 bushfires, with a few large older specimens which escaped the fire. Alpine Ash is completely killed by fire, but the seed, which needs fire to germinate, soon sprouts in the ash bed, resulting in a forest of seedlings, A natural thinning out process occurs as the stronger specimens outgrow the weaker ones which eventually die out leaving a mature forest. By the side of the track Grass Trigger Plants Stylidium graminifolium were growing. It was interesting to set the trigger off with a twig in imitation of a bee alighting in search of nectar. The trigger sprang up to dust the insect with pollen if the pollen was ripe. Tasman Flax Lily Dianella tasmanica growing here had masses of green shining immature berries and the dainty purple Fringe Lily Thyanotus tuberosus showed a few delicate flowers. Bush Birds In the thicket by the stream the most ubiquitous honeyeater the Yellow-faced Meliphaga chrysops was darting in and out. We were alerted by his ringing ‘chick up, chick up’ and slow whistle of four notes in a Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 descending scale. He is an active and in- quisitive ashy brown bird tinged with olive and has a bright yellow line below his eyes. These birds gather nectar in Autumn and Spring but in winter they are largely insec- tiverous and cannot remain on the Moun- tain, We were also delighted to watch the flut- tering grey Fantails Rhipidura fuliginosa as they flitted after insects or to see a placid Grey Thrush Collunicincla harmonica with black eye cocked reflectively listening for grubs under the bark. Flame Robins Pet- roica phoenicea were also occasionally seen looking for food or bathing in pools along the track. In thick bush brown Thornbills Acanthiza pusilla fed among the leaves while White-browed Scrub-wrens Sericor- nis frontalis hopped under the bushes like little brown mice. The Trip to the Horn On Wednesday, Ist February, a bus from the Chalet took us to a spot past the Tatra Inn at the foot of the Horn. On the way the driver stopped at the Leviathan, a great boulder balanced on a very much smaller one. This was aremarkable example of the weathering above and below of so many of the boulders May/June, 1978 E. Mitchelliana trunk. Photo by E. Costermans on the plateau. In the morning many of the party walked up the road on to the track and then climbed the boulders and ladders to the great boulder at the top of the Horn. Look- ing up from the road it was interesting to see how the face of the boulder had been cleaned by the rain washing metal from the railing down over the rock and killing the algae growing there. A Pool in the Rock There was a pool of water in a depression in a slab of rock just before the last boulder. In this water we saw Spring-tails, insects with water repellent exoskeletons, the usual six legs and no wings. They were floating in a purplish raft on the surface of the water. Birds on the Mountain Top Looking out on the rock surfaces below us we could see half a dozen Pipits Anthus australis with bobbing heads and flicking tails, catching insects as they ran over the boulders. Pipits are one of the few birds to remain permanently on the open plains above the snow line. Floating high in the sky above us were several pairs of wedge Tailed Eagles Aquila audax. They were soaring with wings upswept and rising on the ther- mal currents until they were lost to sight. diet Along The Track On the track back to the road there were a few white flowers remaining on the Alpine Westringia W. senifolia and the Mountain Gentian Gentianella diemensis was out in moist places, The low growing Alpine Gre- villea G. australis scrambled about the rocks showing white flowers clustered in small heads. Purple Eyebright Euphrasia collina, Glacial Eyebright E. glaciales var. eglundulosa and Derwent Speedwell Ver- onica derwentiana were also flowering. As we walked along the road and looked over the tree tops towards Mt. Dunn we heard both Golden Whistlers Pachycephala pectoralis and Olive Whistlers Pachycephala olivacea calling and the sharp shrill peeping of a flock of Silver Eyes Zosterops lateralis as they hurried from tree to tree in search of fruits or insects. Scarlet Robins Petroica multicolor were also seen on the Horn track. A Picnic When we returned to the picnic spot the manager's wife had a tasty barbecue lunch ready for us. Thinking we were eating coun- try meat, saying how tender it was we were told it came from Melbourne. The Walk to Dickson's Falls In the afternoon the bus stopped at the Tatra Inn to allow members to walk across the open snow plain towards Dickson's Falls. Much time was spent crouching amongst clumps and tussocks to look at Green Alpine Leek Orchids Prasophyllum alpinum and Mauve Leek Orchids P. sut- tonii flowering in the grass. There were also fascinating fruits of Al- pine Marsh-marigold Caltha introloba. They were very decorative and astonish- ingly robust. Each fruit-head was 2-3 cm across, a multi-pointed star on a sturdy broad stalk that projected some 6-8 cm above nearly heart-shaped leaves. These were spread flat on the ground, but the two extended lobes were turned up where they joined the stalk. Sealy Buttons Leptorhyn- chos squamatus also grew among the grass. Hoary Sunray Helipterum albicane var. buf- faloensis glowed by the way and Clustered Everlastings Helichrysum semipapposum 118 edged the track and Yam Daisies Microser- sis scapigera were in flower. The track passed through wet heathland where Rosy Heath Myrtle Baeka ramsis- sima still flowered. Alpine Heath Myrtle B. gunniana was in full flower and fragrance but the Daisy-bush Olearia phlogopappa had finished flowering. Ivy leaf Violet Viola hederacea and Prickly Starwort Stel- laria pungens covered the ground. As the track rose higher through Snow Gum wood- land there were many mauve Brachycome daisies and Tall Rice Flower Pimelea ligus- trina and slender rice flower P. linifolia, but Mountain Aciphyll A. simplicifolia had only its fruits, Pink Alpine BoroniaB. algida was flowering near Dickson’s Falls and also Scaly Phebalium P. squamulosum, and the small flower Grevillea G. parviflora. We enjoyed the rest at Dickson’s Falls which were named for W. Dickson who was Secretary for Mines when the geology of Mt. Buffalo was surveyed in the early 1900s. Sitting among the boulders we looked down over the Buckland Valley to the blue of the Australian Alps beyond be- fore setting out to walk back to the Chalet. As we reached the road below the Chalet many photos were taken of a beautiful Snow Gum growing out from the rocks at the road side. Dragons On all walks a number of lizards were seen sunning themselves on warm boulders or logs beside the tracks. The one member of the dragon lizard family found on Mt. Buffalo — the Mountain Dragon Am- Phibolunus diemensis was seen. It has well developed legs and a long tapering tail. When we disturbed it, it raised its body and ran nimbly away. Skinks Two kinds of Skink of the family Lygosominae were plentiful. The Three- lined Skink L. trilineatum and the Grass Skink Leiolopisma guichenoti. Both look alike with slender polished bronze bodies and a darker line along the centre of the back and on either side, The Three-lined Skink grows to nearly seven inches while the Grass Skink is no jonger than four inches, Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 Bunch of grapes (galls) on tree near chalet. Photo by Zillah Lee. Both slipped away like a flash into a crevice or under some vegetation for safety. Of the family Scincinae both rock skinks were seen. The fat black rock skink Egernia saxatilis about ten inches long was sunning itself on Mt. Dunn and White’s Skink Eger- nia whitei was often seen displaying its striped and spotted body in the sunshine. Snakes Two of the three snakes recorded for Mt. Buffalo were seen, the White-lipped Snake Denisonia coronoides and the Copperhead D. superba. The copperhead was the high- land form, dark in colour with a copper coloured head. The small white lipped snake is venomous but not dangerous to man. Evening Talks Marie Allender was able to add to the interest and pleasure of our stay by having the Staff TV room (the TV was out of order) reserved for our use in the evenings. Here we enjoyed discussing our days’ dis- coveries, watching Mr. and Mrs. Frank Ro- bins’ slides of their recent trip to North America and listening to talks about the area, The first of these talks was given by May/June, 1978 Dan Mclnnes on the Geology of the area. This talk added to the interest we took in the magnificence of the gorge views and the boulder-strewn plateau. Madge Lester gave a well illustrated talk which helped us to identify the three main Eucalypts to be found on the plateau (see Vic. Nat.) The next talk, on birds was given by Joan Forster and on the last evening Dr. Elizabeth Turner involved the whole com- pany in recording the insects and animals encountered on our walks. Rabbits The most prevalent of the animals were rabbits. Every morning the guests of the chalet were entertained by dozens of rabbits feeding unafraid on the front lawns, It’s a pity we could not fully appreciate those bounding little animals with white tufts be- hind and upright ears in front. We were told that the Ranger has the matter in hand and hopes to have their numbers reduced by this time next year. The Homeward Journey On the homeward bus journey down the mountain we were aware of the change in vegetation at 3000 feet to a Peppermint Gum association at the junction of the sedimen- tary rock and the granite. From the bus several wombats were seen beside the road and a Lyre-bird Menura superba and a Black-tailed or Swamp Wal- laby Wallabia bicolor crossed the road ahead of the bus. Pelicans Pelecanus con- spicillatus were seen by a pool, a flock of Sulphur crested Cockatoos Cacatua galerita flew over and a number of Little Eagles Halioetus morphnoides were float- ing above. Our Thanks We would like to than Marie Allender for her planning and preparation which gave us the opportunity of enjoying the beauty of the High Country and for the chance of finding out more about its natural history. (My thanks go to the members whose contributions have added their knowledge and experience to this account. Thanks also for help from National Parks Service Pub- lications and the book — Mt. Buffalo National Park by Sue and John Brownlie, 119 Concerning **Koala, Australia’s native bear”’ of February issue It is heartening to know that somebody reads one’s efforts and is interested enough to write to the Editor, if only in disapproval. I refer to the five corrections provided by Robert Degabriele and published in April issue. I realise that more recent observation and research can disprove what has previously been accepted as true, and hope that other persons with first-hand know- ledge will provide further comments on the ‘facts’ (please change that misguided word to ‘‘information’’) collected by this layman. M. J. LESTER Note from Dr. K. R. Kerry I wish to endorse Professor Messer’s letter pub- lished in the Victorian Naturalist Vol. 95, No. 2, page 61. K. R. Kerry, Head, Biology Section, Antarctic Division. Natural History of Alpine Regions In December we again plan to publish a special issue of ‘‘The Victorian Naturalist’’. This time we request articles relating to the natural history of the Alpine regions. Material for this special issue should be received by the editor by 30 Sep- tember 1978. For Sale Various bird books and journals and natural history publications by North, Hindwood, Thom- son, Pizzey, Cayley, Chisholm, Leach and many others. List available from Harvey Dickison, 26 Rose St., Bentleigh, Vic. 3204. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports on FNCV Activities General Meeting Monday, 10 April, 1978 The meeting opened with the President congratulating Mrs. Eulalie Bennett on her sixtieth anniversary as an FNCV member. Speaker for the evening was Dr. Birch on 120 ” **Victorian Minerals’’. Minerals are ele- ments or inorganic compounds that occur naturally in the earth’s crust. There are about 3000 different kinds of minerals in the world of which Victoria has about 250. Par- ticular minerals are associated with particu- Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 lar geological environments and the seeker knows what minerals to expect in granite country, in basalt, or in sedimentary areas, etc. Dr. Birch showed colour slides of crys- tals and crystal clusters from two important granite areas of Victoria — Lake Boga and Cape Woolamai, other minerals from basalt areas, old sedimentary, younger sedimen- tary, and from greenstones — Victoria's oldest rocks. Many of us had not realised that minerals could be so colourful and var- ied in form. Exhibits. From the Otways came a sprig of Privet Mock-olive Notelaea ligustrina with globular pink fruits to a centimetre across and small leaves 5 cm x I cm. A Chinese Quince, 15 cm long, was rather like a pear in shape but the fatter part was at the stalk end. A pale green, lozenge-shaped crystal, 3 cm long, was hanging by a fine thread from a tea-tree twig; it was thought to be a spider’s egg-sac, but the fleecy interior re- vealed no eggs. Another 3 cm capsule, but oval and white, contained a small spider. A fascinating series of photos taken at 10 minute intervals from 12.10am to 4.40am on 25 March showed the eclipse of the moon; an explanatory diagram accom- panied the photos. FNCV Centenary in 1980. Members were asked to unearth any historical material re- levant to the Club and Mr. Eric Allan has accepted appointment to the Centenary Committee. There are surely other members who are interested in helping to plan our centenary activities or have ideas of what would be desirable; please contact the Pres- ident or Mr. Allan. 1980 is only 18 months away! Annual General Meeting Monday, 8 May, 1978 Annual Report for 1977 was read by President Mrs. Corrick. The main points were: Club membership remained at about 750, many new members being offset by mem- bers who failed to renew their subscriptions. The six Study Groups all had an active year but the Field Survey Group continues May/June, 1978 in recess. The monthly Sunday outings have con- tinued and there was an 8-day trip to Tas- mania in January and a week at Casterton in October. Another Boneseed eradication day was carried out at Studley Park. With general meetings, Sunday outings, Group meetings and excursions, the $10 membership subscription entitles a person to attend two to three functions of some sort each week! Council has been handicapped by shor- tage of members and lack of officers. For almost two years we have had no secretary. Our Kinglake property has been used as a base for several Group activities. A number of working bees have been held, and there are now two toilets and a barbecue. Some of the Club’s larger possessions are now stored at Kinglake. Our bookstall, under the enthusiastic management of Mr. Dan McInnes, con- tinues to prosper and discounts available to members are much appreciated. The high cost of publishing The Victorian Naturalist continues to cause concern. The small printing of the Author Index to the Naturalist has been sold out. The Subject Index, compiled by the Jate Miss Kathleen Hall, is still being prepared for printing and the annual Treasury Grant is being held in reserve to help with its cost. Another printing of ‘‘Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania’’ was made with the addition of a chapter on cultivation. The Natural History Medallion was pre- sented to Mr. Jack Wheeler of Geelong. Treasurer’s Report for 1977. Financial pages were printed in April issue 1978. Treasurer Mr. McInnes reported a surplus of $150 over the year. The cost of publish- ing the Naturalist has increased by $1300, the total cost being more than $1000 in ex- cess of all subscriptions. But grants from the M. A. Ingram Trust for articles on mammals and birds were $1700 — much larger than previously. Without that assistance the Club would be faced with a heavy loss and it would be necessary to increase subscrip- tions. The cost of future Natural History Medallions will also be very high — more 121 than $150 apiece. Election of Office-bearers and Council Members. The following officers were elected: Editor Mr. Reuben Kent, Librarian Mr. John Martindale, Programmer Dr. Brian Smith, Excursion Secretary Miss Marie Allender, Archives Officer Mr. Barry Callanan, Minute Secretary for general meetings Miss Sue Beattie, and Mr. Frank Koth continues in his appointment as Sub- scription Secretary/Bookkeeper. There were no nominations for President, Vice- President, Secretary and Treasurer. Council members are M. Allender, P. Genery, M. Howes, M. Lester, G. Love, J. Martindale, B. McGregor, T. Sault, B. Smith, A. Thies, and the Immediate Past President M, Cor- rick, Speaker for the evening was the retiring president Mrs. Margaret Corrick on “*Look- ing for Bush-peas’’, Mrs. Corrick opened with a brief survey of the family Papilionaceae, and with diagrams described the features that distinguish the genus Pul- tenaea from other yellow pea flowers. Pul- tenaeas occur only in Australia with 120 species of which Victoria has 45. Then fol- lowed colour slides of different Pultenaeas in a variety of habitats, Mrs. Corrick con- cluded by expressing her appreciation of the drawings by Mr. Rex Filson that accompany her Pultenaea articles in the Naturalist. Exhibits were very few, consisting of some Herbarium sheets of Pultenaeas, some tiny white star-fish Tentorous baculatus, wing of the Azure Blue butterfly P, adonis each under a microscope, and an example of a simple dry mount of a specimen to be examined with a microscope. Alien languages in the Naturalist. The meeting passed this motion: ‘“‘Execept for specific names, the Victorian Naturalist shall be printed in English, but up to a quar- ter of a page in any one issue may be in another language; more than a quarter page of non-English must receive special permis- sion from Council’. It was not considered necessary to print the resolution in the Naturalist once a year as the combined memory of Council members would recall it if the occasion arose. 122 “White Fly’’ Pupa Cases Mr, F. Morley states that it is the pupae not the larvae that had been parasitized by a wasp. 60 years Active Membership Mrs, Eulalie Bennett is a regular atten- dant at Club meetings and often contributes to those meetings with natural history exhibits or nature notes. April marked her sixtieth year as an FNCV member. At the general meeting on 10 April, volumes of 1918 ‘‘Naturalist’’ were displayed along with the usual collection of natural history exhibits. Looking at those 1918 Naturalists makes one realise what a wealth of changes, of association with former notable mem- bers, of controversies, and interesting memories are acquired during 60 years. All members will join with the President in congratulating Eulalie Bennett on her 60 years active membership and in wishing her a healthy lot more. New FNCV Reporter Over some years Miss Madge Lester has been reporting FNCV activities for these pages and her contributions have been much appreciated. But in June, Miss Sue Beattie will become Club Reporter and all will wish her satisfaction in her new undertaking. Study Groups and individual members can help our Reporter by supplying information that they think will interest other Club members. Simply post to Miss S. Beattie at P.O, Box 137, Heidelberg, 3084 or phone 459 2900 Ext. 117. If you want your material to be in a par- ticular issue, it must be with our Reporter before the 7th of the preceding month, But the same Club Diaryist as formerly Material for the FNCV Diary pages should continue to be sent to Miss M. Les- ter, 4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra, 3141, before the 14th of the preceding month, If programmes are not received in time, only the dates of Group meetings can be included. Ep Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 (Continued from page 86) GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting, no extra payment. At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month — Geology Group Wednesday, 7 June. **‘Limestone caves of Victoria’, Mr Lloyd Mills (Speleology Association). Wednesday, 5 July. ‘Aboriginal culture of Australia’’, Dr Gallus, Wednesday, 2 August. *‘Space Exploration, What? for Geology’’. Mr G. Love. Third Wednesday in the Month — Microscopy Group Wednesday, 21 June. How to prepare and mount objects in Canada balsam, glycerine jelly, Euparal and other mountants. 44-hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 19 July. Pond and Marine Microscopic Life, Collection, Treatment, Method of Viewing and Preservation. %4-hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 16 August. Zoological and Botanical Section cutting, staining and mounting. 4-hour members’ exhibits. Second Thursday in the Month — Botany Group Each meeting includes a %-hour session for beginners — various subjects, Thursday, 13 July. *‘Key Night’’, Plants and Ferns will be keyed out using overhead projector. Thursday, 10 August. ‘‘Plants and their Habitats’’. Mornington Peninsula, Mr Tom Sault. At the Conference Room, National Museum, at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area — enter from Latrobe Street First Monday in the Month — Entomology and Marine Biology Group Monday, 3 July. “‘Dragonflies and damsel flies’’. Mr Urwin Bates. Monday, 7 August. ‘‘Insects and the Camera’’. Mrs Z. Lee. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown Street, Heidelberg, at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month — Mammal Survey Group Thursday, 6 July, 3 August, 7 September. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. GEOLOGY GROUP Sunday, 25 June. ‘‘Geology of the South Morang Area’. Meet at 10.00 a.m. South Morang Hotel, South Morang. BOTANY GROUP Saturday, 24 June. ‘‘Mosses’’, Mt Macedon. Saturday, 22 July. ‘‘Ferns’’, Warburton. Saturday, 26 August. ‘‘Habitat’’, Mornington Peninsula. Leader Mr Tom Sault. DAY GROUP — THIRD THURSDAY IN THE MONTH Thursday, 15 June: Weather Bureau. Meet at Carlton Gardens, near corner of Latrobe and Spring Streets at 11.30 a.m. for lunch, after which we cross to the Commonwealth Centre to meet our Guide at 1.25 p.m. Once again the number is limited, so please contact the Group Secretary before the due date. Thursday, 20 July: National Gallery. Meet at Batman Avenue corner, 11.30 a.m. Thursday, 17 August: Botanical Gardens — Lakes area. Meet at corner Park Street and Domain Road, 11.30 a.m. Weekend Camps of Mammal Survey Group 10-12 June. Gelliondale (near Yarram) Details of later camps to be arranged. Contact Secretary. May/June, 1978 123 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established I880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E., Q.C. Key Honorary Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Huntsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Vice-President: Mr. DAVID M. LEE, 15 Springvale Road, Springvale, 3171. Secretary: Mr. G. JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227). Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Treasurer: Mr. D., E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427). Subscription-secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R, D. KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087. (435 8664.) Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra. Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161. (527 2749.) Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. (211 2427.) Archives Officer: Mr. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards St., Coburg, 3058. Tel. 36 0587. Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986). Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127. (89 2850.) Field Survey: Mr. R. D, SANDELL, 39 Rubens Gve., Canterbury, 3126 (836 8009.) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, South Yarra, 3141. Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065. Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy St., East Brighton. (96 3268.) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V, is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1977 PAEODOMEIS. 226-75 0 cio hoe bled dee nae dake bene Fee e TEe hae Fike al co Fees let aE ee ens gee aos. sae $10.00 SATS WA ERHONUIN (rat ct Oa SRK chs cites Pcie omy | WEEN sig bb Ute Uda «AAR at Sis Soa bas PE $12.50 $10.00 $8.00 ify, $10.00 $2.50 $8.00 Overseas Subscription pte zi $10.00 sr SN gs oo ae ene, sul ots bees. tbat tn’ mF Ae ss $8.00 Individual Magazines ................... IEF et lo CEPR ace 101d Eat Soak eg et eee dees veereey $1.20 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. @) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE “ee a a TT, { iw HG hs YS q , % _— | LA AN ol. 95, No. 4 July/August, 1978 \ 17 AUG TI7O Or > \ | ‘fp OF VICT Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria $1.20 Registered for posting at a periodical — category “B’’ F.N.CV. |] [———- FNCY DIARY OF COMING EVENTS ‘GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 14 August, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr P. J. Keame, Lecturer in Bontany, LaTrobe University Subject: Fungi in the environment Monday, 11 September, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Mr Ken Simpson, Lecturer, Science Department, Burwood State College. Subject: Natural History writing. Monday, 9 October, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr T. Rich, Curator of Vertebrate Fossils, National. Subject: Some Australian vertebrate fossils. Monday, 13 November, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Probably winner of 1978 Natural History Medallion. New Members — August General Meeting Ordinary: Mr C. Murdoch, 26 Greta Street, Greensborough, 3088, Mr D. Palmer, 82 Kera Street, Frankston, 3199. Botany Entomology. Mr P. Mathews, 31A Howard Street, Glen Iris, 3136. Botany, Mammals, Mr M. Schulz, 37 Halifax Street, Glen Iris, 3146. Mammals. Mr P. Dawson, 16 Aintree Road, Glen Iris, 3146, Botany. Mr G. Flint, 15 Ratten Avenue, North Kew, 3102. Field Survey & Ecology. MrG. Morgan, 14 Wentworth Avenue, Sandringham, 3191. Botany, Geology, Mammal survey. Mr S. Derrick, 208 Barkly Street, East Brunswick, 3057. Botany, Entomology. Mr D. Philipstos, 1/19 Mcllwraith Street, North Carlton, 3054, Mammals. P. Boocks, 47 Walpole Street, Kew, 3101. Joint Members: Mr A. Broughton & Ms J. Windle, 59 Martin Street, Thornbury, 3071. Plants, Birds, Mr K. Rissanen and Mr J. Rissanen, 24 Buckmaster Drive, Mill Park, 3082. Geology, Botany, Mr N. G, Campbell & Mrs A. Campbell, 6 Lowan Avenue, MacLeod, 3185. Botany, Dr & Mrs M. W. Johns, 187 Rathmines Road, Hawthorn, 3123. Mr N. Wallace and Mrs P. Wallace, 23 Ormond Road, Ivanhoe, 3079. Country Members: Mr F. E. Bienvenu, P.O. Box 235, Myrtleford, 3737. Plants. Mr C. Cornwall, 47 Federation Avenue, Horsham, 3400. Mammals. Mr B. G. Hotton, 98 Lascelles Street, Hopetoun, 3396, Geology. Mr R., Ford, P.O. Box 137, Sunbury, 3429. Entomology. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 20 August. Cranbourne Botanic Gardens Annex. Coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m, Fare $5.00. Bring one meal. Sunday, 17 September. Brisbane Ranges. Coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.00. Bring one meal and a snack. Saturday, 14 October — Friday, 20 October. Grampians and Little Desert. Coach will leave Melbourne on Saturday morning for Ararat probably via Mt Cole; two nights at Ararat, one at Horsham, three nights in Little Desert Lodge at Nhill, Accommodation will be booked on dinner, bed and breakfast basis, Cost, including coach, approx. $180. Deposit $25 should be paid when booking, balance by 12 September. Bookings with Excursion Secretary. Preliminary Notices. Cup Day, Tuesday, 7 November. President's picnic to Bushranger’s Bay. Juniors are especially invited to attend. Saturday, 30 December — Saturday, 6 January. Bundanoon, NSW. Details in next Naturalist. (Continued on page 167) 126 Vict.Nat. Vol. 95 17 AUG i978 OF victos®S The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 4 July/August, 1978 Pe Editor: Reuben D. Kent Editorial Committee: Barry A.Callanan, Margaret G.Corrick, Ian Hood, Margery J.Lester, Brian J. Smith, Paul Temple Observations on the biology of the fish Galaxiella pusilla by G. N. Back- HOUSEsANCC We evan elie pe. gst, omen 8 op, eee awe eye 128 Recent Foraminifera from Limeburners Bay, Victoria by K. N. Bell 133 Wictoria-s-oldest Flowers. by: ‘Ge Douglas «2.4450 ac- end nde 137 The origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by James Baines 141 A new species of gecko, genus Cyrtodactyhis from Cape York Peninsula, neous ancdubyaCnecee Taran ce ie. outcast een ae Aee ns pres oes 142 Comments on the feeding of young Marsupials by J. D. Gupta, Tanya Stephenswrattcras Mutton LoD. Harleys, .. ee ee 147 Does the Koala need to drink water by Robert Degabriele ........ 148 A new locality for the frog Litoria brevipalmata by G. V. Czechura. 150 Radiocarbon dating of the volcanoes of Western Victoria by Edmund D. ELT es ae Pee NAPE Sg eter Taine ees aa os Oe ee 152 Juicy Fruits of the Otways by Mary K. Doery .................. 159 Glow worms of the Otways by Frank Robbins.................. 160 BOOKIREVIGWS2.ehtle wae OLE Net Suhdc irl? teeo eee etarea ts decontrie O48 = 163 Field Naturalist Club of Victoria Report of Meetings ............ 165 Cover Illustration: Litoria brevipalmata (Q.M.J32056) Jimna area, South- East Queensland. (Photo courtesy A. Easton, Queensland Museum.) Observations on the Biology of the Dwarf Galaxiid, Galaxiella pusilla (Mack) (Pisces: Galaxiidae) By G, N. BACKHOUSE* Introduction Fishes of the family Galaxiidae are con- fined mainly to the southern hemisphere, with species occurring in South Africa, South America and the Falkland Islands, New Zealand and outlying islands, New Caledonia, Lord Howe Island, mainland’ Australia and Tasmania (Frankenberg 1969). Six species of galaxiids, belonging to two genera, are found in Victorian waters: Galaxias brevipinnis, G. maculatus, G. olidus, G. rostratus, G. truttaceus, and Galaxiella pusilla (R. M. McDowall, New Zealand Fisheries Research Division, pers. comm.). The dwarf galaxiid has previously been placed in the genera Gulaxias (Mack 1936; Andrews 1976) and Brachygalaxias (Scott 1942; Munro 1956; Frankenberg 1969; Lake 1971), However, McDowall (1973) questioned the inclusion of Galaxias pusillus in the genus Brachygalaxias and proposed the genus Galaxiella (McDowall 1978) to in- clude the dwarf galaxiid and two similar Western Australian species, Galaxiella nig- rostriata and Galaxiella munda. The biology of the dwarf galaxiid is poorly understood. Massola (1938) reported the spawning of the dwarf galaxiid in an aquarium and Frankenberg (1974) included brief information on its habitat. The present study was undertaken to increase the avail- able knowledge concerning the biology of the dwarf galaxiid. This paper presents information gained *Victorian Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Snobs Creek Freshwater Fisheries Research Station and Hatchery, Private Bag 20, Alexandra, Vic., 3714. **Eastern Districts Aquarium Society Native Fishes Study Group, C/o Hon. Secretary, Mr. G. Brockhoff, 24 Harlington Street, Clayton, Vic, 128 AND R. W. VANNER** from preliminary observation of the dwarf galaxiid, Ga/axiella pusilla, both in field and in laboratory aquaria, Materials and Methods Field observations were made from mid-April until early September (1977) at Cardinia Creek, Berwick, Diamond Creek, Tonimbuk, and Narracan Creek, Moe. Aquarium observations were made from about 20 specimens, collected from Narra- can Creek, Moe, in mid-April and placed in a 20 | aquarium, and from about 50 speci- mens collected from Diamond Creek and Narracan Creek in early and late August, and placed in 80 1 aquaria. The aquaria had a gravel substrate and were thickly planted with aquatic vegeta- tion. Filtration was supplied by sub-sand filter systems. Specimens were collected using fine mesh dip nets. All measurements (except where otherwise stated) were taken from material preserved in 10% formalin. Description of Adult Fish The dwarf galaxiid is the only galaxiid known to exhibit sexual dimorphism. No information is available yet as to whether the related Western Australian galaxiids exhibit this phenomenon, Males are smaller and more brightly col- oured than females. Total lengths of a sam- ple of 21 mature males ranged from 29.8- 33.5 mm, and maximum body depth from 4,0-4.5 mm. Total lengths of a sample of 16 mature females ranged from 32.5-40.3 mm, and a maximum body depth from 6.3-6.9 mm. The dorsal surface of the male is light brown, and often has a few scattered small black dots. Laterally, two black horizontal lines run along the body of the fish, the Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 } Fe Aes Ons Oy MO ee papain rae pee emer Be ea aI NT en emer a GNB. Fig, 1. Galaxiella pusilla. female. 36.5 mm. T.L. Cardinia Creek, Beaconsfield, uppermost line starting above the eye and running through to the caudal peduncle, while the lower line starts from the mid- operculum and runs through to the anal fin, then ventrally to the caudal peduncle. Between these two black lines is a bright orange-red stripe. The ventral surface is white, often with two rows of small black spots extending back from the jugular region to the ventral fins. The dorsal and upper lateral surfaces of the female are light brown, and a black line runs mid-laterally from the operculum to the caudal peduncle. Often a purplish-green iridescent line is present just above the black line. The ventral surface is white. Distribution The dwarf galaxiid is widespread throughout Victoria (Fig. 2), probably more so, especially in the Gippsland region, than previous reports (Andrews 1976; Franken- berg 1969; Munro 1956) indicate. The species is also found in far eastern South Australia (C. J. M. Glover, South Australian Museum; pers. comm.), Flinders Pee Fig. 2. Distribution of Galaxiella pusilla in Victoria. July/August, 1978 Island, and the Waterhouse district of north-eastern Tasmania (Frankenberg 1974). Description of Habitat The dwarf galaxiid is typically found in still waters such as swamps, drains and backwaters of creeks and streams. The wat- ers are usually shallow, often less than 30 cm deep and have abundant aquatic vegeta- tion. In larger pools the galaxiid is usually captured in the marginal vegetation sur- rounding the edge of the pool. Tite waters inhabited by the galaxiid are often temporary, drying up partially or completely during summer, and being re- plenished by rainfall or floodwaters from a watercourse during the wetter months. Non-breeding Behaviour Little is known of the habits of this di- minutive fish in the wild. Adult fish were not observed during the day, although the dense surface vegetation typical of their habitat precludes observation below the sur- face. However, juvenile fish were readily observed on the surface in vegetation-free areas of the pools. They often congregated in groups of as many as 20 individuals but schooling behaviour* was not evident. The dwarf galaxiids survived satisfactor- ily in aquaria, especially if these were densely planted with aquatic plants. The fish were active during the day, occupying most levels of the aquarium, but apparently preferred the lower strata and rarely ap- proached the surface. Schooling was not observed, and intraspecific aggression ap- *Fish moving as a co-ordinated group. 129 peared minimal, if not absent. When frightened by some external stimulus, such as sudden movement or bright light, the fish immediately darted to the bottom of the aquarium and hid amongst the plants. The diet of the dwarf galaxiid is not known, but in aquaria they fed on plant material, such as filamentous algae, and ac- cepted insect larvae and other freshwater invertebrates. They also accepted commercially-prepared fish food. Breeding Biology Little is known of the breeding biology of the dwarf galaxiid in its natural habitat. Gravid females and larval fish were ob- served in the study areas from late July to early September. A sample of 26 larval fish taken from Diamond Creek in late August measured 5.1-19.3 mm. Dwarf galaxiids taken from Narracan Creek in early April and placed in an aquarium spawned eight days later. When captured the females did not appear to be gravid, but ripened rapidly when introduced to the aquarium. Females captured from the same location in early and late August were obviously gravid and spawned within 48 h of introduction into an aquarium, The first indication of spawning was given when a male gently nudged the jugular and abdomi- nal regions of a female. Often two, and sometimes three males were observed dis- playing this behaviour towards a single female. The intensity of the red stripe did not vary during this prespawning activity, and there was no elaborate display pattern. Atthis stage if the female was not ready to spawn, she rapidly swam away from the courting male(s); if ready to spawn, she allowed the attentions of the courting male(s) to continue. Then the female and one male entered dense vegetation and investigated numerous sites on the leaves and stones on which to deposit the eggs. When a site had been selected, the pair brushed their bodies rapidly forward over the leaf or stone. 130 Two movements facilitating egg deposi- tion were observed. The female made a rapid pass and, pressing the genital aperture’ momentarily to the selected site, deposited a single egg on the top surface of stones or leaves, On narrow-leaf plants the egg may be sheared off as the female passed, adher- ing to the lower surface. However, the pre- ferred site for depositing eggs appeared to be the lower surface of a leaf. The egg is deposited by the female moving forward under the leaf, rolling over quickly and de- positing the egg. The male fish then moved past the egg one or more times, but precise moment of fertilisation is not known, The prespawning behaviour often lasted several minutes although spawning occur- red ina few seconds, After the egg had been laid the pair separated and paid no further attention to the egg. Pair bonds were of a brief duration — males spawned with any female that was ready, and after spawning searched out other females ready to spawn, Females spawned several times in a single day. At temperatures of 16-21C and a pH of 6.9 the eggs hatched in 10-14 days. The ‘“*eyed-stage’’ was visible after 5-6 days. After emerging tail-first, the larvae fell to the bottom of the aquarium. A sample size of 6 larvae measured 4.2-4.8 mm long. A prominent yolk-sac was visible. Within 1-2 days the young fish swam to the surface and remained just below the water surface. The yolk-sac was fully absorbed within 3 days, and the larval fish swam freely near the water surface. No more than 18 eggs were laid in any 24 h period, and at least two females contri- buted to this number. Examination of the ovaries of 12 mature females in breeding condition from the three study areas revealed 155-197 eggs per female. These fish were obtained in late August, after the spawning season had been in progress for at least one month. The diameter of a sample size of 15 unfertilized mature eggs ranged from 0.7-0.8 mm, while the diameter of 12 fertilised, unpreserved eggs ranged from 1.1-1.3 mm. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Discussion Little is known about the breeding biol- ogy of galaxiids although that of Galaxias maculatus ((McDowall 1968; Pollard 1971) and G. vulgaris (Cadwallader 1976) has been studied, Comparison of the reproduc- tive modes of the three species reveals an interesting difference in breeding biology. Galaxias maculatus lives in freshwater, but migrates downstream during the breed- ing season to spawn on the grassy banks of estuaries covered by the peak of a spring tide. The eggs develop, out of water, until the next peak tide, about two weeks later, covers the eggs, which then hatch. The lar- vae are washed out to sea, where they de- velop. After several months the immature fish migrate into fresh water. As many as 13 000 eggs are laid (McDowall 1968) ap- parently on the estuarine grasses, as no nest is made, G. vulgaris (a New Zealand species) is confined to freshwater, and lays fewer eggs than G. maculatus. Cadwallader (1976) recorded 284-1911 eggs per female. G. vulgaris also constructs a nest, a depression in the gravel beneath overhanging rocks, into which several females may spawn. The construction of a nest, a more precise breeding behaviour, increases the chances of fertilization of the eggs, and with this increase in fertilization success there is a decrease in fecundity. Our observations of the spawning habits of the dwarf galaxiid, and the numbers of eggs appearing in the aquarium each day suggest that each female lays only a few eggs a day, probably no more than 10. Therefore each female probably spawns over an extended period, possibly two weeks or more. Massola (1938) observed that a female dwarf galaxiid laid 59 eggs in two days, then died. The most precise method of fertilization and consequently that providing the highest chance of an egg being fertilized is the lay- ing of a single egg in a predetermined spot. Thus the dwarf galaxiid shows the most refined reproductive behaviour so far known among the Australian galaxiids. July/August, 1978 The small South American species Brachygalaxias bullocki spawns ina similar fashion (Campos 1972), but has a lower fecundity (50-120 eggs; average 100) and slightly larger eggs (1,0-1.9 mm) than the dwarf galaxiid. About 7 eggs are laid in a 24 h period, B. bullocki may show a slightly greater refinement than the dwarf galaxiid in that the pair bonds last for several hours, which, even though temporary, are considerably longer than those of the dwarf galaxiid. The habitat of the dwarf galaxiid poses an interesting question. How do populations of the species survive when their habitat, usu- ally shallow, still waters, dry up partially or completely during summer. In such hostile environments fish have developed several methods of surviving, but which one the dwarf galaxiid employs is not known. Some galaxiids are capable of aestiva- tion, usually burying themselves beneath rocks or logs as the water recedes. This has been demonstrated in two of the New Zea- land Neochanna sp. (McDowall 1970) and may occur in some of the Tasmanian galaxtids (Frankenberg 1974). If the dwarf galaxiid dies out from hostile areas as the water dries up, it may be able to recolonize such areas rapidly when suffi- cient water is available. What we already know of the dwarf galaxiid’s lifestyle shows that its survival depends on suitable habitats such as shal- low, still waters. Where rivers are channelized and water courses are encased in concrete, there is less prospect of the creation of suitable habitats such as would occur during flooding. The draining of swamps where the dwarf galaxiid lives is also detrimental to its survi- val. It is hoped that future studies may help answer some of the many questions posed by the life history of the dwarf galaxiid, which is certainly unique among the galaxiids of Victoria. Acknowledgements The authors would like to thank Dr. P. 131 Jackson and Dr. D. Evans for commenting on the manuscript and Miss S. Beattie for preparing the distribution map. REFERENCES Andrews, A. P., 1976 Galaxiidae (Pisces) in Tasmania Freshwat. Res. 27: 297-349 Cadwullader, P. L., 1976. Breeding biology of a non- diadromous galaxiid, Gu/axias vulgaris Stokell in a New Zealand river. J. Fish Biol, 8: 157-77 Cumpos, H., 1972, Breeding season and early develop- ment of Bruchyeulaxiuy bullecki (Osteichthyes: Galuxtidue). Tea. J, Sei. 23: 531-44 f Frankenberg, R. S. (1969). Studies of the evolution of galaniid fishes, with particular reference to the Austra- lian fauna, Ph.D. Thesis. University of Melbourne. Frankenberg, R, S., 1974. Native Freshwater Fish; in Bio-geography and Ecology in Tasmania. pp. 113- 140. Ed. Williams, W. D. The Hague: W-. Junk. Lake, J. S.. 1971. Freshwater Fishes and Rivers of Australia. Nelson, Melbourne. A revision of the family Aust, J, M Rey. Bull. 2: 1-84- McDowall, R. M., 1970. The Galaaiid fishes of New Zealand. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1397): 341-432. McDowall, R. M., 1973. Limitation of the genus Brachygalaxias Eigenmann, 1928 (Pisces: Galaxiidae), J, Roy. Soc. N.Z. 3(2): 193-7. McDowall, R. M., 1978, A new genus and species of Galaxiid fish from Australia (Salmoniformes: Galaniidae), J. Ray. Sac. N.Z. 8(1): 115-24. Mack, G., 1936. Victorian species of the genus Galaxias with descriptions of new species. Mem. Nat. Mus, Vie, 9: 98-101. Massola, A., 1938, Description of a new species of Galaxia. Aquarium J. San Francisco 11(10): 129. Munro, [. S.R,, 1956. Handbook of Australian fishes. Fish, Newslett, Aust. 16: 32-6. Pollard, D. A., 1971, The biology of a landlocked form of the normally catadromous salmoniform fish Galaxius maculatus (Jenyns) — 1. Life cycle and origin. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwar. Res. 22: 91-123. Scott, E. O. G., 1942, Description of Tasmanian mud trout, Galaxtas upcheri sp. noy.: with a note on the genus Brachyyalaxiasy Eigenmann (1924) and its oc- McDowall, R. M., 1968. Galaxtas maculatus Jenyns), currence in Australia. Rec. Queen Vic. Mus. 1(1): the New Zealand whitebait, V.Z. Mar. Dept. Fish. 51-7. Australian Natural History Medallion Fund Amount on hand invested — 20 April, 1978 $656.00 Latrobe Valley Field Naturalists Club 10.00 Newcastle Flora & Fauna Protection Society (second donation) 10.00 Portland Field Naturalists’ Club 10.00 The Entomological Society of Aust. (N.S.W.) 25.00 Mrs. N. A. Wakefield (third donation) 10.00 Illawarra Natural History Society (third donation) 10.00 Total $731.00 Inflation and the Medallion — A note to doners We extend our thanks to all who have so far subscribed to this fund. In 1975 the quote for making the Medallion was $83 plus 15% sales tax, a total of $95.45. This year, 1978, the quote without sales tax was $220. Because of the prestige of the award the manufacturer is generously offering to make it for $150, i.e., $172.50 after adding sales tax. This large rise in the cost of the actual Medallion, coupled with increasing postal charges, will almost double the total cost of administering the award. Without the assistance of the income from this fund the future of the Medallion would have been very uncertain. The fund will remain gpen and further donations would be appreciated, MARGARET CORRICK, Secretary to the Australian Natural History Medallion General Committee, 132 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Recent Foraminifera from Limeburners Bay, Victoria BY K. N. BELL* Abstract Twelve species of foraminifera have been recorded alive from tidal mud flats at Limeburners Bay, Victoria. The estuary can be divided into two regions, a southerly zone with Ammobaculites exiguus and a northerly zone withMiliammina fusca as the characteristic species. Locality Limeburners Bay is an inlet on the north side of Corio Bay which is on the western side of Port Phillip Bay. Into the inlet flows Hovell’s Creek which is also known as Duckponds Creek and as Limeburners Creek. Whilst flowing throughout the year, the creek has a restricted flow during the summer months. The estuary is protected from any exces- sively strong wave energy as it is located behind a sand spit which almost completely closes the entrance. This type of estuary may be called an estuarine lagoon. Tidal influences extend up to the Princes Highway Road bridge. Methods of Study Because of the shallow nature of the inlet (3 metres deepest), at low tide large ex- panses of flats are exposed. All the samples investigated were collected from these flats at low tide during July, 1969. No special collecting device was used. Approximately 50 g of wet sediment was taken from the top 1-2 cm and placed in 70% alcohol. After washing out the sea-water and preservative with fresh water, a small amount of 0.1% rose Bengal stain solution was added and the sample allowed to stand for 2 hours. The sample was then dried and the foraminifera *Honorary Associate, Invertebrate Department, Na- tional Museum of Victoria. July/August, 1978 Sample Localities, Limeburners Boy Corio Bay 10) 1 2Km So floated off using carbon tetrachloride. Or- ganisms which were living when collected had the protoplasm stained bright red. It was found that many dead tests stained pale pink but were easily distinguished from the living foraminifera. Sample localities are shown on Fig. 1. The samples consisted of 5 types: (a) shell debris with sand but very little clay or organic matter — samples 6, qs (b) a thin layer of sand (42-1 cm) over- lying black, broken shells — samples Byte ON Dds 14s 53 133 DISTRIBUTION OF PORAMINIFERA AT LIMEBURNERS BAY hn hn a Ge i on imam isd = onl. Teo Miliammina fusca c | F 4 c c R c Trochammina inflata R R R Ammobaculites exiguus | lian c c R Ammotius australiensis R Reophax barwonensia R | Quingueloculins seminula R R | P ¢ e |ee ¢ ? |r | R S- poeyana | R a R Ammonia soteanus c R at R Cc. c Cc c Pr R | # a a Buliminella elegantissima | | R R | Elphidiue craticulatum | R R | 5. advenum R P c Cc c a F | R E. simplex Rg R R | Number of Species/Sample 5 e 3 3 2 7 9 3 5 5 3 ao | e| ff} ff ff ff (c) a thick layer of sand (3-5 cm) over- lying black, broken shells — sample 2: (d) a thin veneer of sand (%-1 cm) over- lying basalt blocks — sample 12; (e) a thick clayey mud — samples 17, 185-2021} Upstream from sample 15 mangroves line the west bank of the creek for about 0.5 km. Samples 20 and 17 came from the mangrove flats and sample 18 from a ‘‘Zostera’’ bed lying between two mangrove flats. Abundances of species is indicated by R (rare), F (frequent) and C (common). Sam- ples 1, 3,5, 8, 13, 16, 19 contained no live forams. Fauna The table shows the species found alive at each locality. Of the 12 species found alive only 5 are of frequent occurrence — Am- monia aoteanus, Miliammina fusca, Am- mobaculites exiguus, Quinqueloculina seminula and Elphidium advenum. These figures show that the estuary can be divided into two zones — one characterized by M. fusca in the upper reaches, the other zone characterized by A. exiguus and being re- stricted to the lower reaches of the estuary. 134 SAMPLES The other three main species have a wide- spread distribution. All other living species found are very rare being represented by only 1-4 specimens and these occurring in few samples. List of Species Ammonia aoteanus (Finlay); 159 speci- mens. This is the mostcommon species over the entire tidal flat. There is no indication of heavy beading on the sutures or the base as is characteristic of A. beccarii. The staining of the tests showed that the protoplasm oc- curred in the penultimate chamber. The re- mainder of the test chambers was pale green. Ammotium australiensis (Collins); 2 specimens. Both specimens were small and ill-formed. Miliammina fusca (Brady); 76 speci- mens. Typical, well formed specimens were common but restricted to the upper reaches of the estuary. The protoplasm was always found to be contracted within the test chamber and never extruded. Ammobaculites exiguus (Cushman and Bronnimann); 48 specimens. All living specimens came from the east side of the Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 1. Elphidium craticulatum X125. 2. Discorbis dimidiatus X70, 3. Miliammina fusca X70. 4. Ammobaculites exiguus X35. 5. Elphidium advenum X125. 6. Elphidium simplex X100. 7. Ammonia aoteanus X125. July/August, 1978 135 lower part of the estuary. The planispiral coil section of the test has been found de- tached from the uniserial linear segment. The test is coarsely arenaceous being made of agglutinated platy sand grains. Trochammina inflata (Montagu); 5 specimens. Although rare alive, dead specimens were present in large numbers (especially in sample 2). Reophax barwonensis (Collins); 3 speci- mens. Quinqueloculina seminula (Linne); 62 specimens. This is a characteristic species of most Victorian intertidal mud flats. The protoplasm was found extruded from the aperture as a rounded tongue in most cases. Quinqueloculina poeyana (d’Orb); 8 specimens. This species is easily distin- guished by its costate sculpture. The proto- plasm was found extruded from the aperture and attached to sand grains, Buliminella elegantissima (d’Orb); 2 specimens. This species is more characteris- tic of fully marine environments. No dead tests were found. The specimens were quite small. Elphidium advenum (Cushman); 59 specimens. A widespread species, although the number of specimens present in each sample varied greatly. The penultimate chamber stained red, whilst in many cases the remainder of the test was green. Elphidium craticulatum (Fichtel and Moll); 2 specimens. Elphidium simplex (cushman); 3 speci- 136 mens. One specimen was found in each of 3 samples (2, 11, 15) from the middle reaches of the estuary. Specimens were small and not as lobate in outline as specimens from other intertidal localities. Discussion Overall, the living fauna ts typical of in- tertidal mud-flats from other Victorian localities although many of the specimens were much smaller than the normal size. This may be due to the influence of the freshwater from Limeburners Creek and the resulting wider salinity ranges occurring in the estuary compared with the normal mudflat environment. The presence of the rare species in the mid-estuary area and not near the entrance where the water is of normal salinity is due to the effects of the substrate. Near the sand spit entrance the substrate consists of mobile sands with little clay or weed to form a firm support for the forams. At site 10 and up- stream the substrate becomes more clayey thus forming a suitable environment. The deepest water is near sites 10 and 11 and these are less affected by the freshwater run-off, so forming a typical tidal mud flat area in these middle reaches of the estuary. Acknowledgement The R.M.I.T. Electron Microscope Unit, Dept. of Applied Physics, took the photo- micrographs of the seven species of foraminifera shown on the plate. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Victoria’s Oldest Flowers BY J. G. DouGLAS* Resume Two flower compressions recently col- lected from Victorian Lower Tertiary sedi- ments are among the oldest recorded from Australia. One from Anglesea is tentatively placed in the Myrtaceae, the other from near Mount Hotham has floral parts less clearly distinguishable, making relationship to pre- sent day genera more conjectural. Introduction Most plant vegetative and reproductive organs are fossilized in profusion in favour- able locations. In extreme abundance they form coal, but are so changed that the com- ponents are difficult to isolate and recog- nize. Often, in mudstones, leaves and stems are readily recognizable as impressions, or compressions with epidermal structures preserved. In fine grained sandstone heavier woody material may be silicified or other- wise preserved, and pollens, spores, and other fertile organs occur in a variety of sediments, Carbonaceous fruit remains, sometimes quite sizeable, were commonly found in our sub-basaltic deep leads or hid- den streams during the early gold mining days. An exception is the flower, or specialized reproductive shoot of the angiosperms, which is rare or absent in most fossil as- semblages. The record for Australia is meagre, but has been supplemented by the recent discovery of specimens from two Victorian localities. In November, 1976, a visit to the AL- COAT brown coal open cut at Anglesea (Fig. 1) was organised by the Geological *The author is grateful to ALCOA of Australia Limited for facilitating access to the open cut area during several Visits. t Geological Survey of Victoria. July/August, 1978 oy y ¢ | ye ye \ ! ~ i \ f NA 7 \ | VICTORIA sate \ Gr ! Creeks : Min | Hl +> i =" = wy a Ang tf pees inpiaeany vi aw, t Pen Vn “vp Fig. |. Locality map, Survey of Victoria for a small party of local and overseas scientists, Plants in varying stages of preservation were found en masse in a mudstone lens exposed in the overbur- den, and on a subsequent visit in February, 1977, a flower compression was collected. In March, 1977, plant fossils were col- lected from black shales very near the top of sub-basaltic Tertiary fluviatile beds at the abandoned Brandy Creek mine, near Mount Hotham. The assemblage, sparse compared with that of Anglesea, also yielded a well preserved compression of a small flower. Geology A summary of the geology of the Eastern View Coal Measures was included in Gloe (1976). The plant bed under discussion ts interbedded in sand and gravel 30 m below the surface, and appears to be conformable with the upper coal seam. Stratigraphical relationships suggest that the lens is in the Upper Eocene part of the section. As- sociated plant fossils are mostly broad leaved dicotyledons, but ferns and conifers were figured in an introductory report (Douglas 1977). At the Brandy Creek mine, sluicing for gold has exposed a section where basalt overlies Tertiary sediments, which in turn 137 overlie Ordovician bedrock. Underlying the basalt is a weathered yellow-brown clay, in turn underlain by a lignite band up to 20 cm in thickness, The flower was found in a fine black shale below this lignite. A moderately fine grained gravel, the source of most of the gold obtained, underlies this shale and forms the greater part of the Tertiary sequ- ence. The co-fossilized plants are mostly angiosperm leaves, smaller than the major- ity of those in the Anglesea assemblage. Ferns and conifers are also present. Description of Specimens Registered numbers: GS V 65088, 65089 (Counterpart). Locality: Anglesea, ALCOA brown coal mine. Northwest corner of open cut excavation, in eroded corner of overbur- den wall. See ALCOA Quarterly Survey, March, 1977, drawing number 1-006230- AA, Scale 1:1250. Collectors: J. G. Doug- las & R. Gould. Date: 8/2/77. Identification: Cf. Leptospermum: sp. (Figs. 3a, 3b.) Description: Compression, with compression-impression counterpart. Re- ceptacle, circular, diameter. | em, with 5 semi-hemispherical appendages (sepals?), radius approximately 5 mm, joined at, or very near, receptacle periphery. Remarks All the evidence indicates that the fossil is a dicotyledonous flower with a large recep- tacle and 5 appendages. There are numerous families with members bearing floral parts in similar array, and among the most closely comparable is the Myrtaceae. Observations on several members of this family showed that they lose petals much more readily than sepals when perianth wilt- ing proceeds. This was particularly evident in Leptospermum species where thin sepals persist after the petals have fallen, and the appendages of the fossil are therefore re- garded as sepals. Because, in addition, cuticle from the macerated fossil appendage is very closely similar to that of the extant Leprospermum sepal, an affiliation with Leprospermum is 138 suggested. Registered number: GS V 65090, Locality: Brandy Creek mine, 3 km noi‘h east of Mount Hotham, Coords. Alpine are. 1:10,000, 645321. Under basalt cliff in southern exposure. Collector: J. G. Douglas. Date: 23/3/77. Identification: Dicotyledonous flower. (figs. 2a, 2b.) Description: Black carbonaceous com- pression, diameter 12 mm, with 10? promi- nent oblong-lanceolate appendages, maximum length 10 mm. Appendage width up to 5 mm, apex rounded, with numerous fine longitudinal surface striae, joined by transverse members forming delicate rec- tangular pattern visible under low magnifi- cation, Stalk length preserved 2 cm, width 2 mm at receptacle base. Leaf associated, apparently lanceolate, lamina length 2 cm, width greater than | em, margins obscured. Midrib prominent, secondary veins at 70°, fine tertiary vein system interconnecting. Remarks Preservation and attitude of fossilization is such that much of the fossil is obscured. Distinction of parts among the mass of com- pressed carbonaceous material is difficult, and initially I envisaged a Casuarina-like fruit, or distinct ray and disc florets of a composite. My interpretation however is that the fossil represents a dicotyledonous flower, with 5 sepal and 5 petal parts. petal parts, Attachment to the flower of the as- sociated leaf cannot be demonstrated but | believe it arises from the same plant, Concluding Discussion As already noted, fossil flowers are rare in Australian Tertiary beds. Duigan (1951) in her catalogue of Australian Tertiary flora listed only one, from Early Tertiary beds at Vegetable Creek, N.S.W. This was figured by Ettinghausen (1888), as Gertonites Wil- kinsoni and is approximately the same size us the Brandy Creek flower, but with small- er receptacle, Vic.Nat, Vol, 95 ~ ~~ heme oem. 3a a b. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. loa) Gill (1950) figured inflorescences from near Hobart, and considered them to be probably Miocene in age, but did not in- clude detailed description or suggest affilia- tions. Christophel and Blackburn (1977) noted flowers in the Eocene flora of Maslin July/August, 1978 . Dicotyledonous flower x2, Brandy Creek mine. . Drawing showing interpretation of perianth parts. . Cf, Leptospermum sp. x2. ALCOA brown coal mine, Anglesea. . Drawing showing perianth arrangement. Beach, South Australia, but these have not yet been described. In my work on Victorian Mesozoic floras (Douglas 1969) I suggested that an even older specimen (Cretaceous) from Koon- warra might be a flower, but I now regard this as a lacerated stem apex. 139 Fig. 4. a. Fertile branchlet x2. ALCOA brown coal mine, : b, Spores, xc300, indicating derivation from pteridophyte, macerated from fertile branchlet. Maceration techniques* were used on the fossils in an effort to obtain microfloral evi- dence for comparison with present day genera, but no pollen aggregations were isolated. Maceration of another fertile branchlet (Fig. 4a) from the Anglesea col- lection initially suspected of angiosperm af- finities resulted in the isolation of well pre- served spores (Fig. 4b), indicating deriva- tion from a pteridophyte, (fern), not a flow- ering plant. *See article by Millett in Jan./Feb. 1978 Vict. Nat. discussing use of epidermal structures in plant identifi- cation. REFERENCES Christophel, D. C. & Blackburn, D. T., 1977. An Eocene flora from Maslin Beach, South Australia, Abstracts, 2nd Aust. Geol, Convent. Sect. 2A p. 11. Douglas, J. G., 1969. The Mesozoic floras of Victoria Pts. | & 2. Mem. Geol. Surv. Vict. 28. Douglas, J. G., 1977. A new fossil plant assemblage from the Eastern View Coal Measures, Unpub, Rep. geol. Surv. Vic., 1977 — 31 (Unpub.). Duigan, S. L., 1951, A catalogue of the Australian Tertiary flora. Proc. R. Soc. Vict., 63:pp. 41-56. Ettinghausen, C. Von., 1888. Contribution to the Ter- tiary flora of Australia. Mem. geol. Surv. N.S.W, Palaeontology 2. Gill, E. D., 1950. Flowers of thirty million years ago. Wild Life 12:7 318-319. Gloe, C, S., 1976. Brown coal, Economic geology in Geology of Victoria, J. G. Douglas and J. A, Fer- guson*Eds. Geol. Soc. Aust. spec. Pub. 5 p. 386. Subscription Rates to Rise from 1 January, 1979 The Club’s audited Statement of Income and Expenditure for the year ended 31 De- cember shows that the cost of producing and despatching the Naturalist was over one thousand dollars more than our total sub- scriptions received. This amount plus our working expenses had to come from grants and interest from investments, etc. 140 We had a surplus of only $140 last year and this year we could show a loss. Council has prudently agreed to a small rise of $2 on all subscriptions except Juniors without Naturalist. GARNET JOHNSON Hon. Secretary, FNCV. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 104 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A. BAINES *Peucedanum. Gk peukedanon, parsnip (see comments under Pustinaca). *Phalaris. Gk name for a grass of this genus, probably from phalos, shining; al- luding to the shining appearance of the fruit- ing glume. Our four introduced species are all known as different kinds of canary-grass. The genus gives its name to the tribe Phalarideae in family Gramineae (Poaceae), Jaeger gives the origin as Gk phalaros, hav- ing a patch of white. Phebalium, Gk phibalee, a kind of myr- tle (first ¢ short, second e long); or Gk phibaleos, a kind of fig-tree; latinized by Ventenat in 1805 asPhebalium with change of first vowel from ito e. The former deriva- tion seems more probable, for, while the genus is in family Rutaceae, there is a superficial resemblance to myrtaceous Species in the flowers, and certainly no pos- sible likeness to the genus Ficus in Moraceae. The genus is restricted to Aus- tralia, except for one N.Z. species, Victoria having 15 of Australia’s 40 species. It is Strange that no common name, other than the generic name, has emerged for any of our species except P. squameum, Satin- wood, a name used for Queensland and West Indian species of Zanthoxylum (Rutaceae) and for the Indian tree, Chlorox- ylon swietenia (Meliaceae). Philydrum. Gk philos, loving; hydor, hydra, water; because it grows in shallow freshwater swamps. Our species, P. lanuginosum, Woolly Waterlily, is another plant masquerading as a lily, since its genus belongs not to Liliaceae but to Philydraceae, which gets its name from it. The specific epithet means woolly. Phlegmatospermum. Gk phlegma, phlegm (originally meant heat); sperma, seed; the seeds being mucose when mois- tened. Our species, P. cochlearinum, has no common name, despite the ‘jawbreaker’ binomial; the specific epithet means spoon- shaped (latinized from Gk kochlos, a mol- luse with a spiral shell, from kochlo, to wind or turn, hence Lat cochlea, snail shell, and cochlear, spoon), named from the com- pressed form of the seeds. It was first clas- sified in Eunomia, then Thlaspi (family Cruciferae). *Phleum, Gk phleos, name of a reed, rush or grass in classical authors, said to be, according to Gilbert-Carter, Erianthus ravennae (Gramineae), and perhaps applied to this genus because of the crowded inflorescence. The species naturalized here, *P. pratense, Timothy Grass, was called Meadow Cat’s-tail until, after Timothy Hanson introduced it to New Hampshire from England about 1720, it was re- imported to England as St. Timothy’s Grass by 1746! The full story is told by David McClintock in his ‘Companion to Flowers’, pp. 181-182. Now it is an important pasture grass in many countries. New edition ‘*Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania”’ The 1977 edition, further up-dated by Dr Willis, includes a chapter on the cultivation of ferns, $3.75; special discount to FNCV members $2.75; postage 40c, Order from FNCV Sales Officer, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. July/August, 1978 141 A new species of gecko, genus Cyrtodactylus, from Cape York Peninsula, Queensland, Australia BY G. J. INGRAM* Abstraet Cyrtodactylus galgajuga sp. nov. is known only from the bare, black boulder mountains of the Trevethan Range near Cooktown, Queensland. Introduction There are two species of Cyrtodactylus (C. louisiadensis and C. pelagicus) re- corded from Australia, where they are found in the Torres Strait Islands and northeast Queensland (Cogger 1975). Both occur in New Guinea and C. pelagicus is also found on the islands of the south west Pacific (De Rooij 1915). Recently Brown and Parker (1973) de- scribed a new Cyrtodactylus from New Guinea and published a key to the species of the island. They used the pattern of the en- larged scales in the preanal region and on the under surface of the thighs for distinguish- ing the species. This was also found to be a useful diagnostic character for the new species described in this paper. Abbreviations used in the text are as fol- lows:— SVL, snout-vent length; TL, tail length; HW, head width; HDL, head length; AG, distance between the axilla and groin; FL, length of forelimb; HL, length of hindlimb; EW, eye width; TW, ear width; EN, distance between nare and anterior bor- der of the eye; IN, internarial span. Ratios are given as percentages. Cyrtodactylus galgajuga new species Holotype Queensland Museum J29474, collected by G. J. Ingram and D. Miller, near Black * Queensland Museum, Gregory Terrace, Fortitude Val- ley, Queensland, Australia, 142 Mountain (15° 40’ S. 145° 14' EB), Tre- vethan Range, 22 km S of Cooktown on 1 January, 1977. Paratype Australian Museum R70110, collected by W. Hosmer at the same locality as above, in early 1977. Diagnosis A slim rock-dwelling Cyrtodactylus (plate 1) with the preanal and femoral reg- ions covered by enlarged scales relative to the smaller scales of the anal area and the posterior surfaces of the thighs (plate 2), ten well defined rows of tubercles at midbody, no lateral skin fold, and six purplish trans- verse bands between ear region and hind limbs. Distribution Known only from the boulder mountains of the Trevethan Range, south of Cook- town, NE Queensland. Description (meristics of holotype given first) SVL 50 and 49. TL (tail of holotype bro- ken) 119. HW/SVL 19 and 19. AG/SVL 42 and 42. FL/S VL 32 and 35. HL/S VL 53 and 50. HDL/SVL 29 and 29. EW/HDL 29 and 28. TW/HDL 8 and 9. EN/IN 50 and SO. Head covered with small granules, small- er posteriorly and larger anteriorly; scat- tered pointed tubercles as far anterior as the interorbital region. Rostral large. Nostril bordered by the rostral, supranasal, first upper labial, postnasal and 2 small scales. Supranasals large, separated by one small scale. Upper labials 9, lower labials 7. Pair of postmentals separated by a large mental. Ten well defined longitudinal rows of pointed dark tubercles on dorsal surface of Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 midbody. Ventral surface covered by many small scales, becoming larger posteriorly (plate 2); scales between hind legs, very large and about twice the size of the sur- rounding scales; rounded scales on posterior surface of thighs very small, meeting larger flat scales of ventral surface of thighs which July/August, 1978 Plate | 1. Cyrtodactylus pelagicus QM J25320, Home Rule, N.E. Queensland. 2. Cyrtodactylus galgajuga AM R70110 (paratype), Black Mountain, N.E. Queensland. 3. Cyrtodactylus louisiadensis QM J30063, 22 km E. of Chillagoe, N.E. Queensland (scale in centimetres). are about twice their size. Scales surround- ing vent are smaller than surrounding scales. Scales under tail are the largest vent- ral scales. No femoral or preanal pores. Number of lamellae under fourth toe 17 and 16. Palmar tubercles large and rounded. Tail cylindrical. 143 Plate 2 Under surface of thighs and tail of Cyrtodactylus galgajuga (scale in millimetres) Colour in preservative Dorsal surface of neck, body, tail and legs banded with purple-brown on a cream background. There are 6 bands on body, 4 on each leg and 7 on tail. Bands break up into purple and cream blotching on lower lateral surface of body. Head marbled with brown-purple and cream. Labials brown- purple. Ventral surface light brown; under- side of tail lightly banded; ventral surface of toes and palms dark. Habitat The Trevethan Range is composed of bare, black, blue-green algae covered gran- ite boulders (Zweifel and Parker 1977) al- though each mountain in the Range has a few isolated trees. The huge boulders piled one on another form caverns in which C. galgajuga hides by day. At night they emerge to forage on the boulder faces. On the night of | January, 1977, they were uncommon with five individuals ob- served in an area of about 3200 square 144 metres. They were very difficult to ap- proach and usually scampered for cover once their eyes were caught by torchlight. Etymology *““Galgajuga’’ is the territory name for Black Mountain in Gugu-Yalanji, the Bloomfield River language (Chris Ander- son pers. comm. ). Comparisons with Other Species C. galgajuga is readily distinguished from the very large robust C. louisiadensis by its small size and delicate, gangly habitus (plate 1). It also lacks the lateral skin folds and the many rows of tubercles dorsally and laterally. The ventral scales in the preanal region and on the undersurfaces of the thighs are greatly enlarged on C. louisia- densis and the latter scales meet the smaller scales of the posterior surfaces of the thigh along a well defined demarcation line (plate 3). C. pelagicus is very similar to C. gal Vic.Nat, Vol. 95 Plate 3 Under surface of thighs and tail of Cyrtodactylus louisiadensis (scale in millimetres). Plate 4 Under surface of thighs and tail of Cyrtodactylus pelagicus (scale in millimetres). July/August, 1978 145 gajuga but it differs with its robust neck, body, and legs (plate 1), greater number of rows of tubercles dorsally and laterally (greater than 13) with the tubercles more rounded, and with the ventral surfaces uni- formly covered with small scales so that there is no difference in size of the scales on the undersurfaces of thighs and in the preanal region (plate 4). Remarks Cyrtodactylus galgajuga is the third new species of vertebrate discovered from the boulder mountains of the Trevethan Range. The other two species restricted to this habitat, are a microhylid frog Cophixalus saxatilis (Zweifel and Parker 1977) and an undescribed lygosomine skink of the genus Carlia (Wells 1975). KEY TO THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF Cyrtodactylus, 1. Preanal and femoral regions with one or more rows of distinctly enlarged scales Preanal and femoral regions covered by relatively uniform small scales (plate 4) bho Lateral fold from axilla to groin with enlarged rounded tubercles; _C. pelagicus preanal and femoral regions with greatly oes scales (plate 3); maximum snout-vent length 16 cm C. louisiadensis No lateral fold; preanal and femoral regions not with greatly enlarged scales (plate 2); maximum snout-vent length 5 cm Acknowledgements I thank C. Anderson, H. G. Cogger, J. Covacevich, A. E. Greer and F. Parker for their kind help in the preparation of this paper. Douglas Miller assisted me in the field. LITERATURE CITED Brown, W. C. and Parker, F., 1973. A new species of Cyrtodactylus (Gekkonidae) from New Guinea with a _C. galgajuga key to species from the island. Breviora 417: 1-7. Cogger, H. G., 1975. Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia. A. H. & A. W. Reed, Sydney. De Rooij, N., 1915. The Reptiles of the Indo-Australian Archipelago Vol. 1. Lacertilia, Chelonia, Emydosauria. E. J. Brill, Leiden. Wells, R., 1975, Notes on an unidentified skink of the genus Carlia from Black Mountain, north east Queensland. Herpetofauna 7(2): 11, Zweifel, R. and Parker, F., 1977. A new species of frog from Australia (Microhylidae, Cophixalus). Amer. Mus. Novit. 2614: 1-10. A Field Guide to Victorian Wattles BY F, J. C. ROGERS New Revised Edition now available. Price $3.50 Post Free. Order from FNCV Sales Officer 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, Vic., 146 3145. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 ‘*Comments on the Feeding of Young Marsupials’” — A Reply We wish to reply to the criticism of our work (Stephens et al, 1974, Stephens, 1975) by Dr. Michael Messer (Victorian Naturalist, March/ April, 1978, p. 61) made in response to an article by Dr. Elizabeth Turner entitled ‘‘Preventive Marsupialian Paediatries’’ (Victorian Naturalist, May/June, 1977, p. 129) in which this work was cited. Firstly, Dr. Messer had objected that our re- sults on the activities of galactose-metabolizing enzymes were obtained with the red cells of adult animals, from which we made inferences relating to cataract formation in pouch-young marsupials. Although this was true, in subsequent experi- ments we had observed that pouch-young marsu- pials also had low enzyme activity similar to that of the adults (unpublished observation). We have also shown in a subsequent paper (Stephens et al, 1975) that pouch-young kangaroos have abnor- mal galactose tolerance which is corrected with age, and thus presumably with the formation of tuminant-like digestive system, Secondly, Dr. Messer objected that the results were obtained with red cells whereas liver is the site of galactose metabolism. In analogous situa- tion in humans where liver is also the site of galactose metabolism, the defects in galactose metabolism are reflected in the red cells, and the assay of enzyme activity in the red cells is used to diagnose two inherited errors of galactose metabolism, galactose-1-phosphate uridy] trans- ferase deficiency (leading to classical ‘*galac- tosemia’’) and galactokinase deficiency (leading to cataract formation). Dr. Messer in his letter emphasized the fact that marsupial milk contains a variety of galactose- containing oligosaccharides and young marsu- pials may, therefore, be accustomed to metabolize galactose obtained from the hyd- rolysis of these oligosaccharides by the usual metabolic pathway. He suggests without any per- tinent references to literature that the normal func- tion of intestinal lactase is to liberate galactose from these oligosaccharides. However, we quote from his own recent article (Messer and Mossop, 1977), **the mechanism by which marsupial milk oligosaccharides are synthesised in the mammary gland or digested and absorbed in the intestinal July/August, 1978 tract of the pouch-young is unknown’’. It would thus appear incorrect to assume that intestinal lactase of the kangaroos may be responsible for the hydrolysis of the oligosaccharides containing galactose. Although we do not claim to have demon- strated experimentally, that feeding galactose to pouch-young marsupials may cause cataract for- mation, we are impressed by the epidemiological evidence that cataracts occur only in orphan mar- supials bottle fed with cow's milk. In a recent seminar held in The University of Sydney during 6-8 February, 1978 (The Postgraduate Commit- tee in Veterinary Medicine, Proceeding 12036, Fauna — Part B) many clinicians interested in marsupial health have responded to our paper very favourably and recognised the importance of feeding “‘galactose-free’’ diets to young marsu- pials for the prevention of cataract formation. Dr. Messer’s assertion that the hand-rearing of or- phaned marsupials on lactose-free milk “‘has no scientific basis’’ ignores the very considerable amount of circumstantial evidence which has al- ready been obtained in the field of veterinary clinical medicine. We believe, therefore, that it would be unwise to subject young marsupials to exposure to large quantities of lactose-containing material. J. D. Gupta, Tanya Stephens, Patricia Mutton, J. D. Harley, Children’s Medical Research Foundation, Royal Alexandra Hospital for Children, Camperdown, N.S.W. 2050, Australia. REFERENCES I. Stephens, T., Irvine, S., Mutton, P., Gupta, J. D. and Harley, J. D. (1974). ‘‘Deficiency of two en- zymes of galactose metabolism in kangaroos’’. Na- ture (London) 248, 524. 2. Stephens, T. (1975). *‘Nutrition of orphan marsu- pials’’. Aust. Vet. J. 51, 453. 3. Stephens, T., Crollini, C., Mutton, P., Gupta, J. D. and Harley, J. D. (1975). “‘Galactose metabolism in relation to cataract formation in marsupials’’. Aust. J. exp. Biol. Med., 53, 233, . Messer, M. and Mossop, G. S. (1977). ‘*Milk car- bohydrates of marsupials”’. I. Partial separation and characterization of neutral milk oligosaccharides of the Eastern grey kangaroo, Aust. J. Biol, Sci., 30, 37 147 Does the Koala need to drink water? BY ROBERT DEGABRIELE* The koala has been characterised as an extremely specialised arboreal folivore which has evolved so as to feed on a re- stricted range of highly toxic plants (the eucalypts) which are present in large amounts throughout the year, Such a specialisation leads to the prospect that the food supply may also provide an adequate water supply, especially in the light of the fact that koalas have been seen to drink water under natural conditions only rarely. In general terms, an animal is limited to a particular environment by such factors as the availability and quality of food, the thermal environment and the adaptation of the animal to that environment, and the availability of water together with the animal's water requirements. This paper is concerned with the last of these factors, water. Studies of Natural Populations The way in which koalas use water under natural conditions has been studied by fol- lowing the movement of radioactively- labelled water. Measured quantities of this labelled water are injected into koalas which are then released. After at least a week the koalas are recaptured, a blood sample is taken from each one and the level of radio- activity is compared with the injected level. The comparison then leads to the calculation of total body water content and water turn- over rate. When this technique was applied to natural populations of koalas at Magnetic Island (North Queensland), Sydney and Phillip Island, no significant differences were detected between the three populations with respect to total body water and turnover rate. This means that although the three supposedly different locations are inhabited *School of Applied Science, Riverina College of Ad- vanced Education, Wagga Wagga, NSW 2650 148 by three different races of the koala, the microhabitat of the koala is rather constant, irrespective of location, and the three races act as one population, The total body water measurements showed that the koala is three-quarters water, a fairly high proportion which is shared by other ruminant-like marsupials. This high level also confirms the observa- tion that the koala’s large caecum holds sig- nificant amounts of moist food. The koala processes water at a faster rate than most other marsupials (it has a higher water tumover rate), suggesting that the koala’s environment usually supplies suffi- cient water. An interesting comparison can be made between the koala and the short- nosed bandicoot, The water turnover rate of bandicoots living in a waterless island habitat is similar to that of koalas in nature. In both cases, then, the food supply also provides a water supply. Anatomical studies of the koala have confirmed that water ap- pears to be abundant in the koala’s micro- habitat. However, the water content of Eucalyp- tus leaves is quite low (about 45%), so further measurements were carried out on individually caged koalas in order to estab- lish the way in which the water is used. Studies of Caged Koalas Koalas were kept individually in cages and supplied daily with freshly cut branches of grey gum (Eucalyptus punctata) and, in some cases, drinking water. Water turnover rate was found to be half or less than that of koalas under natural conditions. This raises the possibility that the slothful inactivity of koalas in nature may be useful in conserving water. Irrespective of the availability of drinking water, the most important input of water was via the leaves which provided at least 70% of the water consumed. This Vic,Nat. Vol. 95 might explain the koala’s preference for gum tips which have a higher water content (65%) than the older leaves (45%). The koala is able to conserve the water it has taken in by a number of mechanisms. Firstly, studies with antidiuretic hormone have shown that the koala produces as con- centrated urine as it is capable of producing, even when drinking water is available. Sec- ondly, the koala produces extremely dry feces, on a par with dehydrated camels. Thirdly, the koala is able to recycle urea and so reduce the volume of the urine produced. Koala Phascolartos cinereus Conclusion When the koala’s ability to conserve water is compared with its demands on water for evaporative cooling, it can be shown that the koala’s water requirements can be supplied entirely by eucalypt leaves up to an air temperature of 30°C. The koala needs to drink, then, only when air tempera- ture exceeds 30°C. Such an occurrence is likely to be rare when the koala’s ability to actively choose a particular microenviron- ment in a tree is taken into account. Six sun-bathing Echidnas One chilly winter day as I was walking through the bush in the Warby Ranges a slight movement in the undergrowth caught my eye. The move- ment came from some echidnas Tachyglossus aculeatus, They were lying in a patch of sunlight with their soft furry abdomens exposed to the sun. There were six of them, placed side by side one behind the other in a line, and with their orangey-brown and black colouring they looked remarkably like a fallen disintegrating trunk of July/August, 1978 grass tree Xanthorrhoea australis. As I watched, the smallest echidna got to its feet and approached me over a distance of about three metres until its long nose touched my shoe. Unhurriedly, it returned to its position near the end of the line. Some minutes later I returned to the spot with my husband but we could find no trace of any of them. I.C. Morris, SOUTH WANGARATTA 149 A new locality for Litoria brevipalmata (Anura: Pelodryadidae) from South East Queensland BY G. V. CZECHURA* Introduction McDonald (1974) recorded the presence in Queensland of Litoria brevipalmata Tyler, Martin and Watson, This record was based on the collection of two specimens, separately obtained, from Crows Nest Na- tional Park (N.P. 629; 152° 06'E, 27° 15'S) and Ravensbourne National Park (N.P. A92)- 152° 12'E. 27 20S); The recent collection of three specimens of this frog near Jimna (152° 27'E, 26° 39'S) therefore constitutes both an extension of range and a new locality for this frog in south-east Queensland. Observations and Locality Data Observations took place on the night of Sunday, 29 January, 1978. Heavy, intermit- tent showers resulting in the formation of many standing pools of water and moist substrate, were prevailing at the time. All frogs were collected in an area approxi- mately 6 kilometres north-west from the township of Jimma, south-east Queensland. The first individual was found near the gutter of an unsealed roadway. A search of the area for more specimens was im- mediately undertaken, This search resulted in the capture of the additional two speci- mens some 30 metres distant. This latter area was in the vicinity of a small creek, and supported extensive regrowth of the grass Imperata cylindrica, Grassy regrowth was restricted to small, short (3-4 cm height) clumps separated by areas of bare ground; both frogs were sitting on these patches of moist, bare earth. In addition another four frogs were located (but not collected) in similar situations here. Subsequently, a single individual was ob- served near a small pond in a gravel quarry *Wootha Road, Maleny, Queensland 150 some 4 km north-west of Jimna. All frogs observed were males in breeding condition. Table | presents a list of synchronosym- patric frog species for both locations. The vegetation present in the area from which the specimens were collected con- sisted of low, dry sclerophyll forest with a well developed grassy layer. The tree layer consisted of young Eucalyptus spp. and Casuarina sp. The dominant grass being the aforementioned /mperata cylindrica. Small patches of vine scrub (= low closed forest) with Eucalyptus spp. and Tristania conferta as dominant emergents, were also present in the vicinity, The vegetation surrounding the gravel quarry was essentially similar to the former area. However, the dry sclerophyll forest appeared to have both a greater density and higher percentage of more mature trees, re- sulting in a taller tree stratum plus a reduced grassy layer. Adjoining the open forest were, again, areas of vine scrub. TABLE |. Synchronosympatric frog species with Litoria brevipalmata Jimna area, SE.Q. Litoria caerulea Litoria chloris Litoria gracilenta Litoria dentata Litoria latopalmata Litoria lesueuri Adelotus brevis Pseudophryne bibroni Uperoleia marmorata Limnodynastes ornatus Limnodynastes terraereginae Mixophyes fasciolatus Call Barker and Grigg (1977, p. 64) report the Vic.Nat, Vol. 95 call of Literia brevipalmata as a ‘series of short quacking notes’’. Calls which may be described in this manner were heard at the collection site; in one case, aL, brevipal- mata Was found near the point of origin of such a call. In captivity, the three individuals have been heard making soft, clucking noises similar to a very slow and harsh L. latopal- mata call. Discussion L. brevipalmata is easily distinguished from all sympatric frogs on the basis of the lime-green and black thigh, groin and axil- lary colouration in addition to the features reported in the original definition (Tyler, Martin and Watson, 1972, p. 82). Cogger (1975) and Barker and Grigg (1977) have previously indicated the importance of the presence of the lime-green colouration for field identification. The presence of L. brevipalmata in the Jimna area is an extension of some 80 kilometres north from the previously re- corded locations, The Jimna area is included within the Conondale Range complex of south-east Queensland. Czechura (1975, 1976) has previously reported on the rainforest/wet sclerophyll dependent her- petofauna of this area. L, brevipalmata, however, seems to be a representative of an interesting ‘‘dry’’ forest adapted fauna which reaches its greatest de- velopment in the drier country north of the rainforest/wet sclerophyll areas previously studied, Here the rainforests and wet sclerophyll forests are replaced in dry vine scrubs and open, dry sclerophyll forest re- spectively. Very few typically rainforest forms frequent the vine scrub formations (one exception being the agamid lizard Gonocephalus spinipes), Frequently the rainforest/wet sclerophyll herpetofauna are replaced by a congener in this area, (the snakes Hoplocephalus stephensi and H. bitorquatus respectively) or are restricted to gallery forest (e.g. Litoria pearsoniana). On the whole, composition of the ‘‘wet"’ and *‘dry"’ adapted faunas is quite dissimi- lar; differences reflected on the generic as well as the specific level. For example, Literia dentata, L. brevipalmata, the mac- ropods Aepyprymnus rufescens, Petrogale penicillata and Macropus dorsalis all lack close relatives in the *‘wet’’ development. Acknowledgements I wish to thank my wife Robin, Chris Pollitt and Elaine Robinson for field assis- tance, Mr. Glen Ingram, Curator of Amphibia, Queensland Museum for aid in preparation of this contribution, Lastly, | would like to thank Ms. R. Owens for typing the manuscript. REFERENCES Barker, J, and Grigg, G,, 1977, A Field Guide to Austra han Frogs. Rigby, Adelaide Cogger, H. G,, 1975, Reptiles and Amphibians of Aus tralia, Reed, Sydney. Czechura, G, V., 1975. Notes on the frog fauna of Conondale Range, south cust Queensland, Her petofauna 7(2); 2-4 Czechura, G. V,, 1976. Additional notes on the Conon dale Range herpetofauna, Herpetofauna 8(2); 2-4 McDonald, K. R., 1974. Litoria brevipulmata, An addi tion to the Queensland amphibian list. Herpetofauna 7(1): 2-4, Tyler, M. J,, Martin, A. A., Watson, G, F., 1972, A new species of hylid frog from New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. W. 97(1); 82-86, Note on Aboriginal wooden vessel called tarnuk bullito or tarnuk bullarto Dr, L. A. Hercus has kindly pointed out that bullito, bullarto means ‘big’ and is found in sev- July/August, 1978 eral aboriginal vocabularies of the Melbourne area, See Vie.Nat., 95:54, Editor, 151 Radiocarbon Dating of the Volcanoes of Western Victoria, Australia By EDMUND D, GILL The third largest basalt plain in the world above sea level exists in Western Victoria. ItisC. 15 000 km? in extent, and has three components. Ancient decomposed basalts belong to the time of violent earth move- ments in the Lower Tertiary when Australia and Antarctica separated. The second com- ponent forms most of the present land sur- face, and belongs to the Upper Tertiary. Most of these basalt flows are Pliocene, and date from 4.5 m.y. old (Joyce 1975). The third component comprises the volcanic hills of tuff and scoria with minor flows of basalt. Maghemite Dating Before radiocarbon dating was invented, many despaired of ever dating these vol- canic hills, their soils and their archaeologi- cal sites. Challenged by the problem, | worked out a method of relative dating based on the accumulation of magnetic iron oxide (maghemite) in tuff soils. The idea is that in a common matrix (tuff) under a common climate on a common terrain slope (the gentle declivity of the tuff cones), maghemite accumulates according to age as dust, minute nodules, and so up to pea-sized buckshot gravel. At that time no one (as far as I could find out) had looked at these growth stages of the nodules, It was also noted that manganese dioxide (pyrolusite) increases in quantity with age. A different scale applies to the basalt flows because weathering is slower and the sur- faces are usually flat. The tuff series covers soils of increased depth from thin uniform soils to duplex (with A and B horizons) soils a metre deep. A farm valuer gave me aver- age prices for land in the areas studied, and they were in inverse proportion to age, i.e. the older land is more leached and so cheaper. When radiocarbon dating became 152 available the tuff series up to the buckshot gravel stage could be dated, i.e. Mt. Leura complex C. 22 000 years. The maghemite method is still useful for areas where no samples for C14 dating can be found, The Red Rock complex N.W. of Colac was dated by this method, then refined with radiocarbon, as described later in this paper, Tower Hill Volcano Tower Hill (Pl. 1, Fig. 1) was so named by Captain Flinders when exploring the coast in The Investigator, but about the same time the French Captain Baudin sail- ing the same coast in the Geographe called it Piton de Reconnaissance. Hence the ejec- tamenta of which the hill consists is called the Piton Scoria (Gill 1967). This explosive volcano, situated significantly at the change in direction of the coast west of Warrnam- bool, had a short life. It spread ash and lapilli up to 75 m thick over the landscape, but the thousands of thin layers carry no record of a rest in activity. When Professor Willard F. Libby in- vented C14 dating, I heard of it before pub- lication through Dr. Kenneth Oakley of the British Museum, who suggested that I for- ward a couple of samples for dating. I wanted to date Tower Hill, but long search failed to discover any datable material such as fossil wood from the Tower Hill tuff sections, so samples from Tower Hill beach and Goose Lagoon were sent (Gill 1955). These were the first radiocarbon dates on Australian samples. They were assayed by the solid carbon method. When gas counters were invented, smaller samples could be used, and a search was made for juvenile soils from which carbon could be concen- trated, but without success. Samples were later dated (Gill 1967) from above the tuff (up to 5280 years on charcoal) and below it Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Plate 1, fig. 1. Tower Hill volcano, west of Warrnambool. fig. 2. Roadcut at North Cundare, E. side of road running S. from road to Alvie. Yellow loess overlies a Coxiella band, which overlies a fossil soil. fig. 3. East shore of Lake Corangamite at North Cundare. Low terrace behind beach, and high terrace above it, and in distance. C14 samples from near tip of headland. July/August, 1978 153 (5850 years on an insufficient organic frac- tion in bones from Bushfield, and 6605 years on bone carbonate — Gill 1953, 1971). When more was learned of bone dat- ing, it was apparent that the Bushfield dates were not very reliable. Moreover, they did not fit the sea level data. A somewhat more satisfactory age was achieved by the assay of marine shells in highly tuffaceous lime sand at Pickering Point, Warrnambool (Gill 1972). Two kinds of tuff deposit are found — the stratified ash that has not been dis- turbed since it fell, and the unstratified material that occurs in high areas disturbed by the wind and in stream channels dis- turbed by the water. Loose volcanic ash is the most erodable of sediments, and so it is significant if an unstratified deposit in an exposed site like the clifftop at Point Picker- ing is still rich in tuff. Recently a stratified subaerially deposited (not water laid) tuff has been found under the Lake Pertobe marine shell bed at Warrnambool. Various parts of this shell bed have dated 5820, 6500 and 6570 years respectively. The top of the tuff is weathered, and its structure shows it was air laid, so the sea must have been lower then. After the tuff was deposited, the sea advanced over the Lake Pertobe area, reach- ing as far as the railway station and the high ground behind the Woollen Mill; it pene- trated up the Merri River also because its level was 1.5-2 m higher than at present. When the resources are available, an undis- turbed core will be taken at a couple of places through the freshwater peat of Lake Pertobe, the marine shell bed, and into the tuff, to follow in detail the advance of the sea, then its retreat to its present position. This was not a simple advance and retreat, but some oscillations of level took place. Shells from immediately over the tuff will be dated, and this will help define more accurately the time of eruption of the Tower Hill volcano. Among dates in the same area that are older than the tuff is one of 8700 years for mammillary calcite at Dennington. So the eruption occurred between 8700 and 6570 years ago. The 7300 year date is in the correct time bracket. 154 It is interesting that the Tower Hill vol- cano is of the same order of age as Mt. Napier, Mt. Eccles, Red Rock near Colac, and other volcanoes shown by maghemite dating to belong to the same age group. The only younger dates for this volcanic field are in the Mount Gambier area of South Aus- tralia (Blackburn 1966). The University of Sydney Radiocarbon Laboratory has recently announced that the oceanic waters round Australia have a radiocarbon age of 450 years, which must therefore be subtracted from the dates of marine shells grown in those waters. The midden shells in tuff at Point Pickering at Warrnambool must therefore have their C14 date reduced to 6850 years — the nearest date so far to eruption time. Mt. Napier and Mt. Eccles Volcanoes South of Hamilton is the prominent scoria cone of Mt. Napier — a former fire foun- tain. It is part of a series of volcanic forma- tions and resultant swamplands (produced by the damming of drainage) that zigzag across the terrain in a succession of linear deposits roughly at right angles to one another (see map Gibbons and Downes 1964). Thus Buckley’s Swamp, caused by Mt. Napier blocking ihe drainage, extends approximately north as a narrow marsh from the east end of the volcano, while a long narrow lava flow extends west from it along Harman Valley, This meets a swampland that extends both north and south from the junction. At its south end is the Mt. Eccles volcanic complex that extends roughly east-west. At the east end of this complex is a narrow swampland that extends north to McArthur, while at the west end is Condah swamp, a wetland overlying a lava flow or flows. From these lava fills a valley extend- ing roughly south through the Last Intergla- cial duneline to the sea, and beneath in (Butakoff 1973, fig. 20). two points: 1, In Buckley's Swamp, the base of the peat caused by Mt. Napier blocking the drainage dated 7240 years (Gill and Elmore 1973). This is a minimal date for the erup- tion, but probably close to it. It is a date on Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Plate 2, fig 1. Coxiella shells on the modern lake shore, a parallel to those dated by C14. fig. 2. Close up of the fossil soil and Coxiella band in the roadcut at North Cundare dated by C14 (PI. 1, fig. 2). fig. 3. The low cliff of the Holocene terrace shown in PI. J, fig. 3. The upper and lower shell horizons dated 2020 and 4040 years respectively. July/August, 1978 155 carbon and so does not need the deduction of 450 years. 2. In Condah swamp at Breakaway Creek, swamp and pond sediments up to 2.7 m thick overlie the basalt flow which could be from Mt. Napier, or a flow from Mt. Eccles that ran up the valley northwards due to the piling up of the Eccles complex, or both. Field work is needed to sort out the history. My present opinion is that, because the lava surface shows evidence of a.high gas/lava ratio, it is more likely to be from the much closer Mt. Eccles. The date for the base of the peat over the basalt flow is 6235 years (Gill and Gibbons 1969) so Mt. Napier and Mt. Eccles must have erupted about the same time. Red Rock Volcanic Complex Northwest of the town of Colac is an extensive complex of cones, craters and cra- ter lakes. A cone with lookout at Alvie is called Red Rock. By maghemite dating it is of similar age to Tower Hill, Mt. Napier and Mt. Eccles. I took the Colac naturalists there, and they wanted to know its age. No organic matter for dating could be found in its ejectamenta, but there is a high percen- tage of carbonate derived from the Miocene Post Campbell Limestone below, proved by the presence of marine fossils in the scoria. During soil formation this Miocene carbo- nate, devoid of radiocarbon, was taken into solution then precipitated on drying by tak- ing up carbon dioxide (and so radiocarbon) from the soil air. A radiocarbon assay of this soil carbonate gave an age of 7810 + 115 years (SUA-268), a date not previously pub- lished. This is a new approach to the dating of volcanoes, and is widely applicable. Re- lative age can be determined by maghemite dating, and then a more precise age by radiocarbon. Sooner or later carbon, shells and soil carbonate will be obtained from the same ash spread, and the dates can then be checked against one another. To the west of Red Hill is Lake Coranga- mite, on the east shore of which tuff overlies the dunes (lunettes) of yellow silt (Colon- gulac Loess). A road cutting at North Cun- dare (military map ref. 628 956) revealed a bed of the brackish walter gasteropod 156 Coxiella that gave an early C14 date of 28 240 + 1100 years (Y-230). These shells are not good dating material and so when many years later the cutting was deepened and revealed a fossil soil below the shell bed, an attempt was made to date carbon from it. The roadcut showed (PI. 1, fig. 2; Pl. 2, fig. 2); 0.3 m Black crumby to small blocky clayey soil at the surface. 2.7 m Pale yellow SY 7/3 loess grading to light brownish gray 2.5Y 6/6 to grayish brown 5/2 with Coxiella fragments. At the base is the shell bed that provided the origi- nal sample for C14 dating. 0.38 m Dark brown 7.5YR 3/2 blocky clayey soil dipping south at 7°. 0.9 m Light olive gray 5Y 6/2 loess. The Soil Conservation Authority kindly assayed the carbon content of the fossil soil, on the basis of which a 700 gm sample was provided for dating. The preparation method used reduced the carbon available for dating to 1.5 gm, but adate of 15 220 + §30 over 320 (GaK-3214) was obtained. Further west at Lake Colongulac (Gill 1953) a date of 21100 years was obtained for charcoal from the base of the lunette (Gill 1971). The dry period during which these lunettes were built ranged from about 20 000 to about 9000 years ago in Western Victoria. All this fits very well, but what about the shells over the fossil soil dating about 13 000 years more? The difference is too much to be explained by any inaccuracy in the dating. Perhaps in the dry conditions the wind excavated a fossil shell bed, and blew the old shells up over the new land surface. From the point of view of dating volcanoes it should be noted that: 1. The volcanic eruption was a later event than the lunette building because the tuff overlies the lunette. 2. The eruption was much later than 15 220 years ago because only about a quar- ter of the lunette was built then. 3. The eruption was before the lake ter- race on the east shore was built because it is not covered by the tuff. Radiocarbon dates have been obtained for this terrace (Pl. 1, fig. 3; Pl. 2, fig. 3), Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 In July 1967 the lake level was fairly low, and below the Cundare cutting the cliff in the lakeside terrace measured 2.4 m high. There is also a higher terrace. Samples were taken of two horizons or Coxiella shells in the cliff (Pl. 2, fig. 3). The upper dated 2020 + 90 years (GaK-3215) and the lower 4040 + 120 years (GaK-3216). On this evidence the date of the eruption lies between 4040 and 15 220 years ago, so the date on soil carbonate of 7810 years is very reasonable. The bracket of dates in this section has not been previously published. Mount Leura Voleanic Complex Camperdown is built on a volcanic terrain with three prominent craters — Mt. Leura, Lake Bullenmerri and Lake Gnotuk (Gill 1953). The ridge between Mt. Leura and Lake Bullenmerri appears to be a fault line. The tuffs of these volcanoes overlap and are probably penecontemporaneous. Camper- down overlooks Lake Colongulac, in which bedded tuff is found. Over the tuff is a lunette with a basal date of 21 100 years (Gill 1971). Under the tuff is a bone bed with the remains of extinct giant marsupials, an horizon found in many of these lakes. For example, Lake Weeranganuck, which lies between Lake Colongulac and Lake Coran- gamite has such a bone bed also covered with a lunette. There are problems of dating in this area, but | think the following indi- cate the correct orders of age for the beds at Lake Weeranganuck: 11 980 + 20 years (SUA-266) for carbo- nate nodules in the soil on the Colongulac Loess lunette above the bone bed, 25 300 + 1200 years (GaK-986) for Coxiella shells from the bone bed under the loess lunette, These dates have not been published pre- viously. The first belongs to the final stage of the dry period during which the lunettes were built. Such carbonate nodules have been used elsewhere successfully, and in- deed I was the first to use them for this purpose (in connection with the Talgai Cranium investigation). Judging by other Coxiella dates, that from the bone bed may be on the young side. On the other hand, the July/August, 1978 date of 21100 years for the base of the lunette at Lake Colongulac is based on an ample sample of charcoal assayed by the Institute of Nuclear Sciences (DSIR) in New Zealand. On the foregoing evidence, the eruption lies between 21 100 and 25 300 years. As the tuff at Lake Colongulac is finely layered and no evidence has been found of its erosion, and as air-laid tuff on the lake floor shows it was more or less dry then (a condition for lunette formation), the eruption was probably quite close to the time of commencement of lunette building, Say we express this for the time being as about 22 000 years ago. The soil on the tuff is duplex, and con- tains pea-sized maghemite nodules, i.e. buckshot gravel. The tuff ring at Mt. Warrnambool has in its soil micronodules of a couple of millimetres diameter, and so is believed to be between Tower Hill and Mt. Leura in age. Radiocarbon Dates Volcanoes The dates for the volcanic eruptions in Western Victoria have yet to be refined, but their order of age as presently known is: for Victorian years Pleistocene Mt. Leura complex 22 000 Holocene Red Rock 7810 Mt. Napier 7240 Tower Hill 6850 Mt. Eccles 6235 PS. Since the above paper was written, the Mt. Eccles area has been re-visited. A series of volcanic events have occurred; e.g. the basalt at Ettrick lies on a river bed dated 19 300 yr by C14. Mt. Eccles itself is Holocene, while the tuff of the McArthur area is late Pleistocene. At least three ages of volcanic materials are thus present. A series of volcanic events has also now been distin- guished at Camperdown. REFERENCES Blackburn, G,, 1966, Radiocarbon dates relating to soil development, coast-line changes, and yoleanic ash deposition in south-east South Australia, Aust. J. Sei. 29:50-52. Boutakoff, N., 1963. The geology and geomorphology of the Portland area. Geol, Surv. Vict. Mem, 22. 174 Pp. 157 Gill, E. D., 1953. Geological evidence in Western Vic- torla relative to the antiquity of the Australian aborigines. Mem. Nut. Mus, Vict. 18:25-92. Gill, E. D., 1955. Aboriginal midden sites in Western Victoria dated by radiocarbon analysis, Mankind 5(2):51-55 Gill, E. D., 1967. Evolution of the Warrnambool-Port Fairy coast, W_ Victoria. In Landform Studies from Australia and New Guinea, ANU, pp. 340-364, Gill, E. D., 1971. Applications of radiocarbon dating in Victoria, Australia (Royal Society of Victoria Re- search Medal Lecture). Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 84:71-85. Gill, E. D., 1972. Eruption date of Tower Hill volcano, Western Victoria, Australia. Vict. Naturalist 89:188-192. Gill, E. D., and Elmore, L. K. M., 1974. Importance of the Mount Napier volcanic complex near Hamilton, Victoria, Australia. Vict. Naturalist 91:167-174. Gill, E. D., and Gibbons, F. R., 1969, Radiocarbon date related to vulcanism and lake deposits in Western Victoria. Aust. J. Sci. 32:109, Gibbons, F, R,, and Downes, R. G., 1964. A study of the land in south-western Victoria. Soi! Conservation Authority Victoria TC 3. Joyce, E, B., 1975. Quaternary volcanism and tectonics in southeastern Australia. In Quaternary Studies, R- Soc. NZ. Bull. 13:169-176. Range of Day Moths In the swamps behind Biddy’s Cove on Wil- son's Promontory. 13/2/77, many black and white day moths of the family Agaristidae were flitting about the flowering plants. One was cap- tured and idenufied as Phalaenoides tristifica. In its caterpillar stage the larvae feed on Epilobium, the Willow Herb, which was not uncommon there. This is. perhaps, not particularly notewor- thy, save for the fact that some years ago we found the same species fairly common on the summit of Mt. Howitt, surely a considerable vari- ation in its range. ELLEN Lynpon, Leongatha Field Naturalists in Northern Territory form Club Last summer, the Northern Territory Field Naturalists Club was formed by enter- prising naturalists in the Darwin area, They thought “that such a club had a good chance of succeeding, as there is not much else to do in Darwin on week-ends except go bush”’ — so writes Stephen Harwood, the Trea- surer, who is also a member of the FNCV, and former member, and Secretary, of the Mammal Survey Group. The other office- bearers are Pat Rowan (President), Keith Martin (Secretary), Stephen Swanson (Field Trip Coordinator) and Elizabeth Eskbergs (Archives Officer). The club is now about one hundred strong. It meets on the second Wednesday of every month at 8 p.m. at the Darwin High School theatrette, Bullocky Point, Darwin. Stephen also writes **we put 158 out an informative and often hilarious monthly newsletter to keep members in- formed of what they missed if they didn’t come on the last field trip, and to what place we hope to visitin the coming month’’. But plans for a magazine are as yet indefinite because of the high cost of production. The first Issue was to appear in May, and a further issue is scheduled for November, The new club will try and assist FNCV members with any information on the Ter- ritory, and invites Interstate Membership. Stephen’s address is 6 Kelly Place, Rapid Creek, N.T., 5792, and Keith Martin's, 7 Chapman Court, Nightcliff, N.T., 5792. The FNCV has sent a letter to the new NTFNC with congratulations to its founda- tion and best wishes for every success. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Juicy Fruits of the Otways FNCV Easter Excursion, 24-28 March 1978 By Mary K. Dogry* ‘Season of mists and mellow fruitful- ness’’ wrote the poet John Keats, and ex- periences in the Apollo Bay area were true to this quotation. The fascination and beauty of colourful and juicy fruits tempts one to feel, smell and perhaps to taste; using one’s senses helps in the identification of the plant. Group discussion on the site of the specimens and the use of references have helped to make the following report. Coastal areas On a visit to the Cape Otway heathland, Seabox Alyxia buxifolia was found on the cliffs. Its orange to red drupes were on the same branch with the fragrant white flow- ers. Coast Ballart Exocarpus syrticola was also found here. It was identified by the lilac-pink succulent fruit-stalks, each sup- porting a hard small fruit. Shrubs of Coast Beardheath Leucopogon parviflorus had hundreds of globular white berry-like fruits which, due to their ripeness, easily dropped when touched. These fruits are edible. Along the Great Ocean Road between Apollo Baysand Marengo, Seaberry Saltbush Rhagodia baccata made a show of flat, berry-like dark red fruits. At other coastal strips and alongside Carisbrook Creek estuary, festoons of Coarse Dodder-laurel Cassytha melantha smothered host plants. The berry-like fruits were round, green to black, glutinous when squashed, and each with one centrally- placed hard seed. Inland forests At Paradise near Apollo Bay, Banyalla trees Pittosporum bicolor had fruits hanging *20 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127. July/August, 1978 from short stalks, each fruit with its two valves splitting to expose numerous mahogany-red sticky seeds. Near Mait’s Rest Reserve, Rough Cop- rosma Coprosma hirtella showed clusters of deep red to brown drupes. Such signs of fertility were on shrubs which would have had female flowers only, for these plants are unisexual. The fruits are edible but unpalat- able. They are described as sweetish but not pleasant. At the edge of Melba Gully State Park grew Purple Apple-berry Billardiera longif- lora — a climber. The pendulous, deep purple-blue, shining berries showed to ad- vantage above a red-brown earth bank. Numerous small seeds are found within the pulp. Observed while travelling along Turton Track, on the embankments was Tasman Flax-lily Dianella tasmanica. It had many deep blue berries hanging from an upright stem, Towards Carisbrook Creek Falls, Privet Mock-olive Notelaea ligustrina was found with its purple almost black fruits, ripe and round, many of which had fallen on the track. In another inland forest area, this small tree was again found bearing large compound clusters of pink to deep pink fruits. The fruits were distinctive against a backdrop of sombre green bush. In conclusion, it is interesting to specu- late about juicy fruits eaten by aborigines and experimented with by early settlers in the Otway region of Victoria. REFERENCES Galbraith, J. (1977) Wild flowers of South-east Aus- tralia. Collins. Willis, J. H. (1972) A Handbook to Plants in Victoria, Melbourne University Press. Beauglehole, Carr & Parsons. ‘‘Floristic Check-list of the Otway Region’’ Royal Soc, Vic. July 1977 The Otway Region Symposium. 159 Glow-worms of the Otways FNCV Easter Excursion, 24-28 March 1978 By FRANK ROBBINS* Glow-worms seem to be widespread in the wetter parts of the Otway Ranges, but the species has not yet been identified. This is because no adult specimens have been captured and sent to the experts in Canberra or Sydney. Dr. A. Richards is the present Australian expert, University of N.S.W Capture is difficult as the adult is like a gnat or mosquito, and belongs to the fly order (Diptera) — insects with only two wings. (Note that the ** glow-worm”’ is not a worm, but a larva — the young stage of most flying insects.) The famous glow-worms of New Zealand are well documented and attract enormous tourist crowds at Waitomo limestone caves, but the same species can be seen in damp places all over New Zealand. The name is Arachnocampa luminosa (Skuse), Ed- wards, 1924. Three very similar species are known in Australia: A. fasmaniensis Fergu- son, 1925, from Ida Bay Caves in Tas- mania, in total darkness 4 mile from the entrance, A. Richardsae Harrison 1966 from the Blue Mountains of N.S.W. (dis- used railway tunnel), and A. flava Harrison, 1966 from Numinbah, Queensland. All are very similar and it is likely that our Austra- lian species have a similar life history to the New Zealand species. The glow-worm (larva) lives in a little tubular ‘“‘hammock”’ or web along which it can move. Usually, this is found in an over- hanging ledge in a wet valley bank or road cutting. If threatened, it leaves the ‘‘ham- mock’’ and quickly retreats into the recess behind the *‘hammock”’ from which hangs a curtain of fine vertical ‘‘fishing lines’’. Beads of sticky mucin are attached to the lines (similar principle used in spider silk). *81 Mackenzie St., Bendigo 160 Vi i eS St ‘ s+ ee ii ht fh -ferd ¢ eas i} oe 4 ‘ ’ ie] Ey Dae Pict a7 ‘ ] Pe bod, t ‘ ‘ Pit ; + 1 ee | +} ’ ie t ae ve ; +i te $ a © : Glow-worm hammock with fishing lines Fig. | Fig. 2. Glow-worm light and fishing lines taken by worm’s own light “worm'’ moved along hammock during 20 minutes exposure. Photo Peter Ellis At the tail end of the glow-worm is an organ which can produce light ‘without heat’’. The light is continuous and its purpose is to attract “‘midges”’ or other small insects that live in damp places. The insect gets caught in the ‘fishing lines’’, the glow-worm moves along the hammock, hauls up the relevant lines and eats the trapped insect. In the beautiful fern area of Melba Gully State Park beyond Lavers Hill, we had no difficulty in finding the hide-outs of many glow-worms even though it was daylight; they were indicated by the fine vertical fish- Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 ' 4 4 ‘ i : 4 4 4 Fig. 3. Double exposure — time exposure followed by flash — showing beads of mucin on threads as well as light of larva as it moved along hammock, Photo by P. Ellis, ing lines hanging from the glow-worm hammocks. The place to look was always under overhanging ledges in the sides of banks. On another day, when we visited the Grey River Scenic Reserve near Kennett River, I used a torch to show how easy it was to see the delicate curtains of glow-worm threads with their little mucin beads glistening in the light. If you try to catch a glow-worm larva at night, using a torch and a twig, you have to be quick, as it usually makes a hasty retreat back into an inaccessible crack be- hind its fishing lines. The Otway fishing lines are mostly one of two inches long. In New Zealand areas, where there is no wind, lines up to 18 inches long have been reported. The ranger at Melba Gully told us he conducts night visits to see the glow-worms, July/August, 1978 and he has seen numbers of the adult insects flying around in January. The adult also has a light in its tail, but the emissions are inter- mittent. It was suggested that the ranger might catch both males and females for identification. The usual way of procuring an adult is to find a pupa hanging vertically by a thread near the glow-worm home, take it away ina bottle, and wait for the adult to emerge, which should happen in a week or more. In the wild, the male fly often waits at the pupa of an emerging female to fertilise her. She then flies away to search for suitable places in damp overhanging ledges to lay her eggs, after which she soon dies. The eggs soon hatch out into tiny larva, each with a glowing tail, and each sets about making its little fishing line snares to catch food. How much food is available through 161 the cold wet winter is not known, and I am only guessing that the glow-worm larva gradually grows to perhaps an inch, and by January (my guess), it changes into a pupa suspended by a thread. Within perhaps 12 days, out comes the full-grown two-winged fly ready to start the cycle all over again. To my knowledge, no one who lives ina glow-worm locality, or visits one very of- ten, has ever kept watch on glow-worm hides, so we don’t know what happens dur- ing the year. Perhaps, the ranger at Melba Gully could help solve this question. It is only a matter of placing markers at a number of glow-worm hide-outs, and visiting them at short intervals, both night and day, to check on the light and the fishing lines. | think that at least two years’ watch would be needed to find out the life story of the Otway glow-worm, and the species could be iden- tified at the same time. In 1976, January, Peter Ellis, of Bendigo Field Naturalists, and I spent two nights photographing and collecting glow-worms at Grey River. Peter obtained rather unique photos of the beautiful fishing line curtains, both by flash and by the light of the worm itself, including double exposures combin- ing these. At home, I tried to rear the ‘*worms’’ [ caught in a bottle, but the trou- ble was to find enough tiny insects as ac- ceptable food. After 10 days, their lights went out, although they had spun little fish- ing lines in my bottle. The Koala — Some Corrections of the February Issue Having studied the behaviour of koalas at Bris- bane’s Lone Pine Sanctuary, may I make two small corrections to M. J. Lester’s otherwise ex- cellent review? Firstly, the mother’s milk supply does not be- come insufficient before the young is able to leave the pouch, nor are the special faeces produced by the mother used as a supplement. Although it has never been proved, they probably serve to trans- fer to the young the micro-organisms required for proper digestion. They are consumed over a period of several weeks, but certainly not once a day. Secondly, although the idea has been thoroughly popularised by Troughton (1941), the name “‘koala’’ does not mean ‘‘no drink ani- mal’. The name is easily recognisable as gula in Holmer’s (1967) vocabulary of Kattang, a lan- guage once spoken between Pt. Macquarie and the Hawkesbury River. Similarly, the variant *‘culawine”’ is recorded as gulawanj. To under- stand this it must be remembered that the pronun- ciation of aboriginal languages is highly flexible. 162 G and k are interchangeable, and are by conven- tion written ‘*g’’. In the same way, there is confu- sion between u and oe. Gula would thus be pro- nounced *‘koolah”’ or “‘koala’’ (*‘oa"’ as ineak). The point to be made is that in this language ‘don’t drink’” is bitjagi giwi and ‘‘water"’ is batu. The name of the koala, like that of most other animals, bears no relation to any other word. It is true that koalas can go without free water for long periods, but when they do drink they drink for several minutes, I have seen it on scores of occasions. REFERENCES Holmer, M. L. (1967), An attempt towards a compara- tive grammar of two Australian languages. IL. Indices and vocabularies of Kattang and Thangatti. Occ.Pap.Abor Stud, No. 5. Lester, M. J, (1978). Koala, Australia’s ‘native bear’* Viet.Nat. 95:p.35. Troughton, E. LeG, (1941). Furred Animals of Au: stralia, Angus & Robertson. MALCOLM SMITH, No. 7, 23rd Avenue, Brighton, Brisbane, Queensland, 4017. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Victorian Naturalist Subject Index 1884-1977 This is now in the final stages of proof reading and will be published before the end of 1978. The Victorian Naturalist has been one of the major journals for reporting research on Victorian natural history as well as catering for the layman in this subject. The subject index will be an essential tool for anyone with an interest in the the botany. fauna, geology or entomology, etc., of Victoria in particular and South Eastern Australia in general. For example, it is virtually the only approach to articles written on the natural history of particular localities. The subject index is being published with the aid of a grant from the Government of Victoria and will be priced at $14. FNCV members price will be $10. However, there will be a prepublication price of $8.50 for those who order and pay for it before the end of August. For members, this will be ex- tended to 15 September. The number of orders received by then will influence the number of copies printed. (The Author In- dex, published in 1976 went out of print within about 6 months.) Please indicate whether you wish to have it mailed (add postage 90 cents within 50 kilometres, $1.15 within Victoria, $2.25 N.S.W., S.A., Tas., $2.60 Qld., N.T., W.A.) or will collect it at a meeting or from Oakleigh, Clayton, Frankston, Hawthorn, Williamstown or Brunswick Public Lib- raries. Please send your name and address with $8.50 for each copy plus postage if it is to be mailed to: Victorian Naturalist Index Project, C/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Book Reviews Flora of South Australia Part 1. — Third Edition Revised and edited by John F. Jessop, of the State Herbarium of South Australia. 6 July, 1978. Price $16.90. Printed in Australia by the Government Printer D. J. Woolman. J. M. Black published the first volume in 1922 when only 500 species of Monocotyledons were known in the State. The second edition in 1943 listed about 650 species. Now about one fifth of all monocotyledon species now recognized do not appear in the second edition. In 1964-5 H. J. Eichler edited a Supple- ment to all four parts of the second edition. Part | of the second edition had 253 pages while the present third edition has 466 pages and a map outlining zones in South Au- Stralia. This volume includes Lyco- podiaceae to Orchidaceae. As in former editions it has a glossary of July/August, 1978 botanical terms. A new key to all the vascu- lar plants of the State is given. A note on the use of Keys and advice on collecting and despatching specimens is included. As in former editions, helpful sketches accompany a very high percentage of the species, Very many new species and some new genera are described and illustrated, A not- able improvement is the detail in the greater number of orchid species carefully illus- trated, including those of the varieties. Sixteen pages of fine coloured plates, illustrating 21 species, mostly orchids, are inserted in the centre of the book, inciden- 163 tally in the middle of the text on Gramineae (Poaceae), Calectasia and Xanthorrhoea have not been awarded family status as in Calectasiaceae and Xanthorrhoeaceae in some other States but are still included in Liliaceae. It is good to note the careful illustrations of five species of the family Lemnaceae shown, as well as the sporocarps of five species of Marsilea. There is a massive alteration of species and some genera names of the second edi- tion, some of which had been noted in the Supplement. A striking example of change is that of the little fern which changes from Gymno- gramma to Paraceterach. Users of the Key are invited to let the Editor know of problems and suggestions when they have tried the Key so it can be corrected and improved in a later edition. The quality of the paper and cover make it a much more durable book than former edi- tions. This is a most valuable book for naturalists in Victoria as well as South Au- stralia as so many species are common to both States. L. M. WHITE, Science Field Guide — Barnacles by A. J. Underwood Published by: Reed Education. Price $2.95. This small very useful field guide is one of the Reed Science Field Guide series cov- ering one of the commonest types of sea shore animals, the barnacles. The 32 page book provides a key to the identification of the 14 species of barnacles found in New South Wales together with brief notes on the anatomy and larval stages and habits of bar- nacles. It includes 30 colour photos figuring all the species plus short descriptions and ecological notes on each species. Even though the book is of value to the interested field collector, with a little more thought and minor improvements it could have been made easier to understand and of much broader use to Australian naturalists. My first criticism is that the book was writ- ten exclusively for N.S.W, littoral regions. However, many of the species occur in other states. It would have been extremely helpful to have had included either in the notes on individual species or as a list somewhere the known Australia-wide distribution for each species and whether each is common or rare in each state. My second criticism concerns the construction of the keys and the layout of the book. It is confusing on first leafing through the book to find descriptions and ecological notes to most of the species re- peated verbatum in two different parts of the book and to realise that both major parts of the key can lead to 11 of the 14 species. However, use of the key in the field reveals it to be of practical value in the field identifi- cation of the various barnacle species. As an inexpensive information source to the intertidal field naturalist this book is both attractive and good value. BRIAN J. SMITH, Senior Curator (Zoology), National Museum of Victoria. Wild Australia by Douglas Dorward. Paintings and drawings by John Olsen. Published by Wil- liam Collins (Aust.) Limited. Seven stories of man and birds which 164 formed the basis of the successful ABC/TV series are complemented by sensitive photographs, drawings and paintings. Recommended price: $11.95 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 New Reed Nature Books A. H. & A. W. Reed Pty. Ltd. have added to their other nature titles by publish- ing three attractive books with each thirty- two pages of coloured photographs with explanatory text. The titles are: Australian Native Mammals by Barbara Mullins and Margaret Martin. Photography by Douglass Baglin and designed by Beryl Green. Spiders in Australia by Romon Mas- cord. Horses and Ponies in Australia by Barbara Mullins and Julia Mullins, Photo- graphy by Fritz Prenzel. Designed by Bery] Green. The recommended price is $2.50 for each book. Field Naturalist Club of Victoria Reports on FNCV Activities General Meeting Monday, 12 June, 1978 The speakers were Ms. Alison Oates, As- sistant Curator in Anthropology and Ms. Annette Seeman, Education Officer, both from the National Museum of Victoria. Ms. Oates described the problems associated with obtaining early food plant references. Most European observers had virtually no botanical knowledge and as a result plants were often incorrectly named. There was a general lack of information on aboriginal diet as most of the European explorers and settlers were more interested in recording their conflicts with the aborigines rather than their life styles. Ms. Oates described some of the 465 edible plants recorded as being used by the Victorian aborigines, which provided food from their roots, tubers, bulbs, rhizomes, flowers, fruits and gum; also manna, lerp and the roots of plants from which water was obtained. Ms. Seeman then gave a short talk on the loan kit being prepared for teachers and other interested groups involved in studying July/August, 1978 the history, biology, ecology, nutrition and geography of the aborigines. This includes slides which show the food plant and its habitat, pressed and bottled specimens, ex- tracts from early journals. Exhibits: Included many artifacts used in the collection of plant foods: grinding stones, a digging stick, and a coiled reed basket. A range of plants used for food in- cluded specimens of the flower cones of Banksia ornata and B, marginata and roots of Clematis microphylla, fruits of Exocar- pus sparteus and E. aphyllus, Native Cher- ries, Enchylaena tomentosa, Ruby Saltbush, Solanum esuriale , Quena and the Lilly Pilly, Eugenia smithii. Kernals of the Sweet Quandong Santalum acuminatum, tubers of the Bearded Greenhood, Pteros- tylis barbata and the Austral Hollyhock, Lavatera plebeia, seeds of Atriplex stipitata, the Kidney Saltbush, pods of the Eumong wattle, Acacia stenophylla and the fungus known as Black fellows bread, Polyporus mylittae; also a specimen of the gum of Acacia decurrens, the Black Wattle tree. 165 Mr. Ros Garnet displayed a copper billy which had been donated to the Club in 1950 by a Wonthaggi member to be used on Club camps. Other exhibits included an incom- plete set of Broinowski’s ‘‘Birds of Australia’’ and Paddy melons from Albury of which the Sulphur Crested Cockatoo is the only known avian predator; also sections of Red gum limbs, the bolls of which had been colonized by ants. Copper billy Photograph by E. Rotherham General Meeting Monday, 10 July, 1978 The President (Dr, Brian Smith) an- nounced the death of Mr. Fred Morley, who had received his honorary life membership last year, and members observed a minute's silence. Speaker for the evening was Mr. John Blythe, Survey Officer for the National 166 Museum of Victoria, who spoke on **Aqua- tic Invertebrate Surveys — Aims and Methods”’. Mr. Blythe’s work involves the identifi- cation of aquatic invertebrates and their habits; making environmental and pollution assessments of waters, and ultimately pro- tecting the natural systems. Through a series of slides, Mr. Blythe described collecting techniques used to sample both the adult and larval specimens, including the use of dip nets, kick samplers, drift nets and light traps. Some of the areas studied in the sur- vey were the Thompson, Mitta Mitta, La- trobe Rivers and Kerang Lakes. Exhibits. Included several types of col- lecting nets used by the Museum’s aquatic invertebrate survey team, also a pot of Nod- ding Greenhoods, Pterostylis nutans, once very common in the Black Rock area, a specimen of Eucalyptus crenulata, the Bux- ton gum, once uncommon but now a popu- lar garden plant because of its use to bees and honeyeaters. Other exhibits included a facsimile of Batman's ‘‘Melbourne’’ Deed in the La- Trobe Library which was used by Mr. Fawkner to purchase Melbourne from the aborigines; galls on a lightwood wattle, Acacia reflexa; and a snail shell from Eng- land, a descendent of the snail that the Ro- mans brought to England 2000 years ago, and still used as food today. Also exhibited was a vegetable growth from the base of a jacaranda tree, some unidentified scats and a creeper with lantern-like pods from Sydney. Amy Fuller. On display were six water colour paintings by Amy Fuller, of Eucalyp- tus torquata, E. pyriformis, Hypocalimma robusta, Kennedia coccinea and Scaevola ramosissima, Miss Fuller, who died in 1944 be- queathed 230 water colour studies of native Australian and South African flowers to the Club which are among its most valued as- Sets. See Vic. Nat. Vol. 32, p. 57 and Vol. 74, pp. 147-150, for accounts of her life and work. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 (Continued from page 126) ; GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment. At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group Wednesday, 6 September. “Earth Science — what is it?’’ Ms Gabi Rosos, member VUSEB, Earth Science Board. Wednesday, 4 October. ‘*Mining costs today — feasibility’. Mr Graeme Love. Wednesday, 1 November. *‘ Underwater mining of Manganese modules’’. Mr K. Han of Monash University. Wednesday, 6 December. Members’ Christmas party. Third Wednesday in the Month—Microscopy Group Wednesday, 16 August. Zoological and botanical section cutting, staining, mounting. 4 hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 20 September. Special forms of transmitted light; demonstration of Kohler illumi- nation, phase contrast, polarised light for biological specimens and interference. 4 hour members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 18 October. Photography through the microscope — black and white, colour, movies. % hour members’ colour slides. Second Thursday in the Month—Botany Group Thursday, 14 September. Slides of Queensland trip and members’ night. Thursday, 12 October. ‘‘Family Ranunculaceae’’. Miss Madge Lester. At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area—enter from Latrobe Street First Monday in the Month—Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 4 September. **Leaf-eating beetles’’. Mr P. Kelly. Monday, 2 October. Members’ Night. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown St., Heidelberg at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month—Mammal Survey Group Monday, 7 September; Monday, 5 October. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions Botany Group Saturday, 26 August. Mornington Peninsula. Leader Mr Tom Sault. Thursday, 28 September—/Sunday, 1 October. 4-day trip to Benalla, Members of Benalla FNC will help us, and we are invited to attend their meeting on Friday evening and Saturday excursion to Mt Wombat Reserve. Saturday, 28 October. Gisborne to Bacchus Marsh. Leader Mrs Hilary Weatherhead. Day Group—tThird Thursday in the month p Thursday, 17 August. Botanic Gardens lakes area. Meet at corner of Park Street and Domain Road at 11.30 a.m, Thursday, 21 September. Monash University grounds. Meet at head of the bus loop in the University grounds at 11.30 a.m. Valewood bus from Oakleigh station (north side) or from Chadstone Shopping Centre will take you into the grounds. Geology Group Excursions of the Geology Group will be announced at Group meeting. WEEKEND CAMPS—Mammal Survey Group 19-20 August. Big River, 10-17 September. Eildon—Jerusalem Creek area. July/August, 1978 167 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria * Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protett Australian fauna and flora »,. .Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists Patron His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O. B-E ,Q.C Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Mr. GARNET JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227) Correspondence to; FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. D. KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087 (435 8664) Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M, ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (96 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: C/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and Keys: C/o Chairman, GARNET JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1978 Metropolitan............ Lies sahstand Meee eee Lawn eT ee tiGerne fs ‘ i , : $10.00 Joint Metropolitan > $12.50 Joint Retired Members ... $10.00 Country Members, Subscribers and Retired Persons $8.00 Joint Country $10.00 BONE act hors ea ates st $2.50 Subscriptions toil, Nate: so teti is se peters ‘ Tee $8.00 Overseas Subscription ok acto tte Fen” Me test Oe te oe yee Fy sat art ou $10.00 har Withy. Diatiar mee iS ITT oe eatatat a pict Wid be aoe tatttoa be «|e selec Sey meee Pe ee ae < $8.00 incivihial Magazines... .vi5s whew opagtes es iereces ctcenand egw e¥ thes $1.20 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and iportbes 40 tothe ip Subecribn Secretary. @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE 168 Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 ‘ol. 95, No. 5 September/October, 1978 Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria $1.20 Registered for posting as a publication — Category ‘‘B’’ FNCY DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 9 October, 8.00 p.m. , Speaker: Dr T. Rich, Curator of Vertebrate Fossils, National Museum of Victoria. , Subject: Some Australian vertebrate fossils. Honorary Membership to be presented to Mr Cedric Ralph. Monday, 13 November, 7.55 p.m. ; ‘ Extraordinary General Meeting. Business: Election of the Native Fauna Conservation Society as an affiliated club. Monday, 13 November, 8.00 p.m. Presentation of 1978 Australian Natural History Medallion to Mr Alan Sefton, Speaker: The Medallion winner. Subject: Effects of Industrial Development on the Natural History of Wollongong. Honorary Membership to be presented to Mr Alfred A. Baker. Monday, 11 December, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr J. Nelson, Senior Lecturer in Zoology, Monash University. Subject: Arnhem Land mammals. Honorary membership to be presented to Mr Colin F, Lewis. New Members — October General Meeting Ordinary: Ms Gail Lawrence, Dept. of Botany, Latrobe University, 3052. Botany. Miss A. A. Pennell, 5/11 Selwyn Ave., Elwood, 3184. Geology and botany. Miss J. Stevenson, 3/14 Wrexham Rd,, Windsor, 3181 Joint: Mr Frank May & Mrs L. May, c/- Forests Commission, Kallista, 3791. Ms Helen Arundel & Mr Brian Arundel, 59 Illawarra Rd., East Hawthorn, 3123. Birds & mammals, Country: Mr J. Sexton, P.O. Box 203, Seymour, 3660. FNCV EXCURSIONS Saturday, 14 October — Friday, 20 October. Grampians and Little Desert. The coach will leave Flinders Street from outside the Gas and Fuel Corporation at 8.15 a.m., bring a picnic lunch. Accommodation will be at the Central Motel, Ararat, Saturday & Sunday; Innkeepers Westlander Motel, Horsham, Monday; and Little Desert Lodge, Nhill, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday; all accommodation on a dinner, bed and breakfast basis. The coach will return to Melbourne on Friday. As the above excursion includes the third Sunday, there will not be a general day excursion in October. Tuesday, 7 November (Cup Day). Bushrangers’ Bay, to be led by the President, Dr Brian Smith. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9 a.m., fare $5, junior half price. Bring two meals. A special invitation is extended to juniors. Sunday, 19 November. Labertouche. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m., fare $5.50. Bring two meals, Saturday, 30 December — Sunday 7 January. Bundanoon, N.S.W. The party will stay at the Bundanoon Hotel on a dinner, bed and breakfast basis. Transport will be by train, leaving Melbourne at 8.40 a.m. on the **Daylight’’ and returning on the ‘*Spirit’’, leaving Bundanoon at 10.35 p.m., Saturday and arriving in Melbourne at 9.55 a.m. Sunday. Accommodation and first class return rail will be approximately $200, It is proposed to charter a bus for day trips and this cost will be extra, A deposit of $25 should be paid when booking and the balance by the end of November. Sleepers on the return journey cost $8 extra and members wanting one should notify the excursion secretary promptly as they may be hard to obtain, (Continued on page 211) 170 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 5 September/October 1978 rely Editor: Reuben D. Kent Editorial Committee: Barry A.Callanan, Margaret G.Corrick, Ian Hood, Margery J.Lester, Brian J. Smith, Paul Temple DANCY MEACHOS Dyas. WIOASIOY cc fila ste es ore cy sy cle gh ecb a up A 172 Methods for Marking Individual Snake-necked Tortoises Chelodina LOM BIMOLESDUNAWir MIVG Ni GStIOlS fy ee aan ties seg fa neck ta sees 176 Five small Fungi Newly Recorded from Victoria, Australia by G, Beaton AIChE Clam VO BLO TOMB as NLL ASELES J toh? Gesuee Mol ana saree that ac viele Tend 4 eh ele 178 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by James Baines . 187 BushepeastOn sy 1cLona Ove Gi eOMlOk evita 4 ubweh ei yaaa «sa 188 he ORK eateniner DY: us MCINNOS 0e-5 sip src sete ens Oo nots 19] The Oak Leaf-miner established in Australia by I. F. B. Common .... 192 Notes on the Oak Leaf-miner in the Melbourne Area by T. R. New 195 Alterations and additions to the vascular flora of Victoria Part 2 by RCMP DORI MONO Cin tects ay Caf Ag Miitby uae Raat eles gf MOT gles 6 198 Basterdmethes@twaysiby ti tMOnSNAW. yas y ass ach tee ad Cay we 204 Geolouy-Orelvil Buttaloeby Frame ROOMS fy cass reewt 44.0 te Hath oun 206 Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1978 — Allan Roy Sefton by LATMORRE AIO RM Breet enMen ey tte iee Nudie Ou rtiews 4. ere Mat «cea 208 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Report of Meetings ............05 209 Cover illustration: Left to right Caladonia patersonii and Diuris punctata,. Photographed by E. Rotherham from the paintings by Amy Fuller. Sandy Beaches By A. W. BEASLEY* Sandy beaches along our coast are popu- lar playgrounds. As well as being recrea- tional assets, some beaches are of economic value for the minerals they contain. It is interesting to consider the nature, composi- tion, and origin of sandy bea¢hes. Beaches are defined as accumulations of loose sediment deposited by waves and cur- rents in*the shore zone. This is the zone between the water’s edge at normal low tide and the landward limit of effective wave action; it extends above normal high tide level, and is inundated by exceptionally high tides and by large waves during storms. Most beaches on the coast of Australia are sandy, but some are composed of pebbles, cobbles and boulders. The beach sand may have had several different sources. It may have been washed up by waves from the sea floor. It may have been derived compara- tively recently from the erosion and disin- tegration of rocks exposed in coastal cliffs. Some may have come from nearby rivers which carried down sandy loads to the coast, mainly in times of flood. Sandy beaches are seen to be built up during calm weather when waves are driven by gentle winds and tend to have a long wave length. On the other hand, sandy beaches are seen to be combed down, and much or all of the sand may be removed by waves generated by strong winds, espe- cially storm waves, which have a short wave length. Along much of the Australian coast the dominant wave direction is oblique to the shoreline. Sand is carried obliquely up the beach by the swash of a breaking wave, but the backwash carries it back at right angles to the shoreline, following the steepest gra- dient. The resulting action is that sand and other beach material is carried sideways in a *3 Georgian Court, Balwyn, Victoria. Honorary Associate in Geology, National Museum of Victoria, 172 zig-zag motion, This process by which material is transported along the shore is known as longshore drift. Longshore drift and the immediate coastal rocks largely con- trol the character of beach deposits. Sand may be moved considerable distances along the beach by longshore drifting. Drift action also takes place within the breaker zone and extends to the lower limit of wave action offshore; this drifting of sand along the sea floor parallel to the shore is produced by wave-induced currents. The overall diree- tion of drift is determined by the strength and duration of winds, the sand travelling in the direction of the prevailing winds. Thus, along much of the Victorian coast the pre- dominant drift is from west to east under the influence of wind-driven waves generated by prevailing south-westerly winds. Large tracts of the Australian coast, par- ticularly in eastern Australia, consist of long sandy beaches separated by cliffed head- lands. Wave energy is concentrated on headlands, and dispersed in bays with the result that shorelines tend to be made smooth in plan. During Quaternary (Pleistocene and Re- cent) times, that is during the last two mill- ion years, great quantities of sandy beach material have accumulated along our coast. Rivers that were far larger and more power- ful than those which now flow into the sea brought down much material to the margin of the sea in Pleistocene (Ice Age) times. With changes of sea level in Quaternary times a considerable amount of sand has passed through the surf or breaker zone a number of times and been reworked by wave action. Much of the sand composing beaches along the Victorian coast has been brought to the shore comparatively recently from the sea floor close offshore by wave action. At some places it is apparent that erosion and disintegration of rocks exposed in coastal Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 1. Sandy beach near Sorrento, Victoria, derived mainly from the erosion of adjacent cliffs of aeolianite. outcrops has yielded much of the material composing the beach sand. For example, cliffs and shore platforms of calcareous aeolianite on the Nepean Peninsula in Vic- toria have been important contributors of material which has gone to make up the sandy beaches of that region. Similarly, the sandy beach at Mornington in Port Phillip Bay has apparently resulted largely from the erosion of cliffs of sandstone along the coast there. Sandy beaches are often flanked by a belt of dunes. When dry, the sand grains are picked up particularly from the backshore zone of the beach, above normal high tide level, by onshore winds and carried a short distance inland where they are trapped by vegetation or moister ground. Erosion of the foredune adjacent to the beach occurs in- termittently at many places. Prolonged at- tack by powerful waves generated during storms and cyclonic disturbances may re- move considerable amounts of sand from the foredune as well as the beach. Much of this sand is carried into fairly deep water September/October, 1978 offshore and it may be a long time before it is brought back to the shore. Sandy beaches generally have a low angle of slope. Where the shore gradient is very small, the foreshore is wide. This is the zone exposed at low tide but submerged at high tide, A wide foreshore is present, for exam- ple, at Rosebud and Rye in Port Phillip Bay. Most sandy beaches are composed mainly of quartz grains and shell particles. Certain beaches, such as Squeaky Beach on Wilsons Promontory, are composed almost entirely of quartz grains. On the other hand, beach sands at Portland in western Victoria consist chiefly of shell particles, with only a few percent of quartz grains and other con- stituents. In Victoria, the beach sands east of Wilsons Promontory are predominantly quartzose, while west of Wilsons Promon- tory the sands of the ocean beaches are characteristically calcareous, being com- posed largely of shell fragments. Quartz is a common rock-forming min- eral which is very durable; this is why itis so abundant in sandy beaches. Frequently the 173 = LE Ny EE ENT ae NS es quartz and other mineral grains in beach sands have had a long detrital history since they were released by weathering and disin- tegration of source rocks. The primary source of most of the quartz in beach sands is granite, in which it generally occurs as sand-size grains. However, in many places the immediate source rocks are sandstones derived from the weathering of granites and other rocks. In Victoria, a large amount of the shell material in ocean beach sands west of Wil- sons Promontory has come from the weath- ering of coastal rock outcrops of calcareous 174 Fig. 2. Seams of heavy min- eral beach sand (black sand) near Broadbeach, Queens- land, aeolianite, which is composed largely of shell particles of sand size. Cliffs and shore platforms of aeolianite are prominent coas- tal features at such places as the Nepean Peninsula and further to the west at Warrnambool and Portland. This rock was formed from shell-rich sand blown from the exposed sea floor into high dunes at times of low sea level in Pleistocene times. Lime was spread through these calcareous sand dunes and they became lithified to form the aeolianite, sometimes called dune- limestone or aeolian calcarenite. The shell material in most sandy beaches Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 in Australia and elsewhere has been derived from the skeletons of marine organisms which lived on the sea floor and on rocky shore platforms. Many of the shells were broken into fragments, particularly after the animal died, by the pounding of waves. Shell material of fairly recent origin is found washed up in abundance on the shore at various places in Port Phillip Bay and Wes- ternport Bay; it plays an important part in building up sandy beaches. As well as quartz, grains of other miner- als are generally present in beach sands. These may include mica and feldspar as well as so-called heavy minerals such as ilme- nite, zircon, rutile, tourmaline and garnet. These heavy minerals have specific gravities markedly higher than quartz and shell material, At some places heavy miner- als are relatively abundant in sandy beaches. Under such conditions wave action concen- trates them into layers and, since most of the minerals are dark coloured, such concentra- tions are known as black sand deposits. These heavy mineral deposits occur in the backshore zone where powerful waves have carried the heavy mineral particles far up the beach and the backwash has dragged back most of the quartz and other light con- stituents. Following storms or cyclonic gales the backshore zone is sometimes co- vered with a layer of heavy minerals; dig- ging down in the sand may reveal a number of well-defined seams of heavy mineral concentrates, Such deposits have been exploited for their zircon, rutile and ilmenite content in Queensland, New South Wales and Western Australia. IImenite and rutile are sources of the metal titanium, and zircon is the main source of zirconium, By definition, sand grains range from 1/16mm to 2mm in diameter. In many beaches the grains are well sorted, that is they are mostly within a certain narrow range of size, and the grains often have a high degree of roundness. Walking on the dry sand of some beaches causes a squeak- ing or musical sound to be produced. Sands which possess this property are called “singing sands’’. The property has given Squeaky Beach on Wilsons Promontory its name, It is considered that the sound emitted when the dry sand is struck by the foot at Squeaky Beach and other places is con- nected with the nature of packing of the grains, which is controlled by their narrow range of size and their shape. At Squeaky Beach most of the sand grains are sub- rounded to rounded and they have a fairly high degree of sphericity. Presumably, the pressure produced when the sand is dis- turbed results in shearing, successive layers of the regularly packed grains shifting over the other grains. The character of the musi- cal note produced is some function of fric- tion. Back issues of Victorian Naturalist for Sale Mr. J. Rouel, PO Box 39 Point Lonsdale has several issues of the ** Victorian Naturalist’’ Vols September/October, 1978 86 to 91 inclusive which he will sell cheaply. 175 Methods for Marking Individual Snake-necked Tortoises Chelodina longicollis BY W. J. M. VESTJENS* Abstract Methods of marking tortoises individu- ally are described. Marking by cutting the marginal shields was found to last at least 20 years. Introduction The long-necked tortoise Chelodina lon- gicollis, has been studied at Canberra, A.C.T. (Vestjens, 1969). This paper re- ports the results of testing several methods for individual marking of the tortoises. Methods and Results The observations began in 1956. Tor- toises were collected in two permanent large ponds at and near *‘Gungahlin’’ Canberra, A.C.T. After being marked they were re- turned to the respective ponds from which they had been collected. The following marking methods were tested: (a) Claw clipping Claws on the front and hind feet were cut with bone cutters. This technique was discontinued because some tortoises when first collected already had claws missing. (b) Painting the carapace The carapace was scrubbed with a hard brush to remove dirt and algae. The tortoises were held in a cage until the carapace was completely dry. A number was then painted boldly on each side of the carapace. House paint was used, and the colour denoted the particular pond from which the tortoise was collected. After the paint had dried the ani- mal was returned to its pond. *Division of Wildlife Research, CSIRO, P.O. Box 84, Lyneham, A.C,T., 2602. 176 The method was discontinued after some months when it was found that the marking was not permanent because of moulting of the shields. In addition, the application of paint to the shields may upset the temperature control of the tortoise and may also cause deformity (Roberts, 1955). (c) Marking with reflective tape Symbols cut from strips of ‘*Scotchlite”’ self-adhesive refelective tape were stuck onto the carapace after it had been cleaned and dried. This method was unsuitable be- cause of moulting of the carapace shields. (d) Cutting the marginal shields In 1957 tortoises were marked by cutting small V-shaped notches in the marginal shields of the carapace (see Fig. la). The marginal shields do not cover internal or- gans as the vertebral and costal plates do. It was found that the number of marginal shields was constant in all collected tor- toises; the number of vertebral and costal shields varied. For tortoises with a carapace length of less than 100 mm a scalpel was used to cut the notches. Each notch was 2 mm wide at the opening and 2 mm deep. For animals longer than 100 mm a hacksaw blade was used. Generally the notch was 3 mm wide at the opening and 5 mm deep. In the case of shields numbered 5, 6,7, 50, 60, and 70 in Fig. 1b the notch was made not deeper than 2 mm since these shields are connected to the plastron. The key for the numbering of individual tortoises is shown in Fig. 1b, Animals marked by this method may have one to three V-shaped notches, For example number 5 will have one cut; number 55 two Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 1 (a). Carapace with names of shields: C = costal; N = nuchal; M = marginal; V = vertebral, cuts (50 + 5); number 555 three cuts (500, 50 and 5). Using this system 699 may be individually marked and an extra 100 if the nuchal shield is also included. Animals which were marked with the V-shaped cut were retrapped several years after marking. The V-shape had changed slightly to a U-shape. From 1957 to 1977, 73 tortoises marked by this method were retrapped; 22 had been marked more than 10 years. One animal, number 13, was marked in February 1957 and retrapped in August 1977; after more than 20 years the marking was clearly visible. Conclusion The marking of individual tortoises by V-shaped notches in the marginal shields Fig. 1 (b). Key to marginal marking of individual tor- toises from | to 699. has been found to be effective for at least 20 years after marking. This method would be suitable for long-term studies on develop- ment and movement in several species of tortoises. The only disadvantage is that the animals have to be trapped and handled in order to be identified. Acknowledgement The author is indebted to Mr. B. V. Fen- nessy for helpful discussion and for reading the manuscript and to Mr. F. Knight for drawing the figure. REFERENCES Roberts, M. F., 1955. Turtles as pets. Tropical Fish Hobbyist Publication, N.J., U.S.A, Vestjens, W. J. M., 1969. Nesting, egg-laying and hatching of the snake-necked tortoise at Canberra, A.C.T. Aust. Zoologist 15, 149-9. 177 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Five Small Fungi Newly Recorded from Victoria, Australia BY G. BEATON* AND G. WESTE* Five small fungi, not previously recorded for Victoria, have been described and illus- trated, These are all discomycetes, that is fungi in which the spores are exposed at maturity. The fruiting body which bears the sporangia is often called an apothecium, and is usually cup-shaped, However in one of the five small fungi described here (Micro- glossum) the fruiting body is compressed and spear-shaped rather than cup-shaped. Three of the fungi were collected from native forest and streams, while the remain- ing two were found on the lower surface of leaves from introduced trees. Microglossum viride (Pers. ex Fr.) Gill was collected from dense rain forest in eastern Victoria. Vibrissea guernisaci Crouan, the first sessile species of Vibrissea (section Apostemium) to be recorded for Victoria, was collected from under a small waterfall in the Otways. Polydesmia pruinosa (Berk. & Br.) Bond. was found on each occasion in association with a pyrenomycete on eucalypt bark. These fungi are not common, but their descriptions and illustrations may stimulate others to find them. The macroscopic draw- ings (E in the figures) illustrate clearly the nature and size of these unusual fungi. Microglossum viride (Pers. ex Fr.) Gill. Disc. Champ, Fr.: 25. 1879. Geoglossum viride Pers. ex Fr. Syst. Mycol. 1. 489. 1821. (Fig. 1.) Ascocarp solitary, clavate, to 3 em high; fertile portion 1.5 x 0.6 cm, slightly com- pressed, longitudinally furrowed, sharply delimited from stalk, dark green when fresh becoming greyish-brown after a long im- mersion in F.A.A.; stalk cylindrical, flexuose, slightly flattened apically, 15 x 2 mm, pale green when fresh, becoming *Eildon, Victoria. *Botany School, University of Melbourne. September/October, 1978 greyish-orange in F.A.A., appearing smooth but with a few scattered squamules visible under lens; flesh of fertile portion of hyaline or lightly pigmented parallel hyphae with some inflated cells and restricted septa, passing into the medulla of the stalk where the hyphae become thinner and shorter cel- led; the thin hyphae of the stalk cortex more tightly bound and heavily pigmented and surmounted by a few strands of more irregu- lar hyphae that form the scattered squamules. Asci clavate, 8-spored, 85-100 x 8-10 jum, positive iodine reaction. Asco- Spores broadly elliptic-fusiform, obliquely uniseriate, with 2 or 3 large oil drops, hyaline, 12-19 x 5.5-6.5 4m, smooth, at first continuous but after a long period ap- pearing 1-2-pseudo-septate. Paraphyses filiform, branched from the lower third, about | 4m thick expanding to 2.5 zm at the tips, mostly of same average length as the asci, a few to 10 zm longer. Known in Victoria from a solitary asco- carp, Mt. Drummer jungle gully, eastern Victoria, on a wet patch beside stream, G. Beaton 188, 20 May, 1964. Assigned to M. viride more on the green coloration of the ascocarp than on micro- scopic dimensions, In ascus size it is closer toM. olivaceum (Pers, ex Fr.) Gill. than to M. viride (see Dennis, 1968, Mains, 1946 and Seaver, 1951) and the ascospore size does not seem to be significantly different from either. Also the degree of roughness or smoothness of the stalk does not seem to be a reliable character. At no stage have truly septate ascospores been observed. In phloxine mounts made from the fresh specimen the ascospores were 2-3- guttulate, a condition they maintain after thirteen years. In mounts recently made after the ascocarp had been for thirteen years in F.A.A. the ascospore appearance is simi- lar except that the cytoplasm between the 178 ; a “dresoosy “q ‘uonejdas- d 2 MOUS 0} papeys sem) ‘sarodsoosy “q ‘sesXydesed pue snosy ‘> ‘ajnwenbs ym xeu09 xyes Jo aeydAH “g ‘peoy [Mey Jo eT[Npou Woy oeydAH se ioe pO Ba ‘| By = September/October, 1978 guttules has become granular in appearance. With careful examination under oil immer- sion it is clear that this granular condition could not be interpreted as true septa. This appears to contradict the description given by Dennis (1968) and by Seaver (1951) who both gave the ascospores as multi-septate, a condition that, apparently, was not ob- served by Mains (1946). The fungus must be more plentiful, at least in eastern Victoria, than the solitary ascocarp would indicate. It is hoped that more adequate collections will be made in the near future. Vibrissea guernisaci Crouan Annis. Sci. Nat. Bot. ser. 4, 7: 176, 1857. (Fig. 2.). Apostemidium guernisaci (Crouan) Boud., Hist. Class. Discom. d’ Eurape: 91 (1907). Apothecia superficial, scattered; disk to 1.5 mm diameter, grey-white with white areas of extruded ascospores. Convex and standing slightly above the black margin when fresh or soaked, black and depressed when dry; receptable saucer-shaped, ses- sile, with a broad central attachment, black, slightly roughened under hand lens; ectal excipulum to 130 jm thick in the basal area, a pigmented, irregular textura prismatica with cells to about 30 x 15 jam lying at a high angle to the surface and merging into two or three superficial layers of darker, thicker walled, globose, ellipsoidal or irregularly shaped cells; medullary excipulum hyaline, dense, structure not clearly seen. Asci cylindrical with a long, tapering stalk, with eight spores in a fascicle, 210-250 x 6.5 wm no iodine reaction. Ascospores filiform, tapering downwards, approx. 130-170 x.1.5 pm, hyaline, septate, averaging about 15 pm between septa. Paraphyses cylindrical with clavate tips, about 30 zm longer than the asci, some branched and septate in upper third, 1.5 jzm thick, tips to 6 «um. Collection examined: Quarry Glen, Tur- ton’s Track, Otway Range, Victoria, on fal- len eucalypt branch under small waterfall. G. Beaton 276, 14 Feb., 1965. This Victorian collection is, as far as is known, the first Vibrissea, section Apos- 180 temium (Sanchez & Korf, 1966) that has been recorded from the area. It compares most closely with V, guernisaci Crouan but differs in some dimensions and in the dis- tribution of pigmentation in the ectal ex- cipulum from the description of Graddon (1965) and in the colour of the apothecium from that of Seaver (1951). However, the range of ascus size of the Victorian collec- tion is well within the limits assigned to V’. guernisaci by Graddon and Seaver, and the degree of pigmentation of the ectal ex- cipulum seems to be too variable a factor to have great significance. The ascospore length, deduced from the measurement of numerous ascospore fascicles falls slightly below the range given by Graddon but, again, this seems hardly significant as as- cospore length, when it can be measured accurately, is variable within each species. V. guernisaci is the only species that we can locate in the literature that has a black recep- tacle and this, coupled with a broad agree- ment in dimensions and apothecial struc- ture, leads us to believe that the Victorian fungus is best identified with. guernisact. Key to Victorian Species of Vibrissea 1. Apothecia sessile V. guernisaci 1. Apothecia stipitate 2. Ascomata with green pigmentation in stem or head or both when fresh, 3 2. Ascomata lacking green pigmentation, being brown or yellowish brown when fresh or dried, toughly gelatinous when fresh. V. dura 3. Whole ascoma dark green, releasing dark green pigment in 2% KOH solu- tion, tips of paraphyses up to 7 zm wide. V. melanochlora 3. Green pigmentation much less intense or limited to the ascoma stem, tips of paraphyses less than 4 zm wide. 4 4. Whole ascoma pale green when fresh, drying at least partially brown, stem hairs to 150 zm, asci mostly less than 125 yum (Tasmania). V. tasmanica 4. Green pigment restricted to ascoma stem when fresh, head yellow, drying to grey black, stem hairs mostly less than SO pum, asci to 155 um. V. bicolor Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 3mm = = fe) ow Fig. 2. Vibrissea guernisaci. A. Ectal excipulum, B. Ascus, C. Tips of paraphyses, D. Ascospores, E. Apothecia. i CAD Oren ooo PGE wae Ly Sy eS aie fg September/October, 1978 181 Polydesmia pruinosa (Berk. & Br.) Bound., Hist. Class Discom. d'Europe: 100 (1907). (Fig. 3.) Apothecia superticial, scattered; disk to 0.6 mm diameter, flat or slightly convex, pruinose with protruding tips of paraphyses, white when fresh or dry; receptacle sessile, saucer-shaped, white, downy, margin in- conspicuous; ectal excipulum of varying thickness, a rather thick-walled textura an- gularis to textura epidermoidea with cells becoming smaller towards the surface and mixed with irregular strands of hyphae with shortly protruding ends. Asci cylindrical- clavate, slightly curved, 8-spored, pore strongly iodine positive, 80-100 x 6,5-10 um. Ascospores ellipsoidal-fusiform, straight or curved, hyaline, smooth, irregu- larly distributed in the ascus, containing several oil drops, at first continuous, be- coming 1-3-septate, 13-27 x 3.5-5 um. Paraphyses filiform with irregular, much- branched tips, slightly longer than the asci, about 1.5 ym thick. Fruiting at various times throughout the year on or associated with stromatic Pyrenomycetes. We are indebted to Dr, Derek Reid for drawing our attention to the presence of Polydesmia in the Victorian area. The ag- reement of Victorian collections with the description given by Dennis (1968) is good. The upper range of ascospore size is greater than that given for European collections but the larger spores are only a very small pro- portion of the total. The protruding ends of the ectal excipulum hyphae are not as prom- inent as is indicated by Dennis and we have also observed a thin layer of amorphous material on the surface that seems to frag- ment and probably adds to the downy ap- pearance of the receptacle. Collections examined: Cumberland Re- serve near Marysville, Victoria, on bark of living Eucalyptus regnans F. Muell., on a dead Pyrenomycete, D. Reid (herb, Beaton 388), 19 Jun. 1976; Laver’s Hill, Victoria, on dead Pyrenomycete on fallen eucalyptus branch, G. Beaton 116, 17 November, 1963; Mait’s Rest near Apollo Bay, Vic- 182 toria, associated with Pyrenomycete inside fallen bark of E. regnans, G. Beaton 388a, 23 July, 1976. Trochila ilicina (Nees ex Fr.) Greenhalgh & Morgan-Jones Trans. Br. mycal. Soc. 47 (2): 311-320 (1964). (Fig. 4.) Sphaeria ilicina Nees ex Fr. Syst. Mycol. 2: 1823. Eustegia ilicis (Fr.) Chev., Flor. Gen. Paris 1: 443, 1826. T. ilicis (Chey.) Crouan, Flore de Finis- tere pA4, 1867 T. ilicis (Chev.) Rehm, Die Pilze 3: 129, 1896 Apothecia scattered or in swarms, some~ times confluent, immersed in the underside dead leaf tissue and opening by lifting the covering patch of host epidermis; disc to 0.8 mm diameter, circular, elliptical, or irregu- lar if apothecia confluent, dark grey when soaked or fresh, drying almost black, flat or slightly convex and standing slightly above the epidermis; the hymenium arising almost directly from a layer mostly less than 35 «xm thick of brown pigmented, thick walled tex- tura globulosa to textura angularis which turns up around the disk and shows as a blackish margin through the epidermis; mycelium of thin-walled hyphae to 3.5 4m diameter, brown beneath the apothecium becoming hyaline in the host tissue; the slightly protruding disk is protected by a layer of paraphyses to about SO jm thick that become shorter and modified towards the surface of the leaf. Asci clavate, 8-spored, 70-85 x 8-11 jm, positive iodine reaction, Ascospores obliquely biseriate, ellipsoidal, hyaline, smooth, with one or two large oil drops, a few becoming palely tinted with age, 10-12 x 4.5-5.5 um, non- septate, Paraphyses clavate, septate, un- branched, up to about 15m longer than the asci, 2.5 yzm thick, tips to 5 wm. On the underside of dead leaves of holly (lex aquifolium L.) in winter, Many holly trees have been examined throughout Vic- toria during the 13 years since the find- ing of the listed collection but no further evidence of the presence of 7, ilicina has been found, There does not seem to be any Vic.Nat, Vol. 95 September/October, 1978 20uUmM . A. Ectal excipulum, B. Asci, C. Paraphyses with much-branched tips, D. Ascospores, E. Apothecia. Fig. 3. Polydesmia pruinosa 183 UE S][29 p ajuswsid jeseg ‘g ‘eae jeuldiep “y “vuion! D d Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 184 “saqoy ewapide yim samy ‘eIoayjody “gq ‘sorodsoosy ‘q ‘sesXydered pur rosy *D ‘s|[29 payesuoyo YIM vore [eulsieyy *g ‘e[oed2001 Jo s]]99 [eseg “YW “IsP4a20IND] DjIYIOLT *¢ “314 Ss - September/October, 1978 significant difference between the Victorian collection and the descriptions given by Dennis (1968) and Greenhalgh and Morgan-Jones (1964) and it is reasonable to assume its identity with the European species. Collection examined: Devondale, Vic- toria, in deserted garden on heathland, G. Beaton 289, 13 June, 1965. Trochila laurocerasi (Desm.) Fr. Summa Veg. Scand. Sect. Post,: 367 (1849). (Fig. 5.) Apothecia scattered, seldom confluent, immersed in underside of leaf, exposed by the splitting and turning back in irregular lobes of the overlying epidermis; disc to 0.4 mm diameter, greenish-grey when fresh, dark grey when soaked, mostly covered by lobes of epidermis when dry, circular, flat; receptacle dark brown, saucer-shaped, forming a thin black-appearing margin which supports the hymenium slightly above the leaf surface in fresh or soaked apothecia; brown basal layer to about 40 wm thick, a pigmented, thick-walled textura an- gularis with cells becoming larger and more elongated in the upper marginal area; sub- hymenium to about 50 zm thick, of vertical, mostly parallel, thick-walled, hyaline hyphae. Asci clavate, 8-spored, strong posi- tive iodine reaction, 55-65 x 6-9 (— 12) um. Ascospores uniseriate or irregularly biseriate, ellipsoidal, hyaline, smooth, mostly with two large oil drops, 7-10 x 3,5-4 wm, non-septate. Paraphyses clavate, septate, unbranched, same length as asci, a few with greenish oil drops, 2.5 jzm thick, tips to 4 wm. These fungi were found fruiting in au- tumn on the underside of dead leaves of Cherry Laurel (Prunus laurocerasus L.). As with 7. ilicina, known to us from a single Victorian collection which agrees very well with the description given by Greenhalgh & Morgan -Jones (1964) except that no brown ascospores were observed. T. craterium Fr., an inconspicuous species on the dead leaves of Ivy (Hedera helix) with asci to 60 x 12 zm, ascospores 6-9 x 4-5 jm and paraphyses to 6 zm wide 186 at the tips (Dennis 1968) should also be looked for in Victoria. Collection examined: Blackwood near Ballan, Victoria, B. Fuhrer (herb. Beaton 329), 29 May, 1966. Acknowledgements The authors thank Dr. Swart for a critical reading of the manuscript and Dr, Calder, Chairman of the School of Botany for mak- ing facilities available. REFERENCES Dennis, R. W. G., 1968. British Ascomycetes. Lehre: J. Cramer. Graddon, W. D., 1965, A guide to lignicolous species of Apostemidium, Trans. Br. mycol, Soc, 48; 639-646. Greenhalgh, G. N. & Morgan-Jones, G., 1964, Trans. Br, mycol. Soc, 47: 311-320. Mains, E, B., 1955, North American hyaline-spored species of the Geoglosseae. Mycologia 47: 846-877, Sanchez, A, & Kort, R. P., 1966. The genus Vibrivsea and the generic names Leptosporoum, Apostemium, Apostemidium, Gorgoniceps and Ophiogloea. Mycologia 58; 722-737. Seaver, F. J., 1951. The North American cup fungi (Inoperculates) Lancaster Press Pa, GLOSSARY Apothecium: a fungus fruiting body with spores produced in asci on the exposed surface, often cup-shaped. When apothecia are confluent each one is linked to the next, Amorphous: shapeless and without definte struc- ture. Ascocarp: the fruiting body bearing the asci, Ascoma: a fruiting body producing sacs of spores. Ascus: a sac-like bag in which spores are pro- duced, Ascospore: the spores produced inside the ascus. Biseriate: in two layers, usually ascospores in an ascus in this paper. Clavate: club-shaped. Discomycete: a large group of fungi which pro- duce their spores on un exposed surface, usu- ally in apothecia, and often called the ‘cup- fungi’. Excipulum: the outer tissue of the apothecium. it is often denser and darker. Ectal excipulum refers to the oulermost or superficial layers. Medullary excipulum refers to the layers inside the ectal excipulum, F.A.A.: formalin acetic acid, fixative used to preserve the fungi. guttulate; of spores containing one or more oil globules, hyaline: transparent. Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 hymenium: fertile layer which forms spores. hypha: thread of fungus; the tissue of fungus consists of threads. KOH: caustic potash. paraphysis: sterile filaments or hairs which grow among the asci. pyrenomycete: fungi witha flask-shaped fruiting body in which the asci lie parallel, septum: cross wall. Sessile: not stalked. squamules: small scales. textura angularis: short-celled tissue of polyhedral cells without air spaces in the fruit- ing body. textura epidermoidea: long-celled tissue of hyphae running in all directions without inter- cellular spaces in the fruiting body. textura prismatica: short-celled tissue of pris- matic cells in the fruiting body. textura globulosa: short-celled tissue of round cells with intercellular spaces in the fruiting body. The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 141 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A, BAINES Pholidia. Gk pholis (genitive pholidos), a horny scale, particularly of reptiles. A superseded name for Eremophila. Phragmites. Gk phragmites, of fences (from phragma, a fence or screen); from the way these large grasses form a hedgelike growth along ditches. There are only three species in the world, ours being the cos- mopolitan P. communis, Common Reed, which forms floating fens at the mouth of the River Danube. Phrygilanthus. Gk phrygilos, a finch, chaffinch; anthos, flower; probably because of the spreading of seeds by the Mistletoe Bird, Dicaeum hirundinaceum, which be- longs to the family Dicaeidae (Flower- peckers), not to the Finches (Fringillidae) or Weaver Finches (Ploceidae). Our two species, first in Loranthus, then in Phrygilanthus, are now in Muellerina (q.v.). *Phyla, Gk phyle, phylon, a tribe or race (cf. phylum, a sub-kingdom of animals or plants). As the plural of phylum is phyla, the coining of this generic name by Loureiro appears to have been unwise — another example, by the great Linnaeus, is the genus September/October, 1978 Cotyledon (family Crassulaceae). Our species, *P. nodiflora, Fog-fruit, was for- merly classified in Lippia, family Ver- benaceae. Phyllanthus. Gk phyllon, leaf; anthos, flower; in some foreign species the flowers grow on the edges of dilated leaf-like bran- chlets. A large genus of 600 species, of which 60 are in Australia (including 55 en- demics), but Victoria has only 3 species, known as different kinds of spurge, as are our 8 species of Euphorbia, the family to which Phyllanthus belongs being Euphor- biaceae. Phylloglossum. Gk phyllon, leaf; glossa, tongue; from the rather fleshy, linear- subulate radical leaves. Our species, P.drummondii, Pigmy Clubmoss, is one of many Australian plants named after James Drummond, the famous botanical collector and explorer in Western Australia (see ‘The Drummonds of Hawthornden’, by Rica Erickson). (The garden flower Phlox drummondi is named after his brother Thomas, who collected in North America, and was a naturalist on the second Arctic journey of Sir John Franklin.) 187 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 11 By M. G. CORRICK* Pultenaea costata H. B. Williamson in Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet, 33:140 (1921). Pultenaea costata is one of several species of Pultenaea endemic to the Gram- plans, where it occurs mainly in the higher parts of the northern ranges, although it does not extend to the more exposed, rocky areas near the summit of the peaks. P. costata isa spreading shrub, about | m high. The young stems are covered with pale hairs, but they become glabrous with age. The ovate, alternate leaves are 7-15 mm long and 2-5 mm wide and usu- ally have three to five prominent longitudi- nal veins, as indicated by the species name. They taper into a long, pungent point, are concave above and recurved at the tip. Both surfaces are glabrous except for a few pale hairs on the underside of young leaves; the margins are minutely scabrid. The lanceolate, dark brown stipules are about 7 mm long and taper into long, slen- der points. The flowers are axillary, but are clustered in apparent heads at the tips of the bran- chlets. They are a rich orange, strongly marked with dark purple-brown on stan- dard, wings and keel. They are about 12- Fig. 14a, Known distribution of Pultenaea costata and P. acerosa. *7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, Victoria. 188 15 mm long, with the standard about 11 mm high and 14 mm broad. The calyx is about 9 mm long with slen- der, pointed lobes. The lower part of the tube is glabrous, but the lobes have ciliate margins and are covered with long, white hairs. The ovate bracteoles have ciliate margins and a tuft of hairs at the base; they are attached immediately below the calyx tube and reach almost to the top of the lobes. The flowers are subtended by leaves with enlarged stipules and also floral bracts. As in a number of other Pultenaea species a transition can be seen from the normal stipu- late leaves to floral bracts, with the stipules enlarging and the leaf becoming progres- sively smaller, until the innermost flowers of the cluster are subtended by a bract alone. The ovary and base of the long, slender style are covered with pale hairs. Although comparatively large, the ripe pod remains almost concealed within the calyx. Flowering time extends from mid- October to late November. Plants at lower altitudes, such as along the Rose’s Gap Road, will be likely to flower before the end of October, whereas in higher areas of the Wonderland Range the peak of flowering is usually after the middle of November. Considerable variation in leaf size occurs in several populations of P. costata and some of the very narrow-leafed forms have been identified as P. acerosa, a closely re- lated species. However, observations in several areas suggest that P, costata may hybridize, possibly with P. mollis, to pro- duce a variation in leaf form, size of plant and growth habit. A particularly interesting community, showing a range of variation occurs round the picnic area at The Sundial. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Grampians, Mt. Difficult, /. W. Audas & C. Vic,Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 14. a-h, Pultenaea costata; a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style; d, floral bract; e, leaf and stipules, all from MEL 515371; f, pod; g, seed, from MEL 526356; h, narrow-leafed form from the Grampians, MEL 526287. i-n, Pultenaea acerosa; i, habit, from MEL 526422; j, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; k, style, from MEL 526335; |, leaf and stipules from MEL 526422; m, pod; n, seed, from MEL 526238. September/October, 1978 189 D'Alton, November 1923 (MEL 526345); Grampians, Rose's Gap Rd., M. G. Corrick 5622, 16.x.1976 (MEL 515371); Gram- pians, Picnic area near The Sundial, M. G. Corrick 5701, 5704, 5697, 20 Nov. 1976 (MEL 526287, MEL 526284, MEL 526291); Grampians, F. Mueller (MEL 526356 Syntype). Pultenaea acerosa R.Br. ex Benth. in Flora Australiensis 2:131 (1864). Pultenaea acerosa is recorded as occur- ring in western Victoria, however its main distribution is in South Australia; on Kan- garoo Island, around Port Lincoln and in the Mount Lofty Range. Of the Victorian col- lections examined in the National Her- barium, Melbourne, all but two were col- lected in the Grampians and these appear to be the narrow-leafed form of P. costata re- ferred to above. Of the remaining two specimens, one is marked **Wimmera’’ and is identical in appearance with the other Grampians collections, it seems most likely that it was in fact collected there; the second is a sterile specimen from near the South Australian border in the Red Bluff area, north of Yanic. A description and drawing based on South Australian material is given here for comparison with P, costata. Information on occurrences of P. acerosa in Victoria, sup- ported by good collections, would be wel- come. P. acerosa is a small, rigid shrub 30- 60 cm high, with pubescent or tomentose stems. The alternate, linear-terete leaves are 5-10 mm long, grooved on the upper side and tapering into a strong, pungent point. They are glabrous except for a few loose, pale hairs on young growth. The dark brown, lanceolate stipules, closely appressed to the stem are about4mm long and taper into a slender tip. The orange and dark red flowers are axil- lary, but usually clustered at the tips of the branches. The standard is 10mm high and 8mm broad with dark red lines in the throat, the keel is also dark red. The calyx is about 7mm long with rather broad lobes which taper abruptly into slen- der points. It is glabrous except for the 190 ciliate margins of the lobes. The ovate brac- teoles are 4mm long and also have ciliate margins; they are attached immediately below the calyx tube and reach about half way up the calyx lobes. The flowers are subtended by leaves with slightly enlarged stipules, but floral bracts are absent. The ovary is covered with short, pale appressed hairs and the lower one third of the style is also hairy. The short pale hairs persist on the pod, which is half concealed by the calyx. Flowering time is about mid September to the end of October. P. acerosa var. acicularis H.B. William- son differs in having slightly longer needle- like leaves and very pale, usually solitary, axillary flowers. It occurs in the Mt. Lofty Range and on Kangaroo Island, Although superficially rather similar to P. acerosa, the narrow-leafed forms of P. costata may be distinguished by the very long hairs on the calyx lobes and the stan- dard which is broader than high. P. acerosa has only slightly enlarged stipules on the leaves below the flowers, whereas P. cas- tata has numerous leaves with enlarged stipules clustered around the flowers and demonstrates the transition from leaves to bracts below the inner, youngest flowers of the inflorescence. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Big Desert, 2 mls. E, of S.A, border & N. of Red Bluff, A.C. Beauglehole 38346, 18. vi. 1972 (MEL 504795); Yorke's Penin- sula, S.A., W. Gill 164, 30.ix.1890 (MEL 526335); Encounter Bay, S.A., Miss J.L. Hussey 315, 1894 (MEL 526422); Claren- don, S.A., O. Tepper 453, 24.xii.1881 (MEL 526328). Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 The Oak Leaf-miner A new infestation of our street trees? BY D. E. MCINNES* OF FNCV Microscopy Group At the FNCV meeting in February 1978 attention was drawn to extensive damage to oak leaves caused by some sort of leaf- miner. Specimens of the leaves were shown, and under microscopes were exhi- bited the larvae in the mines, pupae, and live moths that had hatched from the pupae. Also under a microscope were specimens of what was thought to be pupae of wasps that may be parasites on the miner larvae. A great deal of interest was aroused, and at a later meeting of the FNCV Microscopy Group members showed more leaf-miner moths and also several wasps that had emerged from miner-infested oak leaves. Mr. John Strong had mounted six different wasps. Were they parasites on the leaf- miner larvae? In view of the interest aroused, Dr. Tim New of Latrobe University was asked if any information was available on the infestation of oak leaves, He replied that work was being done in Melbourne and sent a copy of an article by Dr. I. F. B. Common in the Journal of the Australian Entomological Society. This article is ideal as general background for the ordinary person in- terested in natural history, and is re-printed on the next page by permission of the author and of the editor Dr. Rice. Dr. New has contributed an article on the extent of the miner infestation in the Mel- *129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145. September/October, 1978 bourne area, and members will appreciate his prompt co-operation and assistance. Country Members — Is the leaf-miner in your area? A visitin March , 1978, showed no signs of the leaf-miner on oak trees at Creswick, and country members could keep an eye on the oaks in their area. Reports of infestation will be of great interest to this Club; simply send your findings to the FNCV Micros- copy Group. Make Your Own Observations The interested layman can carry out in- vestigations of his own. Twigs of oak leaves showing signs of blisters caused by leaf- miners should be placed ina large transpar- ent plastic bag; then tie the open end around the neck of a 1 Ib, jam jar. The larvae will form pupae under cover of the leaf mine, and a few weeks later the moths will hatch and make their way to the jar. If any parasi- tic wasps are present they will do the same. Examine all specimens with a hand lens or with a microscope if you have one. Try your hand at making mounts of the moths and wasps. (Editor’s Note: All this material was re- ceived in time for publication in June ‘“*Naturalist’’ but as oak leaves are not avail- able during winter (except evergreen species) it was decided to hold the articles until this October issue when leaf-miners might be active again.) 191 The Oak Leaf-miner Phyllonorycter messaniella (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) established in Australia BY |. F. B. COMMON* Reprinted with permission from the Journal of the Australian Entomological Society, Volume 15 (1976) Abstract The European oak leaf-miner Phyl- lonerycter messaniella (Zeller) (Lepidopt- era: Gracillariidae) is recorded from Au- stralia for the first time. The larvae have damaged several ornamental deciduous and evergreen oaks and chestnuts in the Austra- lian Capital Territory and New South Wales. Six hymenopterous parasites have been reared. The adult moths and larval mines are figured. In January, 1976, two adults of Phyl- lonorycter messaniella (Zeller) were sub- mitted to me for identification by Mr. C. Nazer of the Canberra City Gardens Ad- ministration. These had been reared from leaf-mines on deciduous oaks, Quercus sp., grown as street trees, The mines were numerous and the foliage of the affected trees showed considerable bronzing. Examination of additional oaks in other parts of the city revealed a heavy general infestation and counts of leaf-mines on a random sample of 10 more or less mature leaves of Q. /usitanica Lam. yielded a mean of 15.3 mines per leaf (Fig. 1). A survey of Canberra ornamental trees by Mr. Nazer showed that several species of deciduous and evergreen oaks were attacked, as well as the chestnut Castanea sativa Mill. Among the most severely affected were Q. lusitanica and Q. robur L., whereas Q. palustris Muenchh, and Q. borealis Michx., and the evergreen oaks Q. suber L. and Q. ilex L. had only a few mines. En- quiries and observations in New South Wales indicated that oaks in the Sydney metropolitan area and at Wollongong, *Division of Entomology, CSIRO, Canberra, 2601 192 Menangle Park, Bundanoon and Bathurst were also attacked, although no mines were noticed at Armidale and Glen Innes. These are the first records in Australia of this pest of exotic ornamentals. P. mes- saniella is of European origin, although it has been present in New Zealand since 1951] (Wise 1953a). It spread rapidly in New Zea- land and by 1954 was distributed over most of the North Island and the Nelson district of the South Island (Wise 1954). The follow- ing year it spread much further south (Wise 1955). Wise (1953b) recorded the leaf- miner on five species of Quercus and on several other hosts including Fagus (beech), Nothofagus (Antarctic beech), Be- tula (birch), Carpinus, Parrotia, Liquidambar, Feijoa, Castamea, Prunus, Carya (pecan), and Malus (apple). How- ever, Swan (1973) found that its original host potential had not in fact been realised and in 1972 he had found mines only on Quercus spp., Fagus, Betula and Castanea. The genus Phyllonorycter Hubner, for- merly known as Lithocolletis Hubner, con- tains numerous Palearctic species mining in the leaves of oaks and other trees. It is rep- resented in Australia by two small species groups, One mining in the leaves of Mal- vaceae, Tilliaceae and Sterculiaceae, and the other in the leaves of Papilionaceae. Throughout the genus the mines are con- fined to the epidermis during the first three larval instars, but the fourth instar become characteristically “‘tentiform'’. This form of mine results when the larva spins a layer of silk over the inner surface of the leaf cuticle, and the silk contracts and forms a fold in the cuticle and a corresponding con- vex buckling of the opposite leaf surface. Pupation occurs within the mine and the Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 Fig. 1. Underside of Quercus sp. leaf with larval mines of Phyllonorycter messaniella, pupa is protruded through an aperture in the covering cuticle before the adult emerges. InP. messaniella the mines occur on the underside of the leaf (Figs. 1, 2), but mature mines are also clearly visible on the upper- side by the eroded and buckled areas of the leaf, which soon turn brown in colour The adults (Fig.3) have a wing span of only about 7 mm; they are pale shining brown in colour with a distinctive wing pattern. The frons is white and the head bears a characteristic tuft of erect hairs (Fig. 4), fawn in colour. At rest the adult holds its body parallel to but clear of the substrate, unlike many other Gracillariidae in which the body is held at a steep angle. In New Zealand P. messaniella can pass through three generations annually (Swan 1973). The spring and summer generations September/October, 1978 Fig. 2. Mature larval mine with protruding pupal exuvium and longitudinal fold in leaf cuticle covering mine. are thought to be largely restricted to de- ciduous oaks and the other deciduous hosts. Overwintering occurs in the larval stage on evergreen oaks, primarily Q. suber and Q. ilex, without a diapause. Before 1957 the only parasite reared from P. messaniella in New Zealand was the European hymenopteron Pnigalio pec- tinicornis (L.), which had apparently been introduced accidentally. In 1955 the DSIR requested the Commonwealth Institute of Biological Control to search for parasites of P. messaniella and in 1957 Apanteles cir- cumscriptus (Nees) and Enaysma splendens Delucchi were introduced from Europe and established in New Zealand, At Christ- church Swan (1973) found that Apanteles was the more abundant of the two, but Enaysma was almost as common where 193 Fig. 3. Adult male Phyllonorycter messaniella, leaf-miner populations were low. These two parasites were thought to have largely re- placed Pnigalio. Whereas counts of more than 40 mines per leaf were recorded when the infestation at Nelson was at its peak, by 1972 the density had dropped to 2.3 mines per leaf, However, this was still well above that of Switzerland, where one mine per 20 to 30 leaves was considered a heavy infesta- tion. At Canberra six hymenopterous parasites have so far been reared from collections of mined oak leaves. Five of them belong to the family Eulophidae and are referred to widespread genera which occur naturally in Australia: Neochrysocharis sp., Achry- socharella spp. (two species), Elachertus sp. and Sympiesis sp. One belongs to an unidentified genus and species of 194 Fig. 4, Anterolateral view of head. Ichneumonidae. Examples of each of these have been deposited in the Australian Na- tional Insect Collection, Canberra. Acknowledgments Thanks are due to Dr. E. F. Riek for identifying the parasites, and to Mr: C. Nazer, Dr. C. N. Smithers, Misses J. C. and S. Cardale, Mrs. H. Cameron, Mr. N. R. Badans and Mr. E, D, Edwards for provid- ing notes or samples of mined oak leaves. Mrs. Sybil Monteith kindly prepared the drawings in Figs. 5 and 6, and Mr. C, Lourandos the photograph in Fig. 3. REFERENCES Swan, D. I., (1973). Evaluation of biological control of the oak leaf-miner Phyllonorycter mesyaniella (Zell) (Lep., Gracillariidae) in New Zealand, Bull, ent, Res 63; 49-55. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Wise, K. A.J. , (1953a). Occurrence of the oak blotch miner Lithovolletis messaniellu Zeller (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) in New Zealand. Trany. R, Soc. N.Z. $1; 65-66. Wise, K. A. J., (1953b), Host plants of Lithocolleris messaniella Zeller (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) in New Zealand. NZ. J. Sei, Tech, (A) 35: 172-174 Wise, K, A, J,, 1954. Records and observations of New Zealand Lepidoptera, NZ. Entomologist (4); 27-30 Wise, K. A. J., 1955, Notes on New Zealand Lepidopt- era, NZ, Entomologist 1(5); 13 Notes on the Oak Leaf-Miner in the Melbourne area BY T. R. New* Introduction Oak trees (Quercus spp) in northern temperate regions support some of the largest-known assemblages of phytophag- ous insects, In contrast, oaks support few insect species in many countries to where they are introduced, but some introduced oak insects may demand attention as aesthe- lc or potential forest pests. Thus, for exam- ple, biological control attempts were made against exotic oak aphids in Tasmania some years ago (Wilson 1960). Representatives of the large complexes of Lepidoptera as- sociated with oaks elsewhere have, until recently, been absent from Australia al- though Evans (1939) noted occasional at- tacks on oak by several native Lepidoptera. The recently introduced oak leaf-miner (Phyllonorycter messaniella (Zeller)), re- corded by Common (1977), is of particular interest because of its aggressive colonisa- tion ability and because its biology and parasite complex have been studied both in its native Europe and in New Zealand, where it became the target of biological con- trol attempts some twenty years ago. Since Common’s paper appeared, the moth has been recorded from Norfolk Island (Smithers 1977) and has been found abun- dantly in Victoria, where the conspicuous blotch mines on the undersides of oak leaves are now a familiar sight in the Melbourne metropolitan area. The purpose of this note is to augment the * Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, Bun- doora, 3083, September/October, 1978 information published by Common (1977), and to report some preliminary findings on P.messaniella around Melbourne: a regular sampling programme, involving examina- tion of series of mines from some twenty species of oaks and some other trees has been undertaken since May 1977, with the aims of clarifying the lifehistory and para- site spectrum of P.messaniella around Mel- bourne. Comments on biology There are strong indications that the biology of the moth is similar to that documented for New Zealand (Wise 1953a, b, 1954, 1955, unpublished), where the species rapidly increased its host range fol- lowing introduction and showed the ability to increase to epidemic levels. It seemed that the moth almost completely utilised the foliage of its more usual host plants, and a xenophagically increased host range al- lowed population growth to continue — an unusual strategy in leaf-miners. Amongst the trees attacked by messaniella during this initial *‘build-up phase’? were two species of Nothofagus, and the suspicion that it might become a forest pest in New Zealand prompted investigation of its parasite com- plex in Europe, and subsequent biocontrol. There are currently no records of mes- saniella attacking the Australian Nothofagus cunninghami:; the single speci- men in the Royal Botanic Gardens (which is within 200 m of very heavily infested Quer- cus) has apparently not yet been attacked and recent laboratory tests have failed to 195 Table 1. Host trees of Phyllonorycter messaniella in Melbourne, 1977-78. CATEGORY SPECIES a) Heavily infested i. Summer hosts Quercus alba bicolor, borealis, canariensis, cerris, dentata, douglassii, lusitanica, macrocarpa, mirbeckii, montana, pyrenaica, pubescens, robur, ruba. ii. Winter hosts b) Lightly infested Q.coccifera, ilex, phillyreoides. Q.agrifolia, coccinea, palustris, wislezenii, Fagus sylvatica, Carpinus betulus, Lithocarpus sp. c) New Zealand host genera examined in Australia, with no mine records to date Nothofagus, Betula, Liquidambar, Pyrus, Prunus. Table 2. Summary of infestation levels and parasite species of P.messaniella in various regions. NO INFESTATION LEVELS PARASITE AREA (NOS, MINES/LEAF) SPP REFERENCES Europe Low (< 1) 21 Delucchi 1958 N.Zealand 1950s High (80) | Given 1959 1970s Low (2.3) 3 Swan 1973 Australia ACT Moderate-High (15+) 6 Common 1977 Victoria High( 50+) 8 New, unpublished Norfolk I, High( 60+) ? Smithers 1977 induce the moth to oviposit on seedling Nothofagus. It seems likely that, if the New Zealand sequence is paralleled, messaniella may markedly extend its host range over the next few years and then contract to a relatively small number of host species. Indeed, there is evidence that during the last year ‘‘new”’ hosts have been infested in Melbourne, and numbers have increased markedly on some species of Quercus earlier considered un- suitable (Table 1). The moth’s three annual generations in New Zealand (Swan 1973) are paralleled in Victoria, although slightly different genera- tion times on different host species give the impression of more generations being pre- sent, It breeds throughout the year, by mov- ing onto evergreen hosts for the winter gen- eration and then dispersing to other hosts as foliage becomes available in spring. The moth bred on evergreen oaks in Melbourne September/October, 1978 through the winter of 1977, and the life cycle thus has the potential for continuous increase in numbers throughout the year — undoubtedly a major factor influencing its rapid spread — and the possibility of *‘es- caping’’ from more seasonal natural enemies. Maximum infestation levels found in Victoria are compared with those re- corded elsewhere in Table 2, together with the numbers of parasite species recorded. Perhaps the major difference detected to date between messaniella in Australia and in New Zealand is that Australian populations support a much more diverse complex of hymenopterous parasites. In Victoria, at least eight species of Chalcidoidea are found as parasites or hyperparasites, and the most abundant species are found throughout the year. Levels of parasitism have reached a maximum of about 65% in specific samples, but overall have been in the order of 20% each month, with much lower levels during early winter. Little difference in parasite 196 levels occurs in samples from different host species at the same time of the year, It also appears, although identifications are not yet complete, that several parasite species have been found either only in A.C.T. or only in Victoria: the Ichneu- monid recorded by Common (1977), for instance, has not been found in any of our samples to date. Several of the Victorian parasites have been reared from other min- ing Lepidoptera (predominantly those min- ing phyllodes of Acacia spp) and one from the eucalypt-mining sawfly (Phyllac- teophaga) and these other miners generally support fewer parasite species than does messaniella, In contrast, in New Zealand, there was no evidence of any native parasite moving on to messaniella after its arrival, and the only parasite initially recorded was a common European species. Nevertheless, the additional complex of parasites in Australia still permits high in- festation levels to occur, and details of the interactions of the various wasp species are still unclear. It is possible that native para- sites may increase in effect once the host population becomes more stable but, should biocontrol attempts eventually be deemed worthwhile, additional parasites from Europe may be preferable, Several of these (including Apanteles and Enaysma, both in- troduced and successful in New Zealand) show different seasonal peaks, and could possibly be used to inflict a more seasonal mortality on the moth. Acknowledgements lam very grateful to Dr D. M. Churchill for permission to work in the Royal Botanic Gardens, and to Mr Peter Webb and other members of the Gardens staff for much help. MrK. A. J. Wise generously sent me copies of his unpublished notes on P. mes- saniella in New Zealand, and Mrs J. M. Tenberge and Miss P. Fischer helped with sampling and examination of samples. REFERENCES Common, I. F. B., 1977. The oak leaf-miner, Phyl- lonorycter messaniella (Lepidoptera:Gracillariidae) established in Australia. /.Aust.Ent.Soc, 15 (1976): 471-473. Delucchi, V. L., 1958. Lithocolletis messaniella Zeller (Lep. Gracillariidae); analysis of some mortality fac- tors with particular reference to its parasite complex. Entomophaga 3; 203-270. Evans, J. W., 1939. Oak Insects. Tasm.J.Agric. 10: 199-205, Given, B. B., 1959. Biological control factors influenc- ing populations of oak leaf-miner, Lithocolletis mes- saniella Zeller, in New Zealand including the intro- duction of parasites. N.Z.J.Agric.Res, 2: 124-133. Smithers, C. N., 1977. The oak leaf-miner, Phy/- lonorycter messaniella (Zeller) (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) established on Norfolk Island. Aust.Ent.Mag. 4: 16, Swan, D. I. As cited at end of Dr Common’s article, Wilson, F., 1960. A review of the biological control of insects and weeds in Australia and Australian New Guinea. Tech.Commun.C.1.B.C. 1, 102 pp. Wise, K. A. J. As cited at end of Dr Common’s article, The Geomorphology of the Gippsland Lakes Region This monograph by E. C. F. Bird provides an account of the geomorphological evolution of the Gippsland Lakes, together with their adjacent ter- rain, and describes and analyses the changes in September/October, 1978 progress around their shores. It can be purchased for $3.00 and is available from the Ministry for Conservation’s Head Office at 240 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne, Victoria. 197 Alterations and additions to the vascular flora of Victoria — Part 2. By A. C, BEAUGLEHOLET introduction Part 1* of this paper dealt with name changes to the Victorian flora and also in- cluded reference to some new names. This section lists all known additions to the state's flora available to the author since the publication of *‘A Handbook to Plants in Victoria’’ by J. H. Willis (1970 & 1972) or “The Distribution of Victorian Plants’’ by Churchill and de Corona (1972), Additions found in Willis (1972) but not in Churchill and de Corona (1972) are included to assist readers to up-date their copy of the latter. The list includes some undescribed taxa and refers to others whose identity is in doubt. While some of these may not eventu- ally be recognized at species level, they are included here so that field workers will know in which groups of species there are taxonomic uncertainties and to help indicate where careful checking is needed. Where doubt occurs, the author would be glad to receive good collections, in duplicate, with full locality details. Information about a plant's distribution is valuable, regardless of whether it has a name or not. There are several hundred rare or endangered Victorian species for some of which full details of distribution are lacking; several are apparently already lost. Know- ledge of distribution in relation to land status will assist us to save our rare plants and among these may be some which lack names, In order to assist those already working to record more fully the distribution of plants in Victoria and to encourage others to par- ticipate the author is collaborating with Dr, R. F. Parsons to produce detailed up-to-date checklists. Working copies have already been distri- buted to some helpers and copies, accom- +3 Beverley St., Portland, Vic. 3305 *See Victorian Naturalist 95; 67-74 (1978) 198 panied by maps and instructions, are avail- able to others who may wish to contribute to the scheme. Nomenclature in these checklists includes the alterations and addi- tions given in this paper. Some of the additions to our flora which appear in the following list are the result of taxonomic revisions in which large complex species are split into smaller, distinct en- tities. Other additions are of plants already known elsewhere, but which have only recently been recognized as occurring in Victoria. Many people have contributed to the dis- covery and recognition of these species. A large number of them were found by the author during extensive field work carried out during the past ten years and for these, voucher specimens are lodged at the Na- tional Herbarium of Victoria (MEL). The other records come from a variety of sources and for some of these, vouchers may not be held at MEL. In all cases, fuller details than it was possible to list below are available from the author. For a number of species listed, confirmation is needed of their oc- currence in Victoria at present (e.g. Neurachne munroi), Doubtful cases like this are included to alert field workers to the possibility of their presence in Victoria and thus to try to reduce the chances that they will be overlooked in future work. New names listed are followed by their author and place of publication; new records of already known plants are followed wherever possible by a reference to a rele- vant text giving a description of the plant. References to periodicals appear in the main text; references to books are cited by num- bers in italics and full titles appear in the bibliography. Distributions are shown ac- cording to the Victorian plant mapping grid system (A to Z). Some errata found in Pt. | of this paper are given at the end of the paper. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Additions to the vascular flora of Victoria Acacia nyssophylla F, Muell. in 20:4 A Acacia subporosa F, Muell, in 2/:24 Z Acacia subtilinervis F, Muell, in 2/:33 W Acacia williamsonii A. B. Court in Muelleria 2:163 (1972) HM Acacia sp. aff. microcarpa F. Muell. ABCFG Acacia sp. aff. omalophylla A Cunn, ex Benth, A Acacia sp. aff. pendula A. Cunn. ex G. Don.; see 28:238 AFG Acacia sp. aff. penninervis Sieber ex DC. W Acacia sp, aff. sowdenii Maiden; see 28:237 AFG Acaena agnipila Gandoger; see 28:210 DEHJKMN PSTVWXYZ Acaena echinata Nees; see 28:210 CDEHJKMNP RSTVYWX *Acer pseudoplatanus L.,; see 28:360 (Spasmodie) Adiantum diaphanum Blume; see 27:25, 26:15 & 18:104 T *Aira cupaniana Guss.; see //:584 EH *Aira elegantissima Schur in Lejeunia 75:74 (1975) Determinations by B, K. Simon, BRI. DM Alternanthera sp, A Amaranthus macrocarpus Benth,; see 4:331 AF *Aquilegia vulgaris L. Sp. Pl, 1:533 (1753); For recent description see Flor, Europ. 1:239 (1964). W Arthrocnemum spp. ; J. H, Willis, 2:109 (1972) and P. G. Wilson pers. comm. regard Black’s two varieties of A. halocnemoides Nees as probably two good species, Recorders must treat them, when listing, as iwo separate entities, Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees var, per- granulatum J, M. Black; see 4:319 & 28:109 AB CEFGLNPTWX Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees var. pterygos- permum J. H. Black; sce 4:319 & 28:109 BEG Arthrocnemum pruinosum Paulsen in Dansk Bot. Ar- kiv. ii No, 8:63 (1918) AG *Asparagus setaceus (Kunth) Jessop in Bothalia 9:51 (1966) A Asplenium hookeranum Colenso; see 27:35, 26:34 & 18:120 8 Banksia sp. DJT *Bassia birchii (F, Muell.) F. Muell_; see Ising, Trans. R. Soe. §. Aust. 88:63 (1964) & 13-118 (introduced into Victoria) CMR Bassia convexula Anderson; see Ising, Trans. R, Soc, S. Aust. 88:63 (1964) & 13:118 AF Baumea arthrophylla (Nees) Boeck; see Blake, Conrr. Qd, Herb, 8:28 (1969) E “Bidens pilosa L.; see 2:459 A Boronia citriodora Gunn ex Hook. f.; see /2:105 $ Brachycome scapiformis DC.; see 28:675 CDEJ KRSVYZ *Brassica fruticulosa Cyrillo; see 28:169 KW *Brussica juncea (L.) Czern,; see 4:377 E *Bromus alopecuroides Poir.; see Norton, Keys to Grasses of N.S W, 26 (1977) P *Bromus racemosus L.; see 15:50 N Brunoniella pumilio (R. Br.) Bremekemp; see 28:575 Z *Bupleurum semicompositum L.: see 5:658 © Caladenia hastata (W, H. Nicholls) H. M. R, Rupp in Viet. Nat. 58:198 (1942); see 27:390 under C, reticulata R. D. FitzG. (The author and others regard this as a good species.) DE Caladenia toxochila R, Tate; see 7:231 C Calandrinia volubilis Benth.; see Todd, Muelleria 3:191-196 (1976) A *Carduus pycnocephalus L.; see 28:761 ABDEGH September/October, 1978 KLMSVW Carex sp. aff. archeri Boott S Cassinia sp. E Cassytha sp. aff. glabella R. Br. WZ Celmisia sp. aff, asteliifolia Hook. f S *Cenchrus echinatus L.; see Weston, Nuytsia 1:378 (1974) G *Cenchrus longispinus (Hack.) Fern; see Weston, Nuytsia 1:379 (1974) ABCFGHKMR *Cerastium semidecandrum L.; see 28:138 X “Chenopodium sp. aff. suecicum J, Murr.; see 28:86 VWYZ Chorizandra sphaerocephala R.Br.; sec 2/608 Z Chorizandra sp. E *Conicosia ?bijlii N. E. Br.; see 28:127 P *Conyza albida Willd, ex Spreng. ; see Michael, Proc. 6th Asian-Pacific Weed Sci. Conf. 1:87-95 (1977) NWZ. Correa sp. aff, reflexa (Labill.) Vent. ; see 28:340 CDI *Cortaderia sellowiana (Schult.) Aschers. & Graebn.; see 27;168 (The author has seen this spreading near Bendigo) M Corybas fordhamii (H. M. R. Rupp) H. M. R. Rupp; see 27:449 DKTZ Corybas hispidus D. L.. Jones inVict, Nar, 90:96 (1973) VW Crassula sp. aff. macrantha (Hook, f.) Dicls & Pritzel CD Crassula sp. aff, colorata (Nees) Ostenf, CD *Crocosmia aurea (Pappe ex Hook.) Planch.; see 27:339 NP Croton verreauxii Baill.; see 2:252 Z Cyperus bifax C. B. Clarke inKew Bull. Add, ser. 8:13 (1908) G Cyperus laevigatus L.; see 2:602. Determined by N.S.W, (unknown to author) Grid ? Cyperus sphaeroideus L. Johnson & O, Evans in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 46372 (1973) MRVWZ Cyperus unioloides R. Br.; sce 27:224 V Dampiera sp. aff. scottiana F. Muell, S Dampiera sp. (A) CJM Dampiera sp. (B); see 28:644 W Danthonia monticola J, W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb, 2:280-281 (1956) CDJIRZ Danthonia sp. D Darwinia camptostylis B. G. Briggs; see 28:460 Z *Datura wrightii Regel; sce Haegi, Aust. J. Bot. 24:431-433 (1976) CR Daviesia sp. M Deyeuxia decipiens (F. Muell.)J. Vickery; see 2:654 K Deyeuxia sp. aff. angustifolia J. W. Vickery; see 27142 V Dichelachne rara (R. Br.) Vickery; see 2:655 V Dillwynia ramosissima Benth, in Ann. Wiener Mus. Naturgesch, 2:79 (1840) JMNV Diplachne muelleri Benth.; see 3:113 G Dipodium hamiltonianum F, M, Bailey; see 25:126- 127 RW *Echinochloa cruspavonis (Kunth) Schult,; see Vic- kery, Flora of N.S.W., 19:201-203 (1975) 8 *Echinochloa utilis Ohwi & Yabuno; see Vickery, Flora of N.S.W., 19:197-198 (1975) CEFPW Echinopogon caespitosus Hubbard; see 2:654 S *Eleusine indica (L.) Gaertn. see 2:644 E *Emex spinosa Campd.; see Weiss & Julien, J. Aust, Inst, Agric. Sci,, 41:211-213 (1975) A Epacris coriacea A. Cunn, ex DC,; see 2;408 SW Epacris glacialis (F. Muell,) M. Gray in Contr. Herb. Aust. 26:5-8 (1976) RSV Epilobium brunnescens (Cockayne) Raven & Engel- horn in N.Z. J, Bot. 9:350 (1971) 8 Epilobium willisii Raven & Engelhorn in N.Z. J. Bot. 9:347 (1971) see also 28:465 W 199 Eragrostis molybdea J. W. Vickery; see 27:433 A Eragrostis pilosa (L.) Beauv,;3;118 M Erigeron conyzoides F. Muell., see 28:681 VWZ Eriocaulon australasicum (FP. Muell.) Koern.; see 27:281 DF Eriostemon angustifolius P. G. Wilson; see 28:333 ABCDHJM Eriostemon virgatus A, Cunn, ex Hook. f.; see P. G. Wilson, Nuytxia 150 (1970) Z Eriostemon sp. W Erythranthera australis (Petrie) Zotov in N.Z. J. Bot. 7:124 (1963) V Eucalyptus agglomerata Maiden; see 28:412 7 Eucalyptus angophoroides R. T, Baker in Proc. Linn. Sov. N.S.W.-25 (1900) TWZ Eucalyptus dealbata A. Cunn. ex. Schau. ; see7!137 l Eucalyptus saxatilis Kirkpatrick & Brooker in Aust. For. Res. 7:209-213 (1977) VW Eucalyptus yarraensis Maiden & Cambage; see 281428 DJNT Euphorbia planiticola D. C. Hassall in Aust. J. Bot. 25:446 (1977) GH *Euphorbia platyphyllos L.; see 28:350 T Euphorbia tannensis Spreng.; see Hassall, Aust. J Bot. 25:436 (1977) A Euphrasia sp. (A) VW Euphrasia sp. (B) V *Euryops abrotanifolius (L.) DC.; see 6:889 N Eutaxia diffusa F. Muell.; see 28:273 BCFGHJM Festuca benthamiana J. W_ Vickery inContr. N.S.W- Natn, Herb. 1:13 (1939) SVW Frankenia sp. aff, gracilis Summerhayes; see28:395 A Gahnia ancistrophylla (F. Muell.) Benth. ; see3:168 D Gahnia subaequiglhumis S$. T. Blake; see 28:410 SZ Galium ciliare Hook, f.; see 30:272 EKRSVWZ Galium sp. (A) EK Galium sp. (B) CDEJ Galium sp. (C) DIMRSVWZ Geranium ?obtusisepalum Carolin in Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W, 89:344 (1965) DJ Glossostigma sp.; see 28:564 VW *Glyceria declinata Breb.; see /5:86 NPR Gnaphalium fordianum M. Gray inContr. Herb. Aust. 26;2-5 (1976) SV Gnaphalium sphaericum Willd.; see Drury, N.Z. J. Bot. 12:390 (1974) Widely distributed and common, but G. involucratum Forst. f. apparently confined for Vic- toria to southern and eastern regions. G. involucratum: DEKNPZ G. sphaericum: probably all grids Gonocarpus humilis Orchard in24:195-198 widely dis- tributed in Victoria except north-west but G. teucrioides (DC.) Schlechtendal recorded only for far eastern reg- ion, viz., Z Goodenia heterophylla Sm.; see 2:441 S Goodenia sp. (A) CDEHM Goodenia sp. (B) R Grammitis meridionalis Parris in Bot. J. Linn. Soc 70:21-43 (1975) N Gratiola pubescens R. Br. in 8:435 EP Grevillea glabella R. Br.; see D. J, McGillivray, Telopea 1:28 (1975) CGHMN Grevillea microstegia W. M. Molyneux in Muelleria 3:141-145 (1975) DJ Grevillea willisii R. V. Smith & D. J. McGillivray in Muelleria 3:102-111 (1975) VW Grevillea sp. aff. aquifolium Lindl. JN Grevillea sp. aff, microstegia W. M. Molyneux J Grevillea sp. aff, willisiiR. Y. Smith & D. J. MeGilliv- ray VW Haloragis aspera Lindl. see 24:110-115 &28:470 asH heterophylla Brongn. var. aspera (Lindl; ut sp.) Schindl. 200 ABCDFGJKMNPRY *Helianthus annuus L.; see 2:459 AFG Helichrysum viscosum Sieber ex Spreng.; see 9384 HJIMRVWZ Helichrysum sp. aff. acuminatum DC. DEPT *Heliotropium amplexicaule Vahl; see 2:484 Ror V *Heliotropium sp. aff. europaeum L. BCFGL Hibbertia sp. (A) CD Hibbertia sp. (B) S Hibbertia sp. (C) S Hierochloe submutica FP. Muell.; see Vickery, Flora of N.S_W. No. 19 part 2:280 (1975) V *Hordeum glaucum Steud.; sce Cocks, Boyce & Kloot, Aust. J, Bot. 24:651-662 (1976) ABFGHN Hydrocotyle bonariensis Lam.; see /3)247 Z Hydrocotyle sp. SVW *Hypecoum pendulum L.; see Aston, Muelleria 3:177-182 (1976) G Indigofera signata (F, Muell,) Domin; see 28.299 R *Ipomoea indica (Burm.f.) Merrill, see 28:544 (as *Ipomaea congesta R, Br.) (Note spelling of Ipomoea) NP Isoetes sp. EHR Juncus amabilis Edgar in N.Z. J. Bot. 2:186 (1964) CDEHJKLMNPRTIVWYZ Juncus aridivola L. A. S. Johnson in 29:322-323 AFLMR Juncus continuus L RSTWXZ Juncus flavidus L. A. S. Johnson in 29:325-326 ABCDFGHJKLMNPRSV WZ "Juncus gerardii Louiseleur; see Nilsson & Snogerup, Bot. Notiser 124:438 (1971) E *Juncus imbricatus Laharpe; see 2-587 M *Juncus microephalus H.B.K.; see /4:148 NPT *Juncus oxycarpus BE, Mey. see /9:3 DJ A. S. Johnson in 29;325 Juncus procerus E. Mey.; see 27:442 DEJKNPSTWXZ NOTE: Letters in brackets for following Juncus spp. belong to coding system of L. A. S, Johnson Juncus sp. (1) SVWZ Juncus sp. (D1) KRSVWZ Juncus sp. (F) RSVWZ Juncus sp. (Q) MR Juncus sp. (A) CDHJMNRSW Juncus sp. (O) HJMR Juncus sp. (U0) SV Koeleria australiensis Domin; see 9:34 8 *Koeleria cristata (L.) Pers., see /7:243 NRW *Lactuca virosa L.; see 6.492 A *Lagarosiphon major (Ridley) Moss, see /.240 N Lagenifera montana Hook. f.; Drury, NZ. J. Bor 12:390 (1974) SVW *Leersia ory zoides (L.) Swartz; see Corrick, Viet, Nat 93:67-68 (1976) N Lepidium sp.; see 28:176 EKN Lepidium pseudotasmuanica Thell,; see /2:39 T Leptospermum coriaceum (F_ Muell. ex Mig.) Cheel; see 28:445 ABCFG *Leucojum aestivum L.; see /3:85 K *Limonium sinuatum (L.) Mill; see 28:516 GHN *Lomandra obliqua (Thumb.) MacBride, see Lee, Flora of N.S.W., 34:39 (1966) Z Luzula acutifolia Nordenskiold in Bor. Notiser 122:85 (1969); see also Edgar, N.Z. J. Bot, 13:791-794 (1975) RV Luzula alpestris Nordenskiold in Bot, Notiser 122:84 (1969) VW Luzula atrata Edgar inN.Z. J. Bot. 13:781-802 (1975) V Luzula australasica Steudel; see Nordenskiold, Bor Notiser 122-79 (1969) EKRSVWZ Vic.Nat, Vol. 95 Luzula densiflora (Nordenskiold) Edgar inN.Z. J. Bot. 13:786-788 (1975) EHJMNPRSVWZ Luzula flaceida (Buch.) Edgar in N.Z. J. Bot. 13:786 (1975) DEJKNPRST VWXYZ Luzula meridionalis Nordenskiold in Bot, Notiser 122:71 (1969) CREHJKMNPRZ Luzula novaecambriae Gandoger, see Edgar, N.Z, J. Bot, 13:790-791 (1975) SV Luzula oldfieldii Hook. f.; see Edgar, N.Z. J. Bot. 13;789-790 (1975) V Luzula ovata Edgar in N.Z_ J. Bot, 13:788-789 (1975) DVW *Lysimachia japonica Thunb,; see 28:514 W *Lysimachia vulgaris L.; see 28:514 V Maireana lobiflora (F. Muell.) P. G. Wilson Nuytsia 2;25-26 (1975) AG Maireana trichoptera (Black) P. G. Wilson in Nuytsia 2:31-32 (1975) also 28:104 as Kochia excavata J, M, Black var. trichoptera J. M. Black ABFG *Malvya sylvestris L.; see 28:377 NPS Marsilea mutica Mett.; see /:40-41 NSWX *Medicago littoralis Rhode ex Loisel (Publication un- known to present author) BFG Melaleuca sp. aff. ericifolia Sm.; see 28:455 MSW *Melianthus major L.; see /0 (no page number) & 28:356 (the latter not regarding it as naturalized, how- ever the author has seen a colony spreading near Mt. Napier). D *Mesembryanthemum nodiflorum L.; see 4:337 (as *Psilocaulon caducum (Ait.) N-E.Br.) and /3:133 (as *Gasoul nodiflorum (L.) Rothm.) ABG Mitrasacme sp. KPWZ *Monopsis simplex (L.) E. Wimm. in Engler & Diels, Pflanzen, 4 (276b:699) D Neurachne munroi (F, Muell.) F. Muell.; see Blake, Contrib, Od. Herb, 13:14-15 (1972) C *Nicotiana tabacum L.; see 28:558 M Nymphoides sp. aff. exiliflora; see /:117 SW *Qenothera speciosa Nutt.; see 2:204 C Olearia sp. W *Ononis spinosa L.; see 28:285 K Ophioglossum petiolatum Hook.; see 16:56 R Oplismenus imbecillis (R. Br.) Roem. et Schult.; see Vickery, Flora of N.S.W. No. 19:217 (1975) WZ *Opuntia cylindrica DC.; see 28:400 G *Opuntia robusta Wendl.; see 28:400 ABCFGHMR Oreobolus oxycarpus S. T. Blake; see 27:440 SW Pandorea jasminoides (Lindl.) K. Schumann; see 28:578 W *Panicum schinzii Hackel; se¢ L. K. Chippindall in Grasses & Pastures of South Africa 1334 CM *Paronychia brasiliana DC.; see 28:133 & Aston, Muelleria 3:209-214 (1977) NWZ Paspalidium constrictum (Domin) C. E. Hubbard; see Vickery, Flora of N.S.W. No, 19:144-145 (1975) AFGL *Passiflora edulis Sims; see 28:399 S$ Persoonia mollis R, Br.; see 2:217 Z Persoonia sp. S Phebalium sp. aff. diosmeum A. Juss. ; see 28:334 V Phyllanthus australis Hook. f.; see 4:511 DJ Pimelea sp. DJ Plantago cunninghamii Decne. see Briggs, Carolin & Pulley, Flora of N.S.W. 181:32 (1977) ABGM Plantago drummondii Decne.; see Briggs, Carolin & Pulley, Flora of N.S.W. 181:34 (1977) ABDEFG Plantago euryphylla Briggs, Carolin & Pulley inContr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 4:396 (1973) RSV Plantago gaudichaudii Barn.; see Briggs, Carolin & Pulley, Flora of N.S.W. 181:28 (1977) DEHJKNT Plantago ylacialis Briggs, Carolin & Pulley in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 4:395 (1973) V September/October, 1978 Plantago hispida R. Br.; see Briggs, Carolin & Pulley, Flora of N.S.W. 181:24 (1977) DEJKMPRW *Plantago indica L.; see Todd, Vict. Nat. 94:29-30 (1977) B . *Plantago myosurus Lamk.; see Briggs, Carolin & Pulley, Flora of N.S.W. 181:10 (1977) N Plantago turrifera Briggs, Carolin & Pulley in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 4:396 (1973) ABFH Poa affinis R, Br.; see Vickery, Contr, N.S.W. natn. Merb. 4:187-188 (1970) WZ Poa cheelii J. W. Vickery inContr. N.S.W, natn. Herb. 4:195-197 (1970) W Poa clelandii J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W~ nain, Herb. 4:193-194 (1970) BDEJPT Poa clivicola J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb, 4:213-214 (1970) RVWZ Poa costiniana J, W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W, natin. Herb, 4:214-217 (1970) SVWZ Poa crassicaudex J, W. Vickery inContr, N.S.W, natn. Herb. 4:193-194 (1970) DH Poa ensiformis J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb, 4:188-191 (1970) NRSTVWZ Poa fawcettiae J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 4:232-233 (1970) DJIRSVW Poa helmsii J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W, natn. Herb. 4;205-208 (1970) RSVWXYZ Poa hiemata J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn, Herb, 4:230-231 (1970) STV Poa hookerii J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb, 4:222-223 (1970) YZ Poa hothamensis J. W. Vickery inContr. N.S.W. nain, Herb, 4:191-193 (1970) RSV Poa induta J. W. Vickery inContr, N.S.W_nain. Herb. 4:236-238 (1970) DWZ *Poa infirma Kunth.; see Gray, Contr. Herb. Aust. No. 6:2-3 (1974) N Poa labillardieri Steud.; see Vickery, Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb, 4:199-205 (1970) CDEJKMNPRSTV WXZ Poa meionectes J, W, Vickery inContr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 5:250 (1972) Z Poa morrisii J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W_ natn. Herb. 4:239-241 (1970) CDEJKMNPRTVWZ ?*Poa nemoralis L.; see Vickery, Contr, N.S.W, natn. Herb. 4:244 (1970) & 27:100 W Poa petrophila J. W. Vickery in Contr. N.S.W_ nain. Herb, 4:238-239 (1970) SWZ Poa phillipsiana J. W. Vickery inContr..N.S,W. natn. Herb, 4:220-222 (1970) RSVWZ Poa rodwayi J. W. Vickery in Contr, N.S.W. natn. Herb, 4:235-236 (1970) EN Poa sieberana Spreng.; see Vickery, Contr, N.S.W-. natn. Herb, 4;:223-229 (1970) BCDEHJKMNPRST VWXYZ Poa sp. Z *Polygala virgata Thumb.; in Prod. Pl. Cap, 120 E Polyscias murrayii; (F, Muell.) Harms; see 2:391 & 28:476 the latter as Tieghemopanax murrayi (F. Muell.) Viguier Z Pomaderris obcordata Fenzl.; see 28:361 CD Pomaderris sp. aff. velutina J, H. Willis STWZ Pratia sp. aff. purpurascens (R. Br.) F. E. Wimmer; see 28:631 DEK Prostanthera rhombea R., Br.; see 2:516 8 Prostanthera sp. aff. howelliae Blakely ST Prostanthera sp. aff. linearis R. Br, T Prostanthera sp. aff. melissifolia F, Muell. Z Prostanthera sp. aff. rhombea R. Br. S Prostanthera sp. aff, rotundifolia R. Br. S Prostanthera sp. aff. walteri F. Muell. R Pterostylis aestiva D. L. Jones Muelleria 2:151 (1972) vw 201 Pterostylis coccinea RD. FitzG.; see 22:87 W Pterostylis laxa J. A. P. Blackmore: Orchadian 3:2 (1968) VWYZ Pterastylis sp. (A) Pterostylis sp. (B) B Pultenaea paludosa | Nat. 94:15] (1977) Z Ranunculus scapiger Hook.; see 28:150 SVWZ Ranunculus undosus Melville inKew Bull, 211 (1955) CG Ranunculus victoriensis B. G. Briggs; see 28:148 SVW *Robinia pseudoacacia L. ; see 28-306 (The author has seen this spreading along the Wonnangatta River) S *Romulea minutiflora Klatt, see /3:72 J Rorippa eustylis (F. Muell.) Johnson inContr, N.S.W natn. Herb, 3:97 (1962) AFG *Rorippa microphylla (Boenningh, ex Reichb. ) Hylan- derex A, & D. Love; see 28;182-183 and / (35 (both as *Nasturtium microphyllum Boenn. ex Reichenb.) DESWZ *Rubus vestitus Weihe & Nees ex Bluff & Fingerh; see Amor & Miles, Muelleria 3:56-57 (1974) & 28:205 KV Rumex tenax Rech. f,; see 2;183 CHL *Sagittaria engelmanniana J. G. Sm.;see27:75 (as *8 sagittifolia L.) & 7:182-183 M *Sagittaria graminea Michx.; see /:183-185 R *Saxifragu stolonifera Meerb.; see 28:194 (the author has seen this spreading in the Byaduk Caves) D *Scandix pectenveneris L,; see 28:487 N Schoenus deformis Poir; see 3:151 E Scirpus habrus Edgar in V.Z, J Bot. 4:199 (1966) CISVWZ *Senecio pterophorus DC_; see 6:885 & 28:755 DE Senecio sp. aff, apargiaefolius Walp, ABDEJNSW *Solanum gracilius Herter; see Henderson, Contr. Qu. Herb. No. 16:46 (1974) NW Solanum linearifolium 1. [. Herasimenko; see 28 550 KTIVWYZ Solanum opacum A. Br. & Bouche; see Henderson, Contr. Qd. Herb. No. 16:39 (1974) AKNPSWZ Sonchus hydrophilus Boulos; see /3 331-332 &28:773 BCDEGK Sporobolus creber J, De Nardi in Contr. N.S.W. natn. Herb. 4:406 (1973) M Stackhousia aspericocca Schuch.; see Barker, J. Adelaide Bot. Gard. 1:71-75 (1977) CD Stipa spp. (Under revision by J. W. Vickery) *Suueda sp. aff. linifolia Pall, A Suaeda sp.; see 28:112 N Swainsona luteola F, Muell.; see Lee, Conir. N.S.W. natn, Herb. 1:244 (1948) A Symplocos cochinchinensis (Laur.) Moore; see 231159 Ww Thompson; see Corrick, Vict. *Tamarix sp. (spreading in various places) BD Tetrarrhena sp.; see 27:91 DJIRWZ Tetratheca thymifolia Sm.; see J. Thompson. Telopea 3:200-203 (1976) W or Z Thelymitra holmesii W. H. Nicholls in Vier. Nat. 49:263 (1933); see 27:347, and 22:5 (both as T. pauci- flora R. Br. var. holmesii (W. H. Nicholls) W. H. Nicholls) DEKP Thelymitra mucida R. D. FitzG,; see 27:446 DEP Thelymitra sp, Z Tmesipteris elongata Dang.; see Chinnock, V.Z, J. Bot. 13:761-764 (1975) KT * Trifolium squamosum L_; see 28:296 (the author has seen this spreading at Codrington) E *Tropacolum majus L.; see /3:201 KNP Uncinia compacta R_ Br, in 8:24) SV Uncinia sp. aff. tenella R. Br. S$ 202 *Lrochloa panicoides Pal. Beauy; see 27;207 (the au- thor has seen this spreading at Annuello) F Utricularia sp. (A) (Royal purple flowers with about seven yellow stripes at base of apron) CDK Utricularia sp. (B) W *Verbascum sp. C Veronica sp. aff. gracilis R. Br.; see 28:570 DENR SVWZ Viola sp. aff. hederacea Labill. DE Vittadinia sp. ABFG *Vulpia muralis (Kunth) Nees; see Stace & Cotton, Warsonia 11:257 (1977), Determinations by P. S. Cocks. ABCJMNR Wahlenbergia sp. (A) BGHJMNRW Wahlenbergia sp, (B) CDKNUW *Watsonia pyramidata (Andr,) Klatt, see 272342 N Wolffia globosa (Roxb) Hartog & Plas.; see /:256 M Xanthosia leiophylla Klatt ex F. Muell. in Linnaea 29:710 (1857-1858) DEK Zieria robusta Maiden & Betche; see Blakely inContr, N.S.W. natn. Herb, 1:123 (1941) 8 Zieria sp. CD Zygophyllum eremaeum (Diels) Ostenf. in Biol, Meddr, 3:76 (1921) ABF Zygophyllum sp. aff. billardieri DC, AF Zygophyllum sp. aff. glaucum F, Muell. AFG ?*Genus (Family POLYGALACEAE) D BIBLIOGRAPHY Aston, H. I, (1973). Aquatic Plants ef Australia (Melbourne Uniy. Press: Melbourne). 2. Beadle, N.C. W., Evans, O. D, and Carolin, R, C. (1972), Flora of the Sydney Region. (A. H. & A.W. Reed Pty. Ltd.; Sydney). 3, Black, J. M. (1943). Flora of South Australia. 2nd Edn, Part 1. (S.A. Government Printer: Adelaide), 4. Black, J, M, (1948), Flora of South Australia, 2nd Edn, Part 2, (S.A, Government Printer: Adelaide), 5. Black, J. M. (1957). Flora of South Australia, 2nd Edn, Part 3 (S.A, Government Printer: Adelaide), 6, Black, J. M (1957). Flora ef South Australia. 2nd Edn. Part 4. (S.A. Government Printer: Adelaide), 7. Blakely, W. F. (1965), 4 Key ro rhe Eucalypts. 3rd Edn. (Government Printer: Canberra). 8. Brown, Robert (1810). Prodromus florae Novae Hollandiae, (J. Johnson: London). 9. Burbidge, N. T. and Gray, M_ (1970). Flera of the Australian Capital Territory, (Australian National Univ, Press: Canberra). Churchill, D. M, and de Corona, A. (1972). The Distribution of Victorian Plants. (The Dominion Press: North Blackburn), 11. Coste, H. (1906). Flora descriptive et illustre, de la France, de la Corse et des Contrees limitrophey Vol. 3. (Libraire des Sciences Naturelle: Paris). 12. Curtis, Winifred M., & Morris, D. 1. (1975). The Student's Flora of Tasmania, 2nd Edn, Part |, (Government Printer: Tasmania) 13. Eichler, Hj, (1965). Supplement to J, M. Black's Flora of South Australia. 2nd Edn, (Government Printer: Adelaide). 14. Healey, A. J. (1970). Jdentification of Weeds and Clovers. (Editorial Services Ltd.: Tokyo). 15. Hitcheock, A. S. (1950), Manual of the Grasses af the United States. 2nd Edn. rey. Agnes Chase (U S$ Government Printing Office: Washington). 16. Hooker, W. J. (1823), Exotic flora, (Blackwood: Edinburgh). 17, Hubbard, C. E, (1968). Grasses. 2nd Edn. (Pen- guin Books Ltd,: England). 10, Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 18. Jones, D. L. & Clemesha, 8. C. (1976). Australian Ferns & Fern Allies. (A. H. & A. W, Reed: Syd- ney). 19, Milne—Redhead, E & Polhill, R. M. (1966). Flora- of Tropical East Africa: Juncaceae. (Crown Agents for Overseas Governments and Administrations: United Kingdom) 20. Mueller, F. von (1863-4). Fragmenta Phyto- graphiae Australiae. Vol, 4, (Government Printer: Melbourne), 21. Mueller, F. von (1860-2). Plants Indigenous to the Colony of Victoria, Vol. 1. (Government Printer: Melbourne). 22. Nicholls, W. H. (1969). Orchids of Australia. Edit, Jones, D. L. and Muir, T. B. (Nelson: Australia), 23. Nooteboom, H. P. (1975). Revision of the Symplocaceae of the Old World, New Caledonia excepted, (University Press: Leiden). 24. Orchard, A. E. (1975). Auckland Institute and Museum Bulletin. No. 10 (Auckland Institute and Museum: Auckland), 25. Rupp, H. M. R. (1943). The Orchids of New South Wales. (N.S.W. Government Printer: Sydney) 26. Wakefield, N. A. (1975) . Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania. Rev, Edn. J. H. Willis. (Field Naturalists Club of Victoria: Melbourne). 27. Willis, J. H. (1970). A Handbook to Plants in Vic- toria. Vol. 1 2nd Edn. (Melbourne Univ. Press: Melbourne). 28. Willis, J. H. (1972), A Handbook to Plants in Vic- toria. Vol. 2, (Melbourne Univ. Press: Melbourne). 29. Black, J. M. (1978). Flora of South Australia. 3rd Edn. Part 1.; Revised and Edit. J. P, Jessop. (S.A. Government Printer: Adelaide). 30. Curtis, Winifred M. (1963). The Student's Flora of Tasmania. Part 2, (Government Printer: Tasmania). ERRATA FROM PART 1 Agropyron pectinatum (Labill.) Pal. Beauv. *Alhagi pseudathagi Atriplex inflata... A. lindleyi Mog, *Bromus hordeaceus *Carduus pycnocephalus *Cenchrus longispinus. #Centaurium tenuiflorum (Hoffm. et Link) Fritsch Danthonia paradoxa R. Br,: Plinthanthesis *Desmazeria.. . *Plagiochloa Diuris fastidiosa. . , D. pedunculata Haloragis racemosa , ., Haloragodendron baeuer- lenii Juncus krausii Kochia erioclada Kochia excavata, C Kochia georgei Diels: Maireana turbinata *Lithospermum , . . *Buglossoides *Malus sylvestris (L.) Mill. *Picris .. . *Helminthotheca Tetratheca labillardierei The information source for the Scirpus hamulosus and S. lateriflorus entries is K. Wilson, NSW. See also Adansonia, ser. 2, 6(4) 1967 and 16(1) 1976. F.N.C.V. Submission on the Proposed Recommendations of the Alpine Area. The F.N.C.V. rejects the L.C.S.’s proposed recommendations on the Alpine Study area believing that they do not go far enough in pro- tecting the natural environment from slow de- terioration. We believe that only a National Park, as pro- posed by the V.N.P.A., offers the required qual- ities in the Alps, and at the same time providing for the widest range of recreational activities compatible with nature conservation. The L.C.C.’s stated reason for not having an Alpine National Park was that logging should continue, however we believe that sufficient hardwood resources are available for Victoria’s needs outside the proposed National Park area. We also agree with the L.C.C. that unemploy- ment could arise in the timber industry whether or September/October, 1978 not logging is to continue throughout the study area and therefore do not feel that this fact should prevent an Alpine National Park, with its atten- dant employment opportunities, from being established. We believe that grazing should be phased out of the Alpine area, in general, and stopped as soon as possible in sensitive areas such as alpine herbfields, grassland and sphagnum bogs. The F.N.C. V. supports the National Park addi- tions of Tingaringy and Snowy River, and sup- port the Avon Wilderness so far, although we think it should be much larger so as to adequately fulfil wilderness requirements. The management control of off road vehicles are not strong enough to prevent harassment of other users and environmental damage. 203 Easter in the Otways Speculation about Unusual Phenomena By C. H. HENSHAW* To the writer, a latecomer to the fascinat- ing world of botany, it is a matter of frequent regret that it was not studied in early life, On a trip such as the F.N.C.V. excursion to Apollo Bay at Easter 1978, the absence of an early grounding in the subject can lead: to speculation which may be based on false assumptions. For instance, we noticed at Angahook Forest Park behind Mogg’s Creek a dead grey tree stump, minus bark, at least 24" (60 cm) in diameter, cut off about 4’ (1.2 m) from the ground. Above this stump rose four stems of Eucalyptus sideroxylon (Red Ironbark) each about 6” in diameter. These had not sprung from the stump, but had coppiced from lignotubers or epicormic buds close to ground level, roughly at each “‘corner’’. The living tissue of the four stems was now joining up, having moved across the dead stump in the way that bark grows over the scar left by an axe slash. In fact, only four triangular sections and part of the top of the stump remained uncovered. In the ensuing discussions, doubt was ex- pressed as to whether the stump could be ironbark, surely they didn’t grow that thick; perhaps ironbark seedlings had grown against the stump of another species and gradually the bark had formed over it! How- ever, reference books consulted later, stated that sideroxylon may have a diameter up to 5' (inconclusive, because those on the poor-looking soil supporting the Airey’s Inlet population may not necessarily have been as massive as that); and the species coppices freely. This matter of trees wrapping themselves around others reminded us of a somewhat similar phenomena seen earlier at a picnic spot called Paradise, about 7 km (44 miles) from Apollo Bay on the East Branch of the Barham River. The locality is given the al- *4 Pelling Road, Murrumbeena, 3163. 204 ternative name of Stanley Glen on an early (1946) map while another simply prints the word *‘Fernery"’. At Melba Gully, Mait’s Rest and Grey River Reserves we had seen the Soft Tree Fern Dicksonia antarctica, a few Rough Tree Ferns Cyathea australis and a distant sighting of what may have been two Skirted Tree Ferns Cyathea marcescens. Jones and Clemesha’ consider this rare species to be a hybrid between C. australis and C. cunninghamii (Slender Tree Fern) among which it is always found growing. Dicksonia is the predominant growth in the lush tangle of rain forest clothing lower slopes of the steep vee-shaped valleys. The largest specimens grow practically in the stream so that floods and the fight for light had resulted in the massive trunks leaning at odd angles — sometimes against each other, forming arches and inclined planes, but ac- tual grafting was not seen. The Dicksonia in such situations is often host for a number of epiphytes including filmy ferns, fork ferns, orchids and mosses. At Barham Paradise, the ‘*‘Fernery’’ was on a relatively flat flood plain, and the most interesting portion of it consisted of a pure stand of the Soft Tree Fern with thick straight trunks about 10 m high and spaced some four to eight metres apart, in an area perhaps 40 m square, sufficiently small to enjoy the protection of the canopy of the magnificent eucalypts in the vicinity — thought by us to be globulus, viminalis and/or ovata — towering fifty metres above. The floor of this section was carpeted with leaf mould, largely from Nothofagus cun- ninghami (Myrtle Beech) and it needed very little poetry in one’s soul to imagine the trunks as the columns and the arching fronds the roof of a perfect, natural cathedral. Note 1. ‘*Australian Ferns and Fern Allies’ by D.L.. Jones & S.C. Clemesha. A.H. & A.W. Reed Pty, Ltd., 1976, p, 59. Vic,Nat, Vol. 95 On the outskirts of this pure stand, the tree ferns were mixed with tall slim Acacia melanoxylons (Blackwoods) and Not- notagus and there was a scattered under- storey of low-growing ferns and occasional spindly shrubs. In referring to the tree ferns as being mixed with the trees, interspersed would perhaps be the more accurate word in most cases. However, there were about a dozen more intimate mixtures — in fact tree and fern were inextricably linked together. In one case it seemed that the beech tree had, at about 2 m above the ground, sprouted a thick branch of fern trunk with fronds — a most odd-looking effect. In others, stripling beeches or blackwoods seemed to issue from the fern trunks and to soar upwards from the parent plant. There was another patch of three or four joined doublets in a cleared pasture of river flat some 500 m upstream, presumably spared as an oddity. Having even less knowledge of ferns than other families of plants, the writer can only speculate as to the cause of this phenomena which surely is seen elsewhere rarely, at least not as prolifically as here. It is suggested that, despite differing appear- ances, in all cases the fern was present first and became host to a seedling beech or blackwood which subsequently sent a root- let down along the fern trunk to the ground somewhat after the manner of the strangler fig of the northern rain forests. In time this has developed and partially or completely surrounded the fern trunk with- out apparent harm to the host, in contrast to the fatal embrace of the fig. In considering the cause of this phenomena and the reason for it not being seen extensively elsewhere, it is tempting to think that the geographical differences bet- ween Barham Paradise and the other areas, may have a bearing on the puzzle. The flood plain of the Barham at Paradise is situated some three to five metres above the level of the river when we saw it. In this high rainfall area it probably is inundated several times each winter with a rich deposit of silt each time, However the other three gullies also are rich in humus and are perpetually moist. Both environments appear to have a high humidity and it seems that a more detailed study would be necessary before any sound conclusions could be reached about the cause of the phenomena. While on the subject of odd fern growth, I will conclude with reference to a trunk of Dicksonia flat along the ground, half buried, for three or four metres. At the growing end, green fronds were shooting at right angles, commencing again the long job of erecting a tall vertical trunk. Having in mind, on the one hand, the enormous amount of seed produced by many plants (Eucalypts, callistemon, for example); and on the other hand, the large quantity of seeds eaten or spoiled by insects, and the further loss of young seedlings by virus and fungal infections, or as fodder for animals (from snails to kangaroos) one au- thority concludes that in the plant world, death is the norm, and life, attaining matur- ity, the rare exception. This being so, the present writer never ceases to be amazed at the resilience and formidable will to live shown by some species (these persistent tree ferns, for example) compared with the fragility and temperamental capriciousness of the native species he tries to raise from seed or cutting in his suburban bush plot. September/October, 1978 205 Geology of Mt Buffalo FNCV Excursion, January 1978 By FRANK ROBINS This has been described fairly well in an excellent little booklet available at Mt. Buf- falo information centre — $2 — by Sue and John Brownlee, Mt. Buffalo National Park, Mt. Buffalo is a granite mass or pluton in the form of a gigantic plateau projecting about 1000ft. (300 metres) or more above the surrounding sedimentary sandstones and shales of Ordovician age. The top forms an elongated plateau some 7 miles (11 km) long by about 4 miles (1.6 km) wide with a narrow N. Buffalo section at the N. end. The highest point is called The Horn (5645 feet — 1721 metres above sea level). No radiometric age has been published, but it is stated to be of similar type to the Pilot Range granite further north near Beechworth which is dated at about 365 million years in the Devonian Age. The granite is coarsely crystalline consist- ing largely of quartz crystals (glassy appear- ance), feldspar crystals (plagioclase and orthoclase — milky white colour) and mica (biotise-black). Also hornblende (black crystals). I noticed a rather attractive pink crystalline granite near the Reservoir on Crystal Brook. It is usually assumed that granite was molten rock which cooled and crystallized very slowly, while deeply em- bedded in older sedimentary rock perhaps one or more miles (or kilometres) below the surface. It is not believed this molten rock forced its way up by displacing the overly- ing rock, but more like a combination of pressure and heat from below melting the overlying sedimentary rock, which on cool- ing and recrystallizing slowly became gra- nite. Maybe convection currents in the mol- ten rock facilitated the upward flow of heat, as we now see in our plate tectonic theory. From this, it follows that the older sedimen- tary rock 400 million years ago extended right up several miles (or km) above the present plateau, and erosion has removed 206 this sedimentary rock since then leaving the granite now standing higher than the sur- rounding sedimentary rock which can be seen along the road for quite a distance as we climb up past the Eurobin Creek crossing. The junction of the granite and Ordovician sediments can be seen on the road just be- fore the old I1-mile peg (17.7 km), but motorists don’t stop at such places. Whatever the explanation of the granite, ete., bathyliths (over 160 of them outcrop- ping in Victoria — not all Devonian in age — ages between 350 m.y. and 475 m.y.), they all exhibit features typical of granite country. They are (a) existence of great rounded blocks or tors, (b) a system of joint planes in 3 directions more or less at right angles, one of them being horizontal, (c) deep weathering or kaolinization hidden below the surface in open spaces where no rocks outcrop. (1) Jointing and stream pattern — the Mt. Buffalo joint system is two sets of verti- cal joints running NE-SW and NW-SE plus a horizontal set. This tends to make the granite naturally split up into rectangular blocks, and the stream pattern is roughly controlled by these weaknesses. The Brownlees’ booklet shows this well (p.17) especially for Crystal Brook, Eurobin Creek, Bunyip Creek and the precipitous sides of Mt. Buffalo. The origin of the joints would at least partly be due to contraction during cooling, and also due perhaps to ad- ditional shearing stresses, Otherwise it would be difficult to explain the NE-SW and NW-SE directions at Mt. Buffalo. (2) The rounded tors — are simply explained by chemical and physical weath- ering caused by penetration of ground water containing oxygen, carbon dioxide (an acid gas), nitrogen oxides (acid gases), plant chemicals etc. down along these cracks or joints, and decomposing the minerals. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Quartz crystals do not decompose so they become quartz sand later. The feldspar crys- tals decompose into a white clay (kaolin) and the mica and hornblende and other fer- romagnesium minerals decompose giving red clays due to iron chiefly. Gradually the rectangular blocks between the joint planes would by attack from all six faces would become rounder and rounder especially along the 8 edges. This would happen mostly during subsurface weathering, as I once showed this club in an excursion to the **Pink Cliffs’ at Heathcote, where rounded weathered tors were still embedded in soft completely kaolinized granite. Gradually, rain water removes the soft weathered gra- nite and exposes the rounded blocks or tors. The size of the tors depends a lot on the original spacing of the joints — big tors — distant joints — little tors — close joints. The joint pattern is still visible today, e.g. in the Wool-pack, the Cathedral, etc. After exposure, a new set of features arises — alternate heat and cold, wet and dry further opens up cracks for water to penetrate, and also a deposition of silica on the surface may harden the surface and pre- vent further weathering. In addition, the in- tense temperature differences of the surface causes another type of splitting off of slabs parallel to the surface called exfoliation weathering (onion skin weathering) often seen on tors. The wonderful gorge formed by the Crys- tal Brook is also explained by a jointing feature, The NE-SW joints are close to- gether and continue vertically a great dis- tance, this increases the weathering in this area, so that great thin slabs of granite be- come removed in time with the help of the waters of Crystal Brook, Another feature of granite is the darker colour on the surface than below in the un- decomposed interior. The colour is not the colour of decomposed granite — it is the colour of living plants — primitive lichens —a combination of algae and fungi living in co-operation on rock and helping to break it down, The lichens are sensitive to extreme small concentrations of metals like lead, zinc, copper. Below a brass plaque near the Chalet, a white surface shows where all algae have died through rain water trickling from the brass plate over the granite surface. Similar white stripes appear below gal- vanized pipes set into the granite with lead plugs. We were told that the lead plugs had been covered with plastic to stop this white streak developing. Yet we humans have been drinking rainwater from galvanized roof and tanks for over 100 years without anyone complaining. Amy Fuller Amy Fuller (1869-1944) was one of four sis- ters, all of whom were accomplished musicians or artists. Amy was born in Geelong and, apart from her overseas travels and a short period of resi- dence in Western Australia, she lived most of her life in Melbourne: She was elected to member- ship of the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria in 1914 and was an active member for about ten years. She bequeathed a collection of her water colour paintings to the Club (see front cover) and these have been exhibited many times at shows and Club meetings. September/October, 1978 As well as flowers from Victoria and New South Wales she painted in Western Australia and in Africa, where she spent some time in Cape Town visiting relatives. In 1914, during a visit to London, she sold 102 of her paintings of the more uncommon African plants to the Kew Herbarium. Amy Fuller read a paper to the Club in June 1914 entitled “Some African Scenes and Flow- ers’’ which was later published, (See Vict. Nat, 32:57-64 (1915)). A brief biography by J, H, Willis appeared in 1958. (Vict. Nat. 74:147-50 (1958)). MC 207 Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1978 — Allan Roy Sefton The Award Committee has announced that the Australian Natural History Medallion for 1978 has been won by Allan Roy Sefton. Once again this coveted award has gone to an amateur naturalist who has earned a nationwide reputation in ornithology and conservation, but who has extended his range of activities into other branches of natural history and fields of citizen- ship. It is noteworthy that he has been employed for over 40 years as an electrical engineering draughtsman with Australian Iron and Steel Pty. Ltd. (B.H.P.), and has played an important part in advising the directors of their Wollongong-Port Kembla industrial complex in the preservation wherever possible of the natural environment and the minimization of air pollution in the area. Another example of this useful ‘watchdog’ advis- ory service is Harry Butler, noted naturalist of television documentaries, an employee of W.A. Petroleum Company, Barrow Island, Western Australia. Allan Sefton was born in Hobart, Tasmania, on 4 May 1921, and after short periods of residence in Adelaide (Unley) and Melbourne (Kew), spent the rest of his childhood at Thirroul, the home for many years of his parents and, indeed, of his grandparents and, on his mother’s side, even of his great-grandparents. He attended in turn Thir- roul Primary School, Wollongong Junior Techni- cal School (now Keira Boys’ High School) and Wollongong Technical College, qualifying in the engineering discipline that has provided him with his living ever since. He was first nominated for the Medallion in 1973 by Illawarra Natural History Society, of which he was president for seven consecutive terms and is an honorary life member. He was re-nominated by the club in 1976, and supported by Goulburn Field Naturalist Society. He is reg- ional representative of the R,A.O.U., NSW, and a participant for 14 years in the bird-banding scheme of CSIRO Division of Wildlife Research. He has been awarded life memberships of the Royal Zoological Society of NSW, and of the David G, Stead Memorial Wildlife Research Foundation of Australia. He is an active member of the NSW Field Ornithologists’ Club, the Bird 208 Allan Roy Sefton Banders’ Association of Australia, the South Coast Conservation Society, and the Ornithologi- cal Society of New Zealand. In the field of conservation, he has been chair- man of Five Islands Nature Reserve Committee of Management since its inception in 1960, and for 15 years before that led the crusade to have this set apart for breeding sea-birds. The NSW Govern- ment and Wollongong City Council owe a lot to the logic and foresight of Allan Sefton, who has made a major contribution to the study and pre- servation of Australian fauna and flora. He has actively participated in all conservation issues for over 30 years, a few examples being Lake Ped- der, Clutha, Myall Lakes, Colong Caves and Bungonia Gorge issues, and, nearer to home, aid to distressed and injured native fauna, the planned Illawar 1 Escarpment Regional Park, opposition to a proposed casino complex on a flood-plain (still a haven for water-birds) on the shore of Lake Illawarra, and pollution problems at Port Kembla of fish-kills and the proposed coal-loader. With J. D. Gibson, he conceived the idea of and helped form and supervise the operations of Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 the NSW Albatross Study Group. He has con- tinually patrolled Illawarra beaches since 1950, and the Royal Albatross, Buller’s Albatross, Westland Black Petrel and Georgian Diving Pet- tel were first collected in Australia on Wollon- gong beaches, The Illawarra Bird-list of 314 Species 1s an impressive one — compiled and kept up to date by Mr. Sefton. He completed the or- nithological section of the Biological Survey of the Ilawarra District for the Illawarra Natural History Society (a huge card index housed in the Central Municipal Library and endorsed by Wol- longong City Council), and greatly assisted with the arachnid and herpetological sections, Allan Sefton has given countless talks to vari- ous local groups, including schools, illustrated by his own photographic slides. Migrant families constitute half the population in Wollongong, and he has been assiduous in educating them in the need for preserving our Australian environment and encouraging them to play an active part in conservation. Recent controversies such as the wood chip industry, air pollution, the uranium issue, and ‘Save the Whale’ are cases in point. He is currently working on ‘The Birds of the County of Camden’, to be published in ‘Birds’, the official organ of the Field Ornithologists’ Club of NSW. He has contributed many papers to *“Emu’ (RAOU) and innumerable articles in ‘I.N.H.S. Circular’ (newsletter of Illawarra Natural History Society), In addition, many of his articles have appeared in *B.H.P. Review’, ‘A.LS. Safety News’, “Gould League Notes’, “Australian Bird Watcher’, ‘Kunggurra News’, “Wildlife Research News’, “Illawarra Daily Mer- cury’, ‘Kembla News’, and in ‘Walkabout magazine he had a contribution entitled *Albat- rosses of Southern Coastal NSW’. An article on ‘The Australian Bird Banding Scheme’ appeared in ‘Justice of the Peace’, organ of the NSW Jus- tices’ Association (he has been a J.P. for many years). In 1975 Allan Sefton’s name appeared in the Queen’s Birthday honours list as the recipient of a British Empire Medal (B.E.M.), for ‘services to the community, as a natural historian, ecologist, conservationist and ornithologist’. Among his other interests has been sport —he is a member of 45 years’ standing and a life member of Thirroul District Cricket Club, and has been a trustee of his church for more than 25 years. He married Dorothy Green of Thirroul in 1943, and they have four sons and a daughter. His address is 15 Station Street, Thirroul, NSW 2515. J. A. Baines Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCV Activities General Meeting Monday, 14 August, 1978 Dr P. Keane, Lecturer in Botany, La Trobe University gave a very interesting address on ‘Fungi in the Environment’. Using a series of slides he spoke on the diversity of fungi and their role in nature. Because fungi must absorb car- bohydrate from their surroundings as they cannot September/October, 1978 produce it by photosynthesis, they absorb it from dead organic matter, such as leaf litter and rotting wood, or from living organisms. The latter forms either a parasitic symbiosis where the fungi be- nefit, but the host, generally a plant, suffers; or a mutualistic symbiosis, where both the fungus and the plant benefit. Many native species of plant depend upon this symbiosis. The mycelium at- tach themselves to the plant roots, changing the 209 cell structure, allowing access to greater amounts of nutrients, especially phosphates, This results in healthier plant growth, The fungus benefits by obtaining nutrients from the plant host. Some orchids obtain carbohydrate from mycelium especially during their early growth stages before they have developed leaves. Lichens are com- posed of a fungus and algae living together in symbiotic union — the fungus derives carbohyd- rate from the algae host which obtains water from the fungus. Exhibits, Displayed under the microscope were plant sections shown under both polarized light and ordinary light; and a pamphlet on ‘The Microscope’ pul out by the Microscopy Group, A Note On Saturday 19th August several members of the FNC V and a group of Hawthorn JFN attended the wedding of Barry Cooper and his bride Mar- guerite (Maggie) Ananian. On 22nd August Barry and Maggie left to spend 10 months in Canada where Barry has a temporary position as Assistant Professor at Waterloo University, Toronto to continue with his work on Conodonts, Members of the FNC V would like to wish them both congratulations and every success in their future together. peasy General Meeting Monday Il September 1978 In his address *‘Natural history writing’? Mr Ken Simpson spoke of several writing projects he has on hand. As a lecturer in the Science Depart- ment of Burwood State College he sees the need for a book on this, that or the other and, it seems, goes into action to meet that particular need. An explosion in publications on birds led him to start ‘Bird books for Birdoes"’ in which some 200 bird books have been divided into 28 categories and each evaluated, It will be available soon. Another large project is ‘‘Australian Wildlife Review’. Ken Simpson and Tony Robinson are preparing a short account of creatures in Australia — every species of mammal, birds, fish, reptiles 210 and amphibia. Mr Simpson wished he could have a year free from work (free from his regular bread-winning work) in order to finish the job. “Birds of Groote Island’’ is in progress — commissioned by BHP, and environmental im- pacts are being worked into a story about a mud- daubing wasp that has forgotten how to mud- daub! Exhibits consisted only of a superb flowering specimen of Eucalyptus caesia, and some pressed plants gathered near Mount Tom Price, WA. Positions Vacant Secretary. Mr Garnet Johnson is going on an extended holiday and has resigned from the posi- tion as FNCV Secretary and chairman of our Kinglake property, Garnet has given good service to this Club and has made valuable contributions to Kinglake, The Secretary's job is not as heavy as generally imagined. Stacks of correspondence are received and need to be filed, but there is not so much outward correspondence and some of it can be undertaken by other Council Members, One night per week would probably cover the work, Editor. Mr Reuben Kent is emphatic that he will not continue as editor beyond his original commitment for two years. December will be his last issue. Reuben has done a great job and we seck another volunteer for one or two years. Almost all our editors have been amateurs and previous experience is not necessary although it's certainly easier, Reuben will help the incoming Editor and the printer is always ready to advise on technical matters. The editor's job is very de- manding but it’s also very interesting. New Club Diarist for the Naturalist Our new FNCYV Diarist is Mr Alison Oates. If you want your material to be in a particular issue, it must be with our Diarist before the 7th of the preceding month. Simply post it to Mrs Oates c/o National Museum Victoria 285-321 Russell Street, Melbourne, or phone 663 4811 Ext. 346. Vic.Nat, Vol. 95 (Continued from page 170) GROUP MEETINGS ALLEFNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting, no extra payment At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8,00 pm, CR Ra Rint Sa a a a lc as ET ta a kl ll ih First Wednesday in the Month — Geology Group Wednesday, 4 October, ‘Mining costs today feasibility,’* Mr Graeme Love, Wednesday, | November, “Underwater mining of Manganese modules.’’ Mr K, Han of Monash University, Wednesday, 6 December. Members’ Christmas party Third Wednesday in the Month — Microscopy Group Wednesday, 18 October, Photography through the Microscope movies, % hour member's colour slides Wednesday, 15 November, To be announced at Group meeting black and white, colour, Second Thursday in the Month — Botany Group Thursday, 12 October. ‘Ranunculaceae family’’ Miss Madge Lester ““Mosses"’, Cameron MeConchie, Thursday, 19 November, Illustrated talk on the Benalla area by members of the group, Thursday, 14 December, Annual General Meeting, Flowers to observe in December, Please bring specimens, slides or illustrations, At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8,00 p.m Good parking area — enter from LaTrobe Street First Monday in the Month — Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 2 October, Members’ night. Monday, 6 November, ‘To be announced at Group meeting, At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown St., Heidelberg at 8.00 pom. Hirst Thursday in the Month — Mammal Survey Group Thursday, 5 October, Thursday, 2 November, Thursday, 7 December, pe SR RE A a ea GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCY members are invited to attend Group excursions Botany Group Thursday, 28 September — Sunday, | October, Visit to BenallaFNC, Other FN welcome to join us, Saturday, 28 October, Gisborne to Bacchus Marsh. Leader; Mrs Hilary Weatherhead, Saturday, 25 November, Dom Dom Saddle. Day Group — Third Thursday in the month Thursday, 19 October. Tour of Melbourne ports. Book with Mrs Gillespie, Phone: 578 1879, Thursday, 16 November, Maranoa Gardens, Meet at entrance in Beckett Park at 11,30 a.m, ‘Take Mont Albert tram (No, 42) in Collins St., alight at Kireep Rd, Geology Group Excursions of the Geology Group will be announced at Group meeting, September/October, 1978 ot Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E., Q.C. Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Mr. GARNET JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F, J, KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. D. KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087 (435 8664) Librarian: Mr. J, MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Suet, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (96 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: C/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and Keys: C/o Chairman, GARNET JOHNSON, 20 Sydare Avenue, Chadstone, 3148 (56 3227) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.¥V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1978 DHOTIDOONRII oF hoe ae re Fe Seek a igh CAaplatiamelic gs ehlt wees aahims 2t-t:a¥ ahah e's an ogee fame se $10.00 SATE MOU OR OMAN 6 osc os Uae bess eendetreestvede rn caanpioceppueiea censetceided ss OMA ¥abU Assess $12.50 DOE FORD WORE 7h. crt ect ret dears tenet eres dat ort ve cals : $10.00 Country Members, Subscribers and Retired Persons ... . + $8.00 Joint Country .....-. 6.65. ath $10.00 UO | save, tar) hs x" $2.50 Subscriptions to Vict, Nat. isk He $8.00 Overseas Subscription ....... ; hate $10.00 Junior with “Naturalist” ......... PAE Dh ae Uesep re beueit at vanaee $8.00 Individual Magazines ©... eee cee eens vb en see avahacetwe chtaaes ‘ $1.20 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary, hh tt = tcc the areata Saami Dachte hits chasers tas tn tke as deiseas ae soll. 4 ih Stn St natch rete dA hsanl @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE 212 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 £ Pe Fem eTa ea e ae a NAL MUSES G. { Ss A, 2 2DEC 1978) ; jol. 95, No.6 November/December, 1978 SPECIAL ALPINE ISSUE Published by the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria $1.20 Registered for posting as a publication — Category ‘'B’’ FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 11 December, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr. J. Nelson, Senior Lecturer in Zoology, Monash University. Subject: Arnhem Land Mammals Monday, 8 January, 7.55 p.m. Extraordinary General Meeting. Business: Election of the Black Rock Field Naturalist’s Club as an affiliated club Monday, 8 January, 8.00 p.m. Members Night: Members who wish to speak or show slides should contact either the President or Secretary Monday, 12 February, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Mr. R. Miller, President of the Archaeological Society of Victoria. Subject: Historical Archaeology in Victoria New Members— November General Meeting. No new members New Members— December General Meeting Ordinary: M/s Kathleen Nolan, Mt. St. Josephs College, 133 Maidstone St., Altona West, Vic. 3018, Mr M. Kitchell, 3 Lebanon St, Strathmore, Vic. 3041. Miss Julie Moon, 4 Hillside Ave., Bentleigh, Vic. 3084. Maramal Survey & Botany Mr Lew Kent, 32 Crampton Cres., Rosanna, Vic. 3084. Arachnology. Miss Vivienne Turner, 6 Una St., Mt. Waverley, Vic, 3149. Dr Conrad Serina, C/- Division Of Wildlife Research, C.S.1.R.0. Botany Country: Mrs H. V. Harvey. Box 92, Nyah West, Vic. 3595. Mr J. M. Pisana, Ferndale Via Warragul, Vic. 3820. Mammals & Survey. G, Lofthouse, C/- Botanic Gardens, Canberra, A.C.T. 2601. Mr K. Green, 3-1 Student Residence, C.C.A.E. Belconnen, A.C.T. 2616. Mr P. Hornsby. Dept. Of Psychology, University Of Adelaide, G.P.O Box 498, S.A, 5001. Animal Behaviour Junior: Master Linton Peters, 17 Larne Ave., Donvale, Vic. 3111. FNCV EXCURSIONS Saturday, 30 December—Sunday, 7 January. Bundanoon, N.S.W. Details are in the last Naturalist but if further information is required, contact the excursion secretary, Sunday, 21 January. Seawinds, Mornington Peninsula. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.50. Bring one meal and a snack. Sunday, 18 February. Details of this excursion will be in the next Naturalist, but tentatively, it will be Churchill Island. The coach will leave from Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. March, 10—12, Labour Day weekend. This year the FNCV will be hosts for the combined weekend of the Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Association. There will be an afternoon excursion on Saturday, a full day excursion on Sunday and a short excursion on Mon- day morning. There will also be meetings on Saturday and Sunday evenings. These excursions and meeting will replace the March general excursion and the March meet- ing. Will members try to keep this weekend free to meet the country clubs and join in the weekend activities. Details of the programme will appear in the next Naturalist. (Continued on page 255) 214 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 \ The Victorian Naturalist Volume 95, Number 6 November/December 1978 Editor: Reuben Kent (= > 2DEC 1978 \ >\P Sor yicto8tZ Editorial Committee: Susan Beattie, Barry Callanan, Margaret Corrick, lan Hood, Alison Oates, Brian Smith, Paul Temple Mammals of the Australian Alps—a brief review of past work, with a view to the future by Joan M. Dixon Aborigines in the Ranges by J. G. Douglas .................... 222 Gungartan: A Winter Fauna Survey above 1500 metres by W. Osborne: Vie krcece-wheeerneenadndeMy Greener el seers Gen « 226 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by James TEEREAIS ON Belo We at oe Webi | tek insniem Ol tne giieaiven Gaeta ae ie a Notes on the Molluscs of the Victorian Great Dividing Range by Brian J. Smith rll ay Uy Reet ee Men) She 1 ele al BY lair ine bean. 9 peel 236 Behaviour in a Group of Wild Echidnas by K. Johnson ......... 241 EPNGY. Quectisland Excursion by Jo Wall, 20.5 00%... en aoe 243 In memory of Keith Rogers 1896-1978 by Jean Galbraith ....... 247 The impact of development in Wollongong on the environment during the past fifty years by Alan Sefton.................... 248 Carabid Beetle Preying on Frogs by M. J. Littlejohn and J. W. VENT aot le os REPRO: Um Bae oil Miltes 2) 5 Ae hana, 251 BOGKEREVIEWAD Va Ase Ve DIES ag Rha ween ee 8 ah cates oP ere ony D2: Field Naturalist Club of Victoria Report of Meetings............ 252 Cover illustration: Burramys parvus—The Mountain Pigmy Possum: Living fossil. Photo by courtesy ‘‘The Age’. Mammals of the Australian Alps—a brief review of past work, with a view to the future BY JOAN M. Dixon* Since the early explorers Hume and Hovell skirted the Alps in 1824, thus opening up a vast new territory which was soon used for grazing activities, there has been increasing interest in this unique area of Australia. It was subse- quently investigated for mining, logging and more recently for recreational activities such as skiing and bush walk- ing. Unlike the coastal areas where faunal collection was an integral part of exploration, and other districts inten- sively Surveyed in the pioneering days, for example, the River Murray with the wide variety of natural history material collected by Major Mitchell's expedition, few reports were made on the Alpine flora and fauna. In this article | am arbitrarily limiting the confines of the Alps to the Great Dividing Range, generally considering areas above 4500 feet where there is plentiful winter snow. Both Victorian and New South Wales parts of the Divide are included—the latter usually referred to as the Kosciusko National Park. When I refer to true alpine mam- mals, I will indicate which species are known from above the tree line, a cri- terion which delineates this area from the lower vegetation zones. In Victoria, the Alpine zones above 4500 feet cover about 870 sq. mi. and in N.S.W. and the A.C.T. 1140 sq. mi. This article refers mainly to the Vic- torian situation, but continuity with the range in New South Wales and the similarities of the fauna are important and do not place the Victorian Alps in a unique situation. *Curator of Mammals, National Museum of Vic- toria, 216 Interest in the botanical aspects of the Alps was intensive in the 1950's, significant work being done by Carr and Turner (1959), Carr (1962) and Costin (1957 a, b; 1958). In the 1960s ecology became a field of wide interest, and was rapidly overtaken by a surge in involve- ment in the environment by the public as well as the academic. Survey work has become fashionable in even more recent limes, and is only now reaching a level of sophistication. The first mammal survey of parts of the Victorian Alps was carried out by Brazenor (1947) with investiga- tions into the fauna of the Snowy River area. He recorded a number of mammal species, most interesting of which was the brush-tailed wallaby, Perrogale penicillata found in mountainous parts of the Suggan Buggan district. Another of Brazenor’s contributions in the Alpine region were his comments on Lead- beater’s possum, a species which had been discovered in the Bass River area in 1867 but not sighted for many years, In 1931, a skin was located amongst museum material and identified as Lead- beater’s possum— Gymnobelideus lead- beateri. The date accompanying it was 1909, and the only locality information Mt. Wills. The elevation of Mt. Wills— 5000 feet, gave some indication that this species might have a wider distribution than expected. It was not rediscovered until 1961 in the Marysville district (Brazenor, 1962), but the thoughts that it may yet be one of the Alpine mam- mals cannot be dispelled. Another of the naturalist enthusiasts of north-eastern Victoria was Wakefield, who published on P. penicillata and other species from the region, and included valuable information on fossil deposits Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 (Wakefield 1954, 1960a, b). Little work was carried out on the High Plains, and in a Symposium on the Victorian High Plains, McEvey (1962) commented on the paucity of informa- tion available on the mammals of the area. The ecological work of Calaby and Wimbush (1964) was the first detailed study carried out on a mammal living in Australian Alpine conditions. The species was Mastacomys fuscus, the broad-toothed rat, known then as a relatively rare animal. The area of study in the Kosciusko National Park was a sub-alpine zone at about 5600-6000 feet, a heath community covered with snow for about three months of the year. The authors noted that there was no need for these animals to hibernate in winter as November/December Plate 1. Above Rocky Valley Dam, Falls Creek area. Alpine habitat for Burramys parvus and other small mammals. Photo; J. M Dixon Plate 2. Mt. McKay environs, Burramys parvus habitat, Scat- tered snow gums, dense heath and granite boulders offer refuge. Photo: J. M. Dixon there was no restriction to their move- ment, and food was plentiful beneath the snow. Burrows or other holes among rocks and vegetation provided shelter for these small rodents through all seasons. Subsequent survey work in other areas of the park by C.S.I.R.O. was the first detailed faunal work in Alpine Australia and had significant results. These will be discussed at greater length below. In 1966, a small mammal was found alive in a ski lodge at Mt. Hotham—it was the mammal discovery of the decade. Speculation on its identity and origin was lengthy, and after considera- ble debate, assisted by the animal open- ing its mouth to reveal characteristic sec- torial premolar teeth, it was pronounced to be a living specimen of Burramys par- vus, now usually referred to as the 217 mountain pigmy possum. It was pre- viously known as fossil material only from both Victoria and New South Wales, having been described from the Wombeyan Caves by Broom (1896). The actual habitat of the Hotham animal was a problem. Had it been transferred up the mountain with wood or other material, or was it a native of that rather inhospitable (climatically) environment? This question could not be answered at the time. There were numerous small articles published on it (Seebeck 1967, Warneke, 1967). Proof of the existence of this rare animal in the Alps came in 1970 follow- ing C.S.1.R.O. survey work in Kosciusko National Park. The collection of live specimens of B. parvus in the sub-alpine 218 Plate 3. Sub-alpine tussock grasslands with winter snow cover—Bennison Plains. Habitat for a variety of native mammals Photo: J. M. Dixon Plate 4. Dry open forest— Galbraith Saddle. Habuat for Pseudomys fumeus. Photo: J. M. Dixon zone with boulder strewn, shrubby and scattered snow gum vegetation was pub- lished by Calaby, Dimpel and McTaggart Cowan (1971). The need for future study of this species in its natural habitat was emphasised in relation to both pure research and to conservation in the High Country. As the only Australian mam- mal which is restricted to the sub-alpine to alpine zone, it is of some significance. In 1971 during brief field survey work on the Victorian High Plains by Dixon (1971la), B. parvus was captured in the Falls Creek area near Mt. McKay. The altitude was about 5900 feet, the area a granite tor studded hillside with scat- tered snow gums, alpine shrubs and heath. Mastacomys fuscus was located in the same area along with three other Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 small mammal species, allied rat— Rawus Juscipes, Swainson’s marsupial mouse— Anechinus swainsonii, and brown mar- supial mouse Antechinus stuartii (Dixon 1971b). More recently Burramys and other species have been located at Mt. Hotham, Victoria. All of these species, with the exception of B. parvus are well dispersed throughout south eastern con- tinental Australia, With the formation of the Victorian Land Conservation Council in 1970, the Alpine area became one which was to receive, like others in the state, investigation into numerous fields with a view to appropriate land utilisation. From the initial background of museum survey on the High Plains further field work was carried out in selected areas of the Victorian Alps. This work covered regions which can be described as alpine proper, as well as crossing a range of habitat types:— sub-alpine woodland, wet open forest, dry open forest, wood- lands, semi-cleared areas and forest margins and grasslands. (For list of species see Table). The investigations by museum and other teams and analysis of archival information have been compiled by Dixon (1976). The report produced gives some indication of the minute areas of the Alps which have received survey attention. The habitat needs of species with restricted distributions are of special interest. These are the species which need urgent attention—they are subjected to the impact of a variety of forces—and they have no control over their environment. REFERENCES Brazenor, C. W. (1947), Mammals in —A preliminary report on the Biology and Ecology of the Snowy River area in North-eastern Victoria, Mem. natn. Mus, Vict, 1§: 146-171. November/December Brazenor, C. W. (1962). Australian possum, Gynmobelideus leadbeqteri. Proce. Zool. Sov. Lond. 139%: 529-531. Broom, R. (1896), On a small fossil marsupial with lurge srooved premolars. Proc. Linn Soe. N.S.W, 10: 563. Caluby, J. H., Dimpel, H., and Cowan, lL. McTag- part (1971). The Mountain pigmy possum Bur- rains parvus Broom (Marsupialia), in the Kosciusko National Park, New South Wales Tech. pap. Div, Wildl. Res. C.SAR.O, No, 23. Calaby, J. H., & Wimbush, D. J. (1964). Observa- ions on the broad-toothed rat, Mastacomys Subons (Thomus), C.S.L.R.0. Wildl. Res, 9: 123- 13 Rediscovery of a rare Carr, S, G, (1962). The role of shrubs. in some plant communities of the Bogong High Plains. Proce. R. Sov, Vier, 15: 301-310, Carr, S. G. and Turner, J. 8. (1959). Ecology of the Bogong High Plains 1: Environmental factors and the grasslands communities. Aust. J. Bor, 7: 12-33 Cosun, A. R. (1957a). High mountain carchments in Victoria in relation to land use. Soil Conservation Authority, Vict Costin, A. B. (1957b). The high mountain vegeta- tion of Australia, Aust. J. Bor, S: 173-189. Costin, A. B. (1958). The grazing factor and the maintenanee of catchment in the Australian Alps. C.S.LR.O. (Aust) Plant. Ind. Div, Tech. Paper 10), Dixon, J, M. (1971a) Burranis parvus Broom (Marsuptalia) from Falls Creek area of the Bogong High Plains, Victoria. Victorian Nat. 88: 133-138 Dixon, J. M. (1971b). The broad-toothed rat Mastaconws fuscus, Thomas from the Falls Creck area, Bogong High Plains, Victoria. Vic- torian Nat, 88: 198-200. Dixon, J. M. (1976). Report on the Vertebrate fauna of the Alpine Study Area of Victoria. National Museum of Victoria. J. M. Dixon, Project Diree- tor and ed. Prepared for the Land Conservation Council, McEvey, A. R, (1962). Zoology of the High Plains: Part |1—Birds and Mammals. Proc. R. Soe, Viet. 75: 315-317. Ride, W, D, L. 11970) mals of Australia. Melbourne. Seebeck, J. (1967). A Guide tu the Native Mam- Oxford University Press, Notes on the Mt. Hotham environment, Bull. Aust. Mamm. Soc. 29: 96, Wakefield, N. A. (1954). The rediscovery of the Rock Wallaby in Victoria, Victorian Nat, 70: 202- 206. Wakefield, N. A. (1960a) Forlorn Hope and Reedy River, Fierorian Nat. 77: 4-11 (Part 1), 77: 32-39 (Part I). Wakefield, N. A. (1960b). Recent mammal bones iH i Buchan district. (Part 1). Vicrorian Nar. 80 169-176. Wacreke R. M, (1967). Discovery of a ene Bur- ramys. Bull. Aust, Mamm. Soc. 2: 94-95 219 (OL6T) SPTY 2993e STeuMeU aATJEU JO UOT IOTJISSBTO esnom fsyoug 381 payj004-peorg yer 13qeM yer ysng esnom [etdnsisu Aysng z0 S,UOSUTBAS snow Tetdnszew umoig (UenL) sTe¥ooseyd pattez-ysnag qed TAFT qoooTpueq pasou-#u07] zequoa uoum0) BTBoy umssod Am#td utequnoy umssod Au#td usayseq (T¥®4-t949e94) AepTT? AuATg snaunf sfuopnasg snasn{ shuoanzsDy daysvboskayo shuoaphy sadiasnf snqqzoy : SepTanp VILINAGO8 zzuosuipas ‘y 2244amNAs snuryoezUy vfozv0dn, a70Boaspyg snjo]nonu snanisog aeptankseqg DINSDU Sa] auDiag Sept Loweteg snu1sun snqoquos, sept zEquoA SNBLGU1D 8042AD7 OoasTYyd Sept poFeLOoseug snarod shumazing snupu sn.aquvo049a) snapuBbhd sazoqouoy dep tAmedang SeToedsg Teumey Jo 4ST] ‘Tey t9zeu SAT yequassider ou saBy am yng ‘sdTy au} jo uotza0d uiaysBs-YZIOU a4} WOLZ pepioder uaaq sey oma ayy } umssod s,iejzveqpeeT JeptT® 1aqeaig ZTEPTTS PeTTTaQ-AOTTax Zepttz Terrtmbs JeptTts «ze3ng umssod paTtez-2uty (umssod uTequnoW) yonqog umssod paTte.-ysnag omg AqeTTea yYOor patte4-ysnag (dureas) AqeTTea yoVtg AQUTTBA payoou-psay oozeZuey Aoiz usreyseq sndfqetg supTyog VauV ANId Ty wtaqvaqpye)] snap2zaqowuuhg sup10a sazDqou1oyog 827Da7END “gq szsuaojofiou *g sdao1aaiq snunvzag snurabasad sniiayoopnasg sep TMByeg snutupo *] Dj]nDad]na sninsoyo1dy Sep tiosueleug snzsnqou sndozony 23011 202Uad a1 DBodzag 401 002q D2G0710M snas1ibofnt “jw snaqun616 sndowony Sp Tpodor0ey VITVIdNSYWWN snurqoun snyouhytoy.2twUdo Sep THouAYAOYS TUIO snzvajznon snsso7bhyony SBP TSSOTBAYOB, VIVNAU.LONOW Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 220 Mammals (2) CHIROPTERA Vespertilionidae Nyetophilus timortensts N. geoffroyt Mintopterus schretbersti Eptesteus pwmilus Chalinolobus gouldit C. morto Greater long-eared bat, Lesser long-eared bat Bent-winged bat Little bat Gould's wattled bat Chocolate bat Piptstrellus tasmaniensis Tasmanian pipistrelle Rhinolophidae Rhinolophus megaphyllus Eastern horseshoe bat Molossidae Tadartda australis White-striped bat CARNIVORA Canidae Cants familtaris Dingo INTRODUCED MAMMALS Oryetolagus cunteulus Rabbit Lepus europaeus Hare Mus musculus House mouse Rattus rattus Black rat Vulpes vulpes Fox Felts catus Cat Equus caballus Brumby Bos taurus Cow Cervus untcolor Sambar deer C. elaphus Red deer Erratum There are two errors in co-ordinates in the article ‘‘The First Victorian and other Vic- torian records of the Little Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas)”’ published in Victorian Nat. 95, Jan/Feb. 1978. (1) p.5 Lat. 36°50’S should be Lat. 35°50'S (2) p.6 Long. 114°23'E should be 141°23'E Wedge-tailed Eagle King of the Air? birds alighted on a tree. Soon the eagle flew off. Then I noticed five medium sized birds diving at the eagle and they kept up their attack as the eagle flapped his way out of the territory. During the early afternoon on 22/10/78 on the banks of the Kangaroo Creek, Por- cupine Ridge near Daylesford I noticed a wedge-tailed eagle and a bird which looked like a crow flying up the valley. The two eee November/December 221 Aborigines in the Ranges BY J. G. DOUGLAS* Well documented sites, and the experiences of early settlers show that the aborigines lived in and about the fringes of the Otway Ranges, but there has been a long held belief, mentioned by Massola (1966, 1969), Scarlett (1977), and others, that they did not penetrate into the interior. Both these authors however suggest that the aborigines did visit or cross the ranges, although they were unable to offer any satisfactory supporting evidence. A small collection of implements from Lavers Hill, made by my father W. G. Douglas in 1928 whilst headmaster of the school, and still in his possession, provides more information on the sub- ject. Three stone axe heads were found beside a soak or spring 100m to the north of the present Great Ocean Road, behind the township which is on top of the main ridge, in one of the wettest and most elevated parts of the ranges. I think it is fair to suggest that whether in tran- sit, or in more permanent residence, these people used the site because of the close proximity of water to a main trail along the ridge, making descent into the more thickly vegetated gullies unnecess- ary. All the axes have been tentatively identified as Cambrian greenstone, or probable greenstone. In Victoria there are several outcrops of greenstone which might have been the source. The closest are in the Barrabool Hills near Geelong, and the Mount Stavely-Mount Drum- mond area south of the Grampians. As no thin sections have been cut to facili- tate more authoritative identification, it *Department of Minerals and Energy 107 Russell Street, Melbourne 222 is possible that the implements were derived from the aboriginal quarry near Gellibrand, in basalt or dolerite of prob- able Oligocene age. Two axes (Figs. la, 1b, 4) are broken, but sull retain a very sharp cutting edge (7 cm long on the largest axe). Fig. 2, Aboriginal axe, Rocky Jack Divide Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 3a, Aboriginal axe, Lavers Hill. November/December 223 Hy ee Aboriginal axe, Lavers Hill. All figures are a little smaller than natural size. Photography by Mrs. ; wyer. Axe locality ne LAVERS HILL |”. Woy we S) sy weer N f¢) 500 1000 Metres 224 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 4. Aboriginal axe, Lavers Hill. The third specimen (Figs. 3a, 3b) is a complete axe head, nearly 12 cm long and 8 cm in width at its broadest part, with a white powdery siliceous coating. I find it particularly intriguing because although I am a geologist by profession I had always regarded it as flint. However, Mr. P. Kenley of the Geological Survey, after examination of a small area free of white coating, has identified it as an igneous rock, probably greenstone. Proximity to, or immersion in the spring may have accelerated weathering result- ing in a superficial resemblance to flint. Some peope may be interested in addi- tional implement sites in the southern highlands. I have sighted a large collec- tion from the cleared area between the post office at Dollar and the Tarwin River, in the Strzelecki Ranges, and picked up an axe on the Forest Commis- sion track, Rocky Jack Divide, north of Orbost (Fig. 2; length 14 cm, width 6.5 cm). REFERENCES Massola, A., 1966. Notes on Aboriginal antiquities of the Colac District. Vict. Nat. 83 pp. 125-136. Massola, A., 1969. Journey to Aboriginal Victoria. Rigby. Scarlett, N. H., 1977. The Aborigines of the Otway Region. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 89 pp. 1-5. Australian Natural History Medallion Fund Amount on hand invested August 1978...... Mr Eric Allan (2nd donation)............... Mrs D: W. Mc Kellar Total Mis DoraiGamertine 1.0.02 es a .. isiifehed 3 ates LY Sasa 8 Taree elma cpa ty Depa Pe Ae) He AMI 20.00 $789.00 The Victorian Naturalist—Back Issues Members are informed that back issues of the Victorian Naturalist are available, complete volumes for many years may be obtained and other numbers go back as far as Volume 11 1894 onwards. The price to members is a minimum of 40 cents a single issue or the face value if higher. Postage extra. Enquire from the Sales Officer if the numbers you want are available. November/December 225 Gungartan: A Winter Fauna Survey Above 1500 Metres BY W. OSBORNE, M. PREECE, K. GREEN AND M. GREEN* Summary A survey of the fauna present in mid- winter above 1500 metres in the Gungartan region of Kosciusko National Park, N.S.W., has revealed the presence of 8 species of mammals; 4 marsupials, | native eutherian and 3 introduced species. 14 species of birds were recorded, of which | was introduced. Invertebrates found to be active included 6 species of insect and 1 arachnid. Introduction The purpose of the survey was to establish which mammals, birds and invertebrates remain active above the permanent winter snowline during mid- winter. As such, the survey was confined to those areas above 1500 metres. The survey was conducted over a three week period, 7th-28th July, 1978. At this time, the area had a deep snow cover, generally exceeding 1 metre in depth, and was subject to further heavy snowfalls during the survey period. The average maximum temperature during the survey was +2°C and the average minimum was —5°C. The weather was generally overcast with some days of sunlight. Description of Area The study area, which comprised some 65 square kilometres of Kosciusko National Park was centred around the Mount Gungartan (2068 m) region which lies 5.5 kilometres north of the Guthega Hydro-Electric Power Station. The survery extended northwards to Grey Mare Hut and southwards to Dis- appointment Spur Hut; and was *Student Residences, C.C.A.E. Box 20, Belcon- nen. A.C.T. 2616. 226 bounded to the west by The Rolling Ground and The Ghost and to the east by The Porcupine Mountain and Finns River. (See Figure 1.) Topography. The physiography of the area is largely the result of Pleistocene glaciations and present day periglacial and other weathering processes. The general topography of the area consists of steep, evenly sloped ridges which are often crowned by granite tors along their flattened summits. Between these ridges run rounded alpine valleys, many of whose floors are studded with morainic boulders. Numerous smaller creeks di- sect and drain the elevated mountain flats into these larger valleys. Poorly drained alpine swamps occur along some of the rivers and mountain flats. Geology and Soils. The geology of the Gungartan area consists mainly of a massive intrusion of largely foliated, gneissic granite and granodiorite. This intrusion comprises part of the Kosciusko Batholith which intruded the parent rock during the late Devonian early Silurian periods. Also occurring in the area is a narrow outcrop of Ordovi- cian quartzoze, which forms the westernmost extension of this Ramshead/ Kosciusko intrusion. The principal soil types of the area consist of Alpine Humus soils, described by Costin (1954). Vegetation. The vegetation of the study area is quite diverse, consisting of a series of Alpine Complexes, including Sod tussock grasslands; Alpine herbfields; Heaths; Wet scrubs; and Woodlands, (Costin 1954). Because of the deep snow cover during the survey period, a detailed study of the vegetation was not undertaken. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 November/December = a VALENTINE Rood 2 Wheel Drive Road 4 Wheel Orive River Creek Contour in metres Survey Boundary - Otherwise along 1600m contour Rs GUTHEGA POWER STATION Fig. 1 Fauna Survey Area. 227 Road 2 Wheel Drive Road 4 Wheel Drive Power Line River Creek Contour in feet Hot Trapping Area Fig. 2 Concentrated Trapping Area Centred on Schlinks “Hilton”, Methods Trapping, spotlighting, observation by day and interpretation of tracks and faeces were the main methods by which animal presence was noted. Small mam- mals were trapped using 32.5 cm x 9 cm x 9.5 cm Elliot traps which were baited with a mixture of peanut butter, honey and oatmeal. Insulation in the form of wood shavings was provided as a safeguard against the animals freezing whilst in the trap. In most cases traps were located beneath the snow or were covered by snow blocks. The traps were checked twice daily, between 9.00 and 10.00 in the morning and between 4.00 and 5.00 in the afternoon. Animals caught were identified, weighed, sexed and marked before being released at the site of capture. Short term marking was 228 carried out using an indelible, non-toxic, felt pen, Additional evidence of mammal pre- sence was provided by tracks in the snow. Excursions by ski proved the only way by which large areas could be sur- veyed and the location of such tracks noted. Spotlighting was carried out using a sealed beam spotlight powered by a 12 volt motorcycle battery. Observations were usually made between dusk and midnight. Faeces were also noted and collected. Birds present were recorded from sightings; the time of sighting, the num- ber of birds and their activity were also noted. Invertebrates were collected from the snow surface. No investigation beneath the bark of trees was conducted. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Results Three groups of animals were found to be active above 1500 metres during the survey. These were mammals, birds and arthropods. Of the eight mammals recorded, five were native species, Of the fourteen species of birds noted. only one species was introduced. Six species of insects and one species of spider were also considered to be active (were moy- ing when found). Details of the results are summarised in Tables 1-4. Classifi- cation follows that of Ride (1970), Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union (1975), and C,.S.LR.O. (1970). Trapping results were obtained from the areas illustrated in Figure 2. Notes on the Species Recorded (1) MAMMALS Swainson’s Antechinus, Antechinus swainsonii Ten different specimens were trapped in run-aways beneath the snow along a road erosion gully near the Schlink- Hilton Hut. All individuals trapped were males. Intensive trapping in rocks and along creeks in other areas was unsuc- cessful. Brown Antechinus, Antechinus stuartii Although A. Siuartii was not collected in the field, it was found to be present in and underneath some of the huts. A dead male was found in Disappointment Spur Hut. A second male was caught in Valentines Hut. Wombat, Vombatus ursinus Three wombats were recorded during the study period. All were seen walking across snow in mid-afternoon. Wombat tracks were found along the following valleys; Whites River to 2km south of Whites River Hut, Valentines Creek, Duck Creek, Straight Creek and Finn’s Swamp. The highest recorded wombat tracks were seen at 1850 metres 1 km §.S.E. of Tin Hut, Ringtail, Pseudocheirus peregrinus November/December Only one individual was observed. This sighting was made at night near the Schlink-Hilton Hut. Unoccupied possum nests were found near Orange Hut and Disappointment Spur Hut. Several sets of possum tracks leading to trees were noted in open areas near Whites River Hut. Allied Rat, Rattus fuscipes Two individuals were collected in traps set below the snow near Schlink-Hilton Hut. Another specimen was caught in a trap set on the snow’s surface. 100 metres south of Disappointment Spur Hut. This trap had been set where rat tracks ended at a hole in the snow. A fourth rat was found lying dead on the snow’s surface on an open plain at Straight Creek. Rat tracks were often seen in all areas throughout the region. Individual sets of rat tracks were found to extend a distance of 150 metres. Rabbit, Oryctolagus cuniculus Rabbit tracks and faecal pellets were seen along sheltered valleys near Valen- tines Hut at an altitude of 1700 metres, Rabbit faeces were also noted near Whites River up to about 1600 metres, Hare, Lepus eurpaeus Although only four sightings of hares were made, they were apparently very common throughout the region. Follow- ing each fall of fresh snow, tracks were noted commonly in all areas except on the Rolling Ground. The area west of Orange Hut through which a wildfire burned in 1972-73 showed most evi- dence of hare activity. Fox, Vulpes vulpes Foxes are apparently quite common. One fox was sighted by spotlight near Schlink-Hilton hut and another was seen 1 km S.E. of Mount Gungartan. Fox tracks were seen to follow rat tracks for considerable distances and at several locations large holes had been scratched through the snow. Fox faeces were col- lected from some localities. Dog, Canis familiaris (subspecies?) Tracks were found on two occasions in the vicinity of Valentines Hut. 229 (2) BIRDS Wedge-tailed Eagle, Aguila audax Two wedge-tailed eagles were observed together circling over an open area 2 km north of Valentines Hut. Two further individuals were also observed circling, one over Finn’s Swamp, the other over a tor north west of Orange Hut. Peregrine Falcon, Falco peregrinus The only recording of a peregrine falcon was made near the Rolling Ground. Due to conditions of poor visibility, the bird was identified from its alarm call rather than by sight. Yellow-tailed Black Cockatoo, torhynchus funereus These were observed either in flight or perched in trees but at no stage were they observed feeding. Gang Gang Cockatoo, Callocephalon Simbricatum Gang gangs were observed flying in areas of woodland at the northern and southern ends of the survery area. Crimson Rosella, Platycercus elegans These were mainly seen in flight but were also observed feeding on the buds of Eucalypnis paucifiora and E. stellulata. Grey Shrike-Thrush, Colluricincla har- monica Three recordings were made of this species at widely separated localities. In each case the individuals were observed feeding on the snow’s surface in wood- land, White-Browed Scrub Wren, Sericornis Srontalis These were observed in areas of woodland moving through the lower levels of the vegetation. Striated Thornbill, Acanthiza lineata The striated thornbill was generally seen feeding in upper and lower levels of trees and was also observed feeding on the ground beneath the trees. It was recorded in the valleys of Dicky Cooper Creek and Whites River. White-Throated Tree Creeper, Climac- Calyp- 230 teris leucophaea Observations were dispersed throughout the survey area, the bird was generally seen feeding on tree trunks. Starling, Srurnus vulgaris Starlings were seen in the vicinity of Schlinks-Hilton and Tin Hut. White-backed Magpie, Gymnorhina tibicen hypoleuca These were observed at localions throughout the survey area and were generally seen feeding on the snow’s surface. Pied Currawong, Strepera graculina Several individuals were recorded flying and culling near Whites River at 1600 metres. Grey Currawong, Strepera versicolor The only recording of this species came from the southern end of the surv- ery area. It was observed in flight. Little Raven, Corvus mellori This was the most widely distributed and the most commonly recorded bird. It was generally seen on the snow’s sur- face, perching in trees, or in flight and was the only bird observed to be active during blizzards. Discussion The depth of snow recorded imposed certain limitations on movement of mammals. Rattus fiuscipes was found to move beneath the snow but often emerged through pop-holes (usually situated beneath leaning tree trunks) and travelled up to 150 metres above the snow. Antechinus swainsonii was nol observed to move above the snow, but was recorded as having travelled a dis- tance of 50 metres below the snow. A, stuartii was observed above the snow on one occasion within a metre of a hut. As observed by Calaby and Wimbush (1964) the milder micro-climate pre- served beneath the snow enables small mammal activity to continue despite external weather conditions, The results of the present study agree with this and no relationship was found between sunny weather and below-snow mam- Vic,Nat. Vol. 95 TABLE 1 Order Marsupialia Family Dasyuridae: Swainsons Antechinus Antechinus swainsonii Brown Antechinus Antechinus stuartii Family Vombatidae: Common Wombat Vombatus ursinus Family Phalangeridae: Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus peregrinus Order Rodentia Family Muridae: Allied rat Rattus fuscipes Order Lagomorpha Family Leporidae: Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus Hare Lepus europaeus Order Carnivora Family Canidae: Red Fox Vulpes vulpes mal activity. or ski tracks to facilitate progress. Wom- On the snow surface hares were not _ bats had difficulty travelling in soft snow, observed to have any difficulty in mov- possibly due to the shortness of their ing. Foxes were found to often use the —_ legs and hence the necessity of pushing compressed snow of other animal tracks _ their bodies through the snow. November/December 231 TABLE 2 DETAILS OF MAMMAL SURVEY Period Number of trap nights 196 Number of spotlight hours 4 3 weeks in July 1978 Total Number (a) Number of animals caught per 100 trap nights Antechinus swatnsonit 51 Antechinus stuartit on) Rattus fuscipes 1.5 10(+11 recapture) 6 3 (b) Number of animals seen per spotlight hour Pseudochetrus peregrinus Vulpes vulpes O25 0.25 (c) Number of animals seen during daylight Vombatus ursinus Lepus europaeus Vulpes vulves (dead) Antechinus stuartii (dead) Rattus fusctpes oat of ot ty tS (d) Species recorded from other evidence Oryctolagus cuniculus - tracks and faecal pellets Canis familiaris (subspecies?) - tracks recorded Trapping did not result in the capture of Burramys parvus or Mastacomys fuscus, two species known to occur in the area, (Calaby, Dimpel and McTaggart Cowan, 1971). Both species are believed to remain active throughout the winter. The echidna, Tachyglossus aculeata, was not sighted in the present study but has been observed on the snow surface later in the season. Bird activity was generally confined to 232 on two occasions the valleys within the study area, excep- tions being the little raven, peregrine falcon and wedge-tailed eagle. The little Taven appeared to be the most well adapted to winter conditions, being the only bird recorded in flight during blizzards. The white-browed scrub wren, at the other extreme, was observed to shelter under snow-laden vegetation along earth banks on roadsides. The arthropods collected were dis- Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 TABLE 3 BIRDS RECORDED FROM THE GUNGARTAN REGION Scientific Name Aqutla audax Faleo peregrinus Calyptorhynehus funereus Common Name Wedge-tailed eagle Peregrine falcon Yellow-tailed black cockatoo Frequency of Recording Uncommon Uncommon Very common Callocephalon fimbrteatun Platyeerecus elegans ; nee Colturt_etnela harmonica Serteornts frontalts Aeanthtza lineata Gang gang cockatoo Crimson rosella Grey shrike thrush White browed scrub wren Striated thornbil] Common Very common Uncommon Uncommon Very common Climacteris leucophaea White-throated tree Common creeper Sturnus vulgaris Common starling Common Gymnorhina tibicen White-backed magpie Common hypoleuea Strepera yraculina Pied currawong Uncommon Strepera versteolor Grey currawong Uncommon Corvus mellort covered on sunny days, on one such day the shade temperature reached a max- imum of 12.5°C. It is considered unlikely that the arthropods were blown to the collection sites from lowlands due to the distance involved and the absence of wind on many days. The scarcity of invertebrates during the study, the confinement of the activity of certain mammals to beneath the snow and the presence of foxes raises the question of their predation habits during winter. No data is available November/December Little raven Very common as yet but fox scdts were collected for analysis. Acknowledgements The authors gratefully acknowledge the aid of the following: L. Best for his initial guidance and helpful suggestions; J. H. Calaby for his advice and assistance concerning small mammals; The Can- berra College of Advanced Education for loan of equipment; B. Gall for his willing co-operation and loan of equip- ment; P. Zborowski for identification of 233 TABLE 4 INVERTEBRATES COLLECTED FROM SNOW SURFACE Class Insecta Order Coleoptera Number Observed Family Tenebrionidae : Cardtothorax sp. ] Family Chrysomelidae : Paropsis sp. ] Family Carabidae *1 ] Order Blattodea *2 Family Blattidae : Platyzosterta sp. i Order Orthoptera Family Acrididae : sub Family Oxyinae ] Order Diptera *1 ] Class Arachnida Order Aranea Lycosa sp. ] *] Observed but not co!lected *2 One other Blattodea was observed in the field but not collected. 234 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 insect specimens; The Snowy Mountains Authority for the use of the Schlink ‘Hilton’ Hut; the N.S.W. National Parks and Wildlife Service for permission to trap and collect specimens. The following people provided field assistance at various times: P. Geleris, R. Lea, V. Masala, A. Med- nis, A. Montgomery, R. Palmer and R. Tait. REFERENCES Calaby, J. H. and Wimbush, D. J. (1964): ‘Obser- valions on the Broad-Toothed Rat Mastacomys Jiscus Thomas’, C.S.LR.O. Wildlife Research, 1964. 9: 123-33. Calaby, J. H,, Dimpel, H. and MeTaggart Cowan, 1. (1971): ‘The Mountain Pigmy Possum, Burramys parvus Broom (Marsupialia) in the Kosciusko National Park, New South Wales’. C.S.1.R.0. Division of Wildlife Research Tech- nical Paper No. 23, Costin, A. B. (1954): ‘A Study of the Ecosystems of the Monaro Region of New South Wales with Special Reference to Soil Erosion’. Govt. Printer. Sydney. C.S.LR.O, ‘The Insects of Australia’ University Press. 1970. Ride, W. D. L. (1970): ‘A Guide to the Native Mammals of Australia’. Oxford University Press. Readers Digest (1976): ‘Complete Book of Aus- tralian Birds’, Readers Digest. Sydney. Slater, P, (1970, 1974); "A Field Guide to Aus- tralian Birds Vols. | and 2°. Rigby. Adelaide. Melbourne The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 187 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A. BAINES Phyllota. Gk phyllon, leaf; ous, otos, ear; because the bracteoles of some species are leafy. An endemic Australian genus (Burbidge says 4 to 5 spp., J. C. Willis 10) of family Papilionaceae, of which Victoria has only 2, P. pleurandroides and P. re- mota, the former named from resemblance to the genus Pleurandra synonymous with Hibbertia and meaning side-anthered, and the latter from its remote habitat in the Little Desert. *Physalis. Gk physalis, a bladder, bub- ble; (cf. physa, a pair of bellows); from the inflated calyx. Our 3 introduced species are *P. viscosa, Sticky Ground-cherry, *P. peruviana, Cape Gooseberry (so-called be- cause, although a native of Peru, it was cultivated at the Cape of Good Hope and brought thence to N.S.W. at the end of the 18th Century), and *P. alkekengi, Winter Cherry, Bladder Cherry, Alkekengi, or Chinese Lantern Plant. The specific epithet of the last-named is the Arabic name; in German it is Judenkirsche, Jewish Cherry, and the genus is a member of the family November/December Solanacéae. *Phytolacea. Gk phyton, a plant; mod- ern Lat lacea, from Hindi lakh, referring to the dye extracted from the lac insect. The allusion is to the staining qualities of the fruit, hence the name inkberry. Our species, *P_ octandra, Red-ink Weed or Red Ink Plant, is a-native of North and South America. *P. dioica, the Ombu tree of South America, which sometimes persists in deserted gardens, figures in books by W. H. Hudson, who was born in Argentina in a house with a Spanish name meaning ‘The 25 Ombu Trees’. The genus gives its name to family Phytolaccacaea. *Picris. Gk name, in Theophrastus, of a bitter herb (pikros, bitter) resembling let- tuce (according to Black); the plants have a bitter taste (cf. picric acid). Our 2 intro- duced species are *P. echiovides, Ox- tongue, and *P. hieracioides, Hawkweed Picris, so-called from its resemblance to hawkweeds (Hieracium), fellow members of family Compositae. 235 Notes on the Molluscs of the Victorian Great Dividing Range BY BRIAN J. SMITH* Introduction The Great Dividing Range is the major topographical feature of Victoria, being a high mountain range with winter snow-fields and densely forested lower slopes. It has had a major influence on the distribution of animals in the South- eastern Australian faunal region, acting both as a habitat zone itself and as a bar- rier to faunal movement. In some ways the effects of the Range have been more significant than those of Bass Strait, being the northern boundary of the so- called Bassian Faunula (Iredale, 1937). Early work on the non-marine molluscs of Victoria was carried out by Cox and Hedley (1912) and Gabriel (1930, 1939, 1947) while a study of the molluscs of the Snowy River area was carried out by Gabriel and Macpherson (1947). More recently faunal studies have been published of areas within Vic- toria (Smith, 1977) and a current synop- sis of the fauna prepared (Smith and Kershaw—in press). Mollusc Fauna of the Range The non-marine mollusc fauna of the Victorian Great Dividing Range is typi- cal of the whole South-eastern Austra- lian region. The fauna consists of 57 species in 19 families and includes several species considered endemic to the Range. This paper is not intended to be a complete survey of molluscs of the area, but rather aims at pointing out the main characteristics of the fauna and noting items of special interest. Within an area such as the Great Divide the main factor limiting animal distribution is habitat type. Four main * Senior Curator (Zoology), National Museum of Vicloria 236 habitat types can be recognised in the Range, each with its own molluse fauna. These are freshwater, wet forest, dry forest and alpine and man-modified areas. Freshwater Aquatic Habitat There is a wide variety of freshwater habitats in the Great Divide, ranging from the fast flowing mountain rivers and creeks to dams, lakes and alpine bogs. Nineteen species of freshwater molluscs are known from the area. Rivers and permanent creeks form the principal aquatic habitat. In the upland areas these are fast flowing with alternate rifle-rapid and pool sections and largely clean sand to coarse gravel bottoms (Smith et al, 1977), Freshwater limpets are commonly found adhering to the stones, large mussels and small pea shells are found in the finer sediments of the pool sections, while planispiral and high-spired planorbids occur along the margins where vegetation occurs. In the flatter, lowland country the rivers are deeper and slow flowing with a fine sus- pended solid load. These rivers are sub- ject to spring floods which replenish the waters in the associated billabong systems which are otherwise rich, iso- lated water bodies with prolific aquatic vegetation growth and fine sediment. These habitats usually contain the planorbids Physastra gibbosa and Isidorella hainesii, the small flat Segnitila victoriae and lymnaeids. Small forest streams and waterfalls often contain the small round- shouldered hydrobiid Pupiphryx gram- pianensis. The most interesting freshwater snail in Victoria is the small planispiral oper- Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Fig. 1. Map of the known distribution of Glacidorbis hedlevi. The line is the boundary of the Great Dividing Range in eastern Victoria. culate Glacidorbis hedleyi recently redescribed by Meier-Brook and Smith (1975). It is now known from seven localities in Victoria and southern N.S.W. in acidic waters of alpine streams and bogs to mountain lakes and forest streams (Fig. 1). Because of its small size (maximum diameter 2 mm) it has been overlooked. until detailed faunal surveys have been carried out in recent years in the Alpine area. It is closely related to species from similar habitats in Tasmania and southern Chile. Wet Forest Habitat The Great Divide contains large areas of wet sclerophyll and temperate rain- forest with dense vegetation, deep fern gullies and a deep wet litter containing abundant fungus and mosses. The forest floor has a high humidity and rarely, if ever, dries out. The mollusc fauna of this habitat is similar to that of the same habitat type in the Otways (Smith, 1977) and Tasmania. Thirteen species of November/December molluscs are described from this habitat in the Range, of which several are endemic to the Range. The most spec- tacular is the large carnivorous snail Vic- taphanta atramentaria (Fig. 2.), confined to the central part of the Range. Several charopid species are also found only in this part of the Range, including Rhophodon problematica and Pillomena marysvillensis. Dry Forest and Alpine Habitat This category includes all the uncleared terrestrial habitat of the Range apart from the wet forest area. It consists of dry sclerophyll forest to open wood- land to alpine meadow and is charac- terized by shallow litter or open ground surface which dries out completely in the summer, Twenty-one species of molluscs are recorded from this habitat type in the Great Divide including several species introduced into Australia which encroach into native bush areas. Most characteristic of this habitat are the 237 Fig. 2. Large carnivorous snail, Vietaphanta atramentaria, endemic to the Great Divide of Victoria. (Photo by L. Winsor) snails Helicarion niger, Chloritobadistes victoriae and in the eastern ranges the large snail Pygmipanda atomata, together with charopids of the genera F/sothera, Pernagera and Pillomena. Man Modified Areas An alarming amount of the Victorian Great Divide has been extensively modified by European man, Large tracts of forest have been cleared, roads have been built and introduced plants and animals established over most of the area, to such an extent that no part of the Range can now be said to be in the State it was in prior to the settlement of European man in Australia over the past two centuries. Some of the native molluscan species have adapted to life in these modified areas. However the dominant molluscs of these areas and of the Great Divide as a whole are the introduced snails and slugs accidentally brought from Europe on plants, imple- ments etc. by the settlers (Altena and Smith, 1975). These species are mainly 238 pests, feeding on pasture and garden crops. Their only positive value is that they do provide a food source for some of the introduced birds and mammals. Altogether twelve species are found in this man-modified environment, only two of which are native species. Acknowledgements This work on the non-marine mollusc: fauna of south-eastern Australia is sup- ported by the Australian Biological Resources Study to whom thanks are due. Thanks are due to Ms. Fletcher of Monash University for data on Glacidor- bis. Thanks are also due to Ms. Rhyllis Plant of the Invertebrate Department of the Museum for drawing and data extraction, to Mr. F, Coffa for assistance with photography and to Mrs. Lyn Anderson for typing the manuscript. REFERENCES Altena, C. O. van Regteren and B. J. Smith, 1975 Notes on introduced slugs of the families Limacidae and Milacidae in Australia, with two new records. J. malae. Soc, Aust., 3(2): 63-80. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Cox, J.C. and C. Hedley, 1912, An index of the land shells of Victoria. Mfem. nat. Mus. Melb. 4: Gabriel, C. J., 1930, Catalogue of the land shells of Victoria. Proc. R, Sov, Vier, 43: 62-88, Gabriel, C. J,, 1939. The freshwater Mollusea of Victoria. Mem. natn. Mus. Viet, WW: 100-139. Gabriel, C, J., 1947, Additions to and alterations in the catalogue of the land shells of Victoria (including descriptions of new species). /hid., 15: 109-125, Gabriel, C, J.. and J. HW. Macpherson, 1947, Mollusea in A preliminary reporton the biolowy and ecology of the Snowy River area in North Easiern Vieroria, [bid., WS: 146-17) Iredale, T., 1937, A basic list of Land Mollusca of Australia, Pt. 1, dust. Zool, 8(4)+ 287-333. Meier-Brook, C. and B, J, Smith, 1975. Glacidorbis Iredale 1943, a genus of freshwater prosobranchs with a Tasmania-southeast Australian-South Andean distribution. 4rch, Moll., 106: 191-198. Smith, B. J, 1977, The non-marine mollusc fauna of the Otway region of Victoria. Proc, R. Soe. Vier, 89(1): 147-155 Smith, B. J.. Maleolm, H. E. and P. B. Morison, 1977. Aquatic invertebrate fauna of the Mitta Mitta Valley, Vietoria. Herorian Nat, 94(6): 228-238. Species List of Molluscs of the Vic- torian Great Divide Abbreviations used after the species names are: A = freshwater habitat; B = wet forest habitat, C = dry forest and alpine habitat, D = man modified habitat; E = endemic to the Great Divide; | = introduced into Australia. HY DROBIIDAE Glacidorbis hedleyi Iredale, 1943. A,E. Pupiphryx grampianensis (Gabriel, 1939). A, Potomopyrgus niger (Quoy & Gaimard, 1835). A. LYMNAEIDAE Austropeplea lessoni (Deshayes, 1830), A. A. tomentosa (Pfeiffer, 1855). A. ANCYLIDAE Ferrissia (Pettancylus) petterdi (Johnston, 1879). A, F. (P.) tasmanica (T.-Woods, 1876). A. PLANORBIDAE Physastra gibbosa (Gould, 1847). A. Isidorella hainesii (Tryon, 1866). A. Segnitila victoriae (Smith, 1882). A. Gyraulus scottianus (Johnston, 1879). A. G. tasmanicus (T.-Woods, 1876). A. November/December RHYTIDIDAE Victaphanta atrameniaria (Shuttleworth, 1853). B,E, Tasmanphena ruga (Legrand, 1871). B.C. Rhytida capillacea (Ferussac, 1832). C. Prolesophanta dyeri (Petterd, 1879). B. CARYODIDAE Pygmipanda atomata (Gray, 1834). C, PUNCTIDAE Paralaoma caputspinulae (Reeve, 1854). (oF Laomavix collisi (Brazier, 1877), C.D. Miselaoma weldii (T.-Woods, 1877), C. Magilaoma penolensis (Cox, 1868). C,D. CHAROPIDAE Discocharopa inexpectata (Gabriel, 1947), B,E. Elsothera sericatula (Pfeiffer, 1850). C. EF. fuinerea (Cox, 1868). B,C. Allocharopa okeana (Gabriel, 1947). GE: Pernagera tamarensis (Petterd, 1879). C. P. officer’ (Legrand, 1871). C. Dentherona saturni (Cox, 1868). C, Rhophodon problematica (Gabriel, 1947). BE. Pillomena meraca (Cox & Hedley, 1912). B. P. dandenongensis (Petterd, 1879). B. P. nivea (Hedley, 1896). B. P. marysvillensis (Gabriel, 1947). B,E. Thryasona elenescens (Cox & Hedley, LOL 2 eG, Mulathena Jordei (Brazier, 1871), B,C ARIONIDAE Arion intermedia (Normand, C,D\L. ZONITIDAE Oxychilus alliarius (Miller, 1822). DI. LIMACIDAE Deroceras reticulatum (Muller, DiI. D. caruanae (Pollonera, 1891). DJL. Lehmannia (Lehmannia) nyctelia (Bourguignat, 1861), DI. L. (Limacus) flavus (Linnaeus, 1758). iDMl Limax maximus (Linnaeus, 1758). D,L. MILACIDAE 1852). 1774). 239 Milax gagates (Draparnaud, 1801). DI. CYSTOPELTIDAE Cystopelta petterdi (Tate, 1881). B,C. HELICARIONIDAE Helicarion niger (Quoy & Gaimard, 1832). B,C. CAMAENIDAE Chloritobadistes brevipila (Pfeiffer, 1850). ih C. victoriae (Cox, 1868). B,C. HELICIDAE Helix (Cryptomphalus) aspersa (Muller, 1774). DI. Cochlicella ventrosa DJ. (Ferussac, 1821). HYRIIDAE Hyridella (Hyridella) australis (Lamarck, 1819), A. H. (H.) drapeta (Iredale, 1934). A. H. (H.) depressa (Lamarck, 1819). A. H. (H.) narracanensis (Cotton & Gabriel, 1932). A. CORBICULIDAE Corbiculina angasi (Deshayes, 1830). A. SPHAERIIDAE Sphaerium (Musculium) tasmanicum (T.- Woods, 1876).A. Pisidium casertanum (Poli, 1795),A. Trees that establish themselves on trunks of tree ferns and a Yellow Box that enclosed its own sawn-off stump Just as described in C, H. Henshaw’s interesting article on tree ferns, Myrtle Beech and Blackwood growing together (Vic. Nat, Oct. 1978), trees often begin life on tree ferns in gullies in Gippsland where conditions are frequently much like those in the Otways. Seeds of Sassafras Atherosperma moschatum, Myrtle Beech Nothofagus cun- ninghamii, Blackwood Acacia melanoxlyon and, most commonly Banyalla Pittosporum bicolor, all germinate freely in the fibre of living tree ferns, sometimes they “‘take over’’ wholly or, more often partly, enclos- ing the fern trunks. I once searched for a Banyalla growing naturally anywhere but on a tree fern and found none—although | have since done so. This reminds me also of a tree growing over its own trunk which I have watched for more than 60 years. A Yellow Box tree Eucalyptus melliodora growing on the roadside at Tyers had been sawn off about 2ft 6ins (76cm) above the ground during or just before 1914, for in July of that year it had no coppice growth, No one measured it but it was big enough for two of us as children to sit on at the same time. A coppice shoot came out of the stump that spring and became a sapling pressed so closely against the bark that it actually united with the trunk, and in succeeding years began to grow over it. By 1976 the stump was completely enclosed. Now the only sign that the tree was once cut down is an irregular thickening near the base. Jean Galbraith, Tyers Erratum In Victorian Nat. Vol. 95 Jan.-Feb. 1978 Article on The First Victorian and other Victorian records of the Litthe Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas). p. 7 “Lat. 36°50'S should read Lat, BS Se aie NEW SUBSCRIPTION RATES FOR 1979 Subscriptions are due on the Ist January 1979 check the back page of this issue for the cor- rect subscription rate and assist the Club by posting your sub. early. Post direct to Subscription Sect. 240 Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Behaviour in a Group of Wild Echidnas BY K. JOHNSON* Introduction Echidnas, Tachyglossus aculeatus (Shaw, 1792) normally occur as lone individuals but on rare occasions they are seen in small groups (Augee ef al., 1975). Most groups have been seen dur- ing the breeding season (Augee et al., 1975) which lasts from the end of June until early September (Griffiths, 1968). There are only two reports of mating being observed in echidnas (Griffiths, 1968) despite the 186 years that they have been known to science. This fact emphasises how seldom echidnas are seen in groups of two or more individuals. Echidnas are common animals (Ride, 1970) and obviously males must be able to find oestrous females during the breeding season. However the mechan- ism by which they do so is unknown. Dobroruka (1960) observed echidnas leaving a scent trail by rubbing their cloacas on the ground. Augee ef al. (1975) considers this action to be related to olfactory communication between the sexes. This paper reports suspected courting behaviour of four echidnas seen together on July 6, 1976 near Kempton (42°15'N, 147°15'E) in southern Tas- mania. Results The echidnas were first heard moving in a patch of bracken fern Preriditém escu- lentumin a paddock of improved pasture. At 1030 hours they all clambered on toa log in the bracken and moved along it in a nose to tail formation. The following records of activities were extracted from field notes. * National Parks and Wildlife Service, P.O. Box 210, Sandy Bay. Tas. 7005. November/December 1033: An echidna grooms with hind claw. 1035: Echidnas two and three in the line groom as the fourth moves away from the group which is still standing nose to tail. 1036: Echidna three grooms while one and two move further along log. Third echidna follows and all three remain nose to tail. 1038: Echidna four leaves the log to sniff among sticks, returns to log only to leave again shortly. Echidna two mounts leader and grooms itself with hind leg. 1040: The three leave the log and walk, in a delta formation, 15 m towards me over short pasture cloaca of leader being sniffed all the way by a follower. Second follower cuffs leader on back continually using its forelimb. 1041: Leader senses my presence when within one metre and then veers back to the bracken, pursued by its intensely interested followers. 1042: Fourth echidna leaves bracken and moves rapidly towards me along the same line taken by the previous three. It appears unaware of me but turns where the others did and follows their path back to the bracken. Discussion The group members were not sexed because disturbance would probably have upset their behaviour as | had anti- cipated that copulation might be wit- nessed. Nevertheless their behaviour strongly suggests that the leading individual was a female and that the three followers were males Dobroruka. (1960) observed a male echidna mount- ing a female before they adopted an abdomen to abdomen mating position, and sniffing of the urinogenital openings and cuffing is associated with sexual checking in macropods (Johnson, 1977). 241 Because the group was observed during the breeding season it is most probable that their interactions were part of the normal courting behaviour of echidnas. The fourth individual may have simply been following a nondescript odour left by the preceding three. However it may have followed the same cloacal scent which was so interesting to one of the leader’s followers. The above observations support Augee’s er al. (1975) hypothesis of olfactory communication. Certainly a male would have little chance of inter- cepting an oestrous female if both were moving randomly about their home ranges. The probability of three males locating the same oestrous female at the same time by chance is even smaller. However this probability would be greatly increased if there was a long scent trail which males could first encounter and then follow to the female. Acknowledgements D. Rounsevell and J, Wapstra made helpful criticisms of the manuscript. REFERENCES Augee, M, L., Ealey, E. H. M. and Price, 1. P., (1975). Movements of echidnas Tachyglossus aculeatus, determined by marking—recapture and radio-tracking. Aust. Wildl. Res. 2: 93-101. Dobroruka, J, (1960). Einige Beobachtungen an Ameisenigeln Echidna aculeata (Shaw 1792), Z. Tierpsychol. 17: 178-81. Griffith, M. (1968). Echidnas (Pergamon Press: New York). Johnson, K. A. (1977). Ecology and Management of the red-necked Pademelon, Thyplogale thetis, on the Dorrigo Plateau of northern New South Wales. Unpubl. Ph.D. Thesis. Univ. New Eng- land. Ride, W. D. L Mammals of Australia. Melbourne) (1970). A Guide to the Native (Oxford Univ, Press: Open days at FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve - Open days at Kinglake will resume again in February and March. On the first Sunday of the month, members and their friends or other interested persons are invited to visit the FNCV property at Kinglake. Stay for as little or as long as you like. Follow the nature trail, go for a hike, do some odd jobs if you bring a rake or a spade, or simply laze and chat. The property is equipped with toilets, bar- becue (not to be used on fire-ban days) and tank water, A member of the Kinglake Committee will be in attendance and will open the McMahon Road gate at 10 a.m. Drive in, keep to the left and angle park. See location map in February 1978 issue page 38. FNCV members can enter at any time from the McMahons Road by the pedestrian entrance, and FNCV campers are welcome. Become familiar with your property. Delay to Victorian Naturalist Subject Index 1884-1977 1978 Final proof-reading and printing of the Subject Index was expected to be complete by December but delays have occurred. Proof-reading revealed so many faults plus the desirability to improve page layouts that it was decided to type the whole thing again - for the third time. The Subject Index is a 242 huge undertaking and our workers are still at it. Now we realise it cannot be printed this year. We apologise to all who have paid the pre-publication price and ask their for- bearance. We expect, hope, it will be avail- able by February or March 1979, complete with addendum to 1978. Please be patient. Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 FNCV Queensland Excursion 1978 22nd July-5th August, 1978 BY J. WALL* At 7 a.m. on Saturday, 22/7/78, 22 members boarded the aircraft for Proserpine and the Barrier Reef. On our arrival at Proserpine we transferred to an Ansett Coach which took us through cane country to Airlie Beach near Shute Harbour, where we met two more mem- bers. Hook Island Next day a boat trip was arranged for us to Hook Island, South Molle and Daydream Island—to Hook Island where we were taken in glass-bottomed boats to view the coral reef and fish of every conceivable shape and size endowed with beautiful colours. The various corals that we saw were the Brain coral Platygy laneluna which has a peculiar structure resembling the human brain, the Mushroom coral Fungia which is approximately 4-5 ins. across and is only a single polyp, the Staghorn Acropora Rebes with its great antler-like forms, and the delicate branching pat- terns of the Fern and Fan corals. Bedded among the corals were the giant clams whose shells are well camouflaged, but the wavy opening of the shell reveals the glorious colours of the fleshy mantle. From there we went ashore and des- cended into the underwater observatory which is situated on the edge of the reef. There we viewed corals and a variety of brilliantly coloured fish through the glass portholes and one very large fish the Maori Wrasse was of great interest as he attains the weight of up to 80 pounds. A Reef heron was seen on a mooring buoy, and cormorants diving for fish in the Bay. *FNCY, Traralgon & Latrobe Valley Field Natur alists Clubs. November/December South Molle Island Our next call was at South Molle Island and we were delighted to see Lorikeets feeding in abundance, also Pied Currawongs were feeding from the hand of a gardener. Daydream Island Daydream Island was our next stop for a short stay where we observed the Beach Curlew, this ended our first day. Monday we had a half day bus trip which took us through cane fields to Cedar Creek Falls but unfortunately lit- tle water was flowing. The Waterfall drops down in the midst of palms and tain forest which are embossed with fern—Staghorns, Elkhorns and Orchids. In some of the trees could be seen hang- ing from a branch the large rounded nests of the green tree ants which are composed of leaves drawn and cemented together in a remarkable way. On the way back to the main road a number of grass trees were seen, these are a different variety to the Victorian species as the trunk is shorter and the flower stem is very slender and straight with the flower head at the apex, Our next stop was at Conway Beach where numerous birds were seen—Egrets, Reef Heron, Curlews, and Sooty Oyster Catchers also we observed an army of Soldier Crabs Micwyris longicarpus scuttling across the sand and burying themselves with amaz- ing speed. The afternoon was spent browsing about Airlie Beach. Wildlife Sanctuary The next day we were picked up by courtesy car and taken to the Wildlife Sanctuary which is approximately 12 h.a. of landscaped bushland where native fauna is allowed to roam free. 243 Kangaroos, Wallabies (there were 5 Species), Cape Barren Geese, Magpie Geese, Swans and various Ducks, Emus and Scrub Turkeys all gathered for feed- ing time. Here we saw the Blue Winged Kookaburra which differs from the Vic- torian counterpart by its blue wing and inability to laugh. Also seen were Peace- ful Doves, Leaden Flycatchers, Yellow Sunbirds, Lorikeets and Currawongs. Long Island Another boat trip was arranged for us on Wednesday to go to Happy Bay on Long Island which is at the moment unspoiled by too much commercialism. We were disembarked from the boat on to a punt which was driven by twin out- board motors then transferred to a motorised landing vehicle which took us ashore. Quite a variety of birds were seen on the walks, such as the Scrub Fowl, Golden Bronze Cuckoo, Rufous Fantail, Spectacled Flycatcher, Silvereye, Yellow Sunbird, Mistletoe Bird, Brush Turkey, Helmeted Friar Bird, Rainbow Lorikeet, Leaden Flycatcher, Indian Turtle Dove and Southern Curlew and Hibiscus, Poincianas, Coconut Palms and Pandanus Palms grew in abundance. A free day was agreed for Thursday and we followed our own_ interests. Owing to inclement weather early on Friday no trip was arranged, but some of us booked another cruise to Happy Bay to explore further while others spent the day in Conway National Park. On Saturday a bus was chartered and we were taken to see the “Sausage Tree’ Kigelkia pinnata, This tree has a fruit which grows to approximately 2 feet long in the shape of a sausage and hangs from the branches on long stems. It is a native of Tropical Africa and is regarded asacred by the Nubians. From there we went to Shute Harbour and from the Lions Lookout magnificent views of the Whitsunday Passage were obtained. Mandalay Coral Gardens Our next stop was at Mandalay Cora! Gardens where live coral was being 244 grown above sea level in ponds and a running commentary was in progress relating to the various corals and fish, also a full colour documentary on the fascinating Great Barrier Reef was shown. We had lunch near the pools and then off to our next place of interest, which was the Dittmer Nursery and Dit- tmer gold mine situated near Proserpine. The nursery in itself was set in admirable surroundings and only a short walk from the gold mine. The mine was abandoned after water had reached the proportion too great for the pumps to handle but a lot of equipment was still left there; on our way back to Airlie Beach we stopped to photograph the cane which looked like a sea of silver in the setting sun. Eungella National Park On Sunday morning we were picked up by a chartered coach and taken to Eungella National Park which is situated 2,500 feet above the Pioneer Valley. The park covers an area of 49,615 hua. (122,600 acres) and is shaped roughly like a miniature South America. Various walking track systems exist in the park south of Eungella township and magnifi- cent views of Pioneer Valley and the canefields can be seen from various lookouts on the Range. Numerous birds were seen in the school grounds which skirted the edge of the rain forest and to the delight of members we saw the Regent Bower Bird in all its golden glory. We were fortunate to have the Ranger accompany us on one of the walks and explain the jungle type growth which of tree ferns, orchids, massive gums and cedars made the scenery unforgettable; he also mentioned that botanists come from all over the world to this particular area because of the merging vegetation of north and south, We visited Broken River where a platypus colony lives, and were fortu- nate to see a platypus feeding on the bot- tom, A few of us walked the 2! km walk through the rain forest and finished up at the Chalet with a few leeches and Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 mosquito bites. We also did a trip to the Eungella Dam and we were fortunate to see Rock Wallabies on the Dam wall. This Dam supplies water to Goonyella coalfields, Moranbah and the Colinsville power station. The Aboriginal meaning of Eungella means land of cloud and truly it is so as every morning we were enveloped in cloud until about 10 o'clock when the mists began to lift. Mackay At last the time came for us to leave this beautiful but awe inspiring place and descend to the low country and make our way to Mackay where we stayed overnight. Before going to our Motel we visited the Mackay sugar terminal and the man-made breakwater. A stop was made at the harbour beach which is a popular picnic and swimming spot. The coach driver then took us to a lookout that overlooked the harbour and the township of Mackay, finishing with a tour round the town. Hillsborough National Park The next day we left Mackay on the last leg of our journey to the Cape Hillsboro’ National Park driving north along the Bruce Highway and turning just past the picturesque Leap Hotel. We paused for a few moments at Mount Jukes Lookout for a view of the pret- tiest valley in the area and then on to Cape Hillsboro’ Lookout with its vista of the coast, islands and lakes. Finally we arrived where it was arranged for us to go on an escorted walk to Hidden Valley. Scores of butterflies fluttered around us as we walked (blues and browns) Poplar or White Gum Trees Eucalyptus alba Blackboys Xanthorrhoea sp, White Fig Ficus virens Palms Piychosperma elegans Blue Quandong Elaeocarpus grandis Cluster Fig Ficus racemosa Pandanus Palm and Lantana Vines were noted. Back to the camp site where a B.B.Q. lunch was waiting for us. At the conclusion of lunch we boarded the coach and were taken to Cape Hillsboro’ swamps where we were for- tunate to see very many Brolgas dancing in the swampy area and from there to see the Shining Starling tree with its peculiar pear shaped nests hanging from the branches; on our way to Airlie Beach we were lucky enough to see a cane fire of which some members took photo- graphs. Our last day at Airlie we all decided to g0 back to Happy Bay, and walk to Palm Bay, and possibly to Sandy Bay, which was approximately 2'-3 miles further along. An arrangement with the man- agement was made to have our lunch at Palm Bay and this was the completion of a lovely holiday. FNCV TRIP 22nd JULY —5th AUGUST, 1978 Airlie Beach, Whitsunday Islands, Eungella National Park, Mackay and Cape Hillsborough: LIST OF BIRDS—127 SPECIES Name Location Scrub Fowl Happy Bay Brush Turkey Eungella/Happy Bay Red-crowned Pigeon Cape Hillsborough Purple-crowned Pigeon LEungella Brown Pigeon Eungella Spotted-turtle Dove (Intro.) Mackay Peaceful Dove All Bar-shouldered Dove Green-winged Pigeon Happy Bay Palm Bay November/December Name Location Black-tailed Native-hen Eungella Dam Dusky Moorhen Eungella Dam Coot Eungella Dam Little Grebe Eungella Dam Crested Grebe Eungella Dam Crested Tern Airlie Beach/ Hook Is. Silver Gull All Pied Oystereatcher Conway Beach Sooty Oystercatcher Airlie Beach Spur-winged Plover All 245 Name Red-capped Douere! White-headed Sult Australian Curlew Greenshank Southern Stone Curlew Brolga White Ibis Straw-necked Ibis Royal Spoonbill Yellow-billed Spoonbill Jabiru Little Egret Plumed Egret White Egret White-faced Heron White-necked Heron Location Conway Beach Cape Hillsborough Swamps Mackay Wildlife Turn-off Dam Heard— Airlie Beach Cape Hillsborough Swamps All Cannonvale/Turn-off Dam Airlie Beach Wildlife Sanet. Road Mackay/ Airlie Beach Conway Beach Wildlife Turn-off Dam All All Proserpine Road Reef Heron (grey phase) Mandalay/Palm Bay Mangrove Heron Black Swan Maned Goose (Wood Duck) White-headed Shelduck (Burdekin) Grey Duck (Black) Grey Teal White-eyed Duck (Hardhead) Black Cormorant Little Black Cormorant Little Pied Cormorant Australian Darter Pelican Australian Goshawk Wedge-tailed Eagle White-breasted Sea- Eagle Whistling Eagle Red-backed Sea-Eagle (Brahminy) Fork-shouldered Kite (Black) Black-shouldered Kite Crested Hawk Little Falcon Brown Hawk Nankeen Kestrel Osprey Boobook Owl Rainbow Lorikeet Red-tailed Black Cockatoo White Cockatoo King Parrot 246 Mandalay Coral Gardens Eungella Dam Eungella Dam/C. Hillsborough Cape Hillsborough Swamps All Eungella Dam Eungella Dam/W' life Turn-off Dam Airlie Beach Eungella Eungella/ Airlie Beach Wildlife Turn-off Dam All Airlie Beach Proserpine Road/ Bloomsbury Airlie Beach/Mandalay/ Islands Canefields-Proserpine Road Airlie Beach/Mandalay/ Islands All Eungella Bridge Area Dittmer Mine/ Mackay Mackay Canefields-Pros, Rd, Shute Harbour/ Cannonvale Airlie Beach/Islands Airlie Beach/C. Hillsborough Airlie Beach/S. Molle Eungella Bridge Area All Eungella School Grounds/Broken R. Name Pale-headed Rosella Tawny Frogmouth Laughing Kookaburra Location Eungella School Grounds/Broken R. Happy Bay All Blue-winged Kookaburra Canefields Pros. Rd./S. Sacred Kingfisher Forest Kingfisher Rainbow Bird Fan-tailed Cuckoo Golden Bronze Cuckoo Horsfield Bronze Cuckoo Pheasant-Coucal Welcome Swallow Tree Martin Fairy Martin White-breasted Wood- swallow Lemon-breasted Flycateher Grey Fantail Northern Fantail Rufous Fantail Willy Wagtail (Black & White Fantail) Leaden Flycatcher Restless Flycatcher Spectacled Flycatcher Black-faced Cuckoo- shrike Varied Triller Eastern Whipbird Reed Warbler Little Thornbill Brown Thornbill Red-backed Wren White-Browed Scrub- wren (Buff-breasted) Magpie-Lark Grey Shrike Thrush Rufous Shrike Thrush Black-backed Magpie Pied Butcher-bird Rufous Whistler Golden Whistler Northern Yellow Robin White-headed Sittella Silvereye Mistletoe-bird Striated Pardalote Molle/Mirani Airlie Beach Airlie Beach Airlie Beach/Eungella Airlie Beach Happy Bay Airlie Beach Airlie Beach/Eungella/ C. H’borough All Dittmer Mine Canefields All Dittmer Mine All Airlie Beach Happy Bay Eungella All Mackay Road/Eungella Con. Nat. Park/Happy Bay/Dittmer Mine All Eungella School Grds./ C. H’borough Heard—Eungella School G J, Eungella Dam Conway Nat, Park — Ranger Office Eungella School Grds. Airlie Beach/Cattle Ck. Eungella Rainforest All All Dittmer Mine Eungella/ Proserpine Airport Eaters Bridge/Broken Eungella School Grds. Eungella School Grds. Cattle Creek Eungella School Grds./ Happy Bay All Airlie Beach Ycllow-breasted Sunbird Airlie Beach/ Happy Bay White-throated Honeyeater Dusky Honeyeater Eastern Spinebill Lewin Honeyeater Mangrove Honeyeater Yellow Honeyeater Blue-faced Honeyeater Helmeted Friar-bird Pipit Airlie Beach All Eungella School Grds, All Airlie Beach Airlie Beach Airlie Beach Il Mandalay Road Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Name Location House Sparrow Red-browed Finch Nutmeg Finch (Intro.) Shining Starling (old nesis—Cottonwood or Cork tree) Airlie Beach Eungella Dam Airlie Beach/Mackay C, Hillsborough area Name Location Olive-backed Oriole Plant Nursery/ Dittmer Mine Southern Figbird All Spangled Drongo Airlie Beach Regent Bower-bird Fungella School Grds. Crow All Pied Currawong All In memory of Keith Rogers 1896-1978 Keith Rogers, who died last April just before his 82nd birthday, was a long-stand- ing member of the FNCV which he joined in 1953. He was also a valued member of the Bairnsdale and Latrobe Valley clubs, and attended many Bairnsdale meetings although he had to travel 90 miles each way to do so. During the years 1965-77 he missed only one of the alpine campouts held each January by the two clubs, and on that one occasion his unobtrusive but ever-help- ful presence was missed very much. He knew the mountains of eastern Victoria and their flora better than any of us and his knowledge was freely shared. He had lived at Black Mountain Wulgulmerang since he was 7, and knew every mountain and valley and meadow and its flora and had a named collection of the plants of the whole district, During those years he found many rare and several undescribed species including Monotoca rotundifolia J. WH. Willis and Cor- ybas hispida D. C. Jones and others. still unnamed. Helichyrsum rogersianum was named in his honour by Dr. Willis (Muelleria Vol. 1, No, 3). One hopes that one day we may have a full record of his col- lections. He also rediscovered the Brush-tailed Rock-wallaby in Victoria! and, with Mr. L. Hodge, searched the gorges on and near the Snowy, finding in all about 15 colonies. These he recorded and discussed with details of habits and habitats in a valuable article in “‘The Clematis’’ Vol. 1, No. 1 (1962)2, He was a valued contributor to the “The Clematis’’ (with articles in all but two of its past 16 issues) and also to the “Latrobe Valley Naturalist’, and wrote occasionally for ‘‘The Victorian Naturalist’*—see for example *‘Wattle Time by the Snowy River’? November/December The stories of his expeditions among plants, alone or with friends, would be worth hearing. Norman Wakefield in ‘‘Naturalists Diary’ describes a trip shared with him to Reedy River Gorge which Mr. Rogers had discovered a year earlier. His last expedition only a few months before he died was with Mr. Bill Cane to the Kybean Range in search of Persoonia species. He commented in a letter written last Pebru- ary—‘‘Of course I enjoyed it, but eyes and legs are not what they were. However, I'll be 82 in April so | have good reason to count my blessings.” He served his own district in many ways, representing it for 30 years on the Tambo Shire Council, and enlisted as a stretcher- bearer in the 1914-18 war. A friend of many naturalists and with wide knowledge in his own field, he always credited his friends with greater knowledge than his own and considered their comfort and pleasure before his. At his funeral the church was crowded with young and old, a tribute to what he was as well as an expression of sympathy for Mrs Rogers, their daughter, two sons, and his brother. His deep religious faith coloured and enriched his life and a characteristic remark when he described some plant he had seen was ‘‘One does thank God for the beauty of it all.” Jean Galbraith lL. Vie. Nat, March 1954 2. The Clematis, annual magazine of Bairnsdale FNC. 3. Vic. Nat. Oct, 1960, 247 The impact of development in Wollongong on the environment during the past fifty years. 1978 Natural History Medallion Speech BY ALAN SEFTON The area known as Illawarra is still acclaimed for its natural beauty and in the past has often been referred to as the “Garden of New South Wales”. The district zoologically extends from Stanwell Park in the north to the Shoalhaven River in the south, a dis- tance of some 130 kilometres. It takes in the Illawarra and Cambewarra Ranges on the west and includes the water catch- ments on the highlands beyond. A natural eastern boundary is provided by the usually placid blue waters of the Tas- man Sea, The bulk of the population is confined to the northern section and is congreg- ated mainly around the industrial centres of Wollongong and Port Kembla. Rural activities still predominate in the south. The dominant features are a narrow coastal plain, a steep scarp and deeply dissected plateau of moderate elevation in the west. The coastline is charac- terised by rocky cliffs and headlands interspersed with golden crescent beaches. The district was once the hunting ground of an aboriginal tribe known as the Wodi-Wodi and artifacts made by them have been found extensively throughout the area. There are many caves and overhangs, mostly west of the escarpment, which were used as shelters by the aborigines during their seasonal walkabouts. Within these caves have been found many beautiful paintings and drawings—dra- matic and nostalgic reminders of the art and culture of an ancient people vanished completely into the dreamtime. The Illawarra district is endowed with a wide variety of plant life and may be divided roughly into three categories. 248 These are the savannah or open wood- land and healthland on the highlands west of the escarpment, the hardwood rainforest and remaining pockets of sub- tropical jungle known as ‘brush’ on the escarpment itself, and a few areas of the coastal plain in the south where the vegetation consists mainly of various types of Casuarina, Melaleuca and Lep- tospermum. We have many varieties of the national floral emblem, the Acacia or Wattle, and of course the brilliant blood- red Waratah representing New South Wales. The spectacular crimson Flame Tree which proudly bears the district’s name of Illawarra still thrives along the escarpment and in many home gardens. As Australia’s greatest industrial area today mention should be made of the legendary cedar-cutters of the early eigh- teen hundreds—lIllawarra’s first large scale industrial enterprise. Over- exploitation resulted in the almost total removal of the species from the area and mature Red Cedars are now showpieces and rigidly protected. The Illawarra birdlist contains 320 species which is about forty-seven per- cent of those on the Australian Checklist. Included in the total are per- manent residents, summer and winter migrants and several, mainly seabirds, whose occurence is extremely rare. There is a rich variety comparable to any area of similar size in the world. The remarkable Spine-tailed Logrunner must rate a mention as the first specimen to be scientifically described was collected on Mount Kembla in 1804. There is also a small brown bird whose claim to fame is that it is only found in New South Wales and no other State — a vestigial counterpart to Victoria’s Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Helmeted Honeyeater. The range of the Rock Warbler conforms roughly to the regions of Hawkesbury Sandstone so therefore is not uncommon throughout the Illawarra district. In a district which is essentially a strip of coastline it is only natural that seabirds should make up an important part of the bird fauna, From September to February the Five Islands Nature Reserve off Port Kembla becomes a veritable city of seabirds, Many rare and unusual seabirds are on the Illawarra list due to diligent patrolling of the sea beaches. In fact there are species on the list that con- stitute the first New South Wales and even the Australian records. Since 1953 local ornithologists have been co-operating with the CSIRO in the systematic study of birds by banding, the fixing of numbered metal bands to their legs. One project that has attracted world-wide interest has been the ringing of the fabled Wandering Albatross, the largest of flying seabirds, on the open sea off Wollongong. Many native animals can still be found close to Wollongong and this is primarily due to the strict supervision on the Sydney and South Coast water catch- ments west of the escarpment. Wallabies and Wombats are not uncommon and the two egg-laying monotremes, the Platypus and Echidna, are still quite plentiful. Illawarra beaches still get the occasional visit from a Fur Seal or Leopard Seal. The first blast furnace at Australian Iron & Steel Pty. Ltd., was commis- sioned in August 1928 and a grotesque new species had appeared in the hitherto pristine ‘‘Garden of New South Wales”’. Since that time there has been con- siderable conflict between heavy indus- try and the environment. This reached a peak during the years of exceptional industrial growth in the fifties and sixties when Wollongong could not civically and environmentally cope with the enor- November/December mous migrant intake of that period. I first became interested in conserva- tion in the late thirties when I noticed large numbers of dead and dying fish in Allans Creek when travelling by train each day to work. Birds consumed the contaminated fish with agonising conse- quences and so commenced an individual battle with industrial pollution that has been going on for over forty years. Allans Creek was once a beautiful tree-lined waterway but is now located in the heart of today’s industrial colossus and is completely sterile — nothing more than a drain and monument to an initial environmental problem that never went away and progressively worsened. Heavy industry in Wollongong has always acknowledged the massive environmental problems it has created and has spent astronomical sums attempting to combat its own technologi- cal abuse of the environment. As men- tioned previously my association with heavy industry has lasted for well over forty years yet | have never been repri- manded for the at times pertinent stands 1 have taken in the cause of preserving the environment. I must freely admit that it has been an exhilarating experience being personally and directly implicated in the industrial expansion of Wollongong during its most progressive period. As the only group concerned with the environment based in Wollongong in the twenty years period up to 1968 the Illawarra Natural History Society not only recorded and classified the natural history of the area, but also dealt with all conservation issues during this most hectic interval in Wollongong’s develop- ment, During the last decade however the membership of Illawarra’s pioneering environmental organisation has declined considerably but in that time has mothered and nurtured many specialist groups. Illawarra now has an Astronomi- cal Society, Geological Society, Bird 249 Observers Club, a branch of the Society for Growing Australian Plants, Aboriginal Pre-history Group, and above all a large and influential South Coast Conservation Society which capa- bly and efficiently deals with controver- sial issues both inside and outside the Illawarra district. I feel the long battle has not been in vain. Australia’s greatest industrial com- plex remains in an area of great natural beauly and scenic charm. We certainly have had our problems bul now have stringent laws controlling water and air pollution, the control of excessive noise, and environmentally the future is look- ing much rosier. The great conservation battles of past years have made I!lawarra citizens acutely aware that they them- selves are an integral part of the environ- ment and a reasonable ecological balance must be maintained if the quality of life they now enjoy is to continue. It is interesting to note that the first recorded reference to the Illawarra dis- trict comes from Captain Cook’s Jour- nal. **Wednesday 25th (April 1770)... isa point which I called Red Point; some part of the land about it appears of that colour. A little way inland to the NW of this point is a round hill, the top of which looked like the Crown of a Hatt”. Historians tell us that Captain Cook’s Hatt Hill is Mount Kembla today therefore the erstwhile mariner must have been gazing across the site of today’s vast industrial complex at Port Kembla. What a change Captain Cook would see today. I suppose the same could be said for the aboriginals that furtively peered from the shore as Cook sailed northwards along the Illawarra coast. The aboriginal workshops, in contrast to the mighty steel furnaces of today, were the open sandstone areas where they, using only water and muscular power, shaped and polished primitive stone tools to their specific individual taste and requirements. As time goes by the remains of this ancient culture will vanish under closer settlement and as far as the Illawarra dis- trict is concerned it can definitely be said that steel has replaced stone within a century. As mentioned earlier the transition has not been easy but I can vouch that Wollongong citizens now fully realise that they must live in harmony with the environment it they continue to dwell in ‘*The Garden of New South Wales”’. Blue-tongue Lizard survives a Jonah-like experience Accompanied by my large labrador dog, | take a daily walk deep into the bush of the Warby Ranges. Often I see some interesting and amusing sights. One morning the dog pounced on a small blue-tongued lizard (about 20cm long) and swallowed it with one big gulp. A glazed look appeared in the dog’s eyes and he stood 250 still for half a minute, obviously not at all happy with his meal. He took the sensible course and regurgitated it. The lizard ran off up the hill, This experience, I’m pleased to relate, has been the dog’s only attempt to eat any of the wild life that abounds on our property. I. Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 Carabid Beetle Preying on Frogs BY M. J. LITTLEJOHN AND J, W. WAINER* Predation of laryal and adult anuran amphibians by aquatic invertebrates is well known (e.g. Savage, 1961), but there are few reports of predation on frogs by terrestrial arthropods. McKeown (1952) recorded an observa- tion of a tree funnel-web spider, Atrax Jormidabilis Rainbow, feeding on a green tree frog, Hyla (now Litoria) caerulea (White). Main and Main (1956) found a theraphosid trap-door spider, Selenocosmia crassipes L. Koch, with a mutilated, web-encased specimen of the burrowing frog, Heleioporus (now Neobatrachus) centralis (Parker), in its burrow. Butler and Main (1959) re- ported that the remains of 13 adult speci- mens of the brown froglet, Crinia (now Ranidella) pseudinsignifera (Main), were found in the burrow of a mygalomorph trap-door spider, Aganippe rhaphiduca Rainbow and Pulleine. Nash (1962) recorded an incident at Snobs Creek, Victoria, in which a large brown mantid, Archimantis latistvla (Serville), was found eating a live golden bell frog, Litoria raniformis (Keferstein), Ridpath (1977) described observations of the capture and eating of green tree frogs, Litoria caerulea, by a large mantid, Hierodula werneri (Giglio-Tos), at Darwin, North- ern Territory. During 1977, we made two observa- tions of carabid beetles feeding on frogs. The first was made at the edge of a gravel road in a low, swampy area at Yan Yean, 2 km SSE of Whittlesea, Victoria, on October 9th. A large carabid (body length =32 mm), Catadromus lacordairei Boisduval (Family Carabidae, Subfamily Pterostichinae), was attached to the *Department of Zoology, Melbourne, Parkville, 3052. University of November/December lateral pectoral region of a live adult female (snout-vent length=38.5 mm) of the spotted marsh frog, Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Giinther. The beetle was chewing deeply into the tissue of the frog, and had penetrated the cardiac region when first located. There were also lacerations in the ventral pelvic region and behind the left eye of the frog. The animals were placed in a plastic bag for further observation, and the bee- tle continued to feed in the pectoral region. The frog was dead one hour later. On November 9th, at the margin of a small permanent swamp at *‘Strathfieldsaye”, Perry Bridge, about 19 km SE of Stratford, Victoria, a second specimen of C. lacordairei (body length=31 mm) was found feeding on a recently-metamorphosed individual (snout-vent length about 12 mm) of the brown tree frog, Litoria ewingi (Dumeril and Bibron). The beetle was attached to the pelvic region of the frog, and there were extensive and deep lacerations, with much of the tissue and viscera missing. The frog was freshly dead, and is assumed to have been alive when cap- tured by the beetle. The specimens were collected and no further observations made. These observations suggest that Catadromus lacordairei, because of its large size and abundance in wet grass- land areas of south-eastern Australia, may be a significant predator on small frogs. REFERENCES Butler, W. H., and Main, B. Y., 1959. Predation on vrtebrates by mygalomorph spiders. W. Aust. Nat. 7: $2 Main, B, Y,, and Main, A. R., 1956. Spider preda- tor on a vertebrate. W. dust. Nat. 5: 139, McKeown, K. C., 1952. Australian Spiders. Second Edition, Angus and Robertson, Sydney. 251 Nash, K. M. 1962. Mantis eats frog. Victorian Nat. 79 Ut Ridpath, M. G., 1977, Predation on frogs and small birds by Hierodula werneri (Giglio—Tos) (Man- tidae) in tropical Australia. J. Aust, Ent. Soc. 16: 153-4 Savage, R. M., 1961. The Ecology and Life History of the Common Frog (Rana temporaria tem- poraria), Pitman and Sons, London. Book Review A Field Guide to the Common Genera of Gilled Fungi in Australia by M. Cole, B. Fuhrer and A. Holland, Botany Department, Monash University. Recommended price $8.95; to members, $6.95. Inkata Press. This is a loose-leaf folder with a large sheet of a dichotomous key to forty com- mon genera, three sheets of line drawings of typical representatives; and six sheets of beautiful, clear and artistic colour photos of sixty species. The cover and the sheets are plastic coated for field use in the often wet mushroom season. The necessary terms are well explained by sketches on the key sheet, and the brief text on using the key, collect- ing, and making spore prints is clear and devoid of technical jargon. A few errors in the botanical names are mostly trivial and due to lack of time as it was attempted to bring the key out for the 1978 seaon. This is a very welcome and helpful aid to the field naturalist wishing to take up the study of our colourful and intriguing agarics, and will be useful to the more experienced as well. A. W. Thies New Books Available **Eucalypts’’ Stan Kelly Volume 11 $19.95 Postage within Vic. $1.25 “A Field Guide to the Common Genera of Gilled Fungi in Australia.’ Mary Cole Bruce Fuhrer Albert Holland $8.95 Postage within Victoria 70 cents A Discount on these books available to Members Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCY Activities General Meeting Monday 9 October, 1978 Dr. T. Rich, Curator of Vertebrate Fossils, National Museum of Victoria, spoke upon ‘Some Australian Vertebr- ate Fossils’. 252 Australian marsupial fossil remains have only been identified back as far as 25 million years. Very few fossil remains have been found to account for the great diversity of present day marsupials. Australia has extreme chemical weather- ing which destroys fossils, and little Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 geological movement to provide evi- dence of fossil sites and many localities have been discovered purely by chance. Sites which are presently being exca- vated by Dr. Rich include the Western District, near Hamilton (4.5 mill. years): east of Lake Eyre and Lake Frome in Central Australia (15 mill. years). Win- ton in Queensland, contains deposits dating back 100 mill. years. Honorary Membership Certificate was presented to Mr. Cedric Ralph for his 40 years of membership. Mr, Ralph, who joined the Club on October 10, 1938, and whose main interst is entomology reminisced upon some of his early experiences with the Club and of the personalities of the time. All members joined with the President to congratulate Mr. Ralph on his Honorary Membership. Exhibits. Fossil shells, starfish, cri- noides coral and a new species of trilobites from a sandstone quarry near Kinglake West, estimated to be 395 mil- lion years old (Lower Devonian period). Under the microscope were some May fly nymphs, and a piece of micro film. Also displayed were the door of a trap- door spider from Central Australia, galls on a young swamp gum, Eucalyptus ovata. A stone-making sclerotium about 6 inches round of Polyporus basilapiloides which grows in association with mallee eucalypts came from Wathe Fauna Reserve. Several specimens of a Hover Fly (Syrphidaesp.) a piece of Hakea ulicina, Furze Hakea, from the coast of the Otway Ranges, an article on Black Cockatoos causing great damage to young eucalypts and another on sea horses were also displayed. Nature Notes: One member reported that 9 sulphur Crested Cockatoos had fed on earth worms beneath grass and soil which had collected in her roof gut- tering. Mr. Ralph reported that fossils could possibly be found in the East Strezlecki mountains where washaways November/December have occurred recently, Proposals for changes to General Meet- ings In view of the steady decline in atten- dance at General Meetings, Mr. Tom Sault has put forward several proposals upon which members are asked to com- ment. These include reducing the General Meetings from monthly to Quarterly. Two of these would consist of the Annual General Meeting and the Natural History Medallion meeting. As a substitute for the other eight monthly meetings an ‘Activities meet- ing’ would ensue, designed to involve all the groups and talents of members attending. Each meeting would be pre- planned by a committee comprising of representatives of each group, plus any other interested member. Wanted: The Club is short of surplus copies of the Vic, Nat., Vol. 95, numbers 1 and 2 to be included in the library col- lection. Members are requested to return any copies that they no longer require back to Mr. McInnes. Also, the bound copy of Vol. 81 of the Vic. Nat. is missing from the Club Lib- rary. Could members please check their bookshelves. New Secretary and Correspondence Secretary: The President expressed pleasure in announcing the appointment of Miss Wendy Clark as Club Secretary and Mr. Arthur Thies as Correspon- dence Secretary. In responding, Miss Clark said that she could not have undertaken the secretary job unless Mr, Thies had also extended his temporary offer to be Correspondence Secretary. Library: Another announcement was the appointment of Miss Madge Lester as Assistant Librarian. Miss Lester dec- lared that the real assistant librarian was Mrs. Olive O’Hagan. Mrs. O’Hagan comes into the library each Tuesday and does a great deal of work which is much appreciated by our librarian Mr, Jon Martindale. But Mrs. O’Hagan cannot attend General Meetings, so Miss Lester 253 sees her Job as liaison between Olive and Jon, and to check borrowings and returns. She will be in the library at all General Meetings from 7.30 p.m. onwards. Books may be borrowed for two months; if not returned within that period, the borrower will receive a reminder notice to return the book and to refund postage cost of the notice. Donation from Honorary Member: At the general meeting on 9th October, Mr. Cedric Ralph was presented with Honorary Membership for 40 years in the FNCYV. At the end of the meeting Mr. Ralph handed a cheque to the Treas- urer. Very busy al the time, the Treas- urer did not open the cheque until arriv- ing at home. It was for $250! Council decided that it would be desirable to put such a sum to a special purpose and a Cedric Ralph Account has been opened until a decision has been made regarding that purpose. The Club thanks Mr. Ralph for his generosity. General Meeting Monday 13th November, 1978 Presentation of 1978 Natural History Medallion Especially welcome at this meeting were visitors and members of the Medallion Award Committee. Professor Lovering, Department of Geology from the Melbourne Univer- sity, presented the 1978 Natural History Medallion to Mr Alan Sefton. Amid the flashing of cameras, Mr Sefton thanked those associated with his work; in partic- ular the Illawarra Natural History Society and said he felt greatly honoured at receiving this prestigious Award. Speaker for the evening was the 1978 Award winner, Mr Sefton spoke upon ‘The Impact of Development in Wollongong on the Environment during the past Fifty Years’. He related the problems encountered in the conflict be- tween Australia’s largest industrial area, and preserving the natural beauty and 254 unique biological features of the Illawarra region. This area in the past has claimed the title of ‘‘Garden of N.S.W.”’, Of particular interest were his tales about the local ornithologists attempting to band the Wandering Albatross on the open sea off Wollongong. These birds feed upon large squid which float to the surface after being attacked and beheaded by Dolphins. Exhibits included four colour forms of Stypandra caespitosa and one of S. glauca, the Nodding Blue Lily. Fossils of Meekoceras; the Lower Triassic, Anmonoid and Michelinoceroid from the Jurassic period, both from the N.G, Highlands. Under the microscope were seen the smallest flowering plant in the world— Wolffia,(the tiny duck weed) and some Copepodes. Also a sample of green water containing single-celled algae and hydra. Plastic bags contained the Oak leaf miner and moths. A speci- men of Callistemon subulatus—The Tonghi Crk. Bottle Brush, and of Banksia dryandroides—the smallest of the banksias, were displayed, Affiliation of the Native Fauna Preservation Society. Prior to this meeting there was an Extraordinary General Meeting at which the Native Fauna Preservation Society was elected an affiliated society to the FNCV, Editor wanted to edit the Victorian Naturalist Journal. Please contact Dr. Brian Smith. Vic.Nat. Vol, 95 (Continued from page 214) ? GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment. ES At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group Wednesday, 6 December. Members’ Christmas party. Wednesday, 3 January. To be announced at Group Meeting. Second Thursday in the Month—Botany Group. Thursday, 14 December. Annual General Meeting. Flowers to observe in December. Please bring specimens. slides or illustrations. Thursday, 8 Febraury. ‘Topics on the History of Australian Botany’’ Mrs. Ducker. grirsiey, 8 March. ‘Red Wilderness: talk on the North-West corner of Victoria.’’ Mark otch. le ee oe GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. Botany Group Saturday, 24 February. To be announced. Saturday, 24 March. Thomson River, via Noojee, to find native fruit. Third Wednesday in the Month—Microscopy Group. December—No Meeting. ; Wednesday, 17 January—Members night. Discussion to arrange programme for 1979. At the Conference Room, National Museum at 8.00 p.m. First Monday in the Month—Entomology and Marine Biology Group. January 1979—No Meeting. Monday, 5 February— Members Exhibits. Day Group—Third Thursday in the month. No excursion in January 1979. Thursday, 15 February—Hampton—meet at Hampton railway station at 11.30 a.m. Thursday, 15 March—Polly Woodside Maritime Museum. Thursday, 19 April—Train outing to Diamond Creek. es? November/December 255 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE. K.C.M.G., O.B-E., Q.C. Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. D. KENT, 16 Papua Street, Watsonia, 3087 (435 8664) Librarian: Mr, J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (96 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. DICK MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 9148) MEMBERSHIP _ Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalistis distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1979 Metropolitan ... $12.00 Joint Metropolitan . se rhea vith ee te $14.50 Country Members and RetiredPersons.............. $10,00 Joint Country and Joint Retired 5 eT RSet hie $12.00 Junior .... Vdatstalee tie $2.50 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist. 5 iver , bake $10.00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist . shin dshtS- Someta heey Ree pee baud 2 Qikip nes $12.00 Individual Journals ..... APES OPP tat ate 4 RAS eR ne aa) FS EN ety eat $1.75 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. ae ae ae ee ee en ere @) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE